BEYOND ARMAGEDDON
by
SANDRA L. ROGERS
BEYOND ARMAGEDDON
First published by Zeus Publications
http://www.zeus-publications.com
P.O. Box 2554,
Burleigh MDC Qld. 4220
Australia
©Sandra L. Rogers 2004
All rights reserved.
ISBN: 1-9208-8489-0
Australian National Library Listing:
Rogers, S.L.
Beyond Armageddon
No part of this book may be reproduced in any form by photocopying or by any
electronic or mechanical means, including information storage or retrieval
systems, without permission in writing from both the copyright owner and the
publisher of this book.
This book is a work of fiction and any resemblance to any persons living or
dead is purely coincidental.
This book is written with love for my son Robert and daughter Alanie.
AUTHOR’S PROFILE
Sandra Rogers was born in Sydney, Australia, from Russian -Scottish
heritage and grew up in the beach side suburb of Dee Why.
Sandra now lives on the Gold Coast in Queensland with her husband
Bruce. And has two grown-up children, to whom she has dedicated this
book.
Beyond Armageddon is her second novel, and sequel to It
Begins...But Never Ends.
Sandra is now planning her third book and says she believes
everyone in their life hopes to make a difference to the world. “If only
one person who reads my novels changes their thoughts on the values
which are important to the human race today, then I have made a
difference, and one can never ask for more than that.”
CONTENTS
AUTHOR'S NOTES .......................................................................................... 3
CHAPTER ONE ................................................................................................ 7
New York City in the year 2012 - May
CHAPTER TWO ............................................................................................. 18
Kavita – India – May 2012
CHAPTER THREE ......................................................................................... 23
A slow boat down the Ganges
CHAPTER FOUR............................................................................................ 36
Controversy in high places – June 2012
CHAPTER FIVE ............................................................................................. 43
Australia – the visitors
CHAPTER SIX................................................................................................ 59
London - July
CHAPTER SEVEN.......................................................................................... 67
‘The Haven’
CHAPTER EIGHT .......................................................................................... 84
Los Angeles......August
CHAPTER NINE............................................................................................. 89
Crisis meetings
CHAPTER TEN............................................................................................... 94
New Friends
CHAPTER ELEVEN..................................................................................... 107
Dou Setta and Nubon
CHAPTER TWELVE .................................................................................... 120
Sydney – Commonwealth Games - September
CHAPTER THIRTEEN................................................................................. 142
A tragic loss
CHAPTER FOURTEEN................................................................................ 148
A meeting with the Prime Minister
CHAPTER FIFTEEN .................................................................................... 156
Californian Disaster - November
CHAPTER SIXTEEN.................................................................................... 166
The aftermath
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN ............................................................................. 175
The love of Mary
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN................................................................................. 184
The last Christmas
CHAPTER NINETEEN................................................................................. 191
Mother Nature's fury!
1
CHAPTER TWENTY ................................................................................... 200
The Preparation
CHAPTER TWENTY ONE .......................................................................... 213
IMPACT!
CHAPTER TWENTY TWO ......................................................................... 225
Sounds of Silence
CHAPTER TWENTY THREE...................................................................... 235
The first sunrise
CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR........................................................................ 247
Survival in a New World
CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE.......................................................................... 259
Atlantis
CHAPTER TWENTY SIX ............................................................................ 271
Dean and Anna
CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN...................................................................... 281
An anguished heart
CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT ...................................................................... 291
Departure from Earth
CHAPTER TWENTY NINE ......................................................................... 303
The light of Harmoni
CHAPTER THIRTY...................................................................................... 310
An evil force
CHAPTER THIRTY ONE............................................................................. 323
Interplanetary war!
CHAPTER THIRTY TWO............................................................................ 334
Earth rejuvenated
CHAPTER THIRTY THREE........................................................................ 340
A shocking discovery
CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR .......................................................................... 354
The conquest of Greygate
CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE............................................................................ 378
Farewell to Estibulos
CHAPTER THIRTY SIX .............................................................................. 384
Return to a green planet
CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN........................................................................ 392
A lone seagull
2
AUTHOR'S NOTES
The dawning of a New Millennium has come and gone. We, as the
population of Earth have left a legacy of many years of wars, natural
disasters, famines and the constant battle of man's inhumanity to man.
Our track record is one of violence, hatred and greed, as we strive
towards power, control and wealth for ourselves, with complete
disregard for our planet and our fellow man.
We have come to the end of the line.....things must change. But, they
can only change if mankind stops and realises the single most important
asset it has....the precious gift of life. A gift which can so easily be
taken away in a split second without any warning; a gift we should all
treasure and respect for the short time we possess it, for, without life,
there is nothing.
When I started to write the sequel to “It Begins But Never Ends”, I
wrote it with the intention of being a book for the New Millennium.
The story of Dean is complete fiction. It is in no way a reflection of my
beliefs for our future, though I have often felt there is a fine line
between fact and fiction and that sometimes, that line can fade
completely.
No one knows for certain what the future holds for mankind beyond
the year 2010. It could well be sealed in the hands of fate, the hands of
God, or it could be in our own hands. Whatever is in store, we must
enter this new Millennium with a courage and faith that our planet will
never die, that it will never end.
SANDRA L. ROGERS
3
Realise the Heaven within you and all at once all desires are fulfilled
and all misery and suffering is put to an end.
Feel yourselves above the body and its environments, above the mind
and its motives, above the thoughts of success or fear. The great cause
of suffering in the world is that people do not look within, they only rely
on outside forces.
Sri Sathya Sai Baba
-------------------
All things are connected,
Whatever befalls the earth,
befalls the sons of the earth.
Man did not weave the web of life,
He is merely a strand in it.
Whatever he does to the web, he does to himself.
Chief Seattle....1854
--------------------
Behold, I am coming soon! My reward is with me.
And I will give to everyone
According to what he has done.
I am the Alpha and the Omega,
The first and the last..
The Beginning and the End.
Revelations 22: 12 & 13
4
INTRODUCTION
From ‘It Begins But Never Ends’
When Gordon and Leeanne arrive back in Australia Helen casually
informs them that she is three months pregnant with Yianni's baby.
She steadfastly tells a shocked Gordon and her mother that she
intends to have the baby, as it was conceived with love.
Dean was working the winter season at Mount Parnassos. He visited
with Nikolas for one week prior to arriving there. The moment Dean
walked through the gates of the monastery and stood before Nikolas
with arms outstretched to greet him, Nikolas knew that Dean was the
chosen one.
Dean wrote a book that held the reader spellbound as it contained so
many predictions from ancient Atlantis about the future of their world.
He had stayed at the monastery with Nikolas for many years where he
learned the ancient knowledge and wisdom of Atlantis. He learnt of the
past lives of his mother and Gordon as Aanyota and Zaiot and the
meaning of life as a leader of humanity into the new world.
Dean and Nikolas went to London to have the book published. As
Sai Baba and the Hare Krishna movement were supportive of Dean, the
small book was distributed worldwide for free. Whilst in London, a
chance meeting with the son of a world-renowned space scientist whom
Dean had met on a previous visit to Sweden, gave extra hope to their
quest. Professor Haywood took his thick-rimmed glasses from his eyes
and pensively chewed on the ends, whilst looking intently at Dean. The
young man had just told him in simple spiritual terms, what he himself
had known for years, but had been unsure of speaking aloud for fear of
ridicule.
5
“In science, we are taught to go on facts, there is not much room for
intuition or gut feeling. Seeing is believing, we are told. Well Dean, I
have some interesting facts that support your predictions. Stay a few
days with me, we have a lot to discuss....and we both know there is not
much time left.”
6
CHAPTER ONE
New York City in the year 2012 - May
THE young man strode purposefully through the car park...his mind
was alight like a thousand watts of electrical energy, buzzing and
sparking with nowhere to go except back into his brain.
Paul Evans felt exhausted. Now, as he approached the grassed area
in front of the main campus, he suddenly broke into a run. It was 10
am; he would be late for the lecture!
Books, folders and loose papers were flailing around under his
arm...he dropped some, bent down, and almost fell over. Pulling
himself together, he continued to run, the adrenalin in his body was
pumping now - he wanted to run forever - get out of this place - get out
of his head, his mind...his mind that was a deep barrel of confusion.
He needed clarity, peace...a lonely beach......somewhere, he had to
run somewhere!
The lecture rooms were in front of him...he took the stairs two at a
time, bumping into fellow students on their way down. He stopped and
caught his breath...he was at the top of the stairs. Then, he saw her. She
was running towards him, books under her arm, long finely braided hair
dangling over her sensuous breasts. Sparkling brown eyes full of animal
heat, straight, even white teeth...and, those lips! That mouth, that
passion pit of rapturous pleasure. Oh God...he loved her! His mind
cleared as he watched her approach...she was the love of his
life...Bethany.
“Paul..Paul, wait!” she cried, with a look of urgency in her eyes.
Paul smiled and thought, “I could wait for you forever.”
7
As she caught her breath, she said, “Paul, you know those
calculations you've been working on - the weather patterns, the dramatic
change in world temperature?”
“Yeh,” he replied, noticing a worried look slip across Bethany's
beautiful ebony face.
She continued, “All that scientific stuff you're obsessed with...your
theories about...us...our future?”
He looked at her intently. “Well, what?”
Suddenly, she thrust a small book at him, he grabbed it quickly - he
had to hurry as the lecture had already started.
“Paul, you must read this. Don't ask me why, but I accepted it from
those ratbag Hare Krishnas in the park yesterday.”
Paul laughed, knowing all too well what Bethany thought of the
chanting Krishnas. Her mouth was fixed and serious, as she said, “I
read it last night...it worried me Paul, it really worried me.”
Paul bent down and kissed her gently. “I have to go, I promise I'll
read it...I'll ring you tonight about eight...love you babe!”
Paul turned on his heels, and in a moment had opened the door to the
lecture room.
Taking a seat next to his buddy Simon, he arranged his books and
papers into some sort of order as Professor Dickson glared hard at him
because of the intrusion. Paul looked at the small book. The cover was
plain white with the words “THE BOOK” written in a burnt orange,
and, underneath in smaller print, the name DEAN MCINTYRE.
The hour long lecture passed in a daze for Paul, he just couldn't
concentrate today, he felt tired and wrung out, his mind just wanted to
drift along with loving, sensual thoughts of Bethany.
Bethany Simpson had walked into his life six months ago... a vibrant,
head-strong girl with supermodel looks. She was doing an arts degree at
New York City University and Paul was studying physics and science.
They met at a local burger joint a few streets away from the campus.
“Hey Paul! Over here, come and join us!” yelled Simon amidst a
crowd of students hungrily stuffing their faces with burgers and fries.
Bethany was the only one not eating at the table. Her moist lips gently
sucked on a straw from a bottle of coke...her eyes held his and sparkled
a sensuous stare.
“Here, have some of these fries, I've eaten too much,” said Simon, as
Paul pulled up a chair. Noticing Paul's eyes glued to the beautiful dark
8
skinned girl beside him, Simon said: “Meet Bethany Paul, she's new on
campus, just moved up from Florida.”
Paul held out his hand, he had to touch her. “Pleased to meet you
Bethany,” he blurted out, feeling butterflies starting to dance round in
his chest.
The next fifteen minutes was taken up with the usual conversations
about nothing. Now everyone was saying goodbye and he would finally
be alone with this magnificent, delicate creature. “Where do you live
Bethany? I'll drive you home,” he said.
“Here, in the Bronx, only two blocks away. I walked this morning,
but usually I like to ride my bike.”
Paul gave her a smile, as she added, “not a push bike...I ride a
Harley.”
“Fantastic,” was his reply, though, in his mind, he couldn't imagine
this tiny girl riding a Harley, complete with helmet and leathers.
After that first meeting, they were inseparable and within two weeks,
they were lovers. Their bodies were meant for each other, they fitted so
perfectly and satisfied each other's sexual needs with such delicious
rapture and satisfaction that it overwhelmed their every moment. On a
deeper level, there was a mutual respect and caring that went far into
their souls and created a binding of their hearts.
“Mr. Evans, have you finished that thesis on Professor Hayward's
works?” Professor Dickson coughed loud and cleared his throat. “Are
you listening to me young man, or off in dreamland again?”
Simon thumped Paul on the shoulder. “Ah! What?? Yes Sir, I have
finished the paper,” was Paul's hazy reply. As the students stood to
leave the lecture room, Paul gathered his books and realised he hadn't
remembered one thing about the lecture.
During the day, he found his thoughts of Bethany fading amongst the
tireless hours of study. Now, in their place, crept the thoughts of 'THE
BOOK'. “ Just what is in this small nondescript book from the Hare
Krishnas,” he said to himself, as he left the campus.
Paul shared a small apartment with his fellow students Simon and
Winston on lower 54th Street, a crazy 15 minute drive from the campus.
Bethany lived close by with an elderly Aunt and her mother who had
moved up with her from Jacksonville Florida. Bethany never spoke
much about her father, except to say that he disappeared about two years
ago without a trace. Her parents had a happy marriage and there was no
9
reason why her father would suddenly leave, but, to the Police, he was
just another missing person.
When Bethany had been accepted at NYU, it was a blessing, as the
change in residence would hopefully help her mother overcome the
intense depression, which had affected her since the disappearance of
her husband. Living with her Great Aunt Mapel, her two cats and a
cockatoo and an endless stream of wacky friends, gave her a new life
filled with laughter.
Paul hastily opened the door, raced to the freezer and grabbed a cold
beer. He'd have a quick shower, then sit down and read 'THE BOOK'.
The cool water felt wonderful on his hot skin, it had been another
humid day. It was late spring and already the temperature was soaring
far too high. The humidity was 78%, the temperature 34 degrees
centigrade, and this was May for Christ's sake!! But no one cared; no
one gave a damn - except him. The World had become so blasé about
the dramatic weather changes.
Even the Bureau of Meteorology had shrugged off his concerns,
saying that we would all have to adapt to the climatic changes, the
global warming and the greenhouse effect that was now a part of
everyone's normal lives.
“Normal!” Paul yelled to himself, as he washed soap from his eyes.
“There's nothing bloody normal about a rise in world temperature of 8
to 10 degrees centigrade and a drastic drop during winter of minus 10
degrees centigrade...then, it suddenly snows in Mexico in spring and the
great Arabian deserts have floods - more rain than they have seen in a
thousand years!”
Towelling himself dry, Paul looked in the mirror. He was a young
American, a native New Yorker of 22 years, around six feet tall with
sandy coloured hair and deep blue eyes. He was a clever student, with a
promising future in whatever direction his studies would take him.
Right now, all he could think of was the huge atmospheric changes on
Earth, because he cared. He loved New York - he loved America and he
had a gut feeling something was terribly wrong.
THE BOOK was lying on top of a newspaper. Paul picked it up and
glanced at the paper. The usual headlines glared at him - TWO
THOUSAND PEOPLE DEAD FROM GIANT EARTHQUAKE IN
SOUTH AFRICA...INDIA SUFFERS WORST DROUGHT IN
HISTORY, THOUSANDS DIE IN FAMINE...TURKEY DECLARES
10
WAR ON GREECE..and an article on the ocean levels rising around
New York. Paul didn't want to think about what was in the newspapers,
it was always the same with no concrete explanations and no solutions
to the world's problems.
Grabbing some left-over takeaway chinese food from the freezer, he
settled himself comfortably onto the sofa and opened 'THE BOOK'.
On the first page was written: “I have written this book with love in
my heart for all the people of the world - do not read it with fear in your
mind, read it with love and understanding and faith that we all have the
gift of eternal life - that God is our truth.”
The first few pages were on reincarnation and the Krishna beliefs.
Paul skipped though them, as he did the chapter on the Divine Laws of
Harmony, Peace and Love. He was getting bored, this was all just new
age teachings...what was it that could have worried Bethany so much?
He finished his food and shifted impatiently on the sofa.
Then he saw it...about half way through the book...WORLD
CHANGES - climatic changes that have been occurring for the past ten
years (actually, they started more than thirty years ago), but mankind
had only started to notice them recently. As he read, Paul realised
everything he had worried about, questioned, was being stated - not in
scientific wording or equations, but in simple, plain words.
Like the explanation of unusual occurrences in tidal flows and
currents - “Look at the globe as a huge ball filled with water. If you
begin to stir the inner water, you would be able to see the changes
occurring on earth, for the core of the earth has started to spin and
churn. Visualise this ball as its centre begins to spin - at first, the
surface would not feel any effects, but as the spinning becomes more
pronounced, you can see the wobbling effect of the ball. This wobbling
is what will cause the ocean currents to flow in different directions and
patterns. Eventually, this will affect every shore line and the tides will
become out of sync.”
Paul turned the page quickly and read about the melting of the polar
ice caps. “Yeh,” he thought to himself, “everyone knew they were
slowly melting, that's why the ocean levels have been rising.”
As he read page after page on world disasters that had and probably
would occur, Paul wondered just what solution this Dean person would
pose for the world's problems. Then he read: FUTURE EVENTS
THAT WILL HAPPEN DURING THE YEAR 2013.
11
The polar ice caps will melt very quickly and break apart - this will
cause mass flooding. The City of New York will be underwater people will be evacuated - many will lose their lives.
“This couldn't possibly happen next year - it would take twenty
years, if ever,” he thought.
A giant earthquake will destroy the entire city of Los Angeles California will sink into the sea.
“The giant earthquake has been predicted many times,” Paul thought.
Japan will have many earthquakes and will eventually disappear
into the sea - that country will be no more. Violent storms and
tornadoes will occur in countries that have never experienced them.
The Arab countries will be flooded and will eventually become inland
seas.
“Even with the unusual rainfall, this cannot possibly happen,”
thought Paul.
China will become a frozen wasteland. Undersea volcanoes will rise
in the Pacific Ocean!
As Paul read the disastrous predictions, he started to think that this
was just another doomsday fanatic. He closed the book and went to the
freezer and grabbed another beer.
“Millennium mania!” he thought to himself, as he remembered how
his parents talked about the world in the years 1998-99 - the onslaught
of the year 2000. With the global computer crisis finally rectifying
itself, and there were some wackos then, the doomsayers predicting the
'Big Bang' which never happened.
He laughed, remembering a crazy guy from Texas who built a blimp
that would airlift him 16 miles above the earth when the big bang
happened. Then there were the groups waiting for aliens to rescue them
in space ships - the UFO watchers were out in droves then, and actually,
most people, himself included, accepted that something definitely was
out there!
Of course, the widely held belief among Christians was the truth in
the Book of Revelations - that the year 2000 was the beginning of the
end times. Just thinking those words, gave Paul a cold shiver down his
spine. Just because it didn’t happen then who said it couldn’t happen
anytime. He put those thoughts out of his mind - the big bang would
never occur. The new agers had the right idea...the year 2000 and
12
beyond would be an enlightened beginning with peace and prosperity.
Now that was a laugh. After September 11th the world had changed
forever. Terrorists still had everyone living in fear. North Korea was
still developing nuclear weapons; there was more violence and small
wars than at any other time in history. He returned to the sofa and
reluctantly opened 'THE BOOK' again.
This time, the words he read started to make his heart beat faster.
The planet earth will be bombarded with forces, which will cause it
to change its direction in relationship to the universe. It will turn on its
axis. The earth will be shaken and turned and much of the land will be
destroyed as it realigns itself to new places and points. During this time
of realignment, there will be many catastrophic events, some of which I
have already described - not one part of the earth will be untouched.
“Oh shit! This is what worried Bethany,” Paul said out loud, as he
continued to read.
The turning of the axis is the true story of the Book of Revelation the story told in all cultures and in all races. It has been told
throughout eternity, for this is a major event.
“Was he kidding? He makes it sound like a giant circus,” Paul
thought.
This is not the end of the world; it is the beginning of a new era, a
new world with a new understanding. For you to understand the
reasons for this I will take you back to the beginning, to a time when I
lived another life on the ancient continent of Atlantis more than 1500
years before the birth of Christ.
As Paul read the story of the High Priest Ilias and life on Atlantis,
the wisdom and spiritual greatness that the Atlanteans possessed...of
Aanyota and Zaiot and the final horrific destruction of their country, he
slowly started to understand where this was all leading. Now, he read
the words:
The very reasons that Atlantis was destroyed have been slowly
gaining momentum - It seems mankind can never learn from his past
mistakes. These coming events are not acts of God punishing man, they
have been brought about by yourselves and your ancestors. For too
long now, there has been a complete disregard for the earth. For too
long man has polluted the land and the sea..he has been killing the very
essence of his survival. Nuclear waste, poison gases, so much pollution
- and all mankind does is strip the forests bare, pollute the oceans and
13
kill the animals he should be protecting. Finally, not happy with just
that, he turns on his own kind with greed, hate, jealousy and murders,
rapes tortures God's children in the name of power and lust. For too
long, man has waged wars with complete disregard for human life.
Many innocent people have suffered through famine at the hands of the
greedy. This will all stop soon as the earth takes charge of itself.
Remember for every action there is a reaction - and now, the earth will
begin to fight back to save itself.
Paul sat quietly, thinking of what he had just read. He felt strange,
different. When he first started to read the book, he didn't really believe
much of it. Now, as he turned to the last page, he knew it was all true.
We must accept our future and leave it in the hands of God. We must
believe and hope that the lessons we have learnt in this life will guide us
along the path of Truth, Love and Understanding in our next
incarnation, and that we will go on to live a life of peace and love
surrounded by the light of God and that mankind will live within this
Spiritual light for all eternity.
The beginning.......
A single tear rolled down Paul's cheek and landed on the page. He
gazed deeply at the picture of Dean on the back cover and felt more at
peace that he had ever felt in five years.
“Rrring....rring!” Then the loud banging on his door woke him from
his reverie. “Paul, Paul, are you there?”
The familiar angel voice called as Paul glanced at the clock - it was
9pm.
“Bethany!” he yelled, realising he had completely forgotten to phone
her at eight.
He opened the door and grabbed her. Small droplets of perspiration
were trickling down her forehead as his lips hungrily touched hers. She
was wearing a thin cotton mini dress, her long slender legs hung like
molten chocolate beneath the frail blue fabric. Slowly, his hands slid
under the fabric and made their way gently towards her firm buttocks he caressed them sensually. She was only wearing a g-string. “How
sexy!” he thought, as his fingers now slid between the warm moist
valley and started to tickle her sensitive spot. Suddenly Bethany pushed
14
his hand away and teasingly smacked him on the arm. “Get away with
you, you're hopeless Paul Evans, just like some randy old dog!”
Bethany pushed him inside and closed the door behind her.
“Sorry I forgot to phone babe - didn't realise the time,” said Paul as
he led her towards the kitchen. “Would you like a beer or a juice?”
“I'll take a juice thanks.”
Paul handed her a small ice-cold bottle and looked seriously into her
eyes. “I read the book.”
There was a long silence between them. Bethany gulped a refreshing
mouthful from the bottle.
“So?” she said, contemplating his reply.
“Let's sit down on the sofa.”
Paul took the book in his hands and looked at the picture of Dean
again. “I want to meet this Dean McIntyre - everything he has written is
true.”
Bethany studied his face, “Was he serious?” she thought.
“I'm serious babe, there is much more to this book than we think.”
Bethany placed her juice bottle on the coffee table and said: “Listen
Paul, we've heard it all before, years ago - the end of the world.
Everyone was waiting for the year 2000. Now we're more than a decade
on and nothing has changed.” She gently took Paul's hand in hers and
continued: “I admit the predictions worried me, I felt scared when I
finished the book. Now, I've had some time to think about it I realise it
could not possibly happen, we must believe it's not true - God would
never let this happen to our world.”
Paul looked deep into her eyes. “That's just it Bethany, God has
nothing to do with it. Don't you see, it's us - mankind, we've fucked up
our own planet. Not you or I or the greenies down the road, but
mankind as a whole - the evil in man that causes pain and suffering man is the beast, he is killing himself and the earth.”
Bethany didn't answer; she wished she had never accepted the damn
book now.
“Let me explain something babe. The theories on the atmosphere
I've been working on for the past year. In simple terms, it looks like
this. With the greenhouse effect, we are now pumping out almost 7
billion tons of Co2 per year - eventually that can heat the earth up to an
increase of 12 degrees centigrade, within five years.
15
“With the data I have, it breaks down to approximately 220 parts per
thousand carbon dioxide, 150 fluorocarbons, 150 nitrogen oxide and
180 methane..total 700 parts per thousand. Sounds impossible, but it's
not. It's bloody catastrophic and there's nothing that can be done about
it...it's too late.
“The world can't stop all industry - all power and fuel - to stop this
effect, we would all have to stop working, living and just go back to the
land and survive like cavemen! So, there is no solution - we have to live
with the greenhouse effect and suffer through boiling summers, warm
winters or maybe freezing winters, floods, famine and all kinds of
natural disasters - that's our world today.”
Bethany drew her lips together, and then let out a soft sigh.
“You're thinking of something else - aren't you Paul?”
Paul shifted his eyes skyward, then held her stare. “Well...I've been
thinking - I was reading some works the other day on a retired
astrophysicist, a Professor Hayward from London. He worked on some
projects at NASA in the late sixties, used to live in Florida. Anyway, he
apparently had severe heart problems years ago, so he retired and went
back to live in London. I remembered reading something about a theory
he had that the sun has a companion star; he called it the black star, with
a very eccentric orbit, that came close to earth.
“He believed it would perturb an asteroid belt and an asteroid would
eventually be on a collision course with earth. He estimated the year at
about 2100. It was in the sixties and that was such a long way off and
his data was sketchy and his model had flaws. His theory drew a lot of
scepticism and it was waved away. Nothing more was ever written
about it again. That was nearly 50 years ago and a lot has been
discovered in astrophysics since then.
“Bethany, suppose he was right, but his estimation of entry was out?
Suppose it could be on a collision course with earth next year?”
Bethany opened her mouth and let out a loud “wow!” and smiled.
“Paul, don't be crazy, if that was all true, don't you think that with all the
space experts, with all the billions of dollars that go into research and
projects, that they would know, they would have to know by now!”
Paul answered matter-of-factly. “Sometimes man cannot see what is
right in front of him - and sometimes there is nothing to see...only feel.”
Bethany slid her arm around Paul's neck and pulled him close to her.
Gently her lips touched his, and then moved sensually down his chin
16
and onto his neck. Her soft wet tongue danced teasingly in circles till it
reached his chest.
“Let's go to bed darling, I am hungry for you, “ she whispered.
Paul could feel his excitement rising and he stood, grabbing her
around the waist, then led her to the bedroom. Outside the door, he
paused and gazed down into her beautiful face. “On Saturday morning,
I'm going to Central Park to see those Hare Krishnas who gave you the
book. I want to meet Dean McIntyre, I must find him.”
17
CHAPTER TWO
Kavita – India – May 2012
The tired grey ox finally came to a halt. His withered body heaved a
deep sigh of relief now that the day's work was complete. Kavita looked
back at the huge area of dry barren earth that had just been toiled. She
wiped her brow, dust and heat filled her mouth and her lungs. Her thin,
frail body wanted to lie down on the earth and cry.
Kavita unstrapped the harness on the front of the plough and slowly
walked around the old ox. She patted his head and rubbed the dust from
his eyes. “What will become of us oh precious beast?” she spoke out
loud. The animal's eyes stared empty with hopelessness, his thirsty
body ached for just one mouthful of water. Turning around, Kavita
spread her arms wide. “What is the use of all this work on the dead soil,
without water, we have nothing...oh Rama, Rama, please send us the
rains!”
The small farm where Kavita and her family lived lay on the
outskirts of a village near Unnao, which was about half way between
Kanpur and Lucknow in the Gangetic plain region of Uttar Pradesh in
Northern India. This belt of flat alluvial low lands usually had the
richest fertile soil in the country.
Now, halfway through the second year without a drop of rain, the
area was slowly dying like the rest of India.
There had been no winter, no snowfalls on the high mountain ranges,
no storms, no monsoon rains - nothing...except a continual summer for
almost 18 months. How could the regular monsoon that always
occurred from June to November never happen? How could the water
that runs from the slopes of the Himalayas down to the Gangetic plain
be drying up? Something was terribly wrong.
18
Kavita led the tired ox towards the empty water trough. He knew
soon that his parched mouth would feel the wet fluid, which would keep
him alive. Kavita rushed towards the house, almost knocking down her
little sister and brother playing in the dirt.
“Mother, Mother, I must have a bowl of water for the ox,” she cried
desperately.
The startled brown eyes of her mother looked up and she smiled at
her beautiful daughter. “Here, take this bucket that is half filled, I was
going to wash our clothes - but what are clothes compared to the
animal?”
Kavita held the bucket beneath the ox's mouth and slowly, the thirsty
beast drank deeply. He stopped and lifted his head, his eyes holding
hers in thankfulness, then, he continued to drink.
When he stopped, there was a small amount of water left in the
bottom, Kavita urged him to drink more, he refused, he was satisfied
and wanted his young friend to have the last precious drops. Holding
the bucket high above her mouth, she slowly savoured the moisture that
trickled down her throat. She finished, smiled and placed a kiss on the
forehead of the ox. “They would survive,” she thought, “they would all
survive.”
Sitting on the floor, a rug spread out neatly in front of them, the
family shared the sparse evening meal, which consisted mainly of
vegetables and rice and tea. Seven children, ranging in ages from three,
to Kavita, the eldest at 18 years, and the baby Shakti, 12 months old,
cuddled up on her mother's knee.
They were the typical Indian family struggling to survive the most
horrendous drought and famine the country had ever experienced in
history.
Kavita's father, Mukunda, was lying quietly on the only bed in the
house. His pain filled body was resigned to the fact that he may not live
much longer. What had started out as a mild bout of influenza had
turned into incurable tuberculosis.
Kavita was the strongest in mind and body of all the children, though
now, her starved frame was only a shadow of the once curvaceous
young body of only 12 months ago. Dara and Kapil were her twelve
year old twin brothers, robust in body, lazy in nature and only working
when scolded to do so. Sisters Parusha, eight, Meeka, seven and Sita,
five, were happy and playful little girls always looking on the bright
19
side of everything. Now, however, their laughter was beginning to fade
as starvation overcame their optimism.
At three years of age, Kavita's little brother Bhutatma had a strong
forceful character, always wanting his own way and usually getting it.
The youngest of her family was the baby girl Shakti, who only slept and
cried and never seemed to grow. At 12 months of age, she was still only
crawling.
Kavita poured a cup of tea and walked over to her father. Gazing
down at his frail pain filled body, she gently lifted his head and held the
cup to his mouth. “Drink Babu, please drink.” His eyes lit up as he
swallowed the warm liquid. When he finished, he held Kavita's hand in
his and whispered, “My daughter, you must promise me.....,” Makunda
gently squeezed her hand, “you must promise me, if the rains do not
come by two months, you will take the family down to Puttaparthi, to be
near the Ashram of Satmya Sai Baba.”
Kavita's eyes were filled with worry as she said, “But Babu, this is
our home, our land. It is such a long journey, we would have very little
food and water...we would all die Babu, it is too far to travel.”
A soft smile slid across her father's weather-beaten face, as he said,
“Under this bed in a small bag, I have some money, enough money to
buy food and water along the way...,” his smile was wide now and a
happiness glowed within him that Kavita hadn't seen for a long time,
“enough money to buy train tickets from Kanpur to Bombay.”
Kavita gasped in surprise. “That would cost a lot of rupees,” she
thought.
Leaning her face close to her father, she kissed his forehead and
whispered, “I promise you Babu, I promise you.”
Kavita walked outside, she wanted to be alone. The sun had set and
left behind it a dark grey sky heavy with humidity and emptiness.
She walked towards the far Poinciana trees that were now only
barren branches, raped of life. She stopped and spoke out loud to the
sky. “Oh Dean, where are you?” Sitting now, under the skeleton of a
wood apple tree, she hung her head in her hands. Her thoughts drifted
and memories flooded back to the first time she saw Dean, more than
twelve months ago.
Kavita was hanging out the family washing...her mother was inside
the house cooking, the delicious smell of curry spices wafted through
20
the air. Her father and twin brothers were busy in the field harvesting a
patch of dried out wheat and barley, hardly enough to feed the family
for the next six months.
Through the Poinciana trees, the figure of a man clothed in a long
white kaftan walked graciously towards her. Kavita put down the
washing and looked with startled eyes, as this was not a neighbour or a
local from the village, but a stranger, an infidel!
He stood a few meters in front of her and took the orange scarf from
around his neck and wiped his brow. Long shoulder length black wavy
hair hung limp with sweat around his neck. He pushed it back and tied
the scarf around his hair. Deep dark green eyes sparkling like emeralds
shone towards her brown eyes and melted into her soul. She quivered
inside. He smiled and stepped a little closer, aware of her surprise.
He spoke in her native tongue. “Hello my beautiful flower of India,
my name is Dean, I am on my way to Delhi. May I please rest here for a
while?” His Hindi tongue was perfect. “He must have lived in the
country for many years,” Kavita thought.
“Please wait here, I will go and fetch my father,” she replied, feeling
little butterflies dancing in her heart.
Dean sat cross-legged under the wood apple tree, he was weary from
the long three day walk from Allahabad.
Dara and Kapil ran ahead of their father...a stranger walking into
their farm was an unusual surprise. Dean rose to greet the children and
bowed humbly to Makunda. At first, Makunda eyed Dean warily. Then
when Dean spoke, and his eyes held Makunda's with so much love and
gentleness, the tall Indian knew he was in the presence of a Holy Man.
Makunda shook his hand and immediately a warm harmony flowed
through his body. “Who is this stranger?” he thought.
“Please, you are most welcome, come inside our humble home and
share a meal with my family.”
From the moment Dean sat on the floor with the family, he became
as one with them. Kavita's mother, Shanti, fussed over the young
handsome stranger with bowls of dried fruit and sweet orange tea; Sita
and Meera were so close to Dean they almost sat on his lap.
As he spoke of his journey through India, his special friendship with
Sai Baba and his great love for the country and it's people, the children
sat transfixed with eyes wide in wonder, hanging on to his every word.
21
It was difficult to believe this young infidel was not an Indian as he
spoke and felt like one within his heart.
Dean noticed Kavita, her eyes downcast, every now and again
shining with love in his direction. A delicate pretty girl, with long black
hair held together in a braid down her back, with skin that was
somewhat lighter than the rest of her family, except for Bhutatma, who
had similar features.
Dean could feel Kavita's soul - it was a very old soul, he thought to
himself, as he sensed a great love flowing between them.
Dean stopped talking and looked directly at Kavita, their eyes held
and their souls locked in harmony. They smiled at each other. Words
would not have to be spoken, they knew at that moment they would be
together for eternity - they were soul mates.
“Kavita, what are you doing sitting out here alone, my child?” The
voice of her mother, and a gentle arm around her shoulder brought
Kavita out of her dream state.
“Come and sit beside me mother, I'm trying to find a special star in
the sky, but all I can see is emptiness,” she said sadly.
Shanti held a loving arm around her daughter. “The star you are
looking for is Dean, isn't that so my child?”
Kavita's sad eyes held her mother's; she didn't answer.
“Daughter, Dean blessed our home with his presence for two weeks
last year...he spoke with great wisdom, love and truth. I believe he was
sent by Krishna to share his love with our family - his words echoed the
same beliefs as the great Gandhi and Sathya Sai Baba. We all love him
and miss his presence. Dean is a traveller; he goes from country to
country spreading the word of God and giving love. He has no home, he
belongs to no one - yet he belongs to everyone, he stays within the heart
of every person that he touches.”
Kavita started to weep and hung her head close to her mother's
breast. Through her sobs, she cried: “He is inside my soul Mother, as I
am inside his. I know he will return to India to be with me.”
Shanti hugged her daughter and whispered: “That is in the hands of
God, my child.”
Kavita slipped her hand towards her neck and held her crystal tight.
“I know you will return, I know you will Dean,” she thought.
22
CHAPTER THREE
A slow boat down the Ganges
AIR INDIA flight 218 was preparing for descent into Delhi
International airport.
“In approximately 15 minutes, we will be landing at Delhi, we would
kindly ask passengers to fasten their seatbelts...” the voice echoed over
the intercom.
The young Indian steward walked towards aisle seat 43B - he
glanced down at the dark haired man dressed in a purple and white
kaftan. He was dozing peacefully. The steward knelt down beside him
and looked at his face, suddenly the passenger blinked and opened his
eyes wide. The steward gasped in surprise.
“Oh, I am sorry to wake you Sir....Mr. Dean Sir, we will be landing
soon.”
Dean smiled and held the steward's eyes. The young man had heard
many stories of the Australian who travelled around the world spreading
the words of love and faith to people of all colours and all religions.
Rumour had it that he was young, about the same age as himself, yet, as
he looked in awe into Dean's eyes, he felt he was looking at someone
who was more than a thousand years old in wisdom. Dean held out his
hand.
“What is your name?”
“I am called Shiva,” he replied, shaking his hand and straightening
his jacket.
“You wanted to ask me something, did you not, Shiva?”
The steward knelt down again.
“Can you save India, it is dying?” pleaded Shiva with fear in his
eyes.
23
Dean held his hand.
“As long as man has faith and courage in his heart, India will never
die.” Concern crossed Dean's face, as he continued, “No, I cannot save
India, but man can try to save himself if he looks into his soul and finds
the God within.”
The plane dropped steeper for its descent, the steward smiled at
Dean, a small glimmer of hope now flicking in his dark, worried eyes.
He went about his duties in preparation for landing.
Dean lay back and closed his eyes. His thoughts painted a beautiful
vision of the India he first saw more than twelve months ago. A sub
tropical land, with the snow capped Himalayan mountains in the North,
the rich alluvial Gangetic plains, the rice fields and coconut trees...the
taste of ripe succulent mangoes and the intoxicating aroma of curry
spices flowing through the busy markets. The overpopulated cities of
Calcutta and Bombay, where millions lived in squalor...even there the
colour and beauty of India shone through.
Then, suddenly within a split second, the beautiful images were gone
and Dean could see the country under water - masses of water - an
inland sea with only the high mountain peaks protruding like islands in
the ocean.
Dean could feel his pulse racing, his heart was thumping wildly - the
image was so clear. He tried to control his feelings of worry and
despair. Slowly, he gained control of his mind and concentrated within
his third eye. His heart slowed and his consciousness drifted into the
picture. He could feel himself hovering above the inland sea. People
were screaming out to him, drowning...he could see the fear and horror
on their faces...some were clinging frantically to the roofs of houses.
Then the horror was gone and the sea became calm, calm and empty.
Looking towards the Himalayas Dean could see the mountains
bathed in silver light - the word Tibet shone out from the dark grey sky.
Tibet...he held the word in his mind.
The sudden screeching of tyres on the runway and the jerking of
brakes brought him back to reality. Dean sat quietly in his seat; he
didn't want to jostle with the disembarking passengers, preferring to be
last off the plane.
Outside the terminal, a small canvas bag slung over his shoulder,
Dean watched silently as the huge throng of people weaved to and fro
amid the stifling heat. Taxis were almost colliding with each other,
24
people were yelling with frustration and rickshaw drivers were jostling
each other for customers. Dean took a deep breath and inhaled the
essence - the life that was India. He knew he would never relish this
scene again.
Suddenly, out of the throng of rickshaws, a familiar face and a hand
frantically waving. The voice was loud and forceful.
“Sanjay! Sanjay! (Enlightened one) over here...it's Gopal, quickly
Sanjay!”
Dean pushed his way through the tight maze of rickshaws, excitedly
looking for Gopal's long scrawny face and unkempt beard. Gopal wore
a red tattered turban around his head, his chest was bare above his
baggy grey cotton pants and the wide smile revealed the same brown
stained teeth. Dean hugged the tired sweaty body. It was good to see an
old friend.
“How long you stay in Delhi, Sanjay?” said Gopal, smiling widely.
“Only two days, I want to take a slow sail down the Ganges to
Kanpur.”
Gopal's smile turned to worry and he shook his head. “Oh no
Sanjay, the Ganges is terrible now, full of death from the famine, the
water is very low...the Ganges is dying like the rest of India, Sanjay.”
Dean didn't answer, he just hoisted himself up into the rickshaw.
“Where you go Sanjay?” said Gopal as he proceeded to push his way
through the heavy traffic.
“Into the city, anywhere, I just want to feel India again, I won't go to
an hotel, I will sleep somewhere under the stars tonight.”
Dean sat back and drank in Delhi, a city situated on the banks of the
Yamuna River, a tributary of the Ganges. A high stone wall erected in
1638 surrounded the City, which was approached through several
arched gateways. Once inside, one was confronted with a maze of
congested narrow streets, alleyways and the ever-present bustling
bazaars. Half way along Chandri Chank (Silver Street), the main
thoroughfare of the City, Dean asked Gopal to stop.
“Let's just sit here and watch the traffic,” said Dean to a bewildered
Gopal. “You want to sit and watch traffic? That is strange,” said Gopal,
as he pulled the rickshaw to the side of the road. Dean sat down on the
road and crossed his legs. “Come and sit with me Gopal.”
Gopal watched in amazement as the young Australian took out two
plastic bottles of orange juice from his bag and offered one to him.
25
They sat on the side of the road for about twenty minutes, watching the
traffic and drinking the juice, amid strange stares from passers-by and
traffic honking at the unusual scene in the middle of the busy
thoroughfare.
Later in the day, they passed by Jama Masjid (The Great Mosque)
with its tapering minarets and bulberous domes, which dominated the
skyline. As the late afternoon sun faded, leaving behind a heavy humid
haze hanging like a deep grey veil over the City, Gopal stopped outside
the old Red Fort.
Dean stepped from the rickshaw and gazed at the high red sandstone
wall...within, the magnificent Imperial Palace once served some of
India's Mughal Emperors.
Dean held the vision of splendour within his mind. He didn't have to
walk inside, he could see through to the Grand Royal Alcove with its
jewel-encrusted marble walls. The magnificent masterpiece of Mughal
architecture, the Pearl Mosque...the white marble walls - he would
remember it all.
Dean walked back over to Gopal and placed into his hand a large
bundle of American dollars. “Thank you for today Gopal, it's been
wonderful. I want you to use this money to take your family for a
holiday in Tibet.”
Gopal looked in disbelief at the money, his mouth was wide open in
shock. Dean placed his hands on his friend's shoulders and looked into
his eyes.
“You must do as I say and go to Tibet before the month of January
next year and stay there; you must!”
Gopal didn't question his young friend. He just nodded his head and
said, “Yes, yes Sanjay, I will go, I promise you. Thank you, thank you!”
Dean decided that this was the spot where he would sleep for the
night, across the road from the Red Fort, under a Neem tree. In the
morning, he would walk to Raj Ghat, outside of Delhi, to the place
where Mahatma Ghandi had been cremated.
It was late afternoon by the time Dean arrived on the banks of the
Ganges, at a place where he knew it was possible to hire a sailboat or
some home made galleon. The stench of burning bodies had been
drifting through the humid heavy air for miles before he caught sight of
the thick black smoke clouds that now covered a large area just before
the river.
26
In Hindu religion, the body is burnt and not buried and Dean could
visualise this mass ritual being carried out over all of India right now.
He remembered the headlines in the newspapers when he arrived two
days ago. “THE BLACK DEATH OF FAMINE..TWO MILLION
BODIES BURNT THROUGHOUT INDIA...HUNDREDS DIE
EVERY DAY ON THE STREETS OF CALCUTTA AND
BOMBAY...THOUSANDS OF FARMERS STARVE TO DEATH”
Dean knew there was nothing he or anyone else could do to ease the
suffering. Even with the huge amounts of foreign aid food pouring into
the country, there would never be enough to feed India's 800 million
souls. Without rain, the country would never survive.
Dean also knew that when the rain eventually did come in about six
months from now, that it would never stop and the oceans around India
would rise and cover all the land. He pushed those thoughts to the back
of his subconscious - he would only allow beautiful thoughts of hope,
faith and courage to consume him. He would pray that the fate of the
earth could somehow be changed.
Four old boats, two with tattered sails, one a makeshift barge and the
fourth looking like it would sink at any moment, hung close to the bank.
“I want to hire a boat to go to Kanpur,” said Dean in the native
tongue, to a group of men sitting cross legged on the broken down jetty.
They looked up at the young stranger, clad in cotton khaki pants and
a long sleeved grey shirt. Around his head, he wore a cotton scarf tied
into a turban. The men stared silently into Dean's deep green eyes, as
the stranger now squatted down to their level.
“I have the boat with red sail, I can take you to Kanpur Mister,” said
a friendly voice. “No good to sail down Ganges Mister, nothing to see
but death,” another voice broke in.
“I am not worried about death,” replied Dean handing a bag full of
rupees to the man who had offered his boat.
The water level in the Ganges had dropped dramatically by more
than half. Well into the second year with no monsoon, the water now
resembled thick, dark grey soup, filled with rotting carcasses of animals
and humans. Dean knew this two-day journey would be horrific.
He had brought in his canvas bag a large packet of dried fruit and
nuts and a three-litre bottle of boiled water. This would have to sustain
himself and the boat owner, whose name was Brahma, for the journey.
He didn't want to stop; he had to get to Kanpur as quickly as possible.
27
The blood red sun was setting; its fine rays dancing on the water that
seemed to look like thick molten silver, as the small boat with tattered
sails moved slowly down the Ganges. Dean lay back and closed his
eyes - he filled his mind with beautiful memories of the India he loved.
He remembered the story that was told in Hindu mythology about how
the Ganges was created in Heaven. That it sprang from the foot of the
God Vishnu and flowed across the sky in the form of the milky way
until it was induced to descend to earth, after many entreaties by human
beings.
At last, a sage performed tremendous and fearful austerities,
persuading Mother Ganga to appear among mankind; it was feared that
the tremendous force of the river as it fell would damage the earth, so
the God Siva consented to stand underneath and take the shock by
allowing it to drop on his head.
The river fell in a thunderous torrent and then was forced to wander
for years among the matted locks of Siva, until it dropped more gently to
earth and flowed across the land, bringing physical sustenance and
spiritual salvation to mankind.
Holding on to the myth in his mind, small tears were forming in his
eyes - he let them escape and roll down his face - he felt so sad to watch
this great river dying.
Dean slept about five hours then took over the boat while Brahma
slept - this would be the ritual until they reached Kanpur.
The colour of the river now turned to dark brown mud - the stench of
raw sewage, dead bodies and rotting animals was becoming unbearable.
Forget eating any dried fruit, both men were so nauseated they could
barely drink any of their boiled water. On the second evening, as they
turned a bend in the river, they noticed a group of people sitting on the
ghats. (stone steps leading to the water)
As Dean looked in their direction, he noticed they were praying - it
looked like a family with five children. Small flickering lights from their
lanterns lit up their thin, scrawny faces. Dean watched now as each
person placed a candle leaf boat into the water. It is said that if the
vessel reaches the Eastern shore, the devotee's wish is destined to be
fulfilled.
28
The water was calm, as one by one the leaf boats sailed by towards
the Eastern bank. The family sat quietly watching the small flickering
lights.
Dean prayed that they would all reach the other side. He watched
sadly, as one by one, they sank and the lights went out - there was only
one left. Dean held the light in his eyes and guided it safely to the bank.
Braham pointed excitedly. “Look Mr. Dean, one of the leaf boats
has made it to the Eastern bank!”
Dean smiled as he heard the loud clapping and happy voices from the
family.
“Yes Braham, the light of mankind will always survive.”
Kavita knelt down beside the body of her dead father. She held her
baby sister tightly in her arms and silently prayed. Shanti walked
around the other side and slowly placed the burning branch amongst the
dry wood that lay piled neatly beneath her husband's body. The other
children stood further back comforting each other as tears rolled down
their sorrow filled young faces.
Bright orange and silver flames quickly flew into the air, the wood
crackled, then dark black smoke billowed into the evening sky.
It was over.
Mukunda's soul had departed and would continue its journey into
another life, another place and another time.
Dean stepped from the boat, his body hunched over and his mind
exhausted from the horrendous journey down the river of death. It was
difficult to accept that the great Ganges was no longer the river of life.
His body was heavy with sadness. Tonight, he would rest somewhere
on the outskirts of Kanpur and tomorrow, start the long one and a half
day journey to Kavita's village.
“Kavita,” he spoke her name out loud, and held the image of her
pretty face in his mind. He could feel his love for her starting to flow
through his body. Dean straightened his back and pushed his shoulders
high. His strength was returning and he would need all his physical and
spiritual strength to rescue Kavita and her family from India's fate.
Tawny gold rays of sunlight were seeping over the dry arid earth,
leaving dark cracks in the once fertile land. The colour green was
nowhere to be found. Dean couldn't believe his eyes as he now
29
approached the farm, just as the sun was setting. The once rich pastures
were gone, the trees brown skeletons of death.
It was far worse than he had imagined. There was no sign of life...the
farm looked deserted.
Dean stopped walking, his mind was swimming with memories of
the first time he walked onto the rich green pasture and the vision of
Kavita hanging out the washing.
The line was empty; there were no clothes on the line now. His
pulse started to race - what if they were gone? What if he was too late
and they had all left the farm - what if they had died?
“Oh God no!” he thought, as he now started to run towards the old
house. Suddenly, the crying of a child and the sight of an ox's head
peering out from the back of the house made Dean run faster.
He burst through the door with passioned relief thumping through his
body. Kavita was placing some food into a small bowl - the children
were sitting on the floor, two of the girls were crying. Kavita's mother
was lying silently on the bed.
Dean ran to Kavita and swept her frail body into his arms...tears
rolled down his cheeks as he covered her face with kisses and hugged
her tightly.
“Thank God you're alive - thank God I've found you!”
The girls stopped crying and started yelling out: “Dean! Dean! You
came back!” Bhutatma ran to his side and tugged on his pants, his arms
outstretched, waiting to be picked up. Kavita thought her heart would
burst with joy - her prayers had been answered.
Shanti stood beside the bed, a smile crossing her sorrow-filled face,
her sunken eyes were surrounded with dark circles.
“It is very good to see you again Dean,” she spoke in a frail voice.
After Dean hugged and kissed the children one by one, he turned to
Kavita. “Where is your father?”
Kavita looked at him with eyes full of despair. “He died two days
ago - his soul is free.”
Dean gave the children what was left of his dried fruit and nuts - he
was content with a cup of sweet tea. As he sat on the floor with the
children, he felt so happy to finally be with the family again. Parusha
and Meeka spoke simultaneously. “How long will you stay with us
Dean?”
30
Dean smiled at the children, and then looked at Kavita. “I've come to
take you all back to Australia with me,” was his reply.
The children's faces were filled with surprise and their mouths were
wide with wonder.
Shanti spoke from her bed. “That is not possible Dean - India is our
home - if the country dies, then we will die with it.”
There was a hushed silence as Dean looked at Kavita, waiting for her
response.
Kavita sighed and small tears were forming in her eyes. She held his
hand in hers.
“Before my father died, he asked me to take the family down to
Puttaparthi, to be close to Sai Baba, if the rains never came. I promised
him I would do this Dean. He gave me the money for our journey
before he died. You must understand I have to honour his wish.”
Dean felt his heart sink to the bottom of his feet. What could he say
or do? His did understand - he understood perfectly, but it didn't help
ease his disappointment.
“When do you plan to go?” he said as calmly as possible.
Kavita tried to smile, but Dean could feel her heart breaking inside he could feel the sadness of her soul.
“We must leave in a few days, my mother is not well. We will catch
a train from Kanpur to Bombay, then a bus to Puttaparthi.”
Dean could imagine the horrendous journey - he wasn't sure they
would survive.
He couldn't speak, then stood and walked outside. He needed to be
alone. He walked around the side of the ramshackle house and placed
his arm on the old ox. The animal was just skin and bone.
“What are they going to do with you old friend?” They stood
silently together, beast and man contemplating their future.
The night sky was dark, filled with small silver stars and a thin
quarter moon. Dean thought of the other worlds beyond ours, of far
away galaxies - he wondered what was happening, millions of light
years away, right now. As his eyes held the heavens, the inner voice of
Ilias whispered to him. “You will find out soon Dean, you will find out
soon.”
The soft voice of Kavita behind him broke the moment. “Dean, come
and sit with me.” She had a folded cotton rug under her arm and her
31
hair had been freshly braided. She wore a clean pale blue sari, which
must have belonged to her mother.
He took her by the hand and together they walked silently towards
the skeleton of the old wood-apple tree. Kavita spread the rug on the
dry broken earth and sat down.
“You look so beautiful tonight, my little princess,” said Dean as he
sat beside her. She moved close to him and gently kissed his cheek,
then shyly held his eyes. “We may never have a chance to be together
again Dean, my body and soul are aching for you to make love to me but I know this is a sin for us.”
Dean held her by the shoulders. “You are wrong Kavita, we will be
together again, for eternity. This is just a short time apart, that I know.”
“Now, lay down beside me and I will tell you a story from a time
long, long ago - about the love of two teenagers named Aanyota and
Zaiot who lived on the ancient island of Atlantis.”
Kavita curled herself up like a kitten on Dean's strong muscular chest
and listened in awe to the story of Aanyota and Zaiot and most
importantly, how they experienced the pleasure of spiritual sex, just by
touching each other with love.
Dean placed his lips on hers, and their breathing filtered through
until they breathed as one. Gently, he placed his hand on her maiden
part and kept it still. Kavita did the same to him. They lay still and
quiet, only their minds and souls were binding together as the love they
felt started to flow through their bodies.
Slowly and gently each could feel the physical pleasure starting to
rise - it started simultaneously from the top of their heads and the
bottom of their toes. As it flowed up and down towards each other's
pleasure dome, the waves of pleasure increased as their hearts beat
faster and their breathing became more rapid. Suddenly, their waves of
ecstasy released in unity, leaving them shaking with unbelievable
rapture and happiness.
Dean held her close and whispered: “See, we have made love
without physical sex - you are still a virgin, my princess!”
Kavita started to giggle - she found it hard to believe what had just
happened. That night, they slept cuddled up together on the hard earth,
lost in the blissful dreams of each other.
32
Over cups of tea the next morning, Kavita couldn't help but blush
every time Dean smiled at her, memories were flooding her mind from
their special night together.
Dean turned to Shanti and said, “My plane leaves from Delhi next
week - but, I am going to change the ticket to leave from Bombay
instead. I will take the train with you from Kanpur and make sure you
are safe on the bus to Puttaparthi.”
Shanti smiled and said, “Thank you.” The children cheered with
glee. Kavita threw her arms around Dean's neck and hugged him tight
with happiness.
Dean spent the day fixing an old cart, which could be attached to the
ox. The young children and Shanti, who was looking far too weak to
walk, could ride in the cart. The others could walk. There was enough
food and water left for three days, and some would have to be given to
the ox. Dean had arrived at the farm just in time.
The train station at Kanpur was a hive of millions of hot sweaty
bodies jostling and pushing to grab a seat on the already overcrowded
trains. Dean had sold the ox and cart and bought more food and water now the family was huddled together waiting for him to buy the tickets.
“Keep your bag close to your chest Kavita, beware of thieves,” said
her mother, as the throng of people moved perilously close. Even though
Dean had light skin, he looked and thought like an Indian - he pushed
his way to the ticket counter and returned quickly - just in time, as two
rough looking men lurched towards the family with evil intent shining in
their dark eyes.
Seeing Dean approach and stand tall, protective of the family, they
turned and slunk in the opposite direction.
“We have fifteen minutes to wait for the next train,” Dean said, as he
smiled at the worried faces of the children, “and don't worry, we will all
have a seat.”
Kavita looked up at Dean, her shining eyes were filled with
gratefulness and love.
The four day journey to Bombay was slow and stifling, with the train
stopping everywhere to let people off and on. When the children were
awake, Dean would keep their spirits high with nursery rhymes and
stories he remembered from childhood. Silently, he wondered if they
would ever have made the journey without him.
33
Finally, they arrived at Bombay and Dean decided to book them all
into a good tourist hotel for one night. It would take most of the money
he had, but it would be worth it just to see their faces after a bath and a
sleep in a good bed.
The bus to Puttaparthi was half an hour late. Shanti and the children
sat on the ground with the rest of the waiting passengers. Dean grabbed
Kavita by the hand and said, “Let's go for a walk, I want to talk to you.”
This goodbye was hanging heavy in Kavita's heart - she truly felt she
would never see Dean again. As they walked along, Kavita's tear filled
eyes looked up at the young man she loved. “Dean, I love you so much,
I wish you could stay in India with us.”
Dean placed his hands on her tiny shoulders - she looked like a child
to him - he wished more than anything he could just bundle her up and
take her home with him - home to Australia and safety.
“Kavita, when your father asked you to take the family to
Puttaparthi, you knew you would honour his wish. Now, when you are
all safe at Puttaparthi, I want you to honour my wish.” Kavita opened
her mouth to speak, but Dean placed a finger on her lips. He continued:
“I want you to promise me that when you see Sai Baba, you will listen
carefully to his words - will you promise me that you will do exactly as
he tells you?”
Kavita was silent for a while - she thought about what Dean had said
and then smiled. “Of course I will obey the words of Sathya Sai Baba is that all you wish me to do?”
“That is all, my love,” replied Dean, relief now filling his mind.
The screeching of the brakes and the loud shouts from the passengers
signified the arrival of the bus. Dean kissed each child and hugged
Shanti, wishing them a safe journey. He turned to Kavita and kissed her
deeply, oblivious of the disapproving stares from the passengers and the
embarrassment on Shanti's face. He wanted to hold her forever,
consume her body - he had never believed he could love like this. As he
let her go, uncontrollable tears streamed down his cheeks - it was all in
the hands of God now.
***
Central Park was beautiful in the spring...filled with happy people
riding bicycles, walking dogs and strolling hand in hand. Paul Evans
34
was in a hurry - he hadn't slept all night, anticipating the meeting with
the Hare Krishnas. Now, as he heard their musical chanting, his steps
quickened.
They were underneath on oak tree, a small group of people were
standing around, clapping to the music. Two young men were handing
out fliers, another was sitting cross-legged on the grass, packing some
books into a box. Paul walked towards the man sitting on the grass.
He knelt down beside him - the Krishna devotee smiled. “Good
morning,” he said.
Paul didn't know where to start. He took a deep breath and held the
young man's eyes. “Dean McIntyre, the man who wrote THE BOOK where can I find him?”
The devotee noticed the urgency in the young man's voice - he could
sense his concern - his stress. He smiled softly and spoke calmly.
“Dean is like Krishna, he is within us all. Oh, he is not truly held as a
holy man, Dean is like you and I... in body he is just another backpacker travelling the world. His soul is from the ancient world beyond
us. He has great wisdom - but, he is just an ordinary guy.”
Paul looked puzzled, yet somehow he understood. The devotee
continued: “Dean is in India now, soon he will be on his way to
Australia - he will stay in Australia for a long time.”
Paul didn't know why, but, without hesitation, he suddenly gave the
devotee a tight hug.
As he walked quickly back through the park, his mind was thinking the summer semester started next week, and somehow he would take
Bethany and go to Australia.
35
CHAPTER FOUR
Controversy in high places – June 2012
TWELVE men were seated around an oval table. In front of them
were folders and glasses of water. Two were smoking and a few others
were engaged in soft conversation.
On a large wall behind them, hung a huge map of the world. Among
these men were the heads of the United States Air Force, US. Navy and
Army Intelligence, three scientists, the head of NASA and his adviser,
the Chief of National Security and the Controller of the CIA.
The door opened and the room became silent, as the men stood to
greet the President of the United States.
President Newman faced the men and spoke. “In front of you is a
folder marked operation SUTE… please sit and open the folder.”
On the first page was written : “SURVIVAL UNDER THE EARTH”
in bold print. The meeting began, as the President continued: “As you
are all aware, we have a world crisis on our hands. It has rapidly been
gaining momentum over the past eight years. We have tried every
possible means to slow down global warming - unfortunately we cannot
stop it - and very soon, we will not be able to live with it.”
President Newman turned to Professor Larson and called on him to
relate the latest findings. The professor cleared his throat and spoke
articulately - walking over to the map of the world, he pointed to the
North Pole.
“We have probes inserted at strategic points in both the North and
South Poles. These probes have been sending back data over the past
five years. The information we have is alarming. It has shown a
dramatic weakening of the ice flow and a temperature rise of three to
36
five degrees centigrade and it continues to accelerate at an alarming
rate.”
The Professor held the President's eyes steadfastly and continued:
“The ice shelf is cracking up and actual meltdown could occur within
the next two years. It will be a reverse of the Ice Age.”
There was surprise on some faces, a few men exchanged words and
the comment 'I expected this to happen' came from a few worried faces.
“That is not all,” the Professor continued, “the weight of the ice
balances out planet - if this ice melts too rapidly, the flows coming
down could throw the balance out. Gentlemen, it is possible this
catastrophe could result in a moving of the axis.” Professor Larson
looked hard at every man in the room, “and, there is no way we can
prevent this from happening.”
The room was silent as each man sat alone with his thoughts. The
Professor returned to his seat.
President Newman stood. “General McPherson, will you brief us on
the situation in North Korea at the moment?”
The General was a well-built man with thick wavy hair and horn
rimmed glasses on his craggy face. “As we all know, North Korea has
been increasing its armed forces over the years. My intelligence spies, I
should say, informers, have reported a dramatic increase in the storage
of nuclear missiles underground. I have in my possession detailed maps
and data showing missiles aimed strategically at all major cities, air
force bases, Naval installations, NASA headquarters...I could go on
forever - instead, I will show you.”
General McPherson dimmed the lights and turned on a switch near
the huge map of the world. Instantly, numerous small lights appeared in
certain sections of the United States.
“There are fifty areas in all - the new missiles have the capacity to
totally destroy an area of 200 square miles. Gentlemen, North Korea
has the capacity to blast the whole of the United States of America off
the face of the earth, and that is a fact!”
As the group started to talk loudly and hurl questions at the General,
he continued, pressing another switch.
“Now, you will see more red lights on all the major cities in Europe
and three in Australia - one is aimed at Pine Gap. Australia is no threat
to North Korea, so why they have missiles aimed there, is beyond my
understanding.”
37
The President stood amid the loud voices from the group. “Silence
please gentlemen. The threat from North Korea is very serious and
could be activated any day - we have the capacity to retaliate, but,
whoever pushes the button first, wins!”
The meeting was quiet now - then, an unusually deep pitched voice
drifted across the room like an echo.
“We were told many years ago that this would happen.” The NASA
Adviser stood...a tall thin man with almost albino looks, except his eyes
had the appearance of changing colours with his surroundings. His skin
was like translucent silk, devoid of lines. His thin white hair hung in
disarray around his somewhat oblong face.
Sien Palmer was 60 years old, yet he didn't look a day over thirty
something. “In my genes,” he would always say when quizzed about his
appearance.
He looked at every man around the table as he spoke. “If we had
taken notice forty years ago when The Visitors warned us, this could
have all been prevented.”
“You're wrong Sien, no one could have stopped nuclear power, that's
progress,” interrupted a voice from the table.
“Those empty eyed aliens have been a menace all along - this is our
bloody world, not theirs!” another voice, filled with anger shouted.
Sien sat quietly. He understood well that the weakness of mankind
was his ignorance and closed mind.
The massive worldwide UFO cover-up had gone way back to 1947 in
President Truman's time. The Roswell incident that happened on the
evening of July 2nd, 1947, when a bright disc shaped object, a flying
saucer, was seen over Roswell in New Mexico, had been cleverly
covered up. Even though pieces of evidence from various sources
suggested that a spacecraft containing alien bodies had been found, the
public at large accepted what the authorities told them...that it was just a
weather balloon.
In the past four decades, there had been at least 80,000 reports of
mysterious objects in the sky, and sightings of UFOs from hundreds of
countries all around the world, and there was still no formal
acknowledgment that they existed.
Neil Armstrong on Apollo 2 had recorded he saw two unidentified
spacecraft when he landed on the moon - the public never had
knowledge of this. As well, a Colonel on a Project Mercury flight
38
encountered a huge UFO over Australia and recorded voices - speaking
in languages belonging to no earth dialect.
President Carter's “Project Blue Book” revealed the truth to an
unsuspecting public, though mostly no one believed it, as there was no
positive proof the public could touch, only words.
Volumes of documented material, proof beyond a shadow of a doubt
had been kept secret or destroyed, in the huge conspiracy to keep the
truth from the people.
Once, an eminent astronomer Carl Sagan, estimated that our Milky
Way galaxy alone may contain 250 billion stars, about one million of
these, he believed, may have planets capable of supporting some form of
civilization. “Do you really think we are alone?” he had said.
The head of National Security stood. “The aliens have never really
posed a threat to us. If they had wanted to destroy earth, they have had
nearly 60 years to do so. They have never shown hostility toward us Oh, we know they have abducted people, but we have no proof those
people have been harmed. We do know there are still a lot of people
missing who have not been returned to earth,” he said.
Another voice interrupted.
“We have only made contact with two species of aliens - they were
friendly - who knows how many others are out there? Just like humans,
there could be good and evil. How do we know others haven't
infiltrated our race, they could be here now among us! The truth is, we
know very little of what or who is out there.”
The head of NASA spoke calmly, with a touch of emotion ringing in
his words. “The visitors have been watching us slowly destroy the
Planet Earth. Sien was right, forty years ago, the first message we
received was to control pollution, protect our forests and oceans. We
laughed at them then, because we believed everything would last
forever. Over the years, as the nuclear age progressed and industry
steamed along burning fossil fuels, pumping out nuclear waste and
poison gases, we truly had no idea of what we were doing, and more
importantly, we didn't give a damn!”
The man contemplated his next words. “If you can all remember,
two years ago, the last message from our visitors was ‘beware the
yellow race, their leaders have no respect or compassion for human life
- they will attempt to control your planet’.”
39
Every man in the room remembered the message vividly. Slowly,
the President stood and faced the group.
“Gentlemen, sometimes I think we should have informed the public.
The visitors came in peace. It was us that wanted to find evil intent in
them because of our fear of the unknown. We have had to keep the
public in the dark for fear of global panic. We assumed the risk to
mankind knowing the truth would be far greater than if he knew
nothing. The mass hysteria caused by Orson Welles with his “War of
the worlds” broadcast, would seem like a drop in the ocean if the truth
came out. That is what we assumed - that global panic would cause
more death than the risk of aliens harming us.”
Admiral Burnhart spoke.
“Mr. President Sir, how would you suddenly tell seven billion people
that they have to close down factories, stop industry, stop wars and go
and live on the land, live like Robinson Crusoe? The world would laugh
at you...to suggest that, would mean the world economy would be wiped
out - we would be destroyed.”
An angry voice yelled out amid the increasing murmur. “This is our
bloody world and we will do with it as we please - in fact, I like it just
fine!”
The President straightened his shoulders and glared at the man who
had made the comment. “If you would all be quiet and listen to me, I do
have a solution. If you would all open your folders to page four, silently
read my proposal - then, we will have a discussion on operation SUTE.”
In a condensed form, Survival Under the Earth, simply meant that in
various locations around the US there would be built underground
bunkers and perspex bubbles underwater. These constructions would be
capable of housing up to two hundred people along with various animals
and plant life.
They would have to be completely self sufficient, with generated
power capable of supplying oxygen. There would be food and supplies
to sustain life for two to three years. It was an ambitious project, with
many building difficulties to overcome. Still, it was a safeguard for
preserving the human race, should obliteration actually occur.
The first bubble was already being constructed and would be placed
in Lake Michigan - if it proved successful, the next one would be
located outside New York harbour.
40
The first bunker was planned for here, in Washington DC, and
another just outside Los Angeles. The project was top secret, with
stringent security measures in place.
The ten-page proposal outlined in every detail all precautions which
needed to be taken into account. On the final page was written: UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE YOU TO DISCUSS THIS OPERATION
OUTSIDE THIS ROOM - YOU CANNOT INFORM FAMILY,
INCLUDING YOUR WIFE, OR FRIENDS...AND YOU MUST NOT
SPEAK ON THE TELEPHONE ABOUT THIS MATTER BETWEEN
YOURSELVES.
The room was exceptionally quiet, with each man alone with his
thoughts. Then, General McPherson said to the President: “How will
you select the people who will live in these buildings, Sir?”
President Newman studied each man, then answered: “Of course,
ourselves and our families - then we will compile a detailed list of
young persons from all walks of life and race, who show the brains and
ability, the gifted and the brave - the ones who could survive and
replenish a new world.”
There was a murmur among the men, then a loud voice called out:
“You are saying that we play God and select who will live or die?”
The President took a deep breath and replied: “No, I would never
want to play God - I just don't know what else to do.”
The head of NASA spoke: “Our program to eventually colonize the
moon and mars has begun, we have the stations there now, and, within
five years, the first group of humans will be living in 'Moon City'.” His
adviser tapped on his shoulder and whispered, “We do not have five
years, we may only have one.”
The President spoke: “Look gentlemen, the moon project is future,
we must do something right now - the future for mankind and our planet
is so vulnerable, I find it difficult to believe that this is all happening.
The truth is we have no choices - if the global warming doesn't destroy
us, then North Korea will. Time is running out, and we cannot warn the
public as panic would kill all of us tomorrow. Our people would expect
a solution - a way out - there is none. We have to save ourselves and
whomever we can under total secrecy. I suppose, in that way, we will
all be playing God.”
President Newman cleared his throat - he felt heavy emotion running
through his body - he wanted to sit down and cry his eyes out!
41
“Gentlemen, I must leave, I have a function to attend this afternoon,
we will meet here again on Tuesday at 10 am.”
The door closed, and the President was gone.
A few moments after President Newman had left, the Controller of
the CIA threw a small white book into the middle of the table.
“Has anyone read THE BOOK yet? What this Dean McIntyre has
written is what will cause world panic.”
A voice broke in. “I've read it and he's nothing but a new age guru.
A very small minority of people believe in the crap he writes, religious
fanatics! Spiritual half wits and Hare Krishnas - those people listening
to him don't panic, they believe in reincarnation anyway.”
Professor Larsen spoke: “I haven't read THE BOOK yet, I would like
to do so, then give my comments.”
Two other men in the room also hadn't read THE BOOK.
It was agreed they should have a private meeting, without The
President, in two days time from now, to discuss THE BOOK at length.
The Head of National Security spoke to the CIA man as they
prepared to leave. “I believe Dean McIntyre is a threat to our security, a
loose cannon among the people. He should be made to refute what he
has written, to say it was all just his vivid imagination, that he got
carried away and made a mistake.”
The CIA man smiled and tapped his friend on the shoulder. “We
have had Mr. McIntyre under surveillance for some time,” the man
glanced at his watch, “right now, he is on Qantas flight 684 from
Bombay to Australia - he will be landing at Brisbane International
Airport at approximately 1600 hours.”
42
CHAPTER FIVE
Australia – the visitors
Helen shut the car door for her mother and lifted Yianni so he could
kiss his Nanna goodbye. Leeanne leaned her cheek towards her
grandson and treasured the soft wet kiss that was placed on her cheek.
“Now you be a good boy for your mummy while we are gone
Yianni,” Leeanne said, smiling at Yianni's cheeky little face.
Gordon leaned towards the boy and said, “When we come back this
afternoon your Uncle Dean will be with us and I'm sure he will have a
gift for you.” Yianni jumped out of Helen's arms and ran around the
side of the car to Gordon's window. “Grandpa! Grandpa! do you think
he has bought me a toy elephant?” Gordon smiled. “You'll just have to
wait and see, I'm sure it will be a big surprise.”
Gordon started the engine and glanced sideways at Leeanne - he
noticed small tears forming in the corner of her eyes, as she held his
look with love. Their thoughts drifted together, it was hard to believe
that in a little over two hours from now, they would finally be with
Dean - after being apart for many years.
As they drove down the range from the garden city of Toowoomba,
now in full bloom, Leeanne gazed through the window at the
magnificent unspoiled country before her. The Lockyer Valley had had
a good rainfall this year, everything was crisp and green.
Leeanne remembered it was just like this when she and Gordon first
lived in the old Queensland home years ago. Her memories drifted
along with the passing scenery, as she prayed that this area would be
spared from disaster when the apocalypse came. Gordon's eyes were
also surveying the beautiful countryside, although his thoughts were
43
elsewhere. He could imagine the horrific scenes of death and starvation
that India was suffering right now. He thought of the pain and despair
Dean must have felt, travelling through the drought and famine shell of
a country he had grown to love.
Dean - Ilias...Gordon held onto the names his mind painted... their
image and the ancient eyes of Ilias looked into him and said, “Protect
Dean, there are those who would see him fall.”
Gordon pondered the words, then the familiar squeezing of Leeanne's
hand on his knee and a soft kiss on the side of his cheek brought him
back to reality.
“Thinking of Dean, darling?” she whispered. “Yes, I've just been
wondering what he has been through the past years,” Gordon replied.
They drove in silence until they finally reached the Gateway Bridge
and the heavy traffic pouring into the City. The airport was only fifteen
minutes away. The adrenaline rush of excitement was now running
through their bodies - Leeanne's heart was thumping, she could hardly
wait to hold her son again.
“Qantas flight 684 from Bombay has just landed,” called the voice
over the loudspeakers. “Hurry Gordon!” said Leeanne, as they stepped
onto the escalator with a crowd of people. Gordon didn't rush, he had a
feeling Dean would be last off the plane - they had plenty of time.
Leeanne stood nervously watching every face that appeared from
behind the customs exit, pushing trolleys of baggage. After twenty
minutes and no Dean, she looked worriedly at Gordon's calm face.
“He's not on the plane Gordon! Something has happened, where is he?”
she cried.
“Stop flapping around like a mother hen, he will be here soon,”
Gordon answered. He walked over to the water fountain and poured
two paper cups full - suddenly, he had the feeling that someone was
watching him. Turning around, his eyes held the face of a man dressed
in a grey suit reading a paper - their eyes met - the stranger looked down
and continued reading his paper. Gordon's psychic mind opened wide
and he thought, “ So! Someone else is waiting for Dean too.”
As he gave the water to Leeanne, he could sense the stranger now
using his mobile phone. “Don't look quickly darling, just glance to your
left and tell me if the man in a grey suit near the magazine stand is
talking on a mobile phone,” Gordon said casually.
“Yes, he is, why do you ask?”
44
“Oh, no reason, just testing out my psychic abilities,” he answered,
smiling cheekily at her.
Gordon noticed him first and tapped Leeanne on the shoulder.
“There's our boy....he's home!” Gordon stood back and let Leeanne run
to greet Dean. The young man had no luggage, he was just carrying a
small backpack and a plastic bag. His thin frame was draped in torn
blue jeans and a crushed khaki shirt - around his neck he wore a long
orange scarf, his face looked tired and drawn.
Leeanne flung her arms around his neck and hugged her son tightly.
“Thank God you're home son, thank God you're home!” she cried
through uncontrollable tears of happiness.
Dean almost lifted his mother off her feet and kissed her adoringly.
Suddenly, through the crowd, a group of young people ran towards
Dean. “He's here! He's here!”
Gordon heard the voices as they pushed past him. Standing in front
of Dean, with eyes wide with excitement and collectively catching their
breath, one of them spoke. “We thought we may have missed you, our
bus was late! Thank God you're here, we need you so much!”
“My name's Tina, please can we talk with you Dean?” Then, they
were all speaking at once. Leeanne looked startled and held tight to
Dean. Gordon walked over, oblivious of the noisy crowd and embraced
the young man he loved beyond words. Their eyes met and Gordon held
on tight to the soul of Ilias, tears were forming in both their eyes.
Gordon spoke. “Leeanne and I will bring the car around to the front
entrance, you go and speak to these young people. We have plenty of
time to talk on the way home.”
Gordon grabbed Leeanne by the arm and propelled her towards the
escalators. As they glanced sideways, they both noticed that the man in
the grey suit was gone.
Gordon stopped the car and wandered around to open the trunk - then
realised that Dean had no luggage. He waited and watched as Dean
emerged through the doors, his arms around the shoulders of a girl and a
boy who were probably only three or four years younger than him somehow, Dean looked more like their father.
Leeanne watched in wonder as Dean knelt down to the level of a
young boy about 14 years old, whose height would barely be just over
five feet. He held him by the shoulders and spoke to him - then hugged
45
him. Dean handed the girl called Tina, a slip of paper and kissed her
forehead, then waved goodbye.
As they sat in the car, Leeanne said, “So, what was that all about,
Dean?” Gordon started the engine, anticipating his reply. “They call
themselves 'Children of the Light' - their group consists of about forty or
so young people from all walks of life who are seeking a better
understanding of life - they are totally disillusioned with the world and
mankind at large,” said Dean. He continued: “Their basic beliefs are
similar to Krishnas, though not as strict. They live and work as do any
other young people, just like a normal part of society. They realise they
cannot change the world or their fellow man and that the change must
be within the heart of each individual person.”
“Sounds like your thoughts Dean,” Gordon interrupted.
Dean smiled and said, “They are the children of the new
millennium.”
“Where do they live?” asked Leeanne.
“All over the place, some in Northern New South Wales, some in
Brisbane and the Gold Coast - some live at home with their parents,
others are sharing apartments. They don't believe in communes or
living a separate life outside of mainstream society. I suppose you
could say they are a spiritual group who get together a few times each
week, to meditate and get in touch with their inner selves, to surround
themselves with the light of truth and love.”
Leeanne turned around to her son and held his hand, saying, “So they
have no leader?” Dean held his mother's eyes and sighed softly, “Well,
they kind of asked me to be their leader...I gave them the address and
phone number of the Healing Farm and told Tina to call me next week
when we will get together and talk some more.”
Changing the subject, Leeanne said; “Helen is cooking some
delicious Greek food tonight for you, Dean. Memories of Santorini mousaka, saganaki and Greek salad and a bottle of Kouros red.” Dean's
stomach started to churn, just thinking of the food. He realised he
couldn't remember the last time he had eaten a decent meal.
“We have to fatten you up darling,” Leeanne laughed, so happy to
have Dean with them again.
After a long silence, Gordon said, “I've found three properties at
Springbrook that are worth inspecting. We can drive down whenever
you like, Dean.”
46
“Soon as possible Gordon, I will know the right place when I see it.
We must start work straight away, Ilias will guide me...the time is
getting closer....time is not on our side!”
By the time they started their ascent up the range, Dean had spoke at
length about his stay at the monastery with Nikolas and his intense
learning period covering the knowledge from Atlantis. He spoke of his
friendship with Sai Baba and the journey through India, his love for
Kavita and his belief that her family would be safe and that Kavita
would come to Australia soon.
Leeanne squeezed Gordon on the knee and spoke sadly. “I know
how you must feel son, it's empty when the one you love is so far away,
soul mates should be together.”
Dean cleared his throat and spoke emotionally. “It's going to be
tough I know, but Sai Baba will be helping me with this.”
The Healing with Harmony Health Farm was in front of them, and
Gordon stopped the car. It was almost seven o'clock.
“Yianni has been so excited to see you Dean, he is a wonderful little
boy,” said Gordon.
“He looks a lot like his father,” Leeanne spoke sadly. “We are going
to be good buddies, Yianni and I,” Dean said, as they drove up towards
the homestead.
Helen heard the car doors slam - Yianni dropped the toys he was
playing with...they had arrived.
Dean walked through the door and swept little Yianni up into his
arms, covering the boy with kisses. Helen was crying with joy as she
embraced the brother she loved. “Uncle Dean! Uncle Dean! Did you
bring me a toy?” yelled Yianni.
“Be patient darling, your Uncle has just walked in the door,” Helen
said, holding her brother's eyes with pride and a strong bond she had
never felt before.
Dean placed Yianni down and held his sister. “Your son is a miracle
of love, he was born within the light.”
Helen couldn't control her tears, as she held her young brother,
memories flooded her mind of Santorini and her Yianni.
Gordon broke the emotional moment. “Let's all have an ouzo and
water - I bet that's something Dean hasn't had for many years.”
As Gordon poured the drinks, Dean opened his bag and knelt down
to Yianni. “This is for you buddy!”
47
Yianni took the small plastic bag and excitedly opened it. “It's an
elephant! I knew you would bring me an elephant, Uncle Dean!”
Dean smiled, and said, “There's something else at the bottom of the
bag.”
Yianni grabbed a small box - inside was a leather neck band on
which dangled a crystal peacock. The boy studied it closely. “What is
this, Uncle Dean?” he said.
“This is a bird called a peacock - in India, the peacock is a spiritual
emblem, you can wear it round your neck or hang it in your room.”
Yianni placed the neck band around his neck and kissed his Uncle,
saying, “thank you! thank you!”
Over dinner that night, the family caught up on the lost years and
they laughed and joked about memories of the Down Under Bar and
Dundee, the stuffed crocodile, of Dean and his Swedish girl friends.
Then, out of the blue, little Yianni said, “My Daddy drowned on
Santorini - Mummy said the water was very deep and dangerous.”
The laughter stopped and each person was alone with their memories
of that horrific night. Gordon lifted the boy onto his lap and spoke
gently to him. “Your Daddy was a very brave man Yianni - he knew the
water was deep, but he was an adventurer and he was never afraid.”
Yianni's sad brown eyes looked up to Gordon. “But Mummy doesn't
have any photos of him, I don't know how brave he looked.”
Gordon smiled. “Look in the mirror Yianni - your Daddy looked just
like you.”
Helen left the table, tears were starting to roll down her cheeks,
unable to hold her emotions back. Leeanne held a hand out to Yianni.
“It's time for bed darling, let's go and brush your teeth, now say good
night to Uncle Dean.”
When Leeanne and Yianni left the room, Dean held Gordon's eyes
and said, “You'll never believe who I saw in Los Angeles two years ago,
with a Hare Krishna group.”
Gordon thought, then said, “I've no idea!”
Dean drew in a breath and the words came out slowly. “Anna
Rogopolis.” Gordon's eyes were wide in surprise. “What?!” he yelled.
“I only met the group briefly, they were living on a small farm just
outside LA - the moment I saw her, I had the strangest feeling....I mean,
I had never met her or Yianni, but I had an eerie sensation of a
connection,” said Dean.
48
“What was she like? How did you know it was her?” Gordon broke
in.
“She was gentle, beautiful and very spiritual - when she held out her
hand to greet me and said her name was Anna, when I touched her hand,
I knew she was Yianni's sister. She was very in tune with my thoughts
and her misty hazel eyes smiled as she said, 'you're Helena's brother,
aren't you?’ ” Dean said.
“How did she know about Helena?” asked Gordon. “Apparently after
Yianni died, Anna found his diary and a postcard from Helena. Yianni
had written that he had met someone special on Santorini - 'when she
walked towards me, she looked like an ancient Goddess...when she
swam towards me, she looked like a mermaid - God help me, she's
inside my soul - I'm falling in love', ” Dean replied.
Gordon released a deep sigh and said, “Phew! can you believe it
Dean - out of that evil Rogopolis family, the youngest daughter has
joined the Krishnas.”
“She had been with the group for years, so I would say she would
have left home shortly after her father and brother died,” said Dean,
taking a long mouthful of red wine.
“That's all in the past. It's the future that's of the greatest concern
right now. Darren and Barbara will be back from holidays at the end of
the week, we'll go to Springbrook then,” said Gordon, wanting to
change the subject.
Dean looked at Gordon and he spoke forcefully, “No, you and I will
go to Springbrook tomorrow, every day counts!”
Gordon and Dean packed the sleeping bags and camping gear into
the back of the four-wheel drive. Yianni was crying and stamping his
feet - he couldn't understand why he wasn't allowed to go to
Springbrook with his Uncle Dean. Helen tried to comfort her son.
“Grandpa and Uncle Dean will only be gone for a few days darling, they
won't be long.”
Dean walked over and picked Yianni up, saying: “Now, you stop
crying, you're the man of the house while we are gone, you must be
brave and strong like your Daddy was.” As soon as Yianni heard those
words, the tears stopped. Dean continued, “And next time we go to
Springbrook, I promise you can come with me.”
It was eleven o'clock by the time Gordon stopped the four-wheel
drive outside Barkley's Real Estate at Springbrook. “Barkleys have two
49
of the properties, and the other one is owned by a couple who have a
small coffee shop down the road, they are selling privately,” Gordon
said, as he slammed the truck door.
“Are they all close by?” asked Dean.
“Only one, the others are about five to six kilometres away.”
The first property was ten acres, about two kilometres from town.
On three acres of cleared land, stood an old farmhouse with adjoining
barn and two over grown paddocks. Dean only spent ten minutes
looking around the place to know it was not suitable. The location was
wrong.
The next property was mainly heavily wooded rain forest with about
150 acres of unusable land. As they drove through the pot holed rough
road towards the first gate, Dean said, “Is there any cleared land on this
property, Gordon?”
“Well, I don't know, the Real Estate guy told me there was about 15
acres of cleared land, a small valley on the Western section. When I
was here, I never found it, the vegetation is too dense,”
“Hmmm, “ Dean murmured under his breath. “This could be the
place,” he thought.
Suddenly, they came to a large stream. Gordon stopped the truck. “I
don't remember this being here before,” he said, as they walked towards
the water.
“They've had a fair amount of rain up here the past month, maybe it
was dry last time?” Dean queried.
Gordon looked around at the area and peered into the deep water
running past. “No Dean, I never came this way before, we must have
taken a wrong turn somewhere.”
They realized that the water was far too deep to drive through. Dean
washed his face in the cool water and drank deeply from the sweet,
fresh liquid. His psychic mind opened as he swallowed the water. He
could see a bridge across the stream - he was walking across it with a
large number of people and over the other side, was a New World.
“Let's go back and see where I took a wrong turn,” said Gordon, as
he slapped Dean on the shoulder.
“Let's just go and look at that other property - get it out of the
way...then, we'll come back to this spot, cross the stream and see what is
over that ridge, Gordon.”
50
The next property was 20 acres of beautiful rolling hills, mostly
cleared land, with a small neat red brick house that was picture perfect.
“Isn't it beautiful Dean?” said Gordon, as they drove up to the front gate.
“The young couple at the coffee shop own it, they have a house in town
and sometimes spend some time out here...they want $250,000 for it, but
will talk about a lease situation.”
Dean stretched his legs and walked around the house - it certainly
was a nice looking property.
“So? What do you think?” Gordon finally said.
“I'm starving - let's hoe into that cold chicken and salad that Mum
made for us, and a cup of coffee,” was the reply.
After feasting on the food packed by Leeanne into the esky earlier
that day, Dean turned to Gordon. “It's 3.30, let's get back to that stream,
we may have to swim across and I want to find that cleared area before
nightfall,” he said.
Upon arrival back at the stream, it was decided to park the truck in
amongst the trees, away from curious eyes. Gordon would swim across
with a long rope, tie it to a tree, and then on a makeshift pulley, they
would pull their sleeping bags, a bag with food, drinks, torches, an axe
and a long bladed knife above the stream.
The whole operation took less than thirty minutes - they had to hurry,
as there was only about an hour of daylight left.
Over the ridge was nothing more than dense country for as far as
one could see. There was no track to follow, just a line of tall trees
heading Westward towards another rocky ridge.
Psychically, Gordon couldn’t see anything - just a haze of heavy
undergrowth. Dean led the way beside the line of trees - the fading rays
of sunlight danced on the thick, heavy growth and the chirping of the
birds.
“Where in hell were they going?” Gordon thought.
As the sun faded, the bush became more dense...Dean chopped away
branches with the knife and Gordon wielded the axe. Darkness was
falling quickly. Gordon handed Dean a torch, and warned him to
beware of snakes. Inside themselves, both men felt a cold fear starting
to run through their veins - what on earth were they doing trekking
through this jungle at night?
They had been walking for almost two hours by the time they finally
reached a clearing and the high rocky ridge. Dean climbed up the rocks,
51
almost dropping his torch...Gordon waited and watched with excited
anticipation. Dean shone the bright torch light around in a semi-circle,
then yelled, “Gordon! It's here - the clearing, as far as I can see, it's all
cleared land like a giant football field.”
Gordon hurried up the rocks to join Dean. His body was tired and
aching, but he found an unexpected adrenaline rush as he pushed
himself over a huge boulder.
They silently walked down the other side and onto the flat ground.
Each man wondered just what this place was like during the day. Right
now, the sky was as black as ink with occasional shapes of clouds
moving along in the cool breeze. The ground beneath their feet was flat
and barren, with the occasional clump of wild grass peeping through there were no trees in sight. After walking a few hundred yards more,
they felt grass beneath their feet - it was about a foot high. Dean
stopped and squatted down, shining the torch directly on the grass. He
picked some.
“Gordon, this is fresh and green.” Gordon shone his torch in a circle,
it looked like acres and acres of grass, maybe a paddock of some sort.
Good country for horses and cattle, but it looked empty and silent...so
silent...not even the occasional cry of a bird.
“The stillness is very eerie here Dean, don't you think?”
Dean didn't answer. He thought the place was wonderful, his
psychic mind was telling him. “This is it - you've found The Haven.”
Dean stopped walking and turned to face Gordon. “Let's camp here, it
will be nice and soft on this grass - and safe, there are no snakes in this
area.”
Gordon spread out his sleeping bag and sat down. He was exhausted
and sleep would come easy to him. “It's a shame we can't make a
fire...doesn't look like there's any wood about,” said Gordon.
“You're right, there's nothing here but grass,” said Dean.
After eating two tins of baked beans and bread and cheese washed
down with fruit juice, the two men lay back looking at the dark, empty
sky. Gordon broke the silence. “This is the place, isn't it Dean?”
“Yes, this is The Haven - I knew it from the minute I drank from that
stream, there was something about that water,” replied Dean, feeling
safe and contented at last.
“The real estate people said that the guy that owns this property lives
in Townsville, he doesn't really want to sell, he would rather just lease it
52
for five to ten years. He said he would take about $20,000, as it's mostly
unusable land with no buildings.” Gordon cleared his throat, then
continued: “Actually Dean, it's a terrible property. Except for this
cleared area, it's absolutely useless. Only worth about $10,000, I would
say.”
Dean looked at Gordon through the darkness and said: “You know
the money and the lease will never matter.”
At that moment, Gordon realized the gravity of what they would be
doing here. It hit him square in the gut - that this was going to be the
start of the future, whatever future there would be - for anyone.
Silently, they both floated off to sleep, as a gentle breeze skipped
over their tired faces. It must have been well past midnight, when Dean
was suddenly wakened by an unusual humming noise. As he sat
upright, a huge circular light shone over the clearing - the light was so
bright, Gordon jumped up screaming: “What the hell is going on!!”
Both men were now standing with mouths agape in silent shock. In
front of them, hovering about 500 metres above the ground, was a dark
circular object some 100 metres in diameter, emitting a strong silver
light over the ground.
All around was still and silent, except for the strange humming and
the rustling of the grass, as the object came closer to the ground.
“Oh shit Dean, tell me we're dreaming - that this is not fucking
real!!” yelled Gordon, with cold fear consuming his body.
Dean placed an arm around his stepfather. “We are not dreaming,
this is real. Don't panic, I feel no sense of danger,” he said calmly.
The huge object, which seemed to have no doors or windows, slowly
descended to the ground, about 200 metres in front of them.
The bright silver light dimmed as eight landing pads fell down and
touched the earth. Small lights started to glow from what now appeared
to be windows around the craft. The humming stopped and all was
silent.
Gordon and Dean stood still and watched for what seemed to be an
eternity, before a sliding door finally opened. Gordon took a few steps
back...his pulse was racing wildly as he felt a cold sweat trickling down
his back.
“Dean, I'm getting out of here - we have no bloody idea of who or
what is going to come out of that door!”
53
“If it makes you feel better, walk back a little way and sit on the
ground, don't run.”
Gordon gasped in surprise. “So, what in hell are you going to do? Go
out and meet them??”
Dean answered matter-of-factly. “Yes.”
Slowly, Dean walked towards the craft. His pulse was normal, there
was no fear or uncertainty in his body or mind. As he approached the
strange dark silver object, his psychic mind felt more alive that it had
ever felt before - the eyes of Ilias were shining happily in his soul.
Suddenly, a staircase dropped from the door to the ground. Dean
kept walking. He was now only metres from the stairs. He looked up
and two figures appeared at the entrance.
Gordon gasped in shock as he watched the two figures - one very
short and the other about six feet tall, slowly walk down the stairs
towards Dean.
“Oh God! I hope that boy knows what he's doing,” Gordon
whispered under his breath.
“He does!” The voice of Ilias rang in Gordon's ears, as fine silver and
purple aura rays emitted around Dean's body. The figures stopped and
looked at each other. Dean stood still. The smaller of the figures
pointed a long thin finger towards Dean. Suddenly, a fine silver light
from Dean's aura seemed to run towards the pointed finger. Within a
split second, there was contact, as Dean's body jumped a little, at the
same time as the small figure.
“Oh Jeez, what's happening!” cried Gordon out loud. The figures
walked quickly towards Dean and stood only a few feet away from him.
Gordon watched stunned with disbelief as Dean knelt down to the
size of the small figure and placed his hands on its shoulders - the figure
did the same to Dean.
Suddenly, out of the dark silence of the night, a wonderful music like
harps and flutes started to caress the still air...music like Gordon had
never heard before or could ever imagine, rang out like soft silk through
the dream-like state in which he now found his mind.
Dean turned around and yelled out loud to Gordon. “Come on over,
we are going on board, there's no worries!”
As Gordon walked towards the strange craft, he felt his fear and
anxiety fade, even though in his mind, he just couldn't believe what he
54
was doing. Facing the figures now, Gordon knew they were aliens from
another world.
He looked at the short one, who was about four feet tall with skin
like transparent cream silk. His huge head held a set of enormous dark,
empty eyes. Gordon held those eyes and slowly, tiny silver specks
danced within the dark pools. There were two holes where a nose
should be and a fine thin mouth with no lips. His head had no ears.
Gordon noticed there were no genitals on the naked figure. He
thought to himself: “Are you a creature or a being?” Instantly, a thought
pierced his consciousness. “I am a being like you.”
Dean spoke. “Gordon, this is Dou Setta and his companion Nubon they communicate through telepathy.” Gordon gave Dean a look of
disbelief. “Just concentrate, I know you can do it.”
Silently, the four walked up the stairs towards the opening. The
music had now faded. Gordon noticed Dean holding Dou Setta's hand,
just like a child. Glancing sideways, Gordon studied Nubon. He was a
different species, tall and thin with small eyes and a flat nose, thin
mouth, and ears that stuck out and looked like ice cream cones. Nubon's
skin colour was dark grey - he wore a tight pair of black pants, which
revealed that he did have genitals.
Inside the craft, there were a dozen or so beings just like Dou Setta,
sitting at control panels. The technology was straight out of Star Wars.
Dou Setta led the way, every now and again looking up to Dean, as a
child would do to a father.
Gordon had to stop himself laughing. “This is absolutely crazy,” he
thought.
Telepathically, he heard Nubon say to him: “There's nothing crazy
here - only you humans are crazy!”
Gordon couldn't help himself. He looked at Nubon and laughed out
loud. “You're right Nubon, you're damned well right!”
Soon, they came to a panel of lights on the wall. Dou Setta's long
hand slid up and pressed three colour co-ordinates, a side opening drew
back, and they entered a large room, which contained a circular table
and ten chairs. Four others, slightly taller than Dou Setta, joined them.
Two wore long, pale orange robes.
Silently, they all sat. Gordon shifted uncomfortably on the chair, he
found it slightly too snug for his liking. “Well, I suppose I am in the
domain of the little people,” he thought.
55
“Some of you humans are just too big!” was Nubon's instant
sarcastic reply.
Gordon glanced sideways at Nubon, who was looking intently at
Dean. “This telepathy is going to drive me crazy,” he spoke out loud to
Dean.
Dean smiled and said: “You and Mum use it all the time, this is just
on a more advanced level - relax Gordon, will you?”
The two with the orange robes stood and bowed their heads, then
touched the centre of the foreheads. When they sat, they joined hands
with each other and the being beside them, until the circle was
complete. The two spare chairs had been taken away. The meditation
began.
The strength of Ilias was flowing through each mind, as they all
drifted beyond the alpha state into an area of total space. Slowly,
images and sounds formed a picture, the same exact picture for each
being.
A spacecraft was landing on the continent of Atlantis - this was the
visitors' first contact with the planet Earth. Gordon was looking at an
Atlantis that must have been a few hundred years before Zaiot was born
- there was no school, and his village was only a few houses. The great
Pyramid of Understanding was not there. Suddenly he saw it all
happening...the aliens were helping the Atlanteans build the pyramid.
When it was complete, many people sat around a huge table and joined
hands, just like they were doing now.
Knowledge was being given from the aliens to the Atlanteans. When
this was complete, the visitors left Earth. The Atlanteans kept the
knowledge and the gift of telepathy that had been bestowed upon them,
but somehow the memory of the visitors was erased from their psychic
minds. Until today, when it all came back through the soul of Ilias.
Then, a soft female voice was speaking from somewhere beyond the
stars. “We have visited your planet Earth many times, to watch how
mankind progresses. The knowledge that we gave you was to help and
preserve your race for all eternity. Then, the evil in mankind took over
and all was destroyed. The people of Earth have never stopped since
then.
“Our messages to care and protect your species and your planet have
fallen on deaf ears. The people you call your leaders are the ones that
have let you down, they have kept so much of the truth from you. The
56
person that you call Dean is the first human, since the Atlanteans, that
we have made contact with on our level. He must be protected. Dean is
all that mankind has to save itself.”
Slowly, the voice faded and the circle of friends drifted out of the
meditation. Dou Setta looked at Gordon and his thoughts of “you have
many questions to ask, go ahead,” transferred to Gordon.
Gordon wanted to know where they came from. How many lived on
their planet, were there other species out there? What was the future for
mankind?
Dou Setta blinked his huge black eyes and responded. “So many
questions Gordon! We come from a planet called Estibulos in a galaxy
just 55 light years from Earth. Our planet is small, half the size of
Earth, with a similar atmosphere, though far more pure. We have no
pollution, we live with crystal power like the Atlanteans. Our
population is only five million and in our solar system, there are seven
other planets with life forms.”
Dou Setta continued: “Two are similar to us and they are peaceful
beings who live within the light of Harmoni. Harmoni is our spiritual
leader. On the other planets, are beings and creatures who have much
evil among them, and are constantly warring with each other.”
There was a hesitation in Dou Setta's thoughts. Gordon picked up
that something was troubling him. Slowly, Dou Setta continued: “Some
of these evil beings have visited Earth a few times in the past - I have no
knowledge of what has happened, but I do know they are not to be
trusted.”
Gordon's thought jumped at Dou Setta. “What do they look like?”
“They are dark creatures with a thin human form, their skin is cold
like a reptile. Their yellow eyes are small and wide apart, they have a
large mouth with sharp teeth. Like us, they have no body hairs, but they
have no telepathic powers and they have no souls.”
Dou Setta continued: “Gordon, many of you on Earth are so similar
to us in mind and heart, you have many wonderful spiritual people
among you. But, you humans have no idea how many other species or
creatures are beyond your galaxy - there are many life forms out there.”
Gordon shivered inside at the thought.
“Now, your last question - Dean has written the answer in THE
BOOK - have you not read it, Gordon?”
Suddenly, Gordon felt stupid. He did know the answers.
57
A side door opened and a being similar to Nubon appeared with a
large silver tray containing a jug, eight goblets and a loaf of bread,
which he placed in the middle of the table. The two in the orange robes
stood and poured the red liquid which looked like wine, into the goblets,
and broke the bread, passing it to each being, and finally, to Dean and
Gordon.
Then, one of them spoke in a human tongue, to the surprise of Dean
and Gordon. “Come and share this bread and wine with us in
friendship.”
Gordon said to the being: “So, you can speak out loud like us.”
“Only on special occasions,” was the reply.
Dean spoke out loud. “The sharing of the bread and wine is very
symbolic amongst us Christians.”
Dou Setta now spoke. “We know, you see, some of our people once
met a Great Prophet who lived on Earth, a holy man who spoke the
knowledge of truth, love and faith to his fellow man. For this, he was
crucified, by his fellow man.”
Silence hung over the table. Dean looked at Gordon, small tears
were rolling down both their cheeks, their hearts were heavy with
emotion.
The first rays of dawn were glowing through the clouds as Gordon
and Dean approached the open door of the spacecraft. Dean knelt down
to Dou Setta and took the crystal from around his neck and placed it
around the small alien's neck.
“I have another crystal identical to this at home. I will wear it
always. You will know exactly where I am and hopefully, what I am
thinking.”
Dean placed his hands on Dou Setta's shoulders and bid him
farewell. Gordon rummaged through his pockets and found a small
heart shaped rose quartz that Leeanne had given him years ago. He
handed it to Nubon. The tall alien gazed at it in his palm and thought:
“This is very special and beautiful like your lady. Thank you, goodbye
my friend. We will return.”
58
CHAPTER SIX
London - July
Professor Michael Haywood pushed the books away that were in
front of him. He leaned back in the swivel chair and slowly stretched his
arms above his sore shoulders. Taking off his bi-focal glasses, he
rubbed a pair of tired eyes and yawned deeply.
A soft knock on the door...it opened, and Esme walked in. “Mr.
Haywood, you must go to bed now, come on..it's past midnight. I've
made you a nice cup of hot cocoa, it's beside your bed. Now please,
come on, off to sleep with you.”
Professor Haywood gave a grumbling reply. “All right Esme, thank
you.”
The housemaid muttered something under her breath as she shuffled
out the door.
Through most of the night, Michael couldn't sleep. He tossed and
turned, dozed for a half hour, then his mind was alive again. He was
seventy years of age, he should be able to sleep like a baby, he thought,
but his mind kept visualising a long erratic orbit, with one extremity
passing extremely close to the sun. The gravity from a nearby star was
influencing the Earth companion system. He could visualise it near the
companion dragging more intensly on it than on the sun, distorting the
system.
He sat up and glanced at the clock beside his bed. It said 4.15 am.
He walked over to his dressing table and opened an envelope, inside
was a letter from a young physics student from New York called Paul
Evans. He read the letter again and decided he would write back to Paul
tomorrow.
59
As Michael slipped back into bed, he closed his eyes and thought of
Dean McIntyre and THE BOOK. Relaxed now, finally drifting off to
sleep, he knew that in a few days time, he would publish his theory that
asteroids or comets would hit Earth and cause a shifting of the axis
some time during the year 2014, not 2100 as he had first calculated
thirty five years previously.
Michael Haywood's only son Nathan had first met Dean back in the
summer months, at a disco in Stockholm. Dean had taken a two week
break from his job at the Embargo Bar on Santorini and had flown to
Sweden to visit two girls, Britt and Ulla, who lived in Stockholm.
Nathan was twenty-eight at the time, a young intern working his last
year at a large hospital just outside Stockholm. At this time, he was
taking a few weeks summer break. Both young men had some mutual
friends and spent many days and nights enjoying the wild party life of
Stockholm in the summer.
Who would have guessed that years later, he would meet a very
different Dean McIntyre in London. As Nathan drove to his father's
house this day, he remembered the chance meeting.
He had just collected a package of books for his father, they were
rather heavy and as he left the bookshop, it started raining.
Trying to open his umbrella, he dropped the box and all the books
went scuttling over the wet pavement. Suddenly, a stranger bent down to
help him pick them up. As his eyes met the stranger's, he gasped in
surprise. “I know you...you look different, but aren't you Dean from
Santorini?”
“Nathan Haywood!” Dean said, as he embraced him in the now
pouring rain. “Let's have a coffee, catch up on what you've been up to.”
From that moment on, Dean had become an important part of their
lives. When he showed Nathan THE BOOK he had just published,
instead of the usual ridicule Dean had expected, Nathan had simply said,
“I think you should meet my father, he is an astrophysicist.”
From the first meeting with Professor Haywood, Dean knew at last
he had scientific evidence to back up his predictions.
Esme fussed around the dining table, re-arranging the flowers and
dusting the chairs. It was a welcome surprise to have young Nathan call
in for Sunday lunch, though she was disappointed that Yvonne, his
fiancée', was unable to attend.
60
Life at Professor Haywood's country cottage had become
increasingly quiet with only the odd friends dropping by now and again.
Since the death of the Professor's wife Jane eight years previously, the
usual laughter and parties had slowly died. The boredom of old age had
a good foothold on Esme and the Professor.
The doorbell rang. Excitedly, Esme shuffled towards the door.
“Today will not be boring,” she thought, as she opened it and smiled
widely at Nathan.
“Esme, you look younger every time I see you,” Nathan beamed and
gave her a tight hug. Esme blushed, and said, “Get on with you - you
need glasses like your father!”
Nathan's strong chiselled features stiffened and his piercing blue
eyes held Esme's. “You're right, I have to get some glasses, well,
contacts anyway. Can you believe it Esme?”
Over lunch that day, Professor Haywood told his son that he was
planning to publish his theory in detail and that he would advise people
to take Dean's book seriously.
“That's a pretty big step Dad, what if you're wrong?” said Nathan.
“I hope to God I am wrong son, for the sake of mankind. I pray
every night that there's an error in my calculations, that we'll have more
time. This burden has been with me for more than 38 years, since my
days at NASA.....then, it was mostly gut feeling and speculation. The
first paper I wrote on the black star was filled with flaws. I jumped the
gun, so to speak. Now, I have a perfect model, there are no flaws.
“When I discussed my theory with Dean, he psychically visualised
the calculations and the event taking place. His date of the disaster was
the early part of 2014.”
Nathan savoured a long mouthful of wine, then held his father's eyes
with understanding. “Dad, I know you're right, I'm not a scientist, I'm a
doctor, but I've read your theory and I understand it completely - it is so
simple, and it will happen. It's just that part of me wants to believe it
won't happen!”
“There's something else Son, that you may not want to believe, but
it's true,” said the Professor, pushing his half empty plate away. “There
is proof beyond any shadow of a doubt that UFOs and Aliens have been
visiting Earth for a long time. They are peaceful and mean no
harm...this has been the greatest cover-up since President Truman's
time.”
61
Nathan didn't look surprised and answered matter-of-factly: “I've
always believed that they have been out there Dad. UFO sightings have
become very commonplace over the years and I think most people now
accept it.”
“Well, then I'm telling you nothing!” the Professor said, with a wide
grin on his face.
Esme cleared the plates and proceeded to serve dessert - Nathan's
favourite bread and butter pudding. Changing the subject, the Professor
asked: “So, Son, have you and Yvonne set a date for the wedding yet?”
Nathan smiled and answered, “Yes, two months from now,
September 14th.”
“So soon? I thought you were thinking more towards Christmas.”
There was a long silence, then Nathan said: “Well Dad, ah…Yvonne
is pregnant, we found out a few weeks ago.”
The Professor clinked his wine glass with Nathan's and beamed
happily, “Congratulations my boy, that's wonderful news!”
After Nathan left late that afternoon, Professor Haywood sat at his
old mahogany desk and answered the letter that Paul Evans had written.
Paul wanted to know if he had any new findings on his old theory of the
“Black Star” that had been written back in the 1960s. He said he was
planning to go to Australia soon and gave a forwarding address in
Sydney.
The Professor didn't want to get to bogged down with long detailed
calculations, so he wrote as simply as he could:
Dear Paul, thank you for your letter. I will answer your question as
briefly as I can. To know the future Paul, we must first understand the
past. Studies and computer models have shown that the 26 million year
cycle, which originally destroyed the dinosaurs on Earth, is, in fact, due
to repeat itself between the years 2010 to 2014.
It simply comes down to this. A companion star, to the sun, which I
called “The Black Star”, is in an erratic orbit. It is gradually growing
smaller, with the companion star coming nearer to the sun with each
orbit. Finally, the companion will get so close that it will come into
Earth's solar system, so close in fact, that I believe it will trigger a
disaster.
62
On its next orbit, it wouldn't come close since the narrow orbit is
unstable and the orbit will get broader. The star would move further
away and the axis of its orbit would move right past the galactic pole.
Peter, I realise that when the axis of the orbit swings far enough, the
force of the galactic tides would reverse and the orbit would begin to
narrow again. The star would return, and because of the number of
comets which are in the Oort comet cloud, I believe that at least two or
three of these comets will hit the earth.
I estimate the size of at least one of these comets to be eight
kilometres across with a mass of 500 million tons and that it will create
a crater at least 100 miles across. In short, the chances of this disaster
happening again, given the scientific information I have, is five to one.
I have enclosed a computer disc with the model on it.
PS: Please, we dare not use the Internet.
By the way, may I suggest you read THE BOOK by Dean McIntyre,
if you can find it. Also, if you happen to run into Dean in Australia,
please give him my kind regards as he is a wonderful friend.
Yours sincerely, Professor Michael Haywood.
On the 18th July at 2.30 pm, Professor Michael Haywood stood on
the dais and addressed a gathering of a dozen or so fellow scientists, the
Prime Minister with six of his colleagues and two members of the Press.
Behind them on the wall was a large white screen. The Professor
cleared his throat and adjusted the microphone. Through his bi-focals,
he studied the face of each man in the room.
“Gentlemen, before I commence, I would ask each an every one of
you to give your word that what I am about to tell you will not be
discussed outside this room, until I have the approval of the Prime
Minister that my findings can be made public.” The Professor stared
hard at the two Pressmen, who were armed heavily with cameras and
equipment.
“There will be no photographs taken until the approval is given,” he
continued.
As the Professor spoke at length in complete scientific detail of his
theory of the “Black Star”, a soft murmur started amongst his fellow
scientists. “I would ask that no one speak or ask me any questions until
I am completely finished gentlemen, please.”
63
As he continued, the murmur ceased - all was so quiet that you could
hear a pin drop. After almost forty minutes, the Professor dimmed the
lights and his computer model appeared on the giant screen. There were
a few deep sighs and surprised gasps from the gathering, but no one
spoke.
An hour later, the lights were turned on.
The Professor looked at the men in front of him. Some were still
staring at the empty screen with blank looks on their faces, some were
gazing at the floor, a few held his eyes in disbelief. The two Press men
stood frozen with their mouths open in shock.
The Professor cleared his throat and spoke: “Gentlemen, I
understand some of you may not agree with my theory, you may look
for flaws in my calculations, but we can discuss this later. Firstly, I
would like to hear what the Prime Minister has to say.”
Prime Minister Edward Campbell stood awkwardly at first, then
straightened his shoulders and spoke clearly to the Professor. “Professor
Haywood, I am not a scientist, some of what you have spoken about has
gone completely over the top of my unscientific head. But, what I have
understood, and that is what matters I'm afraid, is that I do agree with
your findings.”
A murmur started amongst the group - the Press men came out of
their shocked state and began writing on their pads and talking loudly
between themselves. The Prime Minister continued: “First, I want none
of this to leak out to the public at this time. I believe we have a world
crisis on our hands and I want every man to remain in this room until we
come to some kind of solution. The Press are not to record any of our
conversations, understood gentlemen?” The Prime Minister glared hard
at the two men. “Right now, I am going to call the President of the
United States.”
A few minutes later, the call came through. The gathering waited in
anticipation, as the thirty minute long telephone call between the two
most powerful men in the world finally came to an end.
Prime Minister Campbell walked over to the Press men and said: “I
am sorry chaps, I must take your cameras, recorders and pads, as
insurance, you understand. You can come to my office day after
tomorrow and collect them. I will give you a press release then, as to
the outcome of today's meeting. I cannot stress strongly enough on you
the secrecy of what has been said here today.”
64
The men reluctantly handed over their gear, and one said: “We give
you our word nothing will be printed sir.”
“Good,” said the Prime Minister, shaking their hands and showing
them to the door.
The room was quiet; the only sound was the loud locking of the
heavy oak door as the Press men left.
The Prime Minister now walked up to the dais and addressed the
meeting.
“Gentlemen, we do indeed have a world crisis on our hands, and it
not only involves Professor Haywood's prediction. President Newman
has informed me of a Global threat, the scale of which seems
unbelievable, by North Korea. The President is calling a crisis meeting
of the heads of the European Community and myself, next week. In the
meantime, we have agreed to play down the “Black Star” theory.
“Professor Haywood has my permission to only publish his theory in
the Science Journal, as a condensed version, leaving out any estimated
date of impact.”
Professor Haywood started to object, but the Prime Minister
continued: “Only myself will give a press release to the newspapers and
other media on what I feel should be at this time, made available to the
public. Is that understood by everyone, gentlemen?”
Replies came in dribs of “Yes, Sir,” from various lips.
The Prime Minister continued: “I hold every man in this room to an
oath of secrecy. Nothing that has been said here today is to be
discussed. We will all meet here again on July 29th at 10am.”
As they left the room, the Prime Minister pulled Professor Haywood
aside and said: “I'll telephone you as soon as I arrive back from
Washington, we'll talk privately then.”
The next day, alone at his desk, Professor Haywood compiled his
theory and calculations, minus the date of impact from the “Black Star”.
He wasn't happy about not publishing the whole truth, but he had given
his word. “Oh Lord,” he said out loud, “if mankind is on the brink of
world disaster, he has a right to know the truth.”
He forced his mind to focus on a happier subject. Nathan and
Yvonne were coming over for afternoon tea tomorrow and discussing
their marriage plans. He must put his worries in a back pocket for now.
65
The delicious aroma of freshly baked scones wafted through the
kitchen. Esme was busily cleaning the silver tea pot when the door bell
rang. “They're early,” she thought.
The Professor opened the door. On seeing his son and future
daughter in law, the old man couldn't hide his emotion. He embraced
them both tightly as involuntary tears started to fill his eyes. As he
released his grip, Nathan looked with worried eyes at his father.
“Are you all right Dad?”
His father didn't answer, he just embraced Yvonne again and then
softly said, “Yes, I'm OK, come inside, let's sit down.”
As they sat on the sofa, the Professor pulled out a handkerchief and
blew his nose, then wiped his eyes.
“Dad, what's the matter?” said Nathan, holding his father's hand.
“Son, I'm 79 years old, I've had a wonderful life, seen a lot, done a
lot.” His eyes rested on Yvonne's round face and doll like eyes. “In
September, you'll be man and wife and in eight months, you'll be
nursing your first child - my grandson or grand daughter.” He blew his
nose again, and controlled the tears that wanted to fall from his eyes.
“Your life is just beginning...your future...what future! What damned
future do you or your children have?”
“Hey, take it easy Dad, it's going to be OK,” Nathan said.
Yvonne spoke calmly. “I know it won't be easy, but we will survive
Dad, we'll all survive.”
The Professor held both their hands with tight emotional love.
“After you get married in September, I want you to promise me
something.”
Nathan and Yvonne answered simultaneously: “Yes Dad, what do
you want us to promise?”
“I want you to promise that you will leave England and go for a long,
long honeymoon to Australia. I want you to promise that you will find
Dean and stay with him in Australia - have your child there.” As an
afterthought, he added: “I will join you there later.” Though, in the
Professor's mind, he knew that would never happen.
66
CHAPTER SEVEN
‘The Haven’
It was 9pm when the telephone rang; Eva tried to ignore the sound.
She was dozing peacefully in her comfortable recliner chair, the TV was
going as usual, and she didn't want to be disturbed.
At 89 years of age, and with not many old friends left, who except her
daughter Leeanne would be calling at this hour?
“Hello, this is Eva,” she grumbled in a tired voice.
“Hello, I'm not sure if I have the right number, I'm looking for Leeanne
and Gordon Stirling, would you be Leeanne's mother, Eva?” said the male
voice.
“Yes, I am, who is this, please?”
“Phew, thank heavens it's you. My name's GP, I was good friends with
Leeanne and Gordon on Santorini. Dean worked for me in my bar the
“Embargo”,” the voice continued.
Eva's eyes widened in surprise and her voice lifted with happiness.
“Oh, GP, I've heard so much about you and Trish, where are you?”
“It's a long story Eva, we are at Coffs Harbour now. We left Durban in
early May, just two days before the giant earthquake. Trish and I have
been working in Perth since then. When I saw Dean in Durban a few
years ago, he gave me Gordon's phone number and address in
Toowoomba and directions on how to get there, unfortunately, I lost the
paper. Only yesterday Trish found a Gold Coast number scribbled beside
Leeanne's name in an old address book. She had a feeling it may be yours
and Trish remembered she had called you Eva a few times. Anyway, we
bought a Ford station wagon and have spent the last three weeks driving
over here.”
67
Eva gave GP the phone number of the health farm and directions on
how to get to Toowoomba.
“They will be so happy to see you two. Now, if you'd like to stay a
night or so with me, you're very welcome GP,” Eva said.
“Thank you Eva, we'll see how things are going. I'll give you a ring
first if we decide to call in.”
Leeanne's mother put the receiver down, thinking how on earth would
she go to sleep now, with all this excitement happening!
Trish handed GP a new phone card and he dialled the Toowoomba
number. Darren answered. He had heard many stories of GP and Trish.
“They’re all down at Springbrook, working on a new property, should
be back in two days GP. My God, they'll be surprised to see you. Why
not come straight up now, so you'll be here when they return?” Darren
said.
GP smiled at Trish, and answered: “We’ll be there as soon as we can,
get the party music ready Darren!”
Darren slumped down into a chair, he wasn't really into party music, he
thought, recalling how Leeanne and Gordon used to tell him stories of the
wild parties at the Down Under bar.
“I shouldn't be thinking like this, I'm only 67 I'm not an old man yet,”
he mumbled under his breath.
Four days earlier, Dean, Gordon, Leeanne, Helen and little Yianni had
taken the four wheel drive truck and a small jeep over to Springbrook.
The back of the truck was filled with camping equipment, tools, food and
supplies for a week.
Dean had had several meetings with Tina and her group of spiritually
aware young people and he agreed to be their leader. When Tina asked
him if they could call him by the Indian name Sanjay which meant
“Enlightened One”, he knew this was all pre-destined. “Some of my dear
friends in India used to call me Sanjay,” Dean smiled to himself now,
recalling that last meeting with Tina.
Gordon braked suddenly; he had almost missed the entrance. Dean
snapped out of his reverie and looked around.
“We're here Gordon, it's an easy place to miss, all the bush and tracks
look the same.”
Helen, who was driving the jeep behind, also screeched on the brakes.
Dean alighted from the truck and traded places with Helen. He would
68
drive the jeep into town and pick up Tina and her two strong men (as she
had called them), and meet them back at the stream crossing.
Most of today would be taken up with building a bridge to cross the
stream. Thank heavens Tina had two burly construction workers in her
group!
“Talk about a mixture of people,” Dean thought, as he drove into town.
Within the 'Children of the Light', ranging in ages from twelve to twenty
six, were school children, students, office workers, cleaners, waiters and
waitresses, two nurses, a computer analyst, and accountant and two
construction workers.
In nationalities, there were English, German, Japanese, Chinese,
Russian, Greek, Italian and South American and, of course, some 'true
Aussies! Dean thought they were really a mixed bag when he first met
them, yet, together, they were as one family...their thoughts and feelings
flowed together in complete unity and harmony. Dean loved each and
every one of them like they were his own children.
Tina was sitting outside the coffee shop, rugged up against the cold
winter air in a thick woollen jacket, when Dean arrived. The two men
beside her were drinking large cartons of flavoured milk, and they were
big and strong like Tina had said.
“Sanjay,” Tina smiled, as Dean approached, “you remember Antonio
and Carlos?”
Dean smiled up at the six foot four plus giants with shoulders almost
twice the size of his. When Dean put his hand out to greet them, Carlos
stepped forward and gently embraced him, then Antonio did the same.
For men that size, their touch was very gentle.
Antonio, 25, was Italian and Carlos, 28 years old, was Spanish with a
Russian father, both had been living in Australia for ten years.
“Let's go guys, we have some hard work to do for the next week,” said
Dean, as they walked towards the jeep. By the time Dean arrived back at
the stream, Gordon had already chopped down two trees, which seemed
suitable for a bridge.
Looking at the trees, Carlos said, “We'll need at least six more of them,
let's get to work Antonio!”
“Tell us what to do Carlos,” said Gordon, as he proceeded to take nails
and hammers from the truck.
Leeanne set about preparing a barbecue 'bush style' and rummaged
through the food and supplies.
69
Helen stood holding Yianni's hand, watching Carlos start to chop down
a tree - there was something about his face that made her think of her
Yianni. Her eyes drifted over his well-defined muscles, his glistening,
dark tanned skin, now forming small droplets of sweat. He had tied his
shoulder length hair back in a ponytail.
“That was it!” she thought, and remembered the night over dinner
when Yianni had tied his hair back in a pony tail, his luxurious dark, wavy
hair...Carlos had the same hair, and the same dark, brooding eyes.
“Mummy, Mummy! Can I call Carlos 'Rambo'? He looks like Rambo!”
said Yianni.
Helen came back to her senses. “No darling, he may look like
someone else, but he is Carlos.”
Yianni looked disappointed, and said stubbornly: “Well, I'm going to
call him Muscle Man!”
Three hours later, the wooden bridge was complete. The four men
placed it evenly across the stream and bolted it securely, using a system of
ropes and pulleys designed by Carlos.
Slowly and carefully, Dean drove the jeep across first. When he
reached the other side, there were shouts of “fantastic!” and “well done!”
The first and easiest stage of THE HAVEN was complete.
That night, they camped a few hundred metres over the ridge in a small
clearing, before the endless sea of dense undergrowth and tall trees. After
a meal of sausages, baked beans and fried potatoes, washed down with red
wine, Dean and Gordon spoke about tomorrow's trek through the heavy
country.
“We must get an early start, it will take most of the day to cut a track
wide enough for the vehicles to drive through, the bush is very dense in
some parts,” said Dean.
Yianni walked over and sat down between Carlos and Antonio and
squeezed Carlos' muscles. “Can you tell me a story of how you became so
strong?” he said to both men.
Antonio laughed and ruffled Yianni's hair. “Of course we can Yianni,”
he said, and proceeded to tell the boy of his childhood and dreams of
being a famous weight lifter like his father had been in Italy.
Carlos looked over at Helen, her hazel eyes were glowing like golden
topaz beside the light of the fire. She held his eyes and his heart skipped a
beat, he could feel his blood dancing in his veins. “My God, she is
beautiful,” he thought, as his eyes, now gazed over her long golden hair
70
and sensuous body. Helen turned away and walked over to the table and
started to help her mother clean the dishes.
“I don't want to hear stories of how fantastic those two are, they're only
full of conceit and self admiration,” Helen said in a sarcastic voice.
Leeanne looked at her daughter. “You're wrong darling, they are kind,
good men. Dean told me just now that they had been brothers in a past
life, great warriors who fought for truth and justice...they saved the lives
of many people.”
Helen didn't speak; she just continued to dry the dishes. She didn't
care, she had made up her mind about what they were like, and that was
that!
Leeanne woke first the next morning and started making coffee. The
sunrise was spectacular, she thought, as the strong aroma of coffee woke
Gordon and the other men.
“Life in the bush, you can't beat it darling,” said Gordon as he planted
a loving kiss on Leeanne's lips.
By 8am, Antonio, Carlos and Gordon were chopping away at trees,
branches and heavy undergrowth. Helen and Tina grabbed an axe and
followed, chopping at the smaller branches that the men had missed.
Yianni ran behind, picking up stones and twigs.
Dean and Leeanne drove the vehicles slowly. This procession kept
going for two hours, then Dean changed places with Helen and Yianni sat
in the back of the truck, throwing stones back the way they had come. At
mid-day, they stopped to rest and eat. Dean psychically took his bearings
and looked towards the distant high ridge. They were more then half way,
at this rate they should make the clearing by 4pm.
As the long, slow dusty day progressed, little Yianni started to cry in
the back of the truck. The flies were annoying him and the truck was so
bumpy his body was aching and he was thirsty and tired.
“Mummy! Mummy! I don't like this anymore,” he screamed at the top
of his lungs. Helen stopped the truck, Leeanne and Tina hopped down
from the jeep and walked over to the crying boy. “I want to go home! I
want to go home!” he sobbed.
Leeanne held her grandson and wiped his face. Helen yelled out to
Dean that they were stopping for a while.
Antonio put down his axe and walked over to the truck. He lifted
Yianni high into the air, then gave him a hug. “How would you like a
piggy back ride?”
71
Yianni stopped crying and shouted, “Yes! yes!”
Antonio took two towels from the truck and tied them around Yianni
like a sling and fitted the boy onto his back.
“How does that feel up there bambino?” he said, walking around with
Yianni now laughing, “giddy yap horsy, giddy yap!”
Helen couldn't help herself laughing. From that moment on, she really
liked Antonio, he was wonderful with Yianni.
The high ridge was in front of them now, huge rocks and boulders
towered more than sixty feet into the air.
“The cleared land is over the other side,” said Dean, as they all
stopped, their bodies scratched and dirty from the long hike.
“How in hell are we going to get the trucks over that ridge?” asked
Carlos.
Dean pointed westward. “Further down there, it's only about twenty
feet high and mostly small rocks - I think we can drive over them OK.”
Dean drove the truck, the others pushed with all their strength on the
back and guided it over the rocks. The women stood back watching with
anxiety. Helen couldn't stop her eyes gazing over the back of Carlos'
massive muscular frame; his firm buttocks and strong powerful thighs.
Antonio was built similar, though not as tall, with a few extra kilos around
his middle.
As the truck finally reached the top, Helen let out a long deep sigh.
She had to fight the physical desire these two men were starting to stir
inside her.
The last bright orange rays of sunlight were fading - silver speckles of
light were dancing on the lush green grass of the open field, as they started
to make camp for the night.
Yianni was already cuddled up in a sleeping bag, exhausted after the
long day. “He's too tired to eat, I'll let him sleep,” said Helen to her
mother, as she tucked him in.
“Is there any fresh water on this property, other than the first stream?”
Carlos asked Dean.
“Yes, there is. I haven't found it yet, but I know there's some nearby,”
Dean answered.
After the evening meal, everyone wanted to know Dean's plans...what
was he going to build? Where and how?
72
Dean studied every face around the campfire and said: “To tell you the
truth, I've absolutely no idea!” No one spoke, and then he continued, “you
see, I am tired, I need to sleep - it will come to me in the morning.”
Gordon and Leeanne laughed softly, they knew what he meant and
exactly how he felt, and, most importantly, they knew Ilias would guide
him.
It was still dark when Ilias' thoughts drifted into Dean's mind...he
wouldn't need to build any constructions as THE HAVEN was already
there...with the first rays of sunlight, he was to walk towards the spot
where the spacecraft had landed and look back towards the highest part of
the ridge.
Little Yianni woke first with his cries of “I'm hungry!” just as the sun
was breaking through the clouds. Helen tended her son, as, one by one,
everyone else began to stir. Dean was standing in the middle of the field,
looking in a North Easterly direction back towards them.
Gordon stood and followed Dean's line of sight. He was looking at the
highest point of the ridge, Gordon thought to himself. Then he saw it, a
golden glow, lighting up an area around some boulders - the light was
flickering, then it was gone.
Leeanne stood beside Gordon. “What is it darling?” she asked,
noticing a strange look on her husband's face.
“It's going to be an interesting day today, let's have some breakfast,”
was his matter-of-fact reply.
Dean was quiet over breakfast, alone with his thoughts of what was
behind that boulder. Ilias' thought snapped at him: “You'd better get a
move on and find out!”
“I'm going exploring, anyone want to come?” said Dean to the group.
Tina wasn't feeling well and Yianni was too tired, he wanted to go back to
sleep. The rest of them all stood and followed Dean.
“We'll take some rope, torches and an axe - I don't quite know what we
will find up there,” said Dean, as they left the camp.
Helen grabbed a large plastic container of water, and shot a side-glance
at Carlos, who was pulling on a tight fitting T Shirt over his massive
shoulders. Antonio walked beside her and slipped a casual arm around
her shoulders.
“That little bambino of yours is a great kid, I would like a son like him
some day,” he said.
73
Helen didn't flinch. In fact, she felt quite comfortable with Antonio's
powerful arm around her shoulder. She looked up into his cheerful brown
eyes - his wide strong mouth was smiling. “I think you would make a
wonderful father, Antonio,” she said.
The highest point of the ridge was in front of them now. Dean stopped
and looked over the boulders and nearby shrubs. He took his crystal from
around his neck, placed it on his forehead and closed his eyes. He could
see an entrance - a long tunnel winding underground. “Spread out and
search this area, there has to be a cave or tunnel somewhere around here,”
he said with excitement rising in his voice.
Dean scrambled up to the boulder where he had seen the golden glow.
Carlos and Antonio went either side of him in a semi circle and climbed
higher. Leeanne and Helen walked together Westward along the base and
Gordon headed towards a clump of bushes and wild cactus just below
Dean.
Dean searched all around the huge boulder, but there was no opening.
He used the axe to loosen small rocks in cracks either side of the giant
boulder. There was nothing...nothing but solid rock. Antonio and Carlos
yelled out together: “There's nothing up here!”
“Just keep looking,” replied Dean.
Gordon rummaged around in the bushes and spiked his finger on a
cactus. “There are no caves around here,” he thought as he stood up and
sucked on the stinging wound. Gordon stood back and looked towards
Dean. Suddenly, he saw what appeared to be an opening between the
rocks, just below Dean's feet. “Hey Dean! Turn around and lean over the
side of that rock below your feet, I think there's an opening!”
Dean bent over and could feel a space. He pushed hard on the small
rocks and they rolled away. Excitedly, Gordon ran towards him. “I think
we've found something here,” said Dean, as he started to prise away more
rocks with the axe. There was an opening.
“Carlos! Antonio! Over here!” yelled Gordon. Helen and Leeanne ran
towards the excited men. “Move aside Dean, we'll do that,” said Carlos,
as he and Antonio started to move heavier rocks. The opening was
becoming larger and longer as the two men, with perspiration running
down their backs, rolled the last huge rock away. “Jeez, it's a cave!” they
yelled.
74
Dean and Gordon walked inside and shone the torches around. The
others stood beside them. It was a small cave that ran downwards and
narrowed into darkness, empty darkness.
“Looks spooky down there,” Helen said to her mother as she took hold
of her hand. Dean led the way with Carlos and Antonio close behind.
Gordon waited for Leeanne and Helen and took Leeanne by the hand.
“It's OK, just hold tight to me, I won't let any spookies get you darling,” he
smiled.
The cave entrance had been almost ten feet high, but now, after
walking for about 15 minutes, it was barely five feet high and only narrow
enough for two people, also, it was pitch black.
“I don't want to go any further, this is giving me the creeps,” said
Leeanne, as she squeezed Gordon's hand tightly. “I agree,” said Helen in
a shaky voice.
“What's it look like up there?” Gordon yelled to Dean.
“Seems to be getting higher and wider again and slightly steeper,” was
the reply.
It definitely was getting steeper, Gordon thought as he carefully placed
one foot in front of the other.
Dean heard it first. A soft trickling sound, like water, up ahead. He
quickened his pace, the tunnel was getting larger and he noticed pale
coloured rocks in front as the light touched the side walls.
“That sounds like water running,” said Carlos, as he walked beside
Dean. A few moments later, the tunnel came to an abrupt end. In front of
them, as they stood together with eyes wide in surprise, following the
glow of the torches, was a magnificent huge cavern with a height of
maybe 30 feet and a length and breadth of around 100 feet. In the centre,
was a natural spring, running over rocks.
“My God, look at this place,” said Antonio, shining his torch around
the ceiling.
“This is THE HAVEN, the place I've been searching for,” said Dean,
as he walked over to the rock pool. He knelt down and drank from the
clear water, it tasted crisp and sweet, just the same as the water from the
spring where they had built the bridge.
One by one, they all drank, savouring the cool liquid after the long
walk. Leeanne and Gordon wandered off exploring the mammoth cavern,
Antonio followed close behind, watching in awe as Gordon held the torch
high, scanning the crystal like rocks covering the huge ceiling.
75
As they sat by the pool, suddenly Dean started to splash Helen with
great handfuls of water, she turned and did the same to him. Carlos stood
back and laughed at them as they carried on like little children, splashing
and laughing, screaming and yelling as only brother and sister could.
“Hey Dean, this cavern is larger than it seems!” Gordon's voice broke
loud with an echo and stopped Dean's splashing. “I'm coming over,” said
Dean, catching his breath and wiping water from his face.
Dean left the torch on a high flat rock near the pool and wandered over
to Gordon. Helen sat on the edge of the pool and caught her breath in
between fits of laughter. Carlos watched from the shadows. Helen's thin
cotton shirt was drenched, water was trickling from her long hair, making
the thin fabric cling to her skin. The outline of firm, round breasts and
nipples was glowing softly in the light of the torch.
She stood and pushed her hair back, squeezing the water from it.
Carlos' eyes slid over every inch of her body, the dull fires of lust slowly
began to grow hungrily in his veins.
Slowly, he walked towards her, fighting to gain his composure. He
stood only a few feet away and fought desperately against the urge to just
grab hold of her. Helen's eyes glistened, and he smiled widely. “It's great
to see a brother and sister who really care for each other,” he said.
Helen sat back down. “It wasn't always that way. When we were
about Yianni's age, we were great mates, then, as we grew older, we used
to fight a lot, and, as teenagers, we really couldn't stand each other. I
suppose it's all part of growing up. Now, I love him to bits, I'm so proud
of the man he's become, I feel closer to him now than ever before.”
Carlos gently took Helen's hand in his and gazed into her golden hazel
eyes. Water was still dripping from her lashes.
“I have two younger sisters, we are not close and that breaks my
heart,” he said, with sadness, and continued, “Maria and Silvia are seven
years younger than I, they have had a private school education and
unfortunately are what you would call little snobby terribly spoilt
bitches.”
Helen gently squeezed Carlos' hand and said, “They may change,
nothing stays the same.” Helen licked tiny droplets of water from her lips
- soft pink lips that glistened seductively in the warm glow from the torch.
As she gazed into Carlos' smouldering dark eyes, Helen had to stop herself
thinking of Yianni and their night of passion on the beach at Santorini.
76
“You're thinking of someone else, aren't you?” Carlos said picking up her
thoughts, then he took her by the shoulders and pressed his lips to hers.
Helen quivered inside - his strong arms held her tight, yet his touch
was so gentle and passionate. His hungry tongue danced in circles until it
touched hers. Together, their fires of desire were unleashed. Helen could
feel her head spinning, her thighs were starting to shake and a hot burning
sensation was seeping through her wet body.
Carlos felt his manhood grow hard and throb against the wet cotton
fabric of Helen's jeans, he had to hold himself back, this was getting out of
control.
“Hey you two, come over here, we need the other torch!” Dean's voice
broke Carlos' tight hold on Helen - she stepped back and started breathing
in short, deep gasps, trying desperately to come to her senses.
Silently, they walked towards the others. Helen noticed Antonio give
Carlos a dark, hard look, as they approached. Helen went to her mother's
side and grabbed her hand. Her body was still shaking, as she said calmly
as possible: “What have you found over here, Mum?”
Shining the light over the walls, Dean said: “There's huge chunks of
crystal embedded in this rock, see it sparkling?”
“Looks like clear quartz,” said Leeanne, touching the rock.
“This cavern has to be at least 150 feet long, I'll bet that spring is
somehow connected to the stream, there's a permanent water supply here,”
Dean said, putting his arms around Gordon and his mother and squeezing
them tight.
He was filled with emotion; they had finally found their place for
survival. “Let's get back to the camp, we have heaps of work and
organizing to do,” he said.
Gordon squeezed him on the shoulder and said: “Well, I don't care if
it's only mid-day, I'm having a beer when we get back!”
“Sounds good to me,” said Antonio, shooting Helen a side glance, as
he noticed her eyes lingering on Carlos.
Back at the camp, over cans of beer and sandwiches made hastily,
Dean outlined what would have to be done. The operation would need to
be carried out in complete secrecy. No one outside the people here today
would know about it until the time was right.
Firstly, they would have to build a generator. If they were to live
underground for an indefinite time, they could use the natural running
water in the cavern to make some sort of hydro-electric power plant. They
77
would need to create an artificial atmosphere, like an air re-cycler.
Outside, they would build a windmill to harness the wind to charge
batteries. They would use lithium batteries to store energy as normal lead
acid batteries did not retain a charge for long enough.
Dean turned to Antonio and Carlos. “I want you to build four small
paddocks, section off part of this area. We will buy a few young horses, a
young bull, some new-born calves, a milking cow and maybe a few
goats.”
“McDonald's farm you're talking about,” laughed Gordon.
“Well, we have to take a few animals with us, who knows how many
others are going to survive out there?” said Dean.
Gordon looked skyward and said: “That means lots of hay and feed.”
Helen went and picked up Yianni, who was now awake and crying,
and brought him over to the group. Leeanne said: “I've read a lot about
hydroponics and gardening with artificial light. I'm sure we can
successfully grow plants and vegetables, maybe even some grass in that
cavern.”
Tina broke in. “I've always had a green finger, I love gardening and I'll
help you.”
Later that day, Antonio and Carlos started erecting the huge army tent
that Gordon had bought at an auction a few weeks previously. They
would need to make a good strong camp that would house them for maybe
four to five months, while work was being carried out in the cavern.
Dean and Gordon had stacked a number of rocks together and made a
large bush barbecue. As Dean lit the fire beneath it, Helen sat down
beside her brother and gazed into the flickering flames.
Dean sensed her thoughts. “Listen Sis, I saw what happened back in
the cavern, please be careful. Carlos and Antonio are good guys and I can
tell you that they both have the hots for you.”
Helen looked up at her brother with eyes full of sadness. “You know
Dean, I've had a couple of short affairs since Yianni was born, nothing
serious. I've never really been looking for anyone,” Helen hesitated and
cleared her throat. “Carlos ignited a fire in me that I've never felt before,
it scared me, Dean. I don't want to get involved, I don't want to fall in love
with anyone.”
Dean placed a caring arm around his beautiful sister. “Hey, take it
easy, just keep your feet on the ground and remember, you can always talk
to me...I love you Sis.”
78
That night, it was decided. Carlos, Antonio and Tina would stay at the
camp. The others would drive back to the healing farm at Toowoomba,
purchase electrical bits and pieces and everything else needed to work on
the cavern, and return in a few days time.
As Gordon went off to sleep that night, he thought to himself, “there's
a hell of a lot of electrical work to do, what I wouldn't give to have
someone like GP with me right now to help.”
As they left Springbrook the next day, Gordon stopped at a telephone
and called Darren to let him know they would be back late that afternoon.
Darren seemed unusually chirpy and said he was planning a special dinner
for them. When Gordon arrived back at the truck, Dean told him they
would also need to buy about four mobile phones and set up a two way
radio system, so there would always be contact from the camp to the
cavern.
Little Yianni was sound asleep on his mother's lap by the time the
truck pulled in to the healing farm. It had been a long, tiring drive. As
they drove up to the homestead, Dean noticed a station wagon in the drive,
it had West Australian number plates. “Looks like Darren's got visitors,”
said Gordon, as they came to a stop.
Leeanne helped Helen from the truck with Yianni fast asleep in her
arms. They all looked at the number plates, wondering just who would
visit from Western Australia. As they started to walk up the front steps,
suddenly music started, it was 'Down Under' from Men at Work, the loud
familiar tune, their trademark from Santorini....Dean and Gordon burst
through the door at once and were confronted with Dundee sitting on the
dining table, complete with akubra hat.
“Oh Jeez no! I can't believe it!” yelled Gordon. Leeanne and Helen
were screaming in excitement. Yianni woke up crying, wondering what
all the commotion was about.
GP and Trish ran to embrace their friends, tears of happiness were
streaming down all their faces, as the six friends kissed and hugged each
other in passioned excitement.
Gordon caught his breath and said, “I was dreaming about you last
night, GP, I can't believe it, I kept thinking over and over that you were the
one person I most needed at this time.”
Dean spoke emotionally. “Thank God you got out of South Africa
safely, I've been praying that you two would be OK.”
79
GP smiled broadly. “You didn't doubt that I would take your advice,
Dean? I had a gut feeling also, we got out a few days before the
earthquake, just in time.”
That evening, over a delicious roast lamb dinner, with endless bottles
of wine, ouzo shooters and loud Greek music blaring, the friends
reminisced about their time on Santorini. Darren and Barbara left the
party soon after dinner, they weren't into Greek dancing, especially when
Helen suddenly jumped up on the table and declared that this was the right
way to do it.
Nursing hangovers the next morning over endless cups of coffee and
orange juice, GP said to everyone: “I haven't had so much fun since the
last party at the Down Under years ago.”
“I wonder what happened to dear old Fred, maybe he's still on
Santorini laying drunk under a lemon tree,” quipped Leeanne.
Trish answered. “We heard that he went back to London, but I can't
imagine Fred living in that cold weather for too long.”
GP broke in: “The last time I saw Vangeli and Susie they were settling
down in Athens and talking about starting a family, that was just before
we went to South Africa.”
Dean and Gordon explained to GP and Trish their plans for THE
HAVEN at Springbrook, and the seriousness of what would be happening
in the coming months. After more than an hour of conversation which left
Trish with her mouth open in shock and GP scratching his head in despair,
Dean stood and patted Trish on the shoulder. “Don't worry, we will
survive.” Dean went to the desk and picked up THE BOOK. Handing it
to GP, he said, “I wrote this on Santorini, go and lie down, read it, have a
rest. I must drive in to Toowoomba and buy some gear. We'll see you in
about four hours time.”
Two days later, they were all on their way back down to Springbrook.
This time, Leeanne, Helen and Yianni travelled with GP and Trish, as the
truck was filled to overflowing with equipment and supplies. Everyone
laughed at Dundee, who was perched on top of blankets and sleeping
bags, gazing out the back window of the station wagon. Little Yianni
didn't know what to make of the stuffed crocodile - he wasn't happy about
Dundee's huge sharp teeth.
“He's our mascot and he'll keep horrible snakes and crawly things
away,” GP said to the frightened boy.
80
In the few short days they had been away, the camp was already
starting to take shape. The pent up physical frustration, which was
running like boiling water through their bodies, was taken out on hard
work by Carlos and Antonio.
They had built a shed from trees - three walls and a roof, where
equipment and supplies could be stored. Now, they were busily
hammering in wooden stakes and marking out the paddocks in preparation
for the fence wire, that Dean had brought with him. Gordon jumped from
the truck and surveyed the scene. “Wow! The guys sure have been
working hard, that shed looks great,” he said, as Tina came running to
greet them.
Yianni ran over to Carlos and Antonio and sat happily watching his
strong muscle men build the paddocks. Helen, Leeanne, Trish and Tina
unpacked the truck and sorted out the supplies.
Dean and Gordon excitedly wandered off with GP to show him the
cavern. As they stood in the first small cave near the entrance, GP
laughed and said, “Well Gordon, you and Leeanne lived in a cave house
on Santorini for almost nine months, so I suppose this is memories of
Greece!”
Gordon laughed at the significance and said, “OK GP, now we will
have the good news bad news like we used to say back then. The good
news - we found the most magnificent huge cave to live in, a safe haven
where we can hopefully survive. The bad news is that you and I have to
provide enough electrical power for us all to live sealed completely
underground for maybe six months, two years, who knows? We damn
well don't!”
GP's eyes were wide and he smiled as Gordon added, “and that means
creating our own atmosphere!”
GP just shrugged his shoulders and said, “No problems, we'll do it.”
Having a natural running spring with good fresh water was their
saviour - the key to their survival. Without it, there was no way they
could have created hydro-electric power for the atmosphere. Tomorrow,
they would trace the source of the spring and pray it would never dry up.
Later that night, after the evening meal, they listened to Dean
organising the operation for their survival. He needed everything
completed by Christmas, not quite five months away. GP and Trish
wanted to stay at Springbrook permanently, they would be the caretakers.
81
Tina, Carlos and Antonio would come up and work three to four days a
week if possible, as they had other commitments at the moment.
Leeanne and Gordon would also try to spend about three days a week
there, as they still had work commitments at the Healing Farm.
Helen would go down only at weekends, as Yianni was attending preschool five days a week. Just after Christmas, they would all be there
permanently and never leave.
Tina planned to assemble all the Children of the Light at Christmas
and prepare them for what would be happening - she wouldn't tell anyone
until then. The cavern could comfortably house about sixty people and a
dozen or so animals, no more. When Tina asked Dean who, beside
themselves and the Children of the Light would be chosen to live in THE
HAVEN, he answered: “No one will be chosen, the people who will be
here are the ones that are meant to be here - I am leaving that up to
fate...and God.”
Each person looked inside themselves and their thoughts dwelled on
the gravity of what lay ahead.
It was almost midnight by the time everyone finally dozed off to sleep,
tucked up warmly in their sleeping bags inside the huge army tent.
Outside, a cold breeze was starting to blow against a star filled sky with a
hazy three quarter moon.
Helen couldn't sleep, she gazed lovingly at her tiny son beside her, he
was sound asleep in contented dreamland. Her mind was full of worry
about his future, her future and the fate of mankind. It was impossible to
sleep, she thought to herself, as she stood and wrapped a blanket around
her shoulders and walked outside.
The orange ashes of the fire had almost died, she shivered a little
against the cold night air and walked towards the truck. Leaning against
the bonnet, Helen looked at the moon and the emptiness of the dark sky.
The twinkling stars seemed lonely, lonely like her.
Suddenly, she could sense someone behind her. She turned and
recognized Carlo's massive frame. He was rugged up with a thick anorak,
his dark hair glistened in the moonlight and she could feel his eyes
searching her thoughts.
He stood in front of her now, not speaking and wrapped his strong
arms around her quivering body. He held her close and tight. She lay her
head against his chest and sighed softly, as he opened the zipper of his
82
jacket so she could touch his warm bare skin and hard, firm muscles. She
kissed his chest with little butterfly kisses.
Carlos grabbed her chin and held her lips close to his and said: “My
God, I want you more than any woman I've ever met, you're driving me
crazy Helen!”
Helen didn't answer, she just kissed him deeply as the fire inside her
started to grow. The blanket fell to the ground, Carlos unzipped the front
of her tracksuit exposing bare breasts heaving with her deep heart beats.
He squeezed her breasts gently and bent down, his hungry mouth finding
the hard nipples and sucking on them passionately.
Helen started to tremble with desire, her mind was swimming in
circles, delicious circles of ecstasy. Gently, Carlos slid his hand down
inside her pants, she was not wearing any underwear. His hand stopped
on the soft round muscle of her stomach, then continued down her thigh.
Stopping now, he slowly pushed her legs apart. He could feel her inner
thigh muscles throbbing and his searching fingers could feel the hot, wet
passion of burning desire flowing from her body.
Suddenly, through the cold night air came Yianni's cries. “Mummy!
Mummy! Where are you?” Helen pushed Carlos away as she fought to
gain her composure. She re-zipped her tracksuit and picked up the blanket
and said: “They say 'saved by the bell', well this is 'saved by the child'.”
As she turned to leave, Carlos grabbed her hand tightly. His eyes were
flickering like a wild animal ready to pounce. “You won't get away that
easy next time,” he said breathlessly.
Helen pulled away from his grip, as Yianni cried out again for her.
Holding his eyes, she said, “You're wrong Carlos, there won't be a next
time.”
Helen ran back to the tent, Yianni was sitting up in the sleeping bag
sobbing, she couldn't believe no one else had woken up. Curling up
beside him, Helen cradled her little son and kissed his tears. “Mummy's
here darling, don't cry anymore.”
Yianni hugged his mother, then looked up at her. “I had a terrible
dream Mummy, I could see two bad men taking me away and you were
crying.”
Helen patted his head and said, “Hush, hush darling, it was only a bad
dream, now go back to sleep, Mummy's with you now.”
83
CHAPTER EIGHT
Los Angeles...August
Thousands of miles across the ocean in the Northern Hemisphere, Los
Angeles was experiencing the most unusual summer in its history. The
months of May and June had started out with the hottest temperatures on
record; everyone expected a heatwave summer. Suddenly, the first week
of July had turned into an instant freeze with temperatures around eight to
ten degrees celsius - the summer had virtually disappeared over night!
Now, in the month of August, which was usually the hottest, the
temperatures were five degrees down to zero. Los Angeles had only two
months of summer - it was gone before it started. The meteorological
bureau had no explanation for the weather changes - there seemed to be
no unusual occurrences.
Holidaymakers and tourists were disappointed and frustrated with
ocean waters too cold to swim - the beaches were deserted. Tension and
anxiety filled the minds of many was the strange weather threw their
lifestyles into disarray. There were shops full of summer clothes, as
people demanded woollens and heavy jackets....baseball matches, which
usually attracted hundreds of thousands of people, were cancelled due to
the cold weather.
With the temperature so low, there should have been snow, but there
was none, and there had been no rain.
Anna Rogopolis rugged herself up tightly against the icy wind which
blew down the small valley of the farm. She noticed the doors of the barn
were swinging freely as she quickened her strides, realising she was late
today feeding the animals.
Anna ran inside and bolted the door behind her. The horses started to
whinny and the old donkey brayed as she approached the large stack of
84
lucerne hay. “OK you guys! Sorry I'm late, but it's feed time now!” Anna
declared as she unzipped her heavy jacket and placed it over the rail.
Bina, the faithful labrador dog, who had been sleeping in the hay,
woke up and started to run in circles around Anna....she was hungry too!
The animals on the Krishna Farm that would normally be grazing
freely on the lush grass in the sunshine, were now huddled together in the
barn, trying desperately to keep warm against the sudden freezing
weather. Four work oxen, two milking cows, three horses, one donkey
and two goats, along with six stray cats and Bina the dog, were the extent
of the farm's animal life.
On this Krishna Farm, situated some fifty miles outside Los Angeles,
lived sixteen devotees between the ages of 18 to 30 years - one couple had
two young children aged four and six. The devotees were self sufficient
and grew crops of wheat, barley and oats, together with fruit trees and
vegetables.
The sudden cold weather had destroyed all their crops, leaving them
devastated and wondering how they would survive the coming year. Anna
threw the hay into the animals' stalls and cleaned their water bucket, water
was scarce now, it had been dry for more than six months.
There was a small dam on the property, and this was now almost
empty - thankfully, they had three large water tanks in reserve. They were
better prepared than most people for the sudden drought!
Anna opened a large container of vegetable mash and served out
several plates for Bina and the cats, along with bowls of milk. Feed time
was over, she would go back to the farmhouse, have a warm wash, then
prepare for the evening's meeting.
In the Los Angeles area, there were four Hare Krishna groups, and, at
tonight's meeting, there would be devotees from each group discussing
plans for the future.
Anna towelled herself dry and sat down to brush her long hair and rebraid it. Gone were the days when most devotees, mostly the men, had
shaved heads and ponytails. Now, it was freedom of choice for their
hairstyles. Most men still preferred very short-cropped hair, with some
opting for long and tied back in braids and ponytails.
Anna's dark brown hair almost reached her waist, she had never cut it
in five years. As she finished the braid and tied the cotton around the end,
Anna glanced at THE BOOK on the shelf beside her. She smiled, then
reached over and opened it. Her soft hazel eyes rested on the photo of
85
Dean, she could feel the beauty of his eyes looking into her soul. She
smiled again and said out loud to herself, “Who would have thought Dean McIntyre?” As Anna looked at herself in the mirror, her mind
drifted back, back to another time, a time that would change her life
forever.
In the magnificent ten million dollar home overlooking LA.,
surrounded by opulent luxury, Anna was cradling her heartbroken mother
in her arms. It had been four months since the horrific deaths of her
Uncle Costa, father Anthony and brother Yianni, on the island of
Santorini in Greece. Sophia was falling to pieces, every day was worse
than the last.
After the initial shock and grief started to subside, Anna had turned to
God for guidance and spent many hours in silent prayer. When she
looked within herself and asked for the reasons why God had brought this
much suffering to her family, she already knew the answer. The small
voice of her consciousness was speaking as her own. “God has not
caused your family to suffer, Anna, the men of your family have brought it
on themselves. Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.
Power, greed, wealth from ill gotten gains, wealth from the suffering of
others, it had to stop somewhere, now it is over , it is finished for them,
but for you, it is only the beginning. Go and live your life within the light
of truth, love and peace, seek to find your higher self and never doubt that
God is beside you, always.”
Sophia had tried to take her own life several times, she wanted to die,
it was all over for her. Within her grief-filled mind, she knew that Costa
and Anthony had deserved what had happened, but Yianni - her baby, her
son, her treasured son! She blamed herself, she hated herself for living
with the lie for all these years, for pretending that the family business was
real estate, when all along, she knew it was illegal drugs, and, worst of
all, she knew Costa had killed innocent people. She could have stopped
Yianni from getting involved with Costa, she could have saved her son.
Sophia's guilt and self hate was twisting her mind, she was showing
signs of schizophrenia and deep depression. As Anna cradled her mother,
she knew this was goodbye. Suddenly, the door bell rang, the hospital
attendants from the Raleigh Institute were here. Anna walked her mother
out the door, tears were streaming down her face, as she hugged her
tightly. She held her mother's eyes, eyes that were deep empty pools
86
devoid of any emotion or life. As she waved goodbye, Anna called out:
“I'll visit you in a few days Mum...I love you!”
When she walked back inside the house, Anna knew she would never
see her mother again.
Anna's Uncle Costa had mentioned getting even with a Leeanne
McIntyre, who lived on the Gold Coast in Australia. Anna had overheard
a conversation once between Costa and her father - they had been talking
about wanting to see Leeanne dead at the bottom of the ocean.
The day after Anna's mother was admitted to the institution, Anna
packed a small bag and walked out of the door of her home, never to
return.
After joining the Hare Krishna group, she found the peace and
tranquillity within herself that she had always been seeking. Within the
Hindu teachings, Anna understood the force of Karma and how the jigsaw
puzzle of her life was finally fitting together. Forgiveness and acceptance
of the lessons that were placed in front of her, to love unconditionally and
to let go of the past. When Anna first read THE BOOK by Dean
McIntyre, she knew that Dean was Leeanne's son, as she also knew that
Helena was his sister.
Anna took THE BOOK and held it close to her heart, she could feel
the love flowing through her body, her psychic mind was telling her: “You
will see Dean and his family soon, this was all meant to be.”
“Anna! Anna! The meeting has started, you're late!” called a voice
from the door. Anna snapped out of her dream memories and quickly ran
from the room.
Sitting cross-legged on the floor, dressed in their formal garments of
long flowing pale orange cotton robes, were devotees from the four
Krishna groups of Los Angeles. Anna hurriedly joined the circle as they
began chanting their prayers. After the prayers and readings from the
ancient texts of the Vedas (books which hold the timeless knowledge and
wisdom of India), the group drifted away on a spiritual meditation for
thirty minutes.
Coming out of the meditation, Anna felt the strong touch of Dean's
hand holding hers - it felt so real that she quivered inside and her hand
tingled.
The meeting started, a devotee walked in and served cups of herbal tea.
The elder of the group, a man of 38 years, Indian by birth, though he had
87
spent most of his life in the US, spoke first: “We all know we have a
world crisis on our hands. The signs grow stronger every day, time is
running out and we must make plans.”
He studied the eyes of each devotee in the circle, then continued, “we
have done all we can with prayer and meditation. Spreading our words of
love and faith, hopefully we have made a difference to the lives of others
out there. I truly believe that we have.”
Some of the devotees answered: “Yes, we know we have.”
The elder continued: “Now, it is time for us and our families...tonight
the decisions will be made and very soon, we must all leave California.”
A young girl called Parusha spoke: “My spirit guide has been warning
me that the giant Californian earthquake will occur during the month of
November this year.”
Anna had been psychically getting messages to leave Los Angeles, as
an earthquake would soon destroy the whole city, though the voice she
could hear in her higher consciousness was that of a small child, a little
boy. Anna spoke: “Our group has been planning the departure. As soon
as the weather warms up, we will sell the farm and the animals. We have
decided to go to Australia.”
A spokesperson from another group said they had decided to re-settle
in Canada and join another Krishna group. The other two groups were
going to India and planned to journey to Tibet by Christmas.
As the meeting concluded, the plans were in place. Each group would
survive as best they could through the shocking weather conditions, then
sell up whatever they could and make sure they were out of Los Angeles
and California by mid October.
That evening, before Anna and the devotees went to sleep, each person
lit a small candle, placed on the windowsill and prayed to Krishna that all
the children of earth would be saved to replenish a New World, that the
light of mankind would burn for all eternity.
88
CHAPTER NINE
Crisis meetings
It was 10.30pm when the telephone in Professor Haywood's study
rang. Esme had gone to bed early complaining of a headache. The
Professor had felt like reading, he wasn't ready for sleep yet and besides,
he had a gut feeling that the Prime Minister would call tonight, he was a
week overdue from the US and should be back any day now.
“Hello, this is Professor Haywood speaking,” said Michael over the
telephone.
“Hope you don't mind my ringing this late, it's Prime Minister Edward
Campbell speaking.” Michael smiled to himself and said, “I was thinking
of you Sir, I had a feeling you would call tonight.”
“I only arrived home a few hours ago, we'll organize the meeting for
this Thursday, same time, 10am, right now, I'll brief you on what's
happened.” There seemed to be an awkward silence on the line, before
the Prime Minister spoke again, Michael heard him clear his throat.
“Look Professor Haywood, I have the utmost respect for you, you are a
gifted astrophysicist. Ah, you know when you explained your theory on
the black star, I fully supported you, I mean, it made sense to me that this
could occur.”
Michael knew what was coming, though he hoped it would not be so.
The Prime Minister continued, “President Newman, his heads of space
exploration, experts from NASA, disagree with your findings. They have
checked out the companion star to the sun theory many times. They said
that the theory was old and had been pushed around for many years by
other scientists. They admitted your model was very impressive, but there
were discrepancies in some of your data. To quote their findings, they
said that the chance of a comet or asteroid hitting earth was a million to
89
one, not five to one as you had estimated. They suggested we scrap the
black star theory all together and concentrate on what is definitely
happening right now.
“Professor Haywood, the world crisis is far greater than we had first
expected. At our meeting, I will be calling all our heads of defense and
security, and no Press.”
Suddenly, a cold shiver ran over the Professor's body and a dark fear
consumed his mind. Not a fear for himself, but a fear for all mankind, a
fear for the survival of the human race. He spoke slowly, the words
drawn out in thought.
“I am very disappointed with the rejection of my theory...we will
see...thank you Sir, for supporting me, I appreciate that. I will see you at
the meeting on Thursday. Goodnight Prime Minister.”
The Professor walked out to the kitchen and made himself a cup of hot
cocoa, then poured a large nip of whiskey into it. He felt tired, very old
and tired.
The group of faces before him seemed blurry and dream-like. His
mind was hazy from the lack of sleep. Edward Campbell had felt like
nothing around him was real, after his return from the US. Even last night
over dinner with his family, it seemed to him like they were someone
else's family, like life itself was all make-believe.
On the plane back from the meeting with President Newman, the
horrific consequences of what lay ahead hit him hard. He had a terrible
gut feeling there would be no more tomorrows.
Now, as he stood ready to address the meeting, thankfully the
discipline-trained Prime Minister started to emerge.
“Good morning gentlemen.” He spoke at length about the drastic
climatic changes, global warming and the greenhouse effect, and the latest
US findings of the ice meltdown on the North Pole.
“The city of New York has only two years before the water levels rise
high enough to cause flooding. The President is planning a gradual
evacuation of the city over a five-year period. He must avoid panic at all
costs, so he is playing down the seriousness of the problem at the
moment.”
There was silence...then a voice from the crowd spoke loudly with
deep concern. “Excuse me Mr. Prime Minister, maybe I'm ignorant, but if
the water level is going to rise that much, surely it will affect England and
all of Europe. What are we going to do?”
90
The Prime Minister cleared his throat, that concern had been worrying
him all night. “Scotland gentlemen! The highlands of Scotland, that's to
where England will evacuate our people. Eventually, the seat of
Government for Great Britain will be on Ben Nevis in Scotland!”
There were a few loud laughs and shouts of, “you've got to be kidding!
that's ridiculous!” Prime Minister Campbell continued: “That problem is
two years away, right now, what is of utmost importance is a global crisis
which could be only two months or maybe two weeks away, no one
knows.”
The men stopped talking, quietness fell upon the crowd.
“Gentlemen, as I mentioned to some of you at our last meeting, the
threat of North Korea is real...we could have a global nuclear war on our
hands, and this could happen any day.”
The room was so quiet, even the heartbeat of each man couldn't be
heard by a flea.
The Prime Minister continued: “With North Korea, it is a cat and
mouse game, unfortunately, they are the cat. North Korea has announced
to President Newman that they intend to have world domination one way
or the other. That the US and its allies including Australia have for too
long flaunted their superiority. They are not worried about Australia, as
they know the country has limited defence. North Korea has given the
President until December 24th, Christmas Eve, to reply in the affirmative
that they will abandon all their nuclear power.
He continued: “At any given moment, Peon Yang can press a button
and destroy most of the US and Europe and parts of Australia. The US is
preparing to retaliate from space. They have a satellite orbiting earth,
which sends back data on weather changes and various information. The
facilities on this satellite enable it to be re-programmed remotely from the
base simply by entering a new set of commands onto the keypad and
overriding the existing menu. This particular satellite, whilst being
intended as a weather unit, was purpose-built for conversion to a defence
weapon.
“Gentlemen, this is classified information, in that only the highest
officials in the US government know of its capabilities. This satellite can
be re-programmed to destroy and that is exactly what the US are planning
to do, very soon.”
91
The Defence Secretary stood, and addressed the Prime Minister: “So,
what you are saying Sir, is that any day now, we could be entering into a
nuclear World War Three.”
The Prime Minister, his voice tight with emotion, answered, “I hope to
God that it won't come to that, but I'm afraid there is a very strong
possibility.”
He remembered back to a time when the Iraqi people were supposed to
be free from Saddam and his regime, but even after America’s
intervention for peace the country was still a colony of factions and
violence and a dangerous place to be. President Newman’s great dream of
stabilisation and democracy in the Middle East had turned into the
greatest nightmare. Whilst Israel had departed from the Territories the
violence continued because of the Israelis failure to hand over control to
the Palestinians. World conflicts would always seem to remain the same.
As the gathering started to speak amongst themselves in raised voices,
the Prime Minister continued: “I know what you are thinking, that no one
wins a nuclear war, you're absolutely right gentlemen, so the President has
a plan to build underground bunkers and undersea bubbles. We of the
European Community will do the same. France, Germany and Italy will
commence immediately. Scandinavia somehow doesn't believe the
Koreans will push the button, they think we are panicking too soon; they
may build bunkers after Christmas.
“Greece, who is still at war with Turkey, only considers their war to be
top priority - all Greece's money and energy is going into protecting
themselves against the Turks.
“We will start next week to find suitable locations. Under the earth or
under the sea will be the only place mankind could possibly survive a
nuclear war.”
The Prime Minister opened his briefcase and took out a large pile of
folders, which he passed around to each man.
“These are copies of the detailed plan of the operation being conducted
by the US. Don't let them out of your sight at any time, this is top secret
classified information gentlemen!”
A few moments later, one of the scientists who had been present at the
last meeting, spoke: “Excuse me Prime Minister, what about the black star
theory of Professor Haywood's - that a comet is likely to hit earth
sometime next year?”
92
The Prime Minister was starting to look agitated, as he answered: “The
so-called 'black star' theory is finished. Nuclear war is our priority here,
along with the melt-down of the North Pole - we don't have time for
anything else.”
The Prime Minister seemed to be deep in thought for a moment, then
hesitatingly continued, “There is something else gentlemen. At the
meeting, France's Secretary for National Security brought up the subject
of increased UFO sightings. One in particular, on a farm, where a family
witnessed it. They actually made contact and have the whole incident on
camera. At no time, did this family feel any threat from the aliens, the
message they gave them was a warning that time was running out and that
a global catastrophe would occur in the near future. This incident has
been recorded as fact.
“You see, three airforce personnel who happened to be in the area at
that time, witnessed the spacecraft leaving the farm. America agreed with
France, as in Lake Tahoe and Texas, religious groups have witnessed the
same and recorded messages of warnings. People out there are starting to
question why there is such a huge UFO cover-up, the media is demanding
the Government come clean and I'm starting to think I agree. I mean, if
the aliens are friendly, maybe they can help us.”
“You've got to be joking!” a voice called out amid the increasing
murmur of the crowd. The Prime Minister suddenly looked pale and
drawn and there was no strength in his voice, as he said, “Please
gentlemen, I must leave - this meeting is over...I am very tired and I find
myself unable to fully comprehend the unrealistic situation confronting
our planet. All I can say to you, is that if any of you believe in God, now
is the time to pray and make your peace with Him. Take the time to look
into your hearts, hold onto faith, for that is all we may have!”
93
CHAPTER TEN
New Friends
Paul Evans and Bethany Simpson had left New York mid July,
halfway through their summer semester. Paul had assured Bethany they
were only going to Australia for a holiday and would return by the end of
August, ready to resume their studies at NYU.
Realising that Bethany didn't fully believe Dean McIntyre's Book, Paul
played down the importance of finding Dean when they arrived in
Sydney. As it just so happened, Paul had an old school buddy who had
emigrated with his family to Australia many years ago and who had
written to Paul offering the hospitality of his home in Sydney, if Paul ever
visited.
That kind invitation had been accepted by Paul, and co-incidentally, it
was his friend Barton Matthews' address that Paul had given to Professor
Haywood when he had written about the Black Star Theory. A letter from
the professor had arrived at Barton's house just two weeks after Paul and
Bethany arrived.
Now, as Paul re-read the letter and his eyes rested on the words “if you
happen to run into Dean McIntyre in Australia, give him my best
regards...” Paul knew the holiday was over...he had to find Dean
McIntyre.
The harbour side city of Sydney was throbbing with high excitement as
thousands of visitors and locals were counting down the days to the
Commonwealth Games, which started on September 14, only one month
away. Paul and Bethany had fallen in love with the City, the Australian
94
people and the lifestyle. Bethany agreed with Paul that if it wasn't for
their studies and their families, they could quite easily live in Sydney.
Paul had been putting off tracking down Dean. Now, as he took a
short cut through Hyde Park to meet Bethany, he knew that time was up.
In front of him, there were three Hare Krishnas sitting on a park bench,
eating some fruit and talking among themselves.
Paul hesitated, somehow he knew that after today, his life would
change forever.
He stood before them and held out his hand in a friendly greeting. “Hi,
my name's Paul, do you mind if I talk to you for a moment?”
The devotees smiled and told him to sit and join them. They offered
him some fruit, which he gladly accepted.
“I'm on holidays from New York...actually, I've come to Australia to
find Dean McIntyre...you know, the guy who wrote THE BOOK,” Paul
said casually, as he chomped on an apple.
“Ahhh...THE BOOK,” said a devotee, smiling widely. He continued:
“We have many people asking the whereabouts of Dean, he has become
very famous since THE BOOK. I for one have never met him, but he has
visited several of our Ashrams around Sydney and I hear he has been
asked to give a spiritual blessing to the Commonwealth Games.”
Another devotee, a young girl with short cropped auburn hair, spoke
softly: “My, how times have changed, finally there is a universal
acceptance of spiritual New Age teachings.”
Paul finished his apple and said: “It is very important that I find Dean,
I don't have much time.”
A devotee held Paul's eyes intently and drifted into his thoughts.
“Don't panic, you will find Dean and you will become good friends.” The
devotee gently took Paul's hand and continued, “there will be much
knowledge shared between you and Dean, a great friendship will come out
of your meeting. You will find Dean living on a health farm just outside
Toowoomba in Queensland...now, go Paul, you are right, there is not
much time left.”
As Paul walked away from the Krishnas, he glanced at his watch...he
had fifteen minutes before he was due to meet Bethany, just enough time
to call in to Australian airlines on the way.
She was wearing a pair of tight fitting black jeans and a yellow
sweatshirt, her expression said she was tired and anxious as Paul ran
towards her, aware that he was late.
95
He grabbed her and kissed her cheek several times, while saying,
“sorry I'm late babe!”
Bethany had spent the morning shopping for souvenirs to take home
and was laden up with bags and packages. “Well, I'll forgive you if you
take me to that new restaurant we saw last week at 'The Rocks',” was her
stinging reply.
“Anything babe, anything for you, love you babe!”
That night, over a romantic candlelight dinner in the Oasis Restaurant,
Paul casually said, “I'd like to see a bit of Queensland before we go
home...so, I changed our tickets today to depart from Brisbane instead of
Sydney.”
Paul wasn't sure just how Bethany would react to the news, as he
hadn't even asked her opinion before changing the tickets.
Bethany smiled, and said, “Great...I think that's a wonderful idea. The
sunny Gold Coast.. Let’s stay there darling!”
A few moments later, Paul said, “Oh, by the way, I forgot to tell you, I
was talking to some Krishnas the other day and they mentioned that Dean
Mcintyre lived in Toowoomba, that's only a few hours drive from the
Gold Coast...maybe we can drive up there one day.”
Bethany searched Paul's eyes hard and a wily smirk crossed her pretty
face. “You're a sneak Paul Evans, you just want to go to Queensland to
find this Dean McIntyre who obsesses you...it's true, isn't it?”
A sheepish grin crawled across Paul's face and he took Bethany's hand
in his. “I promise babe, we'll spend a week in Surfers Paradise playing
tourist, then a week in Toowoomba, before we go home.”
Three days later, Paul and Bethany said their farewells to Barton and
his family, then boarded a plane for the one hour flight to Coolangatta
airport.
Surfers Paradise in the winter was everything they had dreamed it
would be. Clear, sunny days, good beach weather, even if the water was a
little cold...compared to Sydney, one could swim in it.
It was now only five days until they were due to return home. Paul had
hired a car and driven up to Toowoomba. The temperature in the
mountain areas was somewhat cooler, in fact much more cool than the
Gold Coast.
They sat in a coffee shop, warming up over cups of hot chocolate and
delicious croissants.
96
“So, darling, where do we go from here?” asked Bethany, matter-offactly. Paul glanced around the coffee shop and said, “It's a health farm
where he lives...somewhere!”
As the waitress passed their table, Paul asked her if she knew the
whereabouts of a health farm and if she had heard of Dean McIntyre.
“Yes, that's the Healing with Harmony Health Farm, about 15
kilometres West,” she said. She started giving him directions, when
suddenly she yelled out excitedly as she pointed out the window. “Oh!
There’s Leeanne and Helen walking across the street, that's Dean's mother
and sister, hang on, I'll call them over!”
Paul was so excited he couldn't stop talking. He was finally going to
meet Dean. Leeanne and Helen were impressed that the young New
Yorker had journeyed all this way, just to find Dean.
Bethany spoke, as Paul finally caught his breath. “We actually came to
Sydney for a holiday, but somehow, I always knew in the back of my
mind the true reason was Dean McIntyre.”
“Follow us back to the farm, you're very welcome to stay for the few
remaining days of your holiday,” said Leeanne, as they walked from the
coffee shop.
As they stopped outside the Farm, Paul saw a man bending down
gathering firewood which had recently been cut. Even before he turned
around, Paul knew it was Dean.
Leeanne honked the car horn and the young man turned around. “Hey
Dean! You have some visitors,” Helen yelled, as they all stepped from the
car.
Dean placed the wood back on the ground and casually strolled
towards them. Paul found his heart beating unusually fast...he felt a
youthful excitement like a small child at Christmas. Helen introduced
Paul and Bethany, saying how they had come all the way from New York
to meet him.
As Paul gazed into Dean's deep green eyes and studied his fine
handsome features, a wonderful sensation of complete happiness and bliss
overcame him. He felt like he could cry with joy!
Bethany grabbed Paul's hand; she felt the same sensations. Nothing
had prepared her for this meeting... this man standing in front of her was
actually taking her breath away with the inner beauty that he radiated.
Inside Dean's mind, he knew these two people had been sent to him,
they were special and would become an important part of his life. He
97
smiled widely, then embraced them both. An already strong vibration of
friendship was flowing between them. When Dean finally relaxed his
embrace, he noticed a small tear forming in Paul's eyes.
“Let's go inside and have a nice cup of tea or coffee,” said Leeanne,
walking towards the house.
That afternoon, over endless cups of tea and delicious scones and jam,
the story of Paul and Bethany's life and journey to Australia unfolded.
They spoke at great length about Professor Haywood and the “Black Star”
theory, of the letter the Professor had sent to Paul and his mention of
Dean.
“I'm so glad you found me Paul...the seriousness of what lies ahead
goes beyond the realms of human understanding or imagination. I know
that some of us will survive, but I don't know what type of new earth we
will be surviving on...right now, our world leaders have been discussing
the future catastrophes which will be occurring. They are very worried
about the future events that will be bombarding the planet.”
Paul looked intently at Dean and spoke: “You mean our President,
your Prime Minister? They know what is going on.…they believe it all?”
“Yes Paul, some of them know almost as much as I do. It's just the
way they are handling the situation, or should I say, not handling it!”
Paul looked a little mystified as he said, “Just how do you handle the
knowledge that the earth will soon be destroyed?”
Leeanne sensed it was time for Dean and Paul to be alone; she stood
and started to clean the cups and plates from the table. “Bethany and
Helen will help me do the dishes, why don't you take Paul out for a walk
around the farm, Dean?” she said.
“Yes, I'd like that,” Paul said, as he stood to leave the table.
Outside, the late afternoon sun was starting to fade, leaving fine silver
rays glistening through the many fruit trees that scattered the land. Paul
and Dean zipped up their heavy jackets against the cold mountain air.
“This is a beautiful farm Dean,” said Paul, as they walked towards the
small stream, which flowed along the Western boundary.
“Yes, it is a special place, Gordon has performed some wonderful
miracle healing here,” said Dean.
The two young men walked silently, admiring the richly grassed fields
where several horses and a cow grazed freely.
98
Dean stopped and leaned on the fence railing. “The animals of the
earth will be the first to know when the change is coming - some of the
wild ones already know,” he said.
Paul stood close beside him, leaned on the fence, then turned and
looked into Dean's eyes as he spoke. “Is there really nothing that can be
done? I mean, can't Sai Baba or yourself or the Pope, or someone...anyone
out there!...do something?”
“This is what Sai Baba and I have been trying to do Paul; by educating
man to find the God within himself. If there was an instant solution, it
would go against nature and the karmic law,” said Dean, wondering if
Paul understood what he was saying, however, he continued nonetheless:
“Look, most people live in the material world governed by egos and
desires. They reap the fruits of their actions - this brings about evolution
and devolution. If one was to intervene and solve their problems, it would
stop all action, all development - even evolution,” he said.
“That's why we all reincarnate, to learn. Could you imagine if we
never made any mistakes, if we never had anything to learn, if it was all
done for us! What would be the reason for life? Life is knowledge and
learning - that is what sets us apart from the wild beasts,” said Dean.
“Though over the years, much of mankind has become the beasts.
Suffering and misery are the acts of cosmic drama. God does not bring
forth these calamities - mankind does itself by way of retribution for his
own evil deeds!” Dean said.
Paul remembered the words Dean had written in THE BOOK, he did
understand, though it was so difficult to just accept it. He placed his arm
around Dean's shoulder as he spoke.
“I do understand. I know there can't be any way to stop this event, that
we must just accept it and leave it in God's hands, keep our faith!”
Dean smiled knowingly and continued, “The divine God can intervene
at times. He can prevent mankind from totally destroying himself and
other life forms. But, if God were to bring all suffering and disasters to a
halt, the same conditions would quickly rise again. A permanent change
can only take place when mankind raises it's consciousness to a higher
level than it is now.
“There has been far too much evil in the world for too long. Mankind
must change, he has the choice, it is never too late. God is the reality
Paul, the God within us all - our true self - the true person we were always
meant to be.”
99
The last rays of sunlight were setting behind the far hillside, leaving a
pale orange hue hugging at the cotton wool clouds...night would soon be
falling.
As they started to walk slowly back to the farm house, Paul said, “Did
you have a religious upbringing Dean?”
“Ahh, religion,” Dean said, “Well, I was baptized Church of England.
I can remember my mother used to take Helen and I to the Church quite
often. I was fascinated with the Holy Communion - I couldn't wait until I
was 13 years old, to be confirmed so I could finally taste the wine!”
Paul laughed - that had also been his thought when he was to be
confirmed.
“I am Anglican also,” he said.
“Paul, most religions are the same, we all worship and believe in the
same God. It's just that politics has divided religions into groups.
“The true universal religion is the belief in the Holy Bible - the belief
in Jesus Christ. Sometimes, religion gets confusing. If you can look at the
world as the Temple of the Universal Soul, each religion teaches man the
righteous path, he has only to know it and to march along it - if his vision
is straight, what can division do?
“The whole of mankind belongs to one religion - the religion of man.
For all men, God is the Father. As the children of one God, all men are
brothers. Unfortunately, so many of us have lost our way,” said Dean.
Paul said: “After I read THE BOOK, I thought you were Hindu.”
“I am a Christian and I also embrace the Hindu teachings. As I said, I
don't like to separate religions - I like to think of us all as God's children,”
replied Dean.
“I agree with you Dean, though the world has sure had its share of
crazy religious sects that have made it difficult for mainstream religions,”
said Paul.
He continued: “It's horrific to remember all those mass suicides years
ago in the States, the waste of human life, following some crazy nut who
promises them a better life. That Heaven's Gate sect mass suicide was the
worst...how seemingly normal people could let themselves be
brainwashed by a lunatic...how do they end up thinking like that?”
“Those seemingly normal people are like millions today out there,
Paul. They're totally disillusioned with life - they have given up and are
very vulnerable and will grasp at any new age sect that promises them a
better life than they have today. Maybe mainstream religion has let them
100
down, or maybe they are atheists with no direction,” said Dean in a quiet
voice.
Now, as they approached the front steps of the homestead, night had
fallen, leaving a deep darkness filling the sky. “After dinner tonight, I'll
hold a meditation in the Healing Pyramid - I hope you and Bethany will
join us, Paul,” said Dean.
“Sounds wonderful to me,” replied Paul.
Paul and Bethany walked in awe through the door of the Healing
Pyramid. The soft white and silver tonings enveloped their bodies and the
serene beauty captured their souls. The Pyramid held a peace and
tranquillity they had never experienced before.
Bethany squeezed Paul's hand and whispered: “This is like Heaven, I
feel like I'm floating in the clouds, it's beautiful Paul.”
Only Barbara and little Yianni were absent from the meditation this
evening. The others sat cross-legged in a large circle with Dean in the
centre. The delicate perfume from freshly cut jasmine hung in the air.
Several candles were glowing softly, as Dean started to speak.
“Tonight will be a special welcoming meditation for our new friends
Paul and Bethany. I want them to feel loved and cared for within our
circle. Paul and Bethany, I want you to relax and open your minds, to
trust and believe in what you will hear tonight, to go with the natural flow
of your consciousness. “Do not allow fear or doubt to come into your
thoughts.”
Bethany noticed a knowing smile cross Paul's face, he held Dean's
eyes, as Dean continued:
“Tonight, my higher soul Ilias and I will be speaking to you as one.
There is much he needs to tell us. If Bethany and Paul have any
questions, I would encourage them to ask freely,” said Dean.
Leeanne stood and switched on a music tape...soft delicate waves of a
melody floated through the Pyramid. Everyone started to relax and close
their eyes, as Dean began the meditation.
He led them through the colour chakras of the body and relaxed their
minds with his gentle words. Peace and harmony flowed through the
circle of friends. Dean drifted into his higher consciousness beyond the
alpha state and he became one with Ilias. The word “Bethany” rang out
loud and clear, as Ilias spoke:
“Bethany, Bethany!”
101
Even though Bethany was completely relaxed, she suddenly opened
her eyes to the sound of her name. She glanced around, everyone else had
their eyes closed. She looked at Dean - his eyes were wide open and
staring at her - he was in a deep trance.
As she held Dean's eyes, she felt calm and relaxed - his eyes never
flickered, they just held hers and bored deep into her soul. The voice that
spoke from Dean's mouth was not his, but that of a very old man with a
strange accent.
“Bethany, you are worried about your mother, are you not?”
“Yes, she is on my mind all the time, I worry about her health.”
Dean breathed slow and deeply, never moving his eyes from hers.
“Right now, your mother's health is fine, so is your Aunt Mapel. Your
mother's mind is full of worry over you, Bethany, she worries that you and
Paul will not be returning to New York.”
Bethany broke in and yelled: “What! What are you saying? We are
going back in a few days.”
“Shhh, shhh, don't get upset Bethany, calm down,” said Ilias' voice.
Bethany tapped Paul on the hand and he opened his eyes, startled. “Did
you hear what Dean said Paul?”
Paul's eyes were fixed on Dean, who continued, despite the
interruption.
“Please Bethany, listen to what I have to say. The city of New York
will be completely flooded within six months. It will happen very
quickly. Right now, President Newman has scientific evidence that the
City will be flooded within two years. He is planning an evacuation of the
City over a five year period - he wants to avoid a mass panic.
“Bethany, he doesn't have five years, New York only has five months.
You must get your mother and aunt out of there now, as soon as possible.”
Bethany squeezed Paul's hand with worry, she couldn't believe what
Dean was saying.
“You doubt what I say is true, don't you Bethany?” questioned Dean.
Bethany couldn't answer.
Dean continued: “Oh well, here we go, having to convince people
again.” The old man's voice sounded exasperated and tired. “Your Aunt
Mapel has two cats, one ginger, the other a black tom cat, and a noisy
cockatoo called Jack, who has a bad habit of screeching out some swear
words to people your Aunt Mapel dislikes. Your aunt has a lot of crazy
friends; she is a wonderful kind hearted lady. Your mother is always
102
pining over the loss of your father, she can't get over his
disappearance.....”
“Stop! stop!” cried Bethany. “I believe you Dean, or whoever you are.
There is no way you could have known those things - I believe you, I'm
sorry...forgive my doubting you.”
The sudden outburst caused the rest of the circle to open their eyes
with concern. Dean never flinched - he was still tightly connected with
Ilias. Bethany tried to control her emotions with deep, regular breaths.
Then she spoke:
“Please Dean, what can I do?”
“Paul and yourself must stay at The Haven. You will telephone your
mother and tell her you intend to stay another three weeks and that you
want her and your aunt to come to Australia for a few weeks holiday and
you will go back together. You must buy their tickets, so they cannot
refuse. I realize this is an untruth, but you cannot tell them the truth, they
would never believe you and they would never leave New York
permanently. This is the only way I can see you successfully getting them
to Australia. Psychically in a dream, I will show them this will happen. I
will help them. Paul's parents, who live in Canada now, will be safe, if
they listen to their inner selves. I will guide them also when the time is
necessary.”
Bethany felt more at ease. Somehow she knew this would all happen
just as Dean had said.
“Do you know what happened to my father? Is he alive or dead?” she
asked calmly now, with trust in her heart.
Dean was silent for an unusually long time. No one spoke; all was
quiet within the circle. Paul thought he saw a slight frown cross Dean's
still face, then Dean spoke:
“Bethany, your father, Thomas, is not in the spirit world - he is not
dead.”
Relief filled Bethany's beautiful ebony face and she relaxed her
shoulders, glancing sideways at Paul with a faint smile.
Dean continued: “Unfortunately, I have not been able to see where he
is, this has worried me, as it has never happened before. Ilias is confused
as to your father's whereabouts, he doesn't seem to be able to contact him
within the realms of his psychic capabilities. This could mean that your
father has become very highly evolved psychically and doesn't want to be
found or that somehow, his soul does not exist. This is a great mystery
103
that we will pursue at another time. All I can tell you is that your father is
alive...somewhere.”
Bethany smiled and said, “Thank you Dean, I have wanted to hear that
for so long.”
Suddenly Dean's face twitched and his fingers shook as if vibrating.
As Gordon watched, a strange familiar music rang through his mind - a
soft melody of harps and flutes.
Dean became still again and smiled. “You frightened me there for a
moment Dou Setta, just jumping into my higher consciousness out of the
blue!”
Gordon looked stunned - their alien friends were back!
Everyone in the circle looked at Dean with wide-eyed wonder as he
continued this strange conversation with a person called Dou Setta!
“No, I haven't told my mother about you yet...I haven't told anyone.
Ok...Ok...I will...now calm down, nothing is going to happen....yes, I
understand Dou Setta...we will meet you at The Haven in three days from
now.”
Dean was speaking as if to a child - everyone except Gordon was
wondering about the identity of this person who seemed to be a close
friend.
Concern crossed Leeanne's face, as her son slowly came out of his
trance and looked a little bewildered at Gordon. Everyone was waiting
with bated breath to hear just what Dean would say next. He smiled at
Gordon, and said: “So, what a surprise Gordon, our visitors will be back
in three days.”
“Sounds ridiculous, but I'd almost forgotten about them,” exclaimed
Gordon.
Suddenly, Nubon's deep voice echoed in Gordon's sub-conscious and
he jumped bolt upright.
“YOU are bloody ridiculous Gordon! How could you ever forget us?”
“Jeez! I can't believe this, where are you Nubon? How far does this
damn telepathy go?” cried Gordon.
“Ha ha...that, my friend, is for you to find out!”
Gordon noticed his pulse was starting to race. He was getting excited
at the prospect of meeting the aliens again. Dean looked calmly at his
mother, Helen, Bethany, Paul and Darren, then exclaimed: “Well, I'm glad
you're all sitting down. I have a very interesting story to tell you.”
104
As Dean recounted his and Gordon's meeting with the friendly aliens,
like it had been a completely natural occurrence, Gordon smiled inside at
the look of total disbelief on Helen and Bethany's faces - their mouths
were wide open in shock and all the colour had drained from their skin.
Leeanne had a strange, knowing smile on her face and Paul kept
saying: “I knew they were out there...I knew it! I just knew it Dean!”
When Helen and Bethany finally relaxed and seemed to accept the
story as fact, Gordon said to Dean: “What was Dou Setta concerned
about?”
“Oh, he had a premonition that there would be trouble at the
Commonwealth Games next month and that it would involve me. He
warned me to be very careful. Strange though, I don't have any bad
premonitions about the games, I only see a positive outcome, Gordon.”
Gordon shrugged his shoulders - he didn't feel anything one way or the
other, then he said: “Why don't we take Carlos with us down to Sydney just as a precaution.”
Dean agreed, because by then, Carlos would most likely welcome a
break from the heavy work at The Haven.
Leeanne stood and said to everyone: “Let's go back to the house and I'll
make some herbal tea, or coffee if Paul prefers, and Gordon can tell us his
story of Dou Setta and Nubon, I'm looking forward to meeting them.”
Everyone stood except Dean. He seemed unusually quiet now, deep in
thought. “You go ahead Mum, I'll be in later, I need some time alone.”
When they left, Dean stood and walked to a small cupboard and
opened a drawer. He took out a large photograph of Sai Baba and a
smaller photo of Kavita and her family, which he had taken the first time
they had met.
Dean held the image of Kavita deep in his soul, his heart was heavy, he
missed her so very much. He loved her beyond words. Sitting down, he
placed the photo of Sai Baba in front of him and the other beside it. Dean
started to chant a Hindu prayer as he held the eyes of Sai Baba.
Very soon, he was in a deep trance and his psychic mind connected
with Sai Baba's eyes. Soon, he was drifting away, high above his physical
body, until his higher consciousness connected with Sai Baba's.
Telepathically they spoke together. Dean asked if Kavita and her
family were safe with him. Sai Baba assured him they were, though
Kavita's mother was ill. “The children are safe and healthy, unfortunately,
105
Shanti is not well. Kavita's heart is heavy with sorrow since you left,
Dean. She loves you deeply, you two should be together.”
Dean asked Sai Baba if he could please try to convince Kavita to come
to Australia, as time was running out for the survival of India.
Sai Baba replied: “Next month, I will be leaving for Tibet with many
of my people. We plan to be there before Christmas. I have a safe
Ashram high in the mountains. As you know Dean, Tibet will be spared
when the apocalypse comes. I will endeavour to save as many of my
people as possible. Preparations are already in place. I will take Shanti
and the children with me and I will make sure that Kavita is safely on a
plane to Australia before I leave. This I will do, as I believe that you and
Kavita must be together.”
“Thank you my friend, my Baba, thank you so much,” replied Dean.
When Dean finally drifted out of the trance and returned to his normal
consciousness, he felt relieved and happy that soon he would be together
again with his soul mate, his one true love.
106
CHAPTER ELEVEN
Dou Setta and Nubon
“Hello Mom, yes it's Bethany...I'm fine, Australia is wonderful, Sydney
is a beautiful exciting city...Yes Mom, Paul is fine...listen, you must listen
to me Mom, Paul and I want to stay a few extra weeks, we have a chance
to buy some return tickets New York Brisbane and Brisbane New York,
for a discount price, actually, almost half price. We want to buy them for
you and Aunt Mapel. Come over to Australia for a few weeks holiday,
and then we'll go back together.
“We must buy the tickets within the next week, please Mom, Paul and
I want to do this for you. You can stay on the Gold Coast with us, you'll
love it here, please Mom, say you'll come?”
“No, you can't think about it,” Bethany continued, “don't worry about
the cats and the cockatoo, Aunt Mapel's friends can look after them for a
few weeks.”
Bethany held her breath as she could hear her mother relating the news
to Aunt Mapel, and the muffled sounds of their voices in the background.
Soon, she was back on the phone. “Alright, we will come, but only
because Aunt Mapel had a dream last night that she was flying to
Australia and she was very excited about having a holiday...you know
your Aunt, she firmly believes in her premonitions. You go ahead and
make the arrangements, telephone me in a few days…love you my baby,
give my love to Paul, take care, bye.”
The next telephone call Bethany made was to cancel their flight back
to New York, everything was going just as Dean had said. Tomorrow,
they would be on their way down to The Haven at Springbrook.
Gordon called GP on the mobile phone and prepared him and Trish for
their arrival, along with two new friends from New York. GP was
107
excited, “We'll have a barbecue. Bring some sausages and steak - make it
New York cut sirloin, and two cartons of Fosters beer. Carlos and
Antonio have finished all the fields...I think it's time for a bush party
Gordon!”
Gordon laughed...GP would never change - any excuse for a party.
Then he remembered the impending arrival of Dou Setta and
Nubon...well, this would be one party GP would never forget.
As the truck turned off the Springbrook Road and into the narrow track
leading to The Haven, Bethany turned to Helen and said, “Wow, this
certainly is off the beaten track, real Australian bush country!”
“It gets more dense farther on, if you don't know where you're going,
it's difficult to find, and that's the way we intend to keep it,” answered
Helen.
It was early afternoon by the time they arrived at the camp. Yianni
was the first to jump from the back of the truck, assisted by Paul, who had
been sitting in the back with him.
“I'm going to see Dundee, my crocodile friend!” the boy yelled to his
mother, as he raced in the direction of the tent. After the friendly
introductions of Paul and Bethany to GP and Trish, then Carlos and
Antonio, everyone sat down for a welcome cold drink and freshly made
sandwiches.
“GP,” said Dean, “tomorrow night is a full moon and I think we should
have our barbecue party then - let's have a quiet night tonight, I'm sure you
and Paul will have lots to discuss about the atmosphere and other things in
the cavern. And...ahh, well...you see, we may have some more visitors for
the barbecue.”
Leeanne laughed out loud and turned to Gordon. “The visitors!”
“Yes, well, a full moon party could be very interesting,” he said with a
strange looking smile on his face.
“So, just who are these visitors Dean?” GP asked.
Trish had a feeling there was some joke going on between Gordon,
Leeanne and Dean. Dean cleared his throat, then sat close beside GP and
placed an arm around his shoulder. “OK, well, it's like this...when Gordon
and I first found this property, we, ah, met some 'others' here one night.”
Dean hesitated, he was finding it somewhat difficult this time, to
explain. Gordon quickly interrupted. “Look GP, do you and Trish believe
in UFOs and aliens?”
108
The question came out so casually that it stunned everyone. Carlos
and Antonio sat quietly with their jaws dropped and eyes glued to Dean.
GP and Trish responded together. “What?!”
GP continued, “Don't tell me you saw a bloody flying saucer...then,
met some little ET's?”
Gordon couldn't help but laugh at the disbelief on everyone's faces.
Trish said in a serious tone: “So, now you've invited them for a barbecue
tomorrow night? Well, I hope they like sausages and baked beans!”
“No, I have a feeling that they're vegetarians,” replied Dean.
Now, Helen started to giggle, thinking how on earth was she going to
explain the aliens to little Yianni. Dean picked up his sister's thoughts and
said, “Don't worry Sis, Yianni will get on fabulously with them, he is
about the same height as Dou Setta!”
Sometime later, after Gordon and Dean recounted the facts, GP just
shrugged his shoulders and said: “Oh well, they say seeing is believing, so
let's just see what the full moon brings - could be one hell of a party
tomorrow night!”
Antonio looked at Carlos and said, “Let's go and grab a beer, this is all
too much for me!”
Gordon changed the subject and suggested GP take Paul and show him
the cavern and the electrical work he had done so far. With Paul's
knowledge of physics and science, his input would be invaluable. Helen,
Trish and Bethany went to check on Yianni in the tent and to prepare the
food for the evening meal. Tonight, everyone would be alone with their
own private thoughts as to the outcome of what tomorrow would bring!
Helen had said a friendly hello to Carlos and Antonio, but otherwise,
she had purposefully kept out of their way, thus avoiding conversation.
She was pleased with the heightened excitement about the visitors, as
Carlos and Antonio were always in deep conversation about their beliefs
or otherwise in UFOs. This felt like a welcome reprieve for Helen, as she
knew deep in her heart that at some time she would have to face her true
feelings for Carlos. It was this truth that made her shudder with both
excitement and fear.
Over breakfast the next morning, Leeanne asked Helen if she had told
Yianni about the visitors. Helen laughed as she flipped her long golden
hair from her shoulders, aware that Carlos had been trying to make eye
contact with her over breakfast.
109
“Yes, last night when I tucked him in his sleeping bag I casually said.
'Do you remember E.T. darling? Well we might be having a little E.T. and
a long skinny E.T. joining us for a barbecue tomorrow night!' ”
Everyone burst out laughing, then Helen continued, “You know what
he said? 'I know Mummy, I've been having dreams about meeting E.T. and
going onto his space ship'.”
Dean and Gordon stopped laughing and glanced at each other. Their
psychic minds were telling them, “Yianni will have the gift of telepathy.”
During the day, most of the time was spent in the cavern. GP had
lights running the length of the passageway and Carlos and Antonio had
levelled out the ground, so the walk along the usually uneven rocky and
sometimes steep passage was now a smooth, easy walk to the cavern
itself.
Bethany knew everything there was to know about hydroponics and
after testing the type of sand and soil on the cavern floor, she assured
Leeanne they could successfully grow almost anything, including some
types of grass. Compost would come mostly from animal manure.
Paul was busy taking rock samples to check for minerals and
researching exactly how successfully they would survive underground,
protected from whatever disasters were occurring above. “This cavern is
amazing,” he muttered to himself again and again as yet another new idea
flashed before him.
By mid-afternoon, they were on their way back to the camp with GP
and Paul walking close together in excited conversation about the new
ideas Paul was creating.
Dean walked beside his sister and held her hand tenderly. “I've noticed
you have been ignoring Carlos, he worries you, doesn't he, Sis?”
Helen bit her bottom lip, she knew she couldn't hide anything from her
brother, and said, “Dean, ever since I had Yianni, it's been my son and I ; I
like it that way, no complications with other people...”
Dean looked deep into his sister's eyes and said, “You call love a
complication?”
Helen snapped. “It's not love!”
Dean smiled. “Oh no? Then what do you call it? Listen to me Helen;
love is what life is all about. Not only to love our parents, our children,
our friends and neighbours - but to have that one soul binding
unconditional love that a man and woman naturally need for each other.
My love, my soul mate, is thousands of miles away. I worry sometimes if
110
I'll ever see Kavita again, but my faith, my belief in our love, is what
keeps me going, it's what keeps our love alive. God wants us all to have a
partner in this life...and not to walk alone.”
Small tears were starting to fall down Helen's cheeks, she quickly
wiped them away and said, “How many of us will be walking alone six
months from now…?”
Dean knew it was the uncertainty of the future, any future, which laid
ahead, that worried Helen. He kissed her cheek and said softly: “It's better
to have loved and lost, than never to have loved at all.”
Helen stopped crying and smiled. She loved her brother so much - she
would get through this, they would all get through it together.
Yianni ran behind Carlos and Antonio as they gathered wood from
trees they had cut weeks ago. The timber was now brown and dry, ready
for a fire. Yianni came running back with a handful of kindling, heading
for the barbecue. As he passed Dean and his mother, he said
nonchalantly, “What time will E.T be arriving for our barbecue Uncle
Dean?”
Dean stopped the boy and said, “Now, first of all, E.T.'s real name is
Dou Setta and his friend is called Nubon. I don't think they would
understand if you called them E.T. and I expect they would probably
arrive just in time for dinner!”
Helen broke up laughing - this was going to be a crazy night, she
thought...then she noticed Carlos had overheard the conversation and was
smiling widely at her. She smiled back with sparkling eyes that melted
together with his in harmony and love.
After sunset, everyone gathered around the barbecue, rugged up
heavily against the cold mountain air. The temperature was down to only
three degrees celsius this evening, but, thankfully, there was no wind
which would have made it much colder.
The full moon loomed like a giant silver balloon against the ink black
sky - the night seemed more still than usual, a heavy quietness hung over
the open field in front of them.
Leeanne broke the silence by grabbing a bottle of champagne from the
esky and proposing that she could really drink the whole bottle herself this
night!
Helen, Bethany and Trish laughed and added, “Well, there's six more
bottles in there, let's grab one each girls!”
111
As they popped the corks and filled their glasses, Gordon fetched the
scotch bottle and proceeded to pour drinks for the men, while little Yianni
said, “What do you think Dou Setta and his friends will want to drink?”
GP nearly choked on his scotch. “Jeez, we hadn't thought of that one!”
Dean answered casually, “Oh, they do drink red wine.”
Paul turned to Bethany, who looked flabbergasted at the ridiculous
conversation, and said, “I can't believe we are actually standing here
discussing what aliens are going to drink at our barbecue, we must be all
bloody mad!”
It was almost 9 pm, everyone was hungry and they had been snacking
on crackers and cheese and the occasional hot sausage from the barbecue the steaks were almost cooked and the potatoes were ready...just when
were these 'visitors' arriving?
“Come on, let's eat, we don't really have to wait for them, they may not
arrive for hours ,” said Gordon, noticing the champagne was starting to go
to Helen and Leeanne's heads - so what else was new!
Suddenly, from out of the pitch black sky, came a humming
sound...everyone stopped dead still, their eyes glued to the eerie emptiness
of the open field. From out of nowhere, a bright silver flat circular shape
appeared, it seemed to be about half the size of the moon and hovered just
below it a long way off in the distance.
Leeanne's eyes were wide in disbelief, as she exclaimed: “If that's the
space ship, it's huge...it's monstrous!”
The silver object seemed to be still, then from underneath, a small
flickering round light fell, then moved away from the larger object. As
the small light came in their direction, the huge round object disappeared
like it had never been there!
Helen bent down and picked Yianni up in her arms, she was feeling a
little frightened and squeezed her son tightly. Yianni pointed to the
object, which was becoming larger, as it headed towards the open field.
He yelled excitedly: “Mummy! Mummy! It’s coming, the space ship's
coming!”
GP hugged Trish as she kept saying, “I've had too much champagne,
now I'm seeing a flying saucer or maybe it's just a falling star that's self
propelled!”
GP laughed awkwardly and said, “Shit! I don't believe this, this is not
happening!”
112
Paul started clapping, he was excited beyond words, some of the others
joined in, as the reality of what was actually going to happen, finally hit
them like a ton of bricks!
The disc shaped object was only about 150 metres in front of them, the
humming was starting to fade as it descended lower. Finally, the landing
pads dropped down and hit the ground. The humming stopped, all was
quiet and still, not even the sound of a bird or a cricket. Everyone held
their breaths, as slowly, Dean and Gordon started walking towards the
craft. Dean turned and said, “You all stay here and please, just act
normal!”
Yianni wriggled from his mother's arms and ran towards Dean.
“Please Uncle Dean, please, can I come with you? I'm not afraid.”
Somehow, it felt very natural to take Yianni with them. “OK, if it's
right with your Mum,” Dean said.
Helen just shrugged her shoulders. “What the heck,” she thought,
“we're all crazy, and this night's crazy!”
“Go ahead darling,” was her weak reply.
Carlos walked over to Helen and placed a strong arm around her
shoulder, involuntarily she leaned her head against his chest. “Don't
worry Helen, he will be OK, would you like another champagne?” he
spoke caringly.
Helen looked up into Carlos' sensitive brooding eyes and felt like she
wanted to cry her heart out, but instead, she said, “No, this time, I need a
strong scotch.”
As Gordon and Dean approached the spacecraft, they noticed it was
somewhat smaller than the last one, with not as many portholes. Yianni,
who was snuggled up in Gordon's arms, kept saying, “Don't worry
Grandpa, I'm not afraid, I'm not scared.” Gordon could feel the fast
beating of the little boy's heart and his heavy breathing.
They stood in almost the same spot as last time and watched in awe as
the sliding door opened and the staircase fell to the ground.
The visitors had arrived, just as they promised.
Dou Setta and Nubon appeared at the door and started to walk down
the stairs, this time, two other aliens like Dou Setta, followed close
behind. Dean walked towards Dou Setta and greeted the tiny alien in the
same manner as before. Nubon held Gordon's eyes and telepathically
said, “So, this is your grandson, Gordon?”
113
Suddenly Yianni said excitedly, “How does he know I'm your
grandson? And why can't he talk out loud?”
Gordon nearly dropped Yianni, but instead he placed the boy carefully
on the ground and tried to answer casually. “Oh, they do speak out loud,
but they prefer to talk with their minds, it's called telepathy.”
Yianni gave Gordon a quizzical look and said, “that's a hard word tele
paty...”
Dou Setta walked close to Yianni and held out his hand. The boy was
a few inches shorter than him. Gordon and Dean watched with heavy
emotion in their hearts, as the two held hands in silent wonder. Dou
Setta's huge black eyes linked with Yianni's small brown pools of surprise,
as telepathically, they spoke. “How many earth years are you, Yianni?”
“I'm five, and I go to pre-school. Do you go to pre-school where you
live?”
“No, our schooling starts from the moment we are born, we never stop
learning.”
“Oh, I don't think I would like that, I like to play more than to learn.”
Dean had picked up on the conversation and interrupted, “Looks like
you two will have lots to talk about, let's go and meet the others, my
mother has the gift of telepathy also.”
Yianni still had hold of Dou Setta's hand and by the looks of it, he had
no intention of letting go... he had found a new friend.
As they started to walk towards the camp and the fire of the barbecue,
Gordon glanced behind and said to the other aliens following: “What are
your names?”
Telepathically, they responded. “We are called Karas, the name means
protectors of the Higher ones. We do not have individual names.”
“Ahh, interesting,” Gordon thought to himself.
Nubon was beside him now, and telepathically said, “I am happily
anticipating the meeting with your lady. When I have looked into the
crystal you gave me, I felt a unique love between you that transcends
all...”
Gordon smiled at Nubon. “Our journey has been a long and often
painful one. We lost each other on Atlantis when we were very young,
now, we are finally together for all eternity.”
The women were standing between Carlos and Antonio, who were
looking very apprehensive at the on coming visitors. Paul wanted to laugh
at the sight of Yianni, holding the alien's hand like they were good
114
buddies, but the seriousness of the moment caused him just to walk over
with a welcome greeting. “Welcome to earth, we are so pleased to meet
you...”
Dou Setta and Nubon realized this was a very special occasion and
spoke out loud in the English tongue. “We are pleased to meet you also,
and I must say that with our other contacts with the human race, none has
been on our own level of intelligence, until Dean, Ilias. This makes us
very pleased indeed, I'm sure there is much knowledge we can share
together.”
Nubon looked hard at Carlos and Antonio, he felt sure they were not
that happy with the situation now unfolding. He tried to put some
lightheartedness into his deep serious voice, and said to them, “My my,
you two humans are marvellously developed, physically...are there many
others on earth your size?”
Helen had to laugh despite herself, watching the tall skinny alien
creature, who looked like he was anorexic, admiring Carlos and Antonio,
who were more than three times his size in width. “This whole situation
is hilarious,” she thought and continued to laugh.
Suddenly, Nubon glared at her and stepped close to her face. Helen's
laughter stopped as she held the alien's dark eyes, his voice was filtering
through her mind. “It's not polite to laugh at me, young lady. I am not a
creature...I am a being, though somewhat different from you, and what is
this stupid word 'anorexic'? To me, most of you humans are just too fat
and huge!”
Helen felt ashamed at the way she had laughed, she didn't mean to
offend Nubon, and now, the alien could read her mind!
“Telepathy! Telepathy!” she cried with an excited voice, then smiled at
Nubon, and held his eyes, wondering if she could tell him silently how she
was sorry for what she had thought.
It worked. Nubon held out his long thin hand in friendship and
telepathically said, “It's OK, sometimes I'm just too sensitive.”
As Helen grasped his hand, a wonderful happiness and peace flowed
through her body. She liked Nubon, he was OK.
Helen kept hold of Nubon's hand and guided him towards her mother.
The alien's eyes sparkled and his thin mouth revealed a slight smile as
Helen introduced them. Leeanne smiled as her thoughts mingled with
Nubon's. Telepathically, they held a long conversation until Gordon
115
interrupted with the statement that they should all eat, otherwise the meat
would be burnt.
Dean went to fetch a bottle of red wine and two glasses, inviting the
visitors to sit beside the barbecue and relax.
Carlos and Antonio had realized that there was nothing to worry
about...the aliens were no threat, in fact, they were very human in their
thinking and also had a sense of humour.
Paul placed a piece of steak and a sausage on a plate, along with fried
potatoes, and handed it to Dou Setta. The small alien looked strangely at
the contents of the plate, and said easily: “So, what do I do with this?”
Paul kneeled down and spoke like he would to a child. “This is what
we call food - you eat it!”
“What!?” Dou Setta exclaimed in disbelief. “These things you have
been burning on the fire, you now, eat! It looks like burnt wood!”
Nubon looked closer at the food on the barbecue and laughed out loud.
“You burn this strange type of food, and then you eat it? You have to be
mad!”
Dean came to the rescue, and said to everyone: “I was sure they would
be vegetarians...no problems, we have plenty of vegetables and fruit.”
Bethany and Helen went over to the tent and prepared several bowls of
suitable food and returned to a thankful looking Dou Setta, who said
gratefully: “Thank you, we are very hungry and I was a little worried that
you didn't know what food was.”
Everyone started to laugh - tonight would be one barbecue they would
never forget. Little Yianni, who was sitting close beside Dou Setta,
squeezed lots of tomato sauce over his sausage and then tried enticing the
alien to take a bite.
“It's OK Dou Setta, the tomato sauce is from tomatoes, it's vegetarian.
Please just take a little bite, try it, everyone eats sausages at a barbecue!”
Dou Setta stared intently at the strange long thin burnt object covered
in red sauce...it looked revolting to him. Suddenly, he shrugged his
shoulders just like a human and cautiously opened his mouth and bit the
end. Everyone held their breath in anticipation of a reaction...the reaction
came quickly and loudly! The small piece of sausage was spat out so
quickly that Yianni jumped in fright.
“Water! Water!” yelled Dou Setta, “that was vile!”
Yianni was not finished yet - he was persistent and took some fried
potatoes and baked beans from the barbecue. “Try these, everyone loves
116
chips and baked beans,” he said, placing a small piece of potato onto his
fork, holding it close to Dou Setta's mouth, prompting him to eat it.
Everyone watched in silent wonder as the small alien ate the potato
and seemed pleased with the taste. Leeanne caught Gordon's eye - there
was a tear starting to roll down his cheek, as she whispered to him, “I
remember feeding Yianni potatoes like that, years ago, and could you ever
believe, here he is feeding this little alien!”
“I know, I don't know whether I want to laugh or cry,” Gordon replied.
GP and Trish decided in the true Santorini fashion, that this was going
to be a wild party. “I mean, how many times do you get a chance to party
with visitors from another planet?” said GP, as he proceeded to play
'Down Under' from the group, Men at Work.
As the music blared loudly through the dark cold night, Yianni jumped
up and said,” I'm going to get Dundee! He can't miss out on this party,
come on Dou Setta, come with me and meet Dundee, my pet crocodile!”
Everyone laughed, as Yianni grabbed Dou Setta by the hand and
pulled him in the direction of the tent.
The scream that came from the tent was shrill and piercing, and,
definitely not human! The Karas and Gordon and Dean ran to the tent to
investigate, knowing all too well the probable effect that Dundee would be
having on the alien.
Inside, Yianni was standing with Dundee tucked under his arm - the
crocodile was almost his size - a look of disbelief on his innocent cherub
face. Crouched behind boxes of food and supplies, was Dou Setta,
shaking like a leaf. Dean bent down and cradled the trembling alien in his
arms and whispered, “It's alright, the animal is not alive, it is stuffed!”
Dou Setta held tight to Dean and said in a frightened voice, “How can
you kill animals and then stuff them? That is barbaric.”
Dean tried as best he could to explain and finally Dou Setta calmed
down, though he didn't really want to meet Dundee right at the moment.
Back at the barbecue, the music was now turning into Greek bouzouki
with Helen teaching Carlos and Antonio Zorba's dance. Paul and Bethany
joined in, along with Trish and GP.. Nubon and the other aliens looked on
in disbelief at the strange line of humans twisting their bodies and
throwing their legs in the air. All of a sudden, Helen left the line and ran
to grab Nubon's hand. “Come on, it's easy, I'll teach you to dance!” she
laughed.
117
Nubon couldn't refuse, even though it seemed very strange, he saw no
harm or discomfort in what they were doing.
On the night of the full moon, in the middle of the Australian bush,
humans and aliens were doing Greek dancing around a barbecue - this
would definitely be a night that no one would ever forget!
Dou Setta had calmed down after his meeting with Dundee and was
happily enjoying a glass of red wine, soon, it would be time for them to
leave. Finally, GP stopped the Greek music and changed it to the calm
melody of Enya. The visitors seemed to like it. The embers from the fire
were starting to fade... Gordon threw another log on the fire and placed a
rug around Leeanne, who seemed tired. Everyone sat in a circle, knowing
soon it would be time for farewells.
Dou Setta spoke out loud to those who could hear him. “This has been
wonderful, though sometimes a strange and frightening experience for us
tonight. We thank you for your hospitality and friendship... this is how we
wanted our arrival on your planet to be. Unfortunately, most humans
don't believe we exist, they are terrified of the unknown, they look on
aliens and UFOs with misguided fear.
“I must acknowledge that other aliens, unlike us, evil menacing
creatures, have also visited your planet as well. This is a serious concern
for us, as these creatures are a threat to us and our planet as well. The
large spacecraft you saw tonight was one of three mother ships that we
occupy. Recently, we have sent several shuttlecraft to various locations
around earth, such as America, Mexico, France and Russia, to warn
humans of the coming disaster which will destroy much of your planet.
Some of your people are starting to believe what we say, unfortunately,
your world leaders will never trust us.
“When the time of apocalypse is near, we will attempt to rescue groups
of people who are in positions where it is possible for us to carry this out.
All I can say, is that we will endeavour to do what we can to help. I
cannot promise anything, as we have our own safety to consider, you
understand?” Dou Setta said.
Yianni was sound asleep on his mother's lap, rugged up in a blanket.
Dou Setta stood beside the sleeping boy and gazed at him in wonder. “It
has been an exciting day for Yianni, he is special, your son, having the gift
of telepathy at such an early age. Please say goodbye for me, I'm sure we
will meet again,” he said.
118
Helen smiled and held Dou Setta's hand, saying, “He will miss you, we
will all miss you, God be with you, my little friend.”
Finally, everyone had said their farewells amid a few choked voices
and held back tears. Nubon turned to Carlos and said, “Keep a close
watch on Dean at the Commonwealth Games, we feel there are those who
would do him harm,” he said.
“Don't worry, I will be close by all the time,” was Carlos' reply.
The small group of people stood huddled by the fading fire, their eyes
fixed on the backs of their new found friends walking towards the
spacecraft. Three short figures and a tall thin figure, beings, not creatures
as Nubon had pointed out. Alien by word, but not by feeling - friends
they would always remember.
119
CHAPTER TWELVE
Sydney – Commonwealth Games - September
A tall brown haired man with a nondescript face, a face one would call
blank, devoid of any emotion, cold grey eyes that matched his dark grey
suit, walked into the foyer of the Toowoomba Motel.
He stood in front of the reception desk and tapped his fingers
impatiently on the polished oak surface, noticing the receptionist was on
the telephone.
“Excuse me madam, are there any messages for me, room 18?” his
voice was deep and cold.
The receptionist quickly finished her phone call and walked towards
him. “Ah, Mr. Smith, yes, there is a message for you,” she said, handing
him a slip of paper. His eyes met hers - a cold, uncomfortable feeling slid
through her body. Hurriedly, she returned to her duties and buried her
head in some books.
John Smith, as he called himself this time, returned to his room, threw
off his jacket and shoes and poured himself a scotch and water.
“Hello, it's me...they will be arriving tomorrow morning, 900
hours...OK, you meet us here about mid-day, come straight to room 18.”
John Smith lay down on the bed and savoured the smooth scotch, he
would have a few more, watch TV and just relax for the rest of the day.
He leaned over and opened his brief case. Inside, on top of papers and
maps, was his old faithful .38 Smith and Wesson. He ran his hands over
the smooth, shiny surface of the gun and said. “We may have some work
again, soon, just like the old days!”
Dean, Leeanne, Gordon and Carlos were busy preparing for their trip
to Sydney for the Commonwealth Games, which started the next week.
120
Bethany's mother and aunt would arrive in Brisbane ten days from now,
meanwhile, Paul and Bethany had decided to stay at the Springbrook
Haven with GP and Trish, until her mother and aunt arrived.
Originally, Helen and Yianni had planned to travel to Sydney as well,
but the past few days, Yianni had been in bed with a sore throat. Now, as
Helen looked once again down her son's throat, she turned to Darren, who
was looking on. “His tonsils are huge and red, just as I thought, Darren,
it's tonsillitis,” she said, in a worried voice.
“He will be OK, I have a very good natural herbal antibiotic. We'll
start him on a course straight away,” replied Darren, taking charge of the
situation. “Plenty of fluids, vitamin C, lots of rest and he'll be fine next
week, don't worry Helen, he's a very strong boy.”
Leeanne packed the last of the sandwiches and fruit into the esky and
closed the lid. “That should sustain them enough for the long twelve hour
drive to Sydney,” she thought. She checked her watch - it was almost 6
am, time to go!
Everyone gave Yianni a big hug and kiss as they left the sick little boy
they knew would love to have been going with them. “We should be back
in about three to four weeks, take care,” Gordon yelled, as they drove off.
Helen walked back inside. She would spend this afternoon helping
Barbara make a batch of orange and peach jam.
John Smith had just finished his hamburger and was washing it down
with a can of fourex beer, when a loud knock came to the door. Three
men walked into room 18 at the Toowoomba Motel. They wore black
jeans and heavy khaki jackets. In their hands, they carried black duffel
bags.
These three men were ex-commandos from the United States Army.
Another knock on the door, and a heavyset man with dark hair, wearing a
navy suit and tie, joined the men in room 18.
John Smith shook the hand of Special Agent Harry Waterfield, then
offered him a beer. “So Harry, what have you found out about the farm
and Mr. McIntyre?”
Straight down to business, that's the way John Smith always worked,
and he had worked under cover for the CIA now for more than ten years.
This job was going to be a piece of cake for him.
“McIntyre and three others left the farm early this morning, heading
for Sydney I expect. The owner of the farm, a guy in his late fifties called
121
Darren, and the old woman Barbara, who works there, they stayed
behind...McIntyre's sister and her son are at the farm too, and no one
else,” said Harry.
“Ah ha…his sister and her son...how convenient, this operation will be
so easy, we will go over the details, then relax until tomorrow night,” said
Smith, a sly smile crossing his hardened face.
Only twelve hours after Darren gave Yianni the course of herbal
antibiotics, the little boy was feeling better. His temperature had faded
and he could swallow cool, soft yoghurt. Helen was feeling relieved and
finally had a good six hour sleep without Yianni waking in pain.
Leeanne had said she would call the morning after they arrived in
Sydney, now, when the phone rang, Helen knew it was her mother.
“Hi Mum! Yes...yes, Yianni is feeling much better. OK,...ring me
back in a few days, we can talk longer, bye.”
As Leeanne placed the receiver down on the telephone, she had a
terrible premonition - it was like her stomach was falling to the ground.
She steadied herself, and sat on the sofa. She could hear Helen's voice
ringing in her ears and there was fear in her voice.
Gordon walked over to Leeanne and handed her a cup of coffee. He
noticed her face was pale and drawn. “What's wrong darling? You don't
look well,” he said.
Leeanne placed the coffee on the side table and spoke with tension in
her voice. “I don't know...I just spoke to Helen and I have a terrible feeling
something is wrong...but it isn't...she said Yianni was much better and
everything was fine.”
Gordon bent down and kissed his wife lovingly, reassuring her that it
was probably just the long tiring journey to Sydney and the worry over
Yianni. “Why don't you stay at the Hotel today, take it easy, Dean has
several meetings to attend, Carlos and I will accompany him. When we
return, I will take you out for dinner, just the two of us.”
The few days leading up to the opening of the Commonwealth Games
were filled with a million places to go and so many people to see. Dean's
popularity was spreading like wild fire through the city of Sydney, with
various organisations and clubs wanting him to speak at functions. Even
the Krishna groups had to wait their turn for 'Sanjay', as he was now being
called by the New Agers, to address their gatherings at various Ashrams.
122
Dean had attended a meeting with several clergy of the Anglican
Church, and a pastor from the Uniting Church. After this meeting, Dean
was invited to speak to their parishioners at an informal gathering. After
the emotional 'sermon', there wasn't a dry eye to be found. Even the
priests and the pastor had tears trickling down their cheeks. Never before
had a young man spoken with such great wisdom and understanding, the
words of truth, love and faith, that would make such a huge difference to
their lives.
Meanwhile, the Press was having a field day with him. Some papers
claimed that 'Sanjay' was the new voice of hope for all mankind, whilst
others dismissed him as a new age fanatic who seemed too good to be
true. “Just where did he come from? This young man who wrote the
controversial BOOK.”
They either loved him or feared him!
The new Prime Minister of Australia, Albert Braithwaite, had met
Dean on a previous occasion and had liked the young man immensely.
So, when his two sons arrived home from a holiday in India, raving on
about the wonderful humanitarian work that a young Australian called
Dean McIntyre was doing, Albert decided he would ask Dean to give a
spiritual blessing at the opening of the games, on behalf of the youth of
the day. The official blessing would be given first by the Archbishop,
followed by a few words from Dean.
Now that time was here.
Leeanne and Gordon sat in the front row of the Games stadium; they
were both nervous and proud as they watched Dean walk slowly up the
stairs to the dais. Ten rows behind Leeanne and Gordon sat two men, one
wore a navy turtleneck sweater, the other a black sports jacket and
checked scarf. They would never warrant a second glance.
Dean gave a short meaningful blessing to the games on behalf of the
youth of Australia, then stood back and watched, as the opening ceremony
began. The man in the sports jacket dialled a number on his mobile
phone. “Hello, yes...no, he didn't say anything, I think he'll talk at the
close of the games. OK, go ahead with the preparations...”
The man lit a cigarette, inhaled deeply, then dialled another number.
“Hi! Waterfield!...yes...go ahead as we planned, bring them to Katoomba
now.
Ring me when you arrive...and don't leave any garbage
behind...understood?”
123
Helen sat on the side of Yianni's bed and fed her son small spoonfuls
of nourishing vegetable broth, which Barbara had made. Within a few
moments, the bowl was empty.
“My throat feels a lot better Mummy, please can I have some ice cream
now?”
“Of course you can, darling, but after that, you must go to sleep,”
Helen replied, walking towards the kitchen.
Outside the homestead, in the cold dark Toowoomba night, stood
Smith, Waterfield and the three commandos, hidden behind a clump of
trees.
Waterfield checked his watch; it was 2100 hours. The commandos
checked their semi-automatic weapons, and Smith ran his hand lovingly
over the barrel of his .38 Smith and Wesson revolver.
Darren was sitting in the lounge room, reading some books. Barbara
was in the kitchen, and Helen, who had just checked that her son was fast
asleep upstairs, was now walking towards Darren, when all hell broke
loose!
Suddenly, the front door was kicked in with such force that Helen
screamed in fright. Darren jumped bolt upright, dropping his book, his
eyes wide with fear. Three men, clad in dark clothing, wearing black
balaclavas and wielding machine guns, walked through the door.
They held the guns pointed at Helen and Darren, whose mouths were
wide open in shock!
Behind them, walked two men, one wore jeans, the other wore a dark
grey suit, which looked out of place. He carried a gun in his right hand.
Casually, he walked towards Helen and stood only a few feet from her.
“Listen to me, Miss McIntyre, if you want to keep that pretty head on
your shoulders, just do as I say and don't ask questions, understood?”
Helen tried desperately to gather her senses. She thought, silently,
“This cannot be happening! Oh God! Please help, what is going on?!”
Helen nodded her head, then the fighter in her took over and she
stiffened her shoulders and glared defiantly back at the intruder, yelling
forcefully, almost spitting in his face: “What in the bloody hell do you
want?”
In one split second, the man slapped her so hard across the face, she
flew across the floor, knocking over the coffee table and vase of flowers.
Stunned, Helen lay on the floor, catching her breath. Darren didn't think
124
twice, he made a run for the side door. That was a mistake. The noise
from the semi-automatic rang through the house, bullets slammed into
Darren's back and his lifeless body slumped over the couch.
Helen screamed a long, piercing scream, filled with horror. Barbara
came running out of the kitchen, wielding a large knife. She only ran a
few feet, when suddenly her body fell to the floor, felled by a single shot
to the head. The shot came from the man in the grey suit. Helen noticed
with revulsion that the man was stroking his gun will callous pride.
Suddenly, Yianni's cries from upstairs made Helen jump to her feet
and walk towards the stairs. She turned and screamed at her attackers.
“So! You want to kill me and my son too? Well! bloody well shoot me in
the back, why don't you? I'm going to get my son!”
Smith signalled to the commandos not to shoot, smiling inside himself
and thinking, “well, the lady has guts!”
He spoke to Helen. “Go and get your kid, pack some clothes in a bag,
we're going for a long ride.” Then, to one of the commandos, “Go with
her and make sure she doesn't try anything stupid.”
All was quiet for a while, then everyone downstairs heard the sudden
screaming and yelling of Helen's voice and the banging of furniture and
breaking of glass. Smith watched with a smirk on his face, as the
commando came walking back down the stairs with Helen kicking and
screaming under one arm and Yianni under the other.
As the commando dropped them both on the floor, he said, “Shit! She's
a damn wild cat, this one!”
The humour faded from Smith's face as he grabbed Yianni and held his
gun to the boy's shaking head. “If you don't control yourself young lady,
I'll have to waste your son - then you'll have something to scream
about...now, shut up!!”
Leeanne dialled the number at the Healing Farm. There was no
answer; strange, it was nine in the morning, someone should have been
there...she tried fifteen minutes later, still no answer. When she
mentioned this to Gordon, he said maybe they had all gone into
Toowoomba for the morning, especially if Yianni was feeling better.
Gordon said he would try ringing later that evening.
Unfortunately, that never happened, as Gordon and Leeanne were
caught up with the endless stream of parties and functions during the
evening and days full of Commonwealth events.
125
The light Cessna aircraft had left a private airstrip about 80 kilometres
South of Toowoomba, in the early hours of the morning. Now, by mid
morning, it was circling an area of dense bushland about 15 kilometres
outside Katoomba, a town situated in the Blue Mountains area, about 185
kilometres West of Sydney.
Helen was nursing Yianni, who was thankfully fast asleep, after crying
for the past hour. Beside her, in her handbag, were Yianni's antibiotics, a
bottle of vitamin C, a face washer and a small pocketknife disguised as a
pen. Helen had no idea what these men wanted with her and her son, but
she did know they were professionals and very dangerous. She had to
keep alert to everything around her.
She strained her ears, and heard the pilot say: “I'll circle Katoomba
once more, then we can take her down.”
Thankfully, she knew where Katoomba was - she had been there for a
holiday with her parents when she was twelve.
The moment the plane landed, Helen and Yianni were blindfolded and
led into a waiting car. They drove in silence for approximately 20
minutes, she surmised, as she counted the minutes away in her head.
When the car finally stopped, they were led along a path, then up a set
of stairs and into a room. Smith took the blindfold off Yianni, then Helen.
His cold grey eyes met hers and he spoke with a menacing tone. “I hope
you enjoyed your flight Miss. McIntyre.” Helen stared back, without
replying. He continued, “this will be your home for a couple of weeks.
My men will make sure you and your son are looked after. No harm will
come to you if you behave and do as we say. If you try to escape, I'm
afraid you'll be shot. Do you understand?”
Helen never took her eyes from his, and answered calmly, “Yes.” She
glanced around casually, they were in an apartment or a small house, all
the windows were barred up and painted black. There was little furniture
and a small kitchen was off to the right.
Smith pushed her in the direction of another room, saying, “This
bedroom is for you and your son. It will be locked during the night. The
bathroom is to your left.”
Helen sat on the bed and cradled her son as he started to cry again.
The only window in the bedroom had thick steel bars over it, but
thankfully, it was not painted black and allowed a small amount of
sunlight into the cold, drab room.
126
Looking back through the door, Helen noticed Smith and Waterfield in
a huddled conversation with the other men. “We'll be gone for a few
days, when we return, we'll do the video,” Smith said to the commandos.
He and Waterfield then walked out the door.
Leeanne was starting to panic. After a week, there was still no answer
at the farm. Gordon was on the mobile to GP at Springbrook. “Take
Antonio with you, GP, drive up the farm and see what's going on, I'm
starting to worry.” Gordon put the phone down and looked at Leeanne,
who was beside herself with fear. He didn't want to admit it, but, like his
wife, he was now getting a premonition that something was terribly
wrong.
“GP said he would call the moment they arrive there, he was leaving
straight away,” said Gordon, placing a reassuring arm around Leeanne's
shoulders.
Three hours later, Gordon's mobile phone rang. Before he answered it,
he knew there was trouble, a cold darkness fell over his body. “It's GP,
Gordon...nobody's here, the farm is deserted...I've just called the
Toowoomba Police.”
Gordon's heart skipped a beat and a cold sweat started to run down his
back, as GP continued: “The front door was smashed in, some furniture
broken, looks like there's been a fight. Listen Gordon; take it easy, I'll get
the cops to call you when they arrive. Stay where you are, I'll ring as soon
as I know more...”
The look on Gordon's face said it all to Leeanne. She flung her arms
around his neck and cried hysterically. “What's happened? Oh God! No!”
Half an hour later, the phone rang again. “Mr. Stirling? This is
Sergeant Lawton from Toowoomba Police. It looks like there has been
some drama here, we have found blood stains on the carpet in the lounge
room, and more spattered all over the couch. Someone has been hurt, but
there are no bodies. My men are conducting a thorough search of the
property, I will call you the moment I know more. I'm sorry, please tell
your wife we will do all we can...”
Leeanne wanted to catch the next plane back to Brisbane, but, Gordon
thought rationally, it was the closing of the games day after tomorrow.
Dean had a special speech prepared, a speech he wanted the world to hear.
Once that was over, they could all fly straight back. Nothing could be
127
achieved by their returning now, a few days would make no difference,
and besides, the police were in control.
Reluctantly, Leeanne agreed, as now her psychic mind was telling her
Helen and Yianni were O.K., though she still felt fear and terror
surrounding her thoughts.
Helen turned the dial on the heater up. She could feel the coldness of
Katoomba seeping through the floorboards. Yianni was lying quietly on
the bed, reading a comic book the commandos had given him, together
with a McDonalds cheeseburger and chocolate sundae.
Suddenly, the door opened and Waterfield walked in with a video
camera in one hand and a tripod in the other. The three commandos
followed him. Helen jumped to her feet, she had a bad feeling about this.
As Waterfield positioned the tripod and attached the camera, he casually
said, “We are going to make a short video of you and your son....we need
some real life acting!”
One of the commandos took a length of rope and walked over to
Yianni and grabbed him. The boy started screaming as the commando
tied his hands and legs together roughly. Helen couldn't contain herself
and let fly with a forceful punch to the side of the commando's face.
“Wait! Wait! I'm not ready for action yet!” yelled Waterfield, stopping
the commando from hitting Helen. “Gag the kid, I don't need him
screaming just now.”
The other commandos tied Helen's hands behind her back and her legs
together, then pushed her back on the bed. Waterfield adjusted the
camera, then stood back, surveying the scene. “OK, let's get this over
with! Action!”
One commando sat beside Helen with a gun pointed to her head. The
other walked over and forcefully ripped open the shirt she was wearing,
exposing a white lace brassiere. Helen's mind was running in horrific
circles of cold fear, as slowly, the commando produced a long bladed
knife from his side belt.
He slid the blade between her breasts. Helen thought she would faint
with fear, her blood was suddenly cold in her veins. Slowly, the blade cut
through the soft fabric of her bra, exposing her heaving breasts, where
small droplets of perspiration were forming. Roughly, the commando
ripped her bra off, now, she was naked from the waist up. He caressed the
128
firm ripe breasts and sadistically smiled for the camera, whilst pinching
her nipples hard.
Helen jumped at the sudden pain; heavy tears were now falling from
her eyes. She tried to wriggle away from her abuser's hand, but the hand
came up and hit her hard against the face - she screamed a long, deep, pain
filled scream and started to cry hysterically.
The other commando took the gag from Yianni's mouth and the boy
screamed and yelled: “Stop it! Stop it! Stop hurting my mother!”
Waterfield smiled and looked pleased, as he said, “Cut! That's fine, we
have what we need.”
Leeanne and Gordon had booked their flight back to Brisbane for two
hours after Dean's closing speech, there was just enough time to make it to
the airport. Carlos was beside himself with worry over Helen and Yianni;
he just wanted to get his hands on whoever had taken them. Psychically,
Dean was feeling they were close by and not anywhere near Toowoomba.
The closing ceremony was almost ready to begin. The Prime Minister
and the Commonwealth officials had made their speeches - now, it was
time for Dean to say a few words. A few words only, was what he had
told the officials.
The TV cameras started to roll, as Dean walked up to the dais, dressed
splendidly in a white and purple kaftan. The crowd started to cheer and
applaud - they loved this simple young Australian.
As Dean adjusted the microphone, he could sense a deep concern
troubling Ilias. Something was going to happen...in a split second, he
remembered Dou Setta's warning about the Games. Dean pushed the
worry out of his mind; he knew he had to speak the truth - that was all that
mattered right now.
The NBN World News camera was locked on his face, together with
dozens of other television stations - the crowd was quiet, waiting for his
words...he began....
“Just as the Millennium Flame will soon die, only to be lit again four
years from now, so will the light of life as we know it, die on this earth.
My call is to all the people of the world, people of all races and colours; of
all religions - the rich, the poor, the healthy and the sick.
“I will tell you of future events which will be monstrous and gigantic
in scope and will change the earth and the people living here for all
129
time...” There was some loud murmuring from the crowd and a few shouts
of “what are you saying??”
The Games officials spoke quickly with the Prime Minister. This was
not what they had expected Dean to say. The cameras kept rolling, as
Dean continued, unflustered:
“For those of you out there who have read THE BOOK and
understood my words, you know what I am saying. For those who
haven't, please heed these words. At this very moment, our world leaders
are running in circles, trying to contain a possible World War Three
disaster, but, in truth, they will almost be responsible for it.”
The Prime Minister nearly fainted; all the colour drained from his face.
“How on earth could Dean know about the North Korea problem?” he
thought. The officials suggested they stop him from speaking any more
rubbish, as the crowd was now cheering him on. The Prime Minister
couldn't speak - in truth he wanted to hear more.
Dean continued, without a side glance: “Do not fear, as this war will
never happen. A nuclear war would destroy all mankind and achieve
nothing. The planet earth will face a natural disaster, not one which is
man made. This disaster will cause the planet to turn on its axis. Much of
the land will be destroyed and covered with water and ice.
“New lands will rise and flourish. Unfortunately, most of the human
race will perish. All of this, I have predicted in THE BOOK. If you panic
now, you will only kill yourselves earlier. This is the fear our leaders
have, that is why they have kept so much of the truth from you.
“You must stop and think, look to your inner selves, stay close to your
loved ones, feel your bond with God. Give thanks in prayer for what you
have had and keep faith and hope for a new beginning. Believe in your
heart that this will not be the end. Look around, and give out love to all
that you see and feel. Read and understand the Divine Laws from ancient
Atlantis. Then see where we humans, with our own free will, have chosen
the wrong path. Understand and accept what we have done, for there is no
one else to blame.
“Nothing can change what will happen, it is too late. There are no
solutions, we must accept our future, a future beyond Armageddon, and
leave it in the hands of God.
“We must believe and hope that the lessons we have learnt in this life
will guide us along the path of Truth, Love and Understanding in our next
incarnation and that we will go on to live a life of peace and love,
130
surrounded by the light of God and that mankind will live within this
spiritual light for all eternity.
“May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you always.”
A hush fell over the crowd, the TV cameras were still rolling, when,
suddenly, out of nowhere, two men dressed in dark suits and wielding ID
cards, grabbed Dean and handcuffed him.
Everyone was shouting and yelling. The Prime Minister faced Dean,
with anger in his voice. “Why? Why did you say all those things? You
have made a terrible mistake young man.”
The Games officials were firing orders at security men to try to calm
the noisy crowd. Someone suggested they start the closing ceremony and
get on with it!
Dean held the Prime Minister's eyes and said defiantly: “Albert, you
know it was all true.” The two men holding Dean in a tight grip said, “We
are from the CIA special branch. Mr. McIntyre is wanted in the US He is
a dangerous fanatic.” The men flashed their IDs and legal papers with the
US President's stamp and signature on them. “Please Prime Minister, we
must interrogate him, it is of utmost importance to our national security!”
The Prime Minister looked helplessly at Dean, then called one of his
security men. “Go with these men, take them to my room, next to the
Games office, then wait outside until they have finished talking with Mr.
McIntyre. I'll be along shortly. I must go on television and apologize for
what Dean has said, we can't have global panic,” he said.
Leeanne and Gordon were frantic when they saw Dean being
handcuffed, and ran to the dais. Carlos flew in front of them, cursing
himself for not being closer to Dean. He pushed past the security guards
and caught up to Dean, yelling for them to stop.
The CIA men sized up Carlos, then calmly produced their guns, aiming
at Carlos' head. “What the fuck do you want, Hercules?”
“What are you doing with him? Where the hell are you taking him?”
Carlos spat back at them with deep anger.
“It's none of your damn business, now get out of here or you'll be
arrested for obstructing justice!”
Carlos was ready to throw a high karate kick at them both, he knew he
could make mince meat out of these weasels, but Dean intervened. “Wait
Carlos, I'm OK, don't do anything stupid - just hang around.”
Reluctantly, Carlos walked away, every now and again glancing back
to watch where they were heading. The security guard stood outside the
131
door, his gun at the ready for any trouble. A short distance away, Leeanne
and Gordon were huddled nervously together.
Inside the room, the two men pushed Dean onto a seat and sat opposite
him. One of them lit up a cigarette and blew smoke into his face. “Well,
well, we finally meet the famous Dean McIntyre, you don't look much of a
threat to me,” one of them laughed, then forcefully punched him in the
face.
Dean caught his breath with the sudden pain and said, “Why don't you
just tell me what you want?” The man with the cigarette walked close to
Dean, then casually stubbed his cigarette out on Dean's hand. The hot ash
burnt through Dean's skin, as he silently screamed in pain.
“It's like this, Mr. McIntyre, we want you to go back on television and
refute everything you have said. We want you to tell the world that what
you wrote in THE BOOK was just your vivid imagination, that there was
no truth to any of it, and that you were lying. We want you to say that you
have a neurotic schizophrenic nature...in short, you're a fucking nut! Ha
Ha!”
Dean couldn't believe what he was hearing, these so-called official
CIA agents were dead scared of him and so was the U.S. President. He
answered defiantly: “Over my dead body I'll refute what is the truth!”
“Well said, though I'm afraid it may be over the dead bodies of your
sister and her kid!”
Dean's pulse raced like a train out of control. His heart was beating
faster than his mind could register what had just been said. He wanted to
scream and cry with anger and fear. Instead, he hung his head and silently
said, “Oh God! No! No!”
Outside, Carlos was walking up and down like a wild stallion. He
wasn't happy with Dean being alone with those men. He looked up and
noticed the Prime Minister talking with his son, and headed towards them.
“Listen Dad, I know Dean, he only speaks the truth, he didn't mean any
harm, he's not a fanatic...what do those CIA guys want? You should be
with them while they're interrogating him, Dean's an Australian citizen,”
the Prime Minister's son said.
When Carlos joined them, along with Gordon and Leeanne, he said,
“Excuse me Prime Minister, I don't trust those so called CIA guys, you
should thoroughly check out their I.Ds.”
Meanwhile, inside the room, Dean tried to put on a brave face, though
he knew that Helen and Yianni had been kidnapped by these men and
132
their organization, he also knew that it was under cover and the US
President knew nothing about it, and that was dangerous.
He looked into his captive's eyes.
“So, prove to me that you have my sister and her son.” The answer
made Dean regret the question. “Naturally, Mr. McIntyre, we were
planning that.”
One of the men moved the T.V. set close to Dean, while the other
produced a video tape, casually tapping his fingers on the top.
Confidently, he adjusted the video recorder and placed the tape inside.
The emotions that Ilias had once said he should never feel, fear and anger,
slowly seeped through Dean's mind, as he watched with pain filled eyes,
the video of his beloved sister being abused and little Yianni screaming
and crying in fear. “Stop! Stop! Stop it! OK, you win,” Dean breathed
heavy with total despair and continued, “give me some time to prepare
what I have to say.”
The two men smiled triumphantly and patted Dean on the shoulder,
saying, “Wise choice, we'll send out for some coffee for you. You have
twenty minutes only.”
On television stations around the world, a news bulletin flashed that
Dean McIntyre would be making a statement in approximately 30 minutes
time.
Back in Katoomba, Helen sat on the bed crying. The commandos had
boasted sarcastically to her about the plan for the videotape. When
Waterfield had left with the tape, he said that if Dean did as he was told,
that her and Yianni would be released tomorrow.
Helen had a gut feeling that somehow, this would not be the case.
Yianni placed his small hand around his mother's shoulder and said,
“Don't cry Mummy, I don't think they will hurt you any more, we should
try to escape.”
Helen went to the bathroom to wash her bruised face. She hadn't
thought of escaping, that seemed impossibility; until now.
As she wiped her face, she noticed a large air vent that had only a thin
steel mesh covering the opening; it was almost hidden behind an old set of
drawers. Helen pushed the drawers away, Yianni could easily fit through
it, but it may be a tight squeeze for her.
Frantically Helen rummaged through her handbag and found the pen.
Yianni looked on in surprise, as his mother twisted the pen and a small
133
knife emerged from the end. “Go and stand near the door, run and tell me
if you hear anyone coming, and be quiet,” Helen said.
She hoisted herself up on the chest of drawers and nervously prized
away at the rusty screws holding the mesh. The screws were stuck hard;
this would be a long job, she thought, as determinedly she kept trying to
move the screws.
Finally, one screw came loose. Sweat was starting to trickle down her
cheeks, as slowly, one by one, she managed to remove the screws.
Carefully, Helen lifted the mesh away from the opening, then peered into
the darkness beyond. The sudden cold rush of crisp night air told her
freedom was not far away.
Hoisting her little son up to the chest of drawers, Helen kept praying
under her breath that one of the commandos wouldn't come walking
through the door. Yianni crawled through the opening easily, there was
about two feet of solid brick before he climbed out and his tiny feet found
a ledge.
As he peered hard into the darkness, the ground seemed to be not far
beneath him. “Mummy, I think I can jump,” Yianni called back to Helen.
“Be careful,” was the reply, as Helen twisted her shoulders in an effort
to squeeze through the opening. She held her breath, praying that she
wouldn't become wedged in the opening. Within a few moments, Yianni
was on the ground and Helen had successfully wormed her way out to
freedom.
Gordon watched, as the door of the Games office opened and Dean
walked out, hands free, with the two CIA men. They were joined by the
Prime Minister and one of his aides. They stood together, speaking
among themselves for some time.
Gordon took Leeanne by the hand and walked towards them, along
with Carlos, who was now ready to punch anyone who looked sideways at
him!
Dean looked into Gordon's eyes as they approached. Leeanne instantly
picked up on the stressful vibrations emitting from her son. She squeezed
Gordon's hand. “Something is very wrong,” she whispered in her
husband's ear.
“I know,” Gordon said, keeping a tight contact with Dean's psychic
mind. Telepathically, Dean told Gordon: “They have Helen and Yianni,
do not panic, just stay close to me.”
134
“Oh shit!” cried Gordon under his breath, as he looked sideways at
Leeanne.
She already knew. Her intuition had told her all along that Helen was
in danger. “Carlos, don't do anything stupid, stay calm,” was Gordon's
forceful command, as the powerful young man started fuming like a wild
bull! “If any harm comes to Helen or Yianni, I'll kill those responsible, I
swear! I swear!” he said, thumping his fists together.
Helen carried Yianni in her arms as she ran wildly through the dense
bushland, not knowing where she was going. The boy was rugged up
warm, with a heavy jacket, but Helen only wore the shirt that had been
ripped down the front, and a pair of jeans.
Fear kept her body heat high, as she fled through the cold, dark night.
She must have been running for more than fifteen minutes, when,
suddenly, she saw the lights from a car - a road was just a few metres
ahead.
A young couple in a pick up truck stopped, when Helen frantically
waved them down. “Please take me to the nearest telephone, please, it's a
matter of life and death! Help us!”
“Hop in, there's a church about two miles down the road and a
telephone outside,” said the driver.
The girl noticed Helen shivering with the cold and offered her a thick
jacket, telling her to keep it. She also handed Helen four dollars in change
for the phone call.
The signboard read St.John's Anglican Church, erected in 1920. It was
a magnificent old sandstone church. Two huge oak trees almost covered it
from sight of the road. The grass was overgrown and the garden
neglected. A faint light flickered in one of the stained glass windows - it
looked deserted.
Helen ran from the truck and tested the telephone. “The phone is
working, I'll be OK, thank you so much for everything,” she said, as she
waved goodbye to the strangers.
Dean stood on the dais, flanked closely by the CIA men and gazed
helplessly at the mass of television cameras and reporters jostling for a
good position. There was a lump in his throat the size of a tennis
ball...had it really come to this? All he believed in, everything he knew
was the truth...he had to lie now and refute it - to sacrifice the faith of
people on earth, to save the lives of Helen and Yianni. “Oh God, give me
135
the strength and courage to get this over with as quickly as possible,” he
prayed, under his breath.
Dean took a deep breath and held his head high, as the cameras started
to roll.
The Prime Minister's mobile phone rang. He had given strict orders to
his office that there were to be no calls unless they were extremely urgent.
His secretary spoke: “I'm sorry Sir, I have this hysterical woman on the
line claiming to be Dean McIntyre's sister. She says her name is Helen
and that her son and her had been kidnapped by some US commandos, she
is demanding that you speak to her.”
“Hang on a minute,” he replied, as he walked closer to Dean. Albert
Braithwaite noticed the tears rolling down Leeanne's face, as she clung to
Gordon. His sons, Ben and Stephen were beside them and both gave their
father a hard look of dislike, as he approached the dais.
Albert hesitated while he listened to Dean starting to apologize to the
world for what he had said. Suddenly, the Prime Minister yelled out loud:
“Stop! stop! Dean don't say anymore...wait a minute!”
The Prime Minister held his mobile phone close to his ear and spoke.
“Hello young lady, I'm listening to what you have to say.”
Gordon and Carlos turned quickly to see what was happening. They
noticed the startled look on Albert Braithwaite's face, the same time as the
CIA men also noticed something was wrong.
Dean stood quietly...the cameras turned on to the Prime Minister, as he
suddenly screamed orders for his security guards to grab the CIA
men...but, Carlos got to them first! He had one in a neck hold and held
him about two feet off the ground, yelling wildly, “Where are they! Where
are they?!”
Amid all the confusion, the Prime Minister faced the cameras and said,
“We have experienced a breach of National Security here, the matter is
being investigated right now! I want everyone to stay calm and just enjoy
the closing ceremony. As for Dean McIntyre's words, it is up to you,
whether you believe him or not. I, myself, feel that he speaks in good
faith, though somewhat a little over the top! We will give you more up to
the minute news in a later bulletin.”
Dean breathed long and deep, his body limp with relief that Helen and
Yianni had somehow escaped. Now, the problem was how to find them,
as the phone had cut out because of insufficient change and Helen didn't
have a chance to give her location.
136
Dean grabbed the microphone and made an emotional plea to Helen
and Yianni, wherever they were, to come straight to the Games office and
to watch their backs, as there were more men out there who would be
looking for them.
This message was flashed around New South Wales on radio and
television every fifteen minutes.
Carlos had almost choked the life out of the CIA men. The security
guards tried to calm him down, but to no avail...he was like a wild animal,
as he demanded the whereabouts of Helen and Yianni.
Finally, in muffled tones, one of the men spoke: “Katoomba, they're at
Katoomba.”
Gordon yelled to Dean, “That's more than 180 kilometres away, how
on earth will they get here?”
The first thought that came to Dean was 'station'. “They will come to
Sydney either by bus or train, somehow I think it will be the train,” he
said.
Carlos roughly released his hold on his captives and pushed them
towards the security guards. “Look after these scum, I'm sure the Prime
Minister will want to have a long talk with them!”
Carlos placed a caring arm around Leeanne and Gordon and spoke
determinedly, “I'm going to Wynyard station to check all the trains due
from Katoomba, and I'll check the bus terminals too.”
Gordon glanced at Leeanne and said, “I should go with you Carlos.”
“No Gordon, you stay here and keep an eye on Dean, there could be
more trouble. Don't worry, I promise you I will bring Helen and Yianni
back safely, by God I will!”
Helen's pulse had stopped racing, she was breathing evenly now, as she
held Yianni's hand and walked towards the old sandstone church. She
approached the closed door, praying it would open and that someone
would be inside. As she turned the old bronze handle, it opened easily
and they walked in.
“Oh Mummy, it's so beautiful,” said Yianni, his eyes wide with
wonder.
Safety and peace flowed through Helen's tired body as she beheld the
magnificent frescos painted on the ceiling and the beautiful stained glass
windows. Small candles were flickering near the altar, where a priest
knelt in prayer.
137
All was quiet. The priest stood and slowly turned around, his kind
eyes met Helen's and he spoke. “Welcome to the house of our Lord,
please sit with me, you look very distressed, can I be of help?”
Father Colin Britton listened with heartfelt concern as Helen recalled
her story, tears falling from her eyes. Father Britton placed a kind arm
around her and hugged little Yianni tightly. He lived behind the church in
a small ramshackle house with his two cats. As the parish was a few
kilometres outside the town, not many parishioners attended the old
church, because there was a new Anglican church in the centre of
Katoomba.
“You're welcome to stay the night, but, if you prefer, I can drive you to
the train station,” he checked his watch and continued, “there's an express
train to Sydney at seven o'clock, if we hurry, we may just catch it.”
Helen knew she had to get out of Katoomba as soon as possible; the
commandos could be tracking them right now.
“Let's go Father, if you could give me some money for our tickets, I
would be grateful,” Helen replied.
They arrived at the station with only minutes to spare; quickly, Father
Britton purchased the tickets.
Helen glanced up at the television monitor, suddenly recognizing a
familiar voice. It was a news flash and Dean was telling her to come
straight to the Games Offices and to watch her back.
Helen embraced Father Britton and thanked him, saying she would
keep in touch, then ran with Yianni in her arms and jumped on the train
just as it started to depart. Finally, they were safe.
Carlos had been held up in heavy traffic whilst driving into the City
and parking the car had been a major problem - the result was a twentyminute walk to Wynyard Station. On the way, he had checked the bus
terminal, there were no arrivals until mid-night. Now, standing on the
platform at the train station, he checked his watch...it was just after 9.30
pm...the monitor showed the express had arrived from Katoomba at
9.25pm.
“Shit!” he cursed under his breath, he had just missed it. Looking
frantically around at the crowds of people, he wondered if Helen and
Yianni were still at the station. “The exit terminals, maybe a station
attendant saw them,” his frantic mind buzzed, as he strode quickly in that
direction.
138
Luck was with him now as the young attendant smiled. “Yes, I do
remember a gorgeous looking blonde carrying a little boy. I think they
took the George Street exit.”
Carlos pushed past passengers and broke into a run...he had to find
them.
The large crowds at Wynyard Station caused fear to ebb through
Helen's mind, as she jostled towards the exit. She whispered to Yianni,
“Tell me if you notice any strange men watching us, darling.”
Immediately, Yianni pointed and said, “You mean like those two men
over there?”
Helen saw them in the same instant they saw her. She quickened her
pace and rushed through the George Street exit, knowing they were
following close behind.
It was late night shopping, some of the stores were starting to close and
people were lined up for taxis that never came.
“Where on earth could she run to?” Helen thought, as she emerged into
busy George Street. She had to lose the dangerous baggage that was
quickly catching up with her. They would be armed and at any moment,
they could pounce.
Helen scurried in front of a group of Japanese tourists and ducked into
a side street, then into the door of a small boutique.
“Sorry madam, we will be closing in five minutes,” said the stern faced
sales girl.
Helen didn't want to explain and simply said, “That's OK, I just need to
try on a pair of slacks, I know what I want.”
Helen grabbed the closest slacks on a rack and quickly ducked into the
change cubicle with Yianni in tow. “Now, shhh, you must be quiet
darling, we'll wait in here a few moments,” Helen whispered, as she
closed the door.
“I'm sorry gentlemen, we are closed now.” The words rang out loud
like a bolt of lightning to Helen's terrified ears.
“Oh God! No! Shh! Shh! Don't move Yianni.”
Helen held him tight with fear and crouched low in the cubicle. The
front door banged shut and Helen heard the sales girl scream as the two
intruders held a gun to her head. “Take the money, just let me go!” she
cried.
“We don't want any bloody money, we're after a blonde and a small kid
- have you seen them?”
139
The sales girl hesitated, then suddenly, Yianni coughed involuntarily.
“Oh No!” Helen cried, as she heard the heavy footsteps walk in the
direction of her change booth.
Yianni started to cry. He was frightened and clung to his mother. The
door swung open and Helen faced her killers head on. The one that
grabbed her by the arm had a dark olive complexion and a deep scar
running down his cheek. His eyes were cold and full of evil. Forcefully,
he pushed her out of the cubicle.
The other man, who was heavily built and just as ugly, stood by with
the sales girl in an arm lock and a gun pointed to her shaking head.
“Don't you hurt my Mummy!” Yianni screamed through his sobs. That
did it for Helen; she knew she had to fight for her life. Quickly, and with
all the strength she could gather, she kicked backwards and high...high
into the groin of her aggressor. He screamed with pain and let her go, as
he doubled up in agony.
Helen grabbed Yianni's hand and ran for the door. The words rang
out: “Stop! This bullet is aimed for your son's head.. .stop, or I'll shoot!”
Helen pushed Yianni beneath her and fell to the floor. Covering her
child, she prayed: “Oh God, please help us!”
Suddenly, beside her, the front door flew from its hinges. All hell
broke loose as a huge figure of a man smashed through the door and leapt
in the air, throwing a powerful karate kick at the man with the gun.
The sales girl screamed a long piercing scream as her assailant fell to
the floor, his head almost smashed in two and blood pouring from his nose
and mouth.
“Rambo! Carlos!” cried Yianni, jumping to his feet and recognizing
the familiar frame and dark flowing hair.
The other assailant made a forceful lunge at Carlos. He was no match,
and fell to the floor after two punches to the head.
The sales girl quickly dialled triple 0 on the telephone.
Helen ran to Carlos' side, turbulent tears were streaming down her face
as she gratefully flung her arms around his neck. He cradled her body
tightly to his and gazed down lovingly at her beautiful, though badly
bruised face. Gently, he wiped the tears away, then kissed her deeply and
passionately, with all the love in his heart.
The police sirens sounded a long way off. Helen and Carlos were
oblivious to anything around them as their rapturous passion consumed
140
them. Finally, their lips parted and Carlos spoke. “I don't know what I
would have done if they had killed you...Helen....I love you!”
Helen hung her head against Carlos' strong heaving chest and
whispered, “I love you too.”
The sales girl had finally come to her senses and muttered in agitated
tones. “OK, OK, you two, break it up.. look at my bloody shop, it's a mess
- who is going to clean it up?”
Yianni tugged on Carlos' pants and said, “I knew you would save us
Rambo!”
Sometime later, as they sat in the back of a police car being driven to
the Games office, Helen looked at Carlos with eyes full of sorrow and
whispered, “Darren and Barbara are dead.”
141
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
A tragic loss
The Toowoomba police had searched the Healing Farm, and
adjoining bushland thoroughly for over a week, with no sign of Barbara
or Darren. The search was ready to be called off, when one of the
police suggested to Sergeant Lawton that maybe it was worth sending a
diver down to check the deep part of the stream.
“Where those large boulders are, at the top end, the water is very
deep there, it's worth a look Sergeant!” the young constable insisted.
“OK, we'll organize it for tomorrow morning,” Sergeant Lawton
replied, as he headed for his car, calling it a day.
The police diver zipped the front of his wet suit and adjusted his
facemask. The area of water into which he would be diving, was only
about 30 feet in circumference and appeared to be roughly ten to fifteen
feet deep. He wouldn't need his scuba gear, he thought, peering closer at
the water.
“If anything is down there, I'll find it in five minutes!” he yelled,
plunging into the cold mountain water.
He was right. Exactly two minutes later, he surfaced and called:
“There's something down here, looks like two large bags on the
bottom...I'll put the aqualung on and check it out!”
Sergeant Lawton and two other officers looked on apprehensively as
the diver stayed down for what seemed ages.
When he surfaced and removed his facemask, his expression said it
all. “There are two bodies down there in hessian bags, with bricks
weighing them down, I'd say it's the couple you're looking for,
Sergeant.”
142
Gordon, Leeanne and Dean walked silently off the plane. Carlos
followed carrying Yianni in one hand and holding Helen tightly with the
other. Their thoughts were heavy with sadness.
A few hours later, they walked into the Toowoomba Police station.
“We will need someone to identify the bodies,” Sergeant Lawton
explained to the concerned faces before him. Gordon and Leeanne's
eyes were filled with tears - they knew without question the identity of
the bodies.
Dean stepped forward. “I'll go and identify them, you all stay here,”
he said.
It was only a five-minute drive to the morgue, but somehow it
seemed an eternity to Dean.
Now, before him, the bodies were being wheeled out and the bags
unzipped. The cold, grey faces of death stared blankly up at him.
“The woman has a single shot to the head, she would have died
instantly...the man was gunned down in the back by a semi-automatic.
It was a very callous killing, done by professionals, they never stood a
chance,” the Sergeant spoke with emotion in his deep, scratchy voice.
Dean bent over, gave them the last rites and placed a kiss softly on
their foreheads, bading them farewell from this life.
The wildflowers of springtime were just starting to bloom, making a
soft yellow haze blanket the front fields of the Healing Farm. Pink
petals from the fruit trees fell silently to the ground...the sun was
shining and the earth seemed so beautiful in this part of the world.
Gordon sat alone on the rocks by the stream, at the same place he
had sat years ago with Barbara. Tomorrow would be the funeral, the
final farewell for Barbara and Darren. It was here by this stream that
Gordon had explained the meaning of life to Barbara when she had
given up all hope.
When her body was riddled with cancer, he had taught her how to
love and forgive; he had brought God into her hate-filled life and given
her faith. The years she had spent at the Healing Farm were the best
years of her life...and that made Gordon feel happy.
Darren always had said he wanted to be cremated, he didn't like the
idea of decaying under the earth, so it was decided that they would both
be cremated, their ashes kept in urns and placed in the healing pyramid.
Gordon threw some pebbles into the water and watched the circles
form on the top...some were small, others larger, just like the circle of
143
life. Slowly, the circles faded and became one with the water. “Like
life, eventually, we all become one with The Universe, the Universal
soul,” Gordon thought, with melancholy in his heart.
On the day of the funeral, a short service was held at the
Toowoomba crematorium. Sergeant Lawton and two officers joined
Gordon, Leeanne, family and friends. Later that day, a private service
was held at the Healing Farm inside the splendid pyramid.
Gordon placed the small brass urns on a table surrounded with
freshly cut flowers from the farm. Above them hung the ancient Divine
Laws from Atlantis, which Gordon had written in Atlantean so many
years ago. His eyes hung on the words he had written and a single tear
fell from his eyes, as he remembered the first time he had entered the
Healing and Meditation pyramid. Slowly, he turned to face his family
and friends.
“The first time I visited this farm, I was with two friends, Mary and
Simone, that was back in the late nineties. Simone was a clairvoyant,
and conducted meditations in this pyramid. Unfortunately, she left
Toowoomba to live in New Zealand.
“As my gift of healing became apparent, I started healing sessions in
this pyramid, with much success, I will proudly admit. But, no success
has been as great as with Barbara, who fought terminal cancer, and won.
When I first met Barbara, she wanted to die, she felt there was nothing
to live for. With patience, love and care, I slowly changed her mind,
but, ultimately, it was Barbara herself and her faith that life was worth
living, that saved her.
“Barbara and Darren had many wonderful years here, they were the
best of friends. Darren had fought a lonely battle of despair and grief
when his wife Naomi had died three years before he built the farm.
“Sometimes, when we think the circle of life is just birth and death,
we must remember the wonderful times in between. It is what is
between birth and death that really counts. The lessons of our lives, the
laughter, the tears, the happiness, sorrow and love...love. I remember
Darren once said to me the word love is what frees us from all the
weight and pain in life.
“I don't think Darren or Barbara would want us to feel pain or sorrow
for them now. I am sure they would only want us to feel as they do ...at
peace. Naturally, we will all grieve for some time to come, grief is a
natural process that we have to go through - but now, I would ask you
144
all to remember what is written on the plaque in the foyer....'Death is not
the greatest loss in life, the greatest loss is what dies inside us while we
live',” concluded Gordon.
The funeral was over and two small candles would always stay alight
beside the urns in the pyramid.
Later that day, just as the sun was setting, Carlos took Helen by the
hand and said, “Let's go for a long walk.”
GP, Trish, Antonio and Tina had driven back to Springbrook. Paul
and Bethany were going to stay for a week on the Gold Coast with
Bethany's mum and aunt. They had left after the funeral. Yianni was
having a sleep. All was quiet.
Helen and Carlos walked in silence, taking in the serene beauty of
the country at sunset. Nothing around them had changed...the farm was
the same, the animals grazing, the soft golden rays peeking through the
fruit trees, the sounds of birds and crickets. That was all the same. But,
they were not the same.
The past few weeks had made them realize now, more than ever, how
fragile life was and just how precious.
Carlos stopped and took Helen into his arms. He embraced her
tightly and kissed the silken hair on the top of her head - he never
wanted to let her go.
“Helen, there is no guarantee of the future, none of us knows what
lies ahead. What we have now, today, is maybe all we will ever have,”
he said.
Helen looked up with tears in her eyes, the strain of the past weeks
had caught up with her and she felt exhausted. Carlos kissed her cheeks
and continued: “I love you, like I have never loved before. I want us to
spend every living moment together...as husband and wife...will you
marry me?”
Love and emotion consumed Helen's fragile mind, as she answered:
“Yes! Yes!”
Suddenly, exhaustion took over her tired body and she went limp,
limp with happiness. Carlos just caught her before she hit the ground
and swept her up into his arms, then carried her towards the homestead.
Leeanne came running out the door, concern in her voice: “What has
happened Carlos? Is she OK?”
“I just asked your daughter to marry me, and she fainted...but, she
did say yes!”
145
Leeanne laughed and said, “Put her into bed, she needs a good long
rest.”
Almost ten hours later, Helen stirred. She stretched out her long
legs, feeling the soft cosy warmth of her duvet, then slowly opened her
eyes.
Carlos was sitting on the side of the bed gazing at her with lovelorn
eyes, the aroma of freshly brewed coffee hung in the air. “I thought you
would like some coffee, you've been asleep for ten hours, how do you
feel?”
Helen stirred and felt she had underwear on - she realized Carlos
must have put her to bed. Then, the memory of last night came back to
her. She smiled at him and her dreamy eyes sparkled. “I don't want
coffee just now...I want you.”
Helen slipped out of her underwear, then threw it across the room.
Carlos smiled and went to lock the door. It was almost sunrise, a faint
silver light filtered through the curtains. Carlos stood beside the bed.
Slowly he removed his sweater, then his jeans, his eyes not leaving
Helen's.
Her eyes hungrily held the rugged beauty of the huge man standing
before her. Her heart was starting to race wildly with the delicious
anticipation of the pleasures that lay ahead.
Within a moment, he was naked and in bed beside her. Their lips
met and the soft wet caress of love filled their mouths. Helen could feel
the throbbing hardness against her thigh, as she teasingly kissed Carlos'
warm muscular chest and slid her fingers down his back. Carlos knelt up
and straddled her.
Forcefully pinning her hands above her head, he started to lick down
the inside of her arms, his warm wet tongue dancing in circles until it
reached her breasts...then he gently licked the nipples until they
hardened. Helen wiggled with pleasure and tried to free her arms from
his tight grip. Carlos held her like a vice, ignoring her struggle.
Now, his tongue danced its way down to her belly button and licked
little circles over her soft stomach. Helen thought she would faint,
again, with desire, as his wet tongue found her pleasure dome and
lingered, teasingly aware of her rising frustration.
Helen could feel all the nerve endings of her body tingle, the warm
wetness of her readiness was seeping through and she knew his tongue
could taste it. Carlos released his grip and pulled her body to his.
146
Helen's legs locked around his buttocks and urgently pulled him deeper
into her. He filled her whole being as their bodies moved together in
rapturous ecstasy; each knowing this was not just a binding of their
bodies, but a binding of their souls.
Finally, their waves of orgasm fell from their bodies with such
searing pleasure that Carlos moaned like an animal in pain and Helen
whimpered softly as tears of happiness fell from her eyes.
Over breakfast that morning, Helen excitedly told Yianni of their
marriage plans. The boy was so ecstatic he jumped into Carlos' lap and
hugged him, saying, “Does that mean you're going to be my daddy
now?”
Carlos felt a lump in his throat, as he said proudly, “It sure does
Yianni.” Everyone was overjoyed as they planned the wedding for
some time before Christmas. Helen said she wanted a church wedding
and the church she would really love for the wedding was St. John's at
Katoomba, the old 1920 sandstone church where she had met Father
Colin Britton. The priest who had befriended her and Yianni. Without
his help, she may not have been here today.
The telephone rang. Gordon answered it and called for Dean. “It's
for you Dean, a guy called Nathan Haywood. Dean ran to the phone,
this was one person he really wanted to see.
“Nathan old buddy, where are you?...great...O.K...I'll see you then.”
Nathan and Yvonne had arrived in Brisbane and would be catching
the bus to Toowoomba tomorrow, Dean had arranged to meet them in
town about mid-day.
A few moments after that phone call, there was another call. This
time, the familiar long distance sounds brought unbearable happiness
into Dean's soul. He knew instantly who was on the other end.
“Hello Baba...yes...all right...I”ll be there, thank you so much, God
be with you all, my Baba, my friend.”
Kavita would arrive at Brisbane airport at 8pm tomorrow night.
Dean didn't quite know how he would survive until then.
147
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
A meeting with the Prime Minister
The Prime Minister of Australia, Albert Braithwaite, had just
concluded a long intense conversation with the US President.
He felt emotionally drained after the fiasco at the Commonwealth
Games and now, the enormity of an unknown future for Australia and
the world, hit him hard.
President Newman had assured him he knew nothing of the attempt
to discredit Dean McIntyre - the CIA men were obviously working for a
secret organisation unknown to the President. The description of John
Smith, who had eluded the security net, seemed familiar to him.
Waterfield and the others arrested at the Games were not known to US
Special Security.
The three commandos at Katoomba had disappeared without a trace.
When Albert asked President Newman for his honest appraisal of
Dean's book, the President told Albert he believed there was a great deal
of truth to it, but it was a truth they could not afford the luxury of
believing.
It was that answer that suddenly made Albert aware of the reasons
Dean was so popular with the youth of Australia and in particular, his
two sons. He thought long and hard before he made the phone call then he dialled Dean's number.
“Dean, it's Albert Braithwaite speaking...I need to talk to you, a
meeting, just the two of us.” There was an awkward silence, then Dean
said: “Go on.”
“Listen, we must put what happened at the Games behind us, it is the
future that is of the utmost concern...Dean, I need your assistance.
Please come to Sydney to see me as soon as possible,” the Prime
Minister implored.
148
Dean's mind, at that moment, was only filled with the impending
arrival of Kavita. Nathan and Yvonne had just arrived, and in a few
hours time, he would be on his way to Brisbane airport to finally hold
the love of his life. Dean cleared his throat, then answered:
“You have caught me at a very busy time Sir, I have my girlfriend
arriving from India tonight. Look, I will come and talk to you, but not
for a few days. I'll call you tomorrow and make a date.”
When Dean placed the receiver down, he could sense the desperation
in the Prime Minister's words. He could tell that Albert now believed
everything he had written and was also aware of the huge job ahead of
them.
Nathan and Dean discussed plans for the future, whilst trying to
remain optimistic.
“I'm glad you're a doctor Nathan, we could do with a few more like
you in our group,” said Gordon, breaking in to the conversation.
Helen said she remembered Tina saying there were two nurses within
the Children of Light. Nathan studied the faces of the group and said, “I
don't want to dwell on the terrible task that may or may not be ahead.
For our own sanity, I believe we should all just live and think one day at
a time.”
Suddenly, Yvonne, looking pale and drawn and four months
pregnant, started to cry. Between her sobs, she said: “You mean...live
each day...like it's our last?”
Nathan comforted his wife, kissing the tears from her eyes. “Shh,
shh darling, don't get upset, it's been a long journey...let's have a rest for
a few hours.”
Dean wrapped the old orange scarf around his head and donned a
pair of black sunglasses. He needed a disguise for the airport. This was
one time he didn't want to be recognized by anyone - except Kavita. He
rummaged through an old suitcase and found the same white kaftan he
wore the first time he met Kavita. It was stained and torn, but wearable.
In this, she would recognize him.
Driving to the airport, Dean played the beautiful music of Enya - the
CD “Memory of Trees” - he lost himself within the soulful melody and
before he knew it, he was driving over the Gateway Bridge.
With twenty minutes to spare, Dean sat in the car and wondered how
Kavita had endured the long flight, her first experience in an aircraft.
The more he thought, the more he started to worry - not only had Kavita
149
never seen or been in an aeroplane, she had never left India or her
people, had never seen the outside world.
Quickly now, he walked from the car park - he couldn't wait to hold
her, to protect her - to love her!
The arrival lounge was packed with excited people awaiting
passengers from Air India flight 857...thankfully, Dean didn't warrant a
second glance from anyone.
Two flight attendants were first through the customs exit, and, close
behind them, walked Kavita. She looked like a child, lost and
frightened - her eyes darting here and there, searching the crowd of
faces - for him.
Dean watched as she quickly grabbed an attendant's hand, a look of
fear covering her pretty and tired face. Dean walked slowly toward
them and removed his dark glasses.
“Dean! Dean!” the soft cry came, as he faced Kavita and lifted her
into the air, embracing her tightly.
“So, you must be Sanjay?” questioned the attendants. With Kavita
still enfolded in his arms, he replied, “Yes, I am...thank you for bringing
her safely to Australia.”
One of the attendants, an Indian woman of about thirty years, said,
“It's been a frightening experience for her, she needs a lot of care.”
Heavy emotion covered Dean’s face and he responded, “She will
have all the care and love in the world, from now on!”
The attendant handed Dean an old hessian bag, saying, “this is all her
luggage.”
Kavita suddenly grabbed the small bag out of Dean's hand - the look
on her face said that this was hers and no one could touch it.
At that moment, Dean knew there would be difficult times ahead, his
mind saying, “patience, you will need lots of patience.”
Inside the car, Dean spoke in Hindi. “Welcome to Australia, my
beautiful flower of India..” Kavita threw her arms around his neck and
kissed him deeply, tears streaming down her face.
When their lips parted, she clung tightly to him, sobbing, “I am so
frightened, please don't ever leave me.”
Dean assured her that they would always be together and that he
would never leave her side - then, he remembered Sydney and the
meeting!
150
During the drive back to Toowoomba, Dean played the soft music of
Enya...Kavita loved it and seemed to relax more. They spoke of the past
four months, the time spent with Sai Baba and of her mother and the
children. Kavita placed her small hand on Dean's thigh and said, “You
know I love you, but it was so difficult to leave my family...if I don't see
them again, I will never forgive myself....”
Dean smiled reassuringly and squeezed her hand. “Please don't
worry, you will see them again - I promise...they will be safe in Tibet.”
Leeanne heard the car doors slam...they had arrived. She rushed to
the door, with Gordon walking slowly behind. Kavita held Dean's hand
tightly and stood a little behind him like a frightened child, as the door
opened.
Her son had spoken so much about the beautiful Indian girl he
loved...she had seen a few photos, but now, as Leeanne gazed at the tiny
delicate girl clinging to her son, she thought she was looking at a child
of twelve.
Leeanne bent to her level - about four feet nine inches, so frail and
beautiful. Kavita's liquid brown eyes held Leeanne's - “this is Dean's
mother,” she thought, as she felt the same love energy that Dean
possessed, filter through her mind.
She loosened her grip on Dean and smiled. Leeanne gently
embraced her as she would embrace Yianni. “Come inside and have a
nice cup of tea, you must be so tired.”
After the introductions everyone sat at the table. Kavita pulled her
chair close to Dean, her eyes never left his face and when he spoke, she
hung on to every word.
Whenever anyone asked Kavita a question, she hesitated and looked
up at Dean, not certain of her response. Mostly, however, she said
nothing.
Dean stood, it was time for bed, it had been a very long day and all
he wanted now, was to cuddle up with his precious flower of India.
As they closed the bedroom door, Helen turned to her mother and
said, “I find it difficult to believe my brother is in love with that child, I
mean, she is gorgeous...but...”
Leeanne looked sternly at her daughter, “She is not a child, she is
nineteen and don't be so judgmental Helen!”
151
That night, Dean restrained his physical desires. He knew Kavita
had been through a harrowing experience leaving India and her family all she really wanted to do, was sleep. There would be ample time for
them to consummate their love...right now, he was content with a soft
cuddle, as finally, she was in his arms.
Dean woke early the next morning and slipped quietly out of bed. In
the kitchen, he prepared a hearty breakfast for two and went back
upstairs, planning to spend all morning lazing around with his loved
one. The pleasant aroma of food woke Kavita…she stirred, then smiled
at Dean as he placed a tray next to the bed.
“I cannot believe I am living in such luxury Dean.” She glanced at
the tray and continued, “and all this food! Just for us?”
Dean poured a cup of tea and said casually, “This is a normal
Australian breakfast - fruit, cereal, eggs and toast!”
Kavita slowly ate a few mouthfuls, then stopped and looked at Dean
with doe eyed innocence and whispered: “I feel so guilty eating all this
food when my people are starving.”
Dean held her hand and said, “You are living in Australia now, you
must follow our customs...and that includes eating what is placed in
front of you...besides, I want to fatten you up!” he laughed, teasingly
smacking her bony arm.
Helen and Carlos had driven Nathan and Yvonne down to
Springbrook to visit the Haven for a few days. Yianni was in Pre
School and Leeanne would collect him about two thirty.
Dean and Kavita could have a few peaceful days together before he
had to depart for Sydney.
It was the thought of travelling to Sydney that was worrying Dean.
He couldn't take Kavita. She told him she would never travel on an
aeroplane again! “Why do you have to go to Sydney, Dean?” she asked,
tears welling in her eyes.
“It's very important, I will only be away for two days, my mother will
take care of you,” he said.
Kavita dropped her bottom lip like a child who had been told she
couldn't have an ice cream. “But, you promised me you wouldn't leave
me!”
Dean sighed helplessly, what could he do?
Suddenly, his mother drove in, with Yianni waving excitedly at the
new arrival. Kavita, as usual, clung to Dean as the car stopped. A wide
152
smile soon covered her face as she watched the little boy emerging from
the vehicle. Yianni walked straight up to Kavita and said in his usual
cheeky voice: “I know who you are, you're Dean's girlfriend from
India...do you want to see the toy elephant Uncle Dean bought me?”
Leeanne laughed, “Go on Kavita, go with Yianni up to his room, I'm
sure he has lots of interesting things to show you, dear.” Kavita smiled
and looked to Dean for his approval. “Go ahead my darling, I'm sure
you'll have lots of fun.”
Yianni forcefully grabbed Kavita by the hand and took her in the
direction of his room. Leeanne glanced at her son, his eyes said it all, as
he hung his shoulders with relief. “Give her time Dean, she will settle
in,” she said.
“Yianni is about the same age as her brother Bhutatma, hopefully,
now she will feel more at home. I hate to have to go to Sydney leaving
her unhappy, I don't want her to feel that I'm deserting her, Mum.”
Leeanne put an arm around her son. “You go to Sydney, that's
important. I’ll take care of Kavita, please don't worry.”
Dean called Albert Braithwaite and made the appointment - he would
only stay two days and no longer. He stipulated that their business
would have to be concluded by then.
The morning of the departure arrived. Kavita sat at the breakfast
table and picked on her food, a heavy look of sadness covering her
pretty face.
Even the impending day shopping for clothes in
Toowoomba with Leeanne, couldn't bring a smile to her lips. Dean
silently grabbed his bag, then kissed her goodbye, saying he would
telephone night and morning while he was away.
Leeanne cuddled Kavita as the girl cried while watching Dean walk
to the car. Helen, who was outside, kissed her brother and slammed the
car door. She looked at him and said, “I hope you know what you are
doing with her.”
Dean didn't answer. The ridiculous statement didn't need an answer Kavita was his soul mate and he loved her.
It had only been a few weeks since Dean had seen the Prime
Minister, but now, as he sat opposite Albert Braithwaite, the man
seemed to have aged five years. He sat with his shoulders hunched over
and his tired face resting on his hand. His normally clear green eyes
were now dark pools of emptiness.
153
“My sons think a great deal of you Dean - Ben and Steven actually
talked me into having this meeting.” Dean smiled and said, “I'm glad to
be here Sir, now, how can I be of assistance?”
The Prime Minister outlined the U.S. plan for the underground
bunkers in case of nuclear war. He confided to Dean the details of
North Korea’s threat and the fact that they only had until Christmas to
respond to the their demands and do something...anything!
Finally, Albert stopped talking and asked Dean's opinion. “What
should I do? How can I save Australia and our people? And, I don't
want you to tell me to just pray and believe in God - I do pray, every
damn night!”
Dean stood and walked over closer to the Prime Minister, placing a
reassuring hand on his shoulder. “Calm down Albert...now, first of all, I
want you to get any notion of a nuclear war out of your head. This will
not happen, regardless of what the U.S. think.
“During the coming months, monstrous catastrophes will occur in
California, Japan and other parts of the world. There will be no
disasters in Australia until well after New Year. That, in itself, will give
us an edge on the rest of the world - we will have time to prepare.
“We must build shelters in the mountain areas, away from the cities
and the coast line. The entire East coast and much of the South will be
covered by water - the sea will reclaim roughly one eighth of Australia the highly populated regions will disappear,” he said.
The Prime Minister looked up at Dean, disbelief covering his worn
face and said: “So, what do I say to seventeen and a half million people?
Head for the hills?”
There was a long silence between the two men. Neither really
wanted to believe this would actually happen. Outside in the bustling
city of Sydney, the spring sun was shining - the weather was glorious.
White sail boats and ferries littered the beautiful harbour.
How could all this change in less than four months time?
Dean walked over to a large white board and drew a map of
Australia. He showed in detail the areas that would be flooded - then, to
the Prime Minister's horror, he drew heavy wide lines across areas
where earthquakes would occur.
“I can't predict where all the damage will be done, only the main
areas...Albert glanced at the drawing of the torn up map of his country
154
and said: “Well, if there are many more of these areas, we'll only be left
with about two thirds of Australia!”
Dean's voice was filled with heavy emotion when he replied, “That's
a great deal more than most other countries will have!”
Both men realized that panicking would get them nowhere. They
had to take one day at a time and prepare for the worst. Firstly,
underground shelters would be built in selected mountain regions close
to the large cities. As the country people stood a better chance of
survival, no immediate plans would be implemented in remote areas.
As they drew up the plans, Albert and Dean knew in reality that only
about thirty to forty thousand people might be saved. There were no
guarantees. When the earth was hit by an asteroid or comet, the
destruction would be unpredictable, even the underground shelters
could be destroyed.
Dean predicted that the impact would be somewhere in the Atlantic
Ocean, just above forty-five degrees. If the comet was only one
kilometre wide, the explosive force would be equal to fifteen million
atomic bombs, but Dean saw it as being much larger. He saw tidal
waves higher than two hundred metres crashing into the already flooded
East Coast of the United States and the same happening to Europe's
Western coast.
No country in the world would come through a disaster like that,
untouched. A few hours later, after they had considered almost every
idea and assumption which could possibly help Australia and it's people,
the meeting came to a close.
Both men were tired and despondent. Shaking Albert's hand, Dean
said, “We must believe it won't be as bad....we have to put all our
energy and faith into believing it won't be the end....”.
Albert wanted more than anything to feel positive, but an eerie
darkness filled his soul. “You know Dean, after we build these shelters,
I won't be selecting who will live there. In the end, it will be every man,
woman and child for themselves.”
155
CHAPTER FIFTEEN
Californian Disaster - November
After California had finally survived its coldest summer in history,
the glorious weather over the past six weeks seemed unbelievable to
most people. The newspapers declared: “Californian weather turned
upside down” - “Autumn just like spring!”
The four Krishna groups of Los Angeles had sold their properties
and belongings in preparation for departure to other locations. Now, by
the end of October, all except Anna Rogopolos' group had left the City.
Anna was pacing up and down outside the lawyer's office. “Why are
things taking so long?” she worried.
The first sale on their farm, a month previous, had fallen through
lack of finance. Now, a new contract had been signed with another
buyer, finance was approved and everything should be settled by now!
Their flight to Sydney was booked for October eighth, just four days
away. Anna was getting edgy, she had to leave as soon as possible, and
refused to delay the flight any longer.
Finally, the door opened and the smile on her lawyer's face brought
welcome relief to Anna. “It's all gone through Miss Rogopolis, the
money will be transferred to the Krishna's account in Sydney at two
o'clock this afternoon,” he said.
Anna thankfully grabbed the documents and hastily said her
goodbyes. Outside, she relaxed and sighed deeply, savouring the feeling
of happiness that finally filled her body. She walked slowly through the
park, taking in the glorious and sunny weather, which enveloped the
City.
“Peace and beauty before the storm,” she thought, as she watched
children at play on the rich, green grass. Birds were chirping, the
156
flowers were in full bloom - “How on earth can this be autumn?” she
wondered. Anna knew the answer, she could feel the cold, dark reality
seeping into every nerve ending in her skin.
Suddenly, her happiness turned to despair. She sat on a bench and
hung her head in her hands. In a few days, she and her friends would be
safely on a plane to Australia, and, sometime during this month, maybe
weeks, maybe days! Who knew? The people of Los Angeles would
never feel safety or happiness again. What could she do? When the
earthquake happened, it was nature and no one could change that! One
could not run around LA warning people of the impending disaster,
urging them to flee their City - they would think she was a nut case!
Even the Earthquake Centre, which kept a close monitor on the
seismological changes to predict any changes, had issued no early
warnings. Everything was normal.
All Anna could do was pray and warn the people who would listen
without ridicule. The Krishna group had been doing just this over the
past few months and now, with all flights, trains and buses fully booked
and the outbound freeways unseasonably busy, obviously some people
were listening.
The day before their departure, Anna awoke early, just as the sun
was rising. An unusual heaviness hung in the still air as fine golden
rays peeked through the treetops. Anna poured herself a cup of tea and
walked out onto the balcony of the apartment the group had rented for
the past two weeks.
Outside, the air was warm with humidity, yet Anna shivered inside, a
cold empty sensation was filling her body. She glanced down, her
hands were shaking - she steadied them tightly around the cup and
inhaled a few deep breaths.
Suddenly, a small voice deep in her sub-conscious called out: “Don't
miss the plane! Don't miss the plane!” Anna's intuition was telling her:
“Be prepared, do not delay!”
Their flight to Sydney was leaving seven thirty tomorrow morning,
but Anna would make sure they were at the Airport two hours earlier,
there was no way she would miss that plane!
Later that morning at the Earthquake Centre, a group of men watched
a seismograph intently. A thin chain of low magnitude tremors were
showing up between San Diego and Los Angeles. “There's definitely
some activity going on,” one man spoke to his colleagues. Upon
157
analyzing the seismograph, they agreed that within the next two months,
Los Angeles would most likely experience an earthquake or major
tremors.
The telephone rang. It was the other Earthquake Centre just outside
San Francisco.
“Hi Bill! How are things going up there?....yes....OK....Oh, we've had
some activity down here too...OK.....right, keep in touch.”
Anna and fourteen members of the Krishna group stood silently in
the park and watched as thousands of birds suddenly flew East, like one
huge migration. People who were walking dogs suddenly found their
animals barking loudly and running in circles - an eerie stillness
suddenly fell over the City.
Anna and the group held hands and prayed to Krishna that the
impending disaster would not happen, though deep in their minds, they
knew it was only days away.
Thousands of miles across the sea in Australia, four New Yorkers
were carrying on a heated conversation. “Mom, if you never listen to
me again in your life, please listen to me now. You can't go back home,
it's too dangerous,” said Bethany to her mother.
Her mother Pearl, stood firm with her plump hands on her hips.
“Don't ya go telling me what to do my child. Your Aunt and I have had
a nice holiday, now we want to go home - and you said you would be
coming back with us!”
Paul went to place a gentle arm around Pearl's shoulder, saying,
“Calm down, don't make an argument about it, we'd just love you to
stay.”
Pearl pushed his arm away and said in a defiant tone: “Well, we want
to go!” Bethany sat down on the sofa and started to cry. A knock came
to the door; Aunt Mapel opened it and in walked Dean.
Instantly, he picked up on the tense energy in the room and, seeing
Bethany crying, he knew all too well what was happening. Pearl
thought Dean was one of the nicest young men she had ever met, and
immediately stopped arguing, welcoming him inside.
“Paul, do you mind if I speak to Pearl and Mapel privately? Just for a
few moments.” Dean gave Paul a look that implied: “Don't worry, I'll
fix it.”
158
After Bethany and Paul left the room, Dean took the women by the
hands and urged them to sit with him. He looked into their eyes and
spoke calmly. “I know you both want to go home, you have a free will
to make your own choices, but, I must tell you that within the next four
days, a giant earthquake will destroy Los Angeles and one third of the
State of California will fall into the sea.
“This earthquake will run from San Diego to San Francisco and the
destruction will be on the scale that has never been seen before,” he
said.
Pearl and Mapel held their hands to their mouths in surprise and their
eyes were wide in shock, as Dean continued: “America will be in
turmoil, but that's not the worst - your beloved New York will suffer a
cataclysmic flood during January.”
Pearl suddenly screamed out: “I don't believe you, you can't predict
that!” Mapel couldn’t take her eyes off Dean and the soul of Ilias
touched her inner consciousness - Mapel knew he spoke the truth. Dean
said gently, “All I am asking you to do is wait a few days, if the
earthquake doesn't happen, then go home. If it happens, then I urge you
to think carefully of my warning. Ultimately, the choice is yours.”
At the Earthquake Centre in San Francisco, Bill Paxton looked in
disbelief at the new graphs in front of him. He didn't want to panic training and discipline had taught him to thoroughly analyze everything,
to be calm, to be rational.
It was four fifteen p.m. on November 7th, and Bill had a feeling
something terrible was in the air.
The seismograph showed hundreds of low magnitude tremors, like a
giant jigsaw puzzle, covering all of the San Andreas fault.
This morning's graph had only showed several tremors, nothing to
panic about. But now, what he was looking at, was something he had
never believed could be possible.
Bill turned to one of his colleagues and showed him the graph.
“What do you make of this, Chris?”
The young man said simply, “There has to be a fault in the machine,
otherwise you're looking at the probability of a giant earthquake - the
biggest mother of them all!”
159
Bill went to the telephone and called Los Angeles Centre. “Hello
John, what do you think of the latest seismograph?...yes...well, I
suppose you're right, it may settle down.”
With the latest technology at the Earthquake Centres, it was possible
to predict an earthquake well in advance. If these low magnitude
tremors stayed static and didn't increase, there was a strong possibility
that nothing would happen. If they were to intensify dramatically, then
an earthquake would occur within a week or so.
At the moment, the tremors were minute, with no increase evident.
The men were optimistic and did not panic, however, they issued
warnings to Washington and National Security that they were
monitoring the situation and that the next twenty-four hours would be
crucial.
Anna had set the alarm for four a.m. and ordered three cabs for four
thirty, earlier than she needed, but allowing for any delays. It was a
twenty-five minute drive to the airport and at that hour, there wouldn't
be much traffic.
All their bags were packed and ready beside the front door.
The alarm rang, the loud shrill piercing through the dark emptiness
of early morning. Anna sat bolt upright and quickly pressed the button
on the alarm. Her mind was wide-awake and a cold blood chilling fear
seeped through her body, as she jumped out of bed.
Waking everyone who wasn't already awake, Anna threw on her
clothes and switched on the jug for tea. “Hurry up! Hurry up! Let's get
going!” she yelled to the devotees with an unusual tone of panic in her
voice. She gulped down two cups of tea then checked her belongings.
Within twenty minutes of rising, all the devotees were ready and
waiting for the cabs. Anna opened the door and walked into the dark
street, looking for the familiar lights among the early dawn traffic.
Two stray cats ran down the side alley, knocking over a garbage bin
and she jumped with nervousness. The air seemed unusually still and
heavy, as the cabs arrived exactly on time.
Bundling everyone into the cabs, Anna yelled to the drivers, “The
quickest way to LA International, and please hurry!”
One of the devotees beside her said, “Calm down Anna, we have
plenty of time.” Anna didn't answer, in her mind, she kept praying, “Oh
please God, give us time!”
160
At precisely five twenty a.m. on November eighth, at the Earthquake
Centres in San Francisco and Los Angeles, the seismographs exploded
into life. The thin chain of low-grade tremors suddenly became medium
to high magnitude events, running in all directions either side of the San
Andreas Fault.
Bill Paxton felt sick to the stomach. He didn't think twice and picked
up the red phone, waited, then spoke into it:
“Sir, the Coast of California will experience a giant earthquake
within twenty four hours, this will be the biggest mother of them all, we
have to evacuate!” He slammed the phone down, the colour drained
from his face.
“Qantas flight 705 to Sydney Australia will be boarding in thirty
minutes, would passengers please make their way to the departure
lounge, gate fourteen,” a voice spoke over the Airport public address
system, in the duty free hall.
Anna and the devotees were already at gate fourteen, duty free
shopping was the last thing on their minds.
The four attendants at gate fourteen were in tense conversation, with
one on a mobile phone, his face the colour of ash grey. Anna
confronted the attendants, as security bells started ringing.
“What's happening?” she said in a concerned voice.
The female attendant looked blankly at her, with fear in her eyes.
“Oh, nothing to worry about, we have an earthquake alert, it may not
happen, but we have to take certain precautions.”
Anna almost pushed her boarding pass into the attendant's face.
“Don't tell me that means our plane won't be leaving?”
The girl gave a nervous laugh and answered. “Of course not, we'll be
taking off on time, now just relax please.”
Fifteen minutes later, Anna and her group were thankfully boarding
the 747, along with a stream of anxious passengers, all eager to leave
Los Angeles as soon as possible.
Outside, a blood red sun had risen, heaviness was in the air, there
were no sounds of birds and even the traffic seemed unusually quiet.
The earthquake warnings had been issued on the seven o'clock news
- most people were not panicking, as the fact was still sinking in. There
had been warnings before and there was ample time to evacuate to
safety. The bulletin had said to prepare for evacuation within twentyfour hours.
161
Anna sat down and adjusted her seat belt. She looked out the
window and knew this was the day it would happen. Silently, she prayed
and closed her eyes, as the engines began to warm up.
“This is your Captain speaking. For those of you who are not aware,
LA is now on full alert for an impending earthquake. Please relax and
fasten your seat belts, in a few moments, we will be taxiing to runway
four and should be air borne by seven thirty as planned. Please do not
panic, I guarantee I will get us all out of here safely.”
As the plane slowly moved towards the runway, Anna held the hand
of Luke beside her - she gently squeezed it with a feeling of fear and
uncertainty. Neither could talk, the seconds pounded away in time to
their racing heartbeats. Small beads of sweat were starting to run down
their backs.
The clock said seven twenty eight, as the plane turned into the
runway. Anna noticed four other planes taxiing down runways in
preparation for their departure.
The engines roared and the plane shook with fierce vibrations as it
now sped against time. Suddenly, the vibrations became so strong it felt
like the plane would fall in half.
Passengers started to scream the same time as the Captain's voice
yelled over the intercom, “What the hell? Oh, Jesus Christ, no! No!”
Up in the cockpit, the Captain and some of the crew were watching
with terror-stricken faces as the runway started cracking apart in front of
them just as the plane lifted off. Gigantic cracks running in all
directions opened up destroying everything in their path; huge clouds of
dust and burning rocks spewed from the crumbling earth below. A noise
louder than thunder hammered at the struggling plane, urging it to give
up, and fall apart. Anna looked out the window with horror, tears
streaming down her face, as the planes below waiting on the runway,
fell like toys silently into the bowels of the earth and the control tower
and terminal collapsed in a cloud of fire and dust.
The flight attendants were trying to calm the hysterical passengers,
most of whom had witnessed the horror. Some were screaming with
fear, others cried with relief that they were airborne and many others
prayed out loud for the souls of those below.
Captain Dickenson slowly steadied the aircraft with shaking hands.
He couldn't talk; no words would come from his horror filled mouth.
He turned the plane in a circle over the City and watched silently the
162
catastrophic destruction of a magnitude beyond imagination. The plane
had leveled out at five thousand feet and below them the airport had
disappeared completely.
Northward towards the City, was a line of fire, roaring hundreds of
feet into the air - the City and surrounding area for as far as they eye
could see, looked as though it had been hit by a hundred atomic bombs.
Huge clouds of black and grey smoke hurled skywards buildings were
crashing and disappearing like dominoes. It didn't look real it looked
like a movie.
Suddenly, Jack Dickenson started to cry, long heavy sobs of despair.
The co-pilot took over, as an attendant handed the Captain a napkin.
She was crying too.
Back amongst the hysterical passengers, an old lady was calmly
reciting Psalm 23, her words rang out amongst the horrendous despair:
“Yea, though I walk through the valley of the shadow of death, I will
fear no evil; for thou art with me, thy rod and thy staff they comfort
me......surely goodness and mercy shall follow me all the days of my
life.....and I will dwell in the house of the Lord forever, Amen”
Anna and the devotees were comforting some elderly passengers,
many of whom had family living in Los Angeles. The attendants were
busy with passengers who had fainted. One with heart problems
urgently needed a Doctor.
The black smoke from the burning City was rising and starting to
cloud the pilot's vision. He snapped to his senses, they had to get out of
there! Checking the control panel and his co-ordinates, he slowly turned
the plane South East and climbed to ten thousand feet.
It was all behind them now.
One of the passengers had a radio cassette and tried to tune in to
somewhere in LA - all he received was static. All radio stations were
off the air.
* * *
Dean jumped in his sleep with fright; his body started to shake as the
voice of Ilias said calmly: “It's happening sooner than I thought.” Dean
kept his eyes closed and a sudden vision of the destruction occurring in
California drifted in with horrific pictures in his mind.
163
He woke up startled and switched on the bedside lamp, being careful
not to wake Kavita. The clock read 12.15a.m. November ninth.
Quickly, he calculated the time difference - it would be roughly seven
thirty a.m. the day before.
Dean walked out into the kitchen and grabbed some orange juice
from the freezer, he had been asleep almost two hours, but now he was
wide-awake - with concern. He switched on the radio and listened to
the twelve thirty news. There was a flash bulletin that a giant
earthquake had hit Los Angeles and there were no details yet as all
communications had broken down.
Dean turned the radio off and slowly walked back to his bedroom.
He would try to get some sleep before the tragic day ahead.
Several hours later, just as the first rays of dawn were breaking,
Kavita stirred and noticed Dean already awake. He rolled over and
placed a soft kiss on her forehead, whispering, “Don't wake up yet, it's
early, I'm going to make a cup of coffee, I'll be back soon, my darling.”
Out in the kitchen, Dean was surprised to see his mother and Gordon
already making coffee. “Why are you two up so early?” he said,
approaching them. Their eyes met his with a concerned look and
Gordon spoke. “I had a terrible premonition that the LA earthquake has
happened right now.”
Dean placed his arms tightly around them and said. “It has.” They
grabbed their cups of coffee and walked down the hallway and into the
lounge room.
Leeanne switched on the television to World News at Six a.m. The
camera focussed on the pain filled face of the news presenter as she
spoke of the disaster. “At precisely seven thirty a.m., Los Angeles time,
on the eighth of November, the American State of California suffered
the most catastrophic destruction of land, cities and human life that
history has ever seen.” The presenter cleared her throat to gain
composure. She could feel herself coming apart, and continued: “From
Tijuana in Mexico and San Diego to Los Angeles and up past San
Francisco, the entire West coast of California has been destroyed by a
giant earthquake. There was no Richter scale reading available as all
equipment was destroyed. All communications with Los Angeles and
San Francisco are out, the whole of North America is in a state of
emergency. The President will address the Nation within the hour.”
164
Tears fell from the News Presenter's eyes as she said: “God help
America and her people.”
Leeanne turned as she heard the heavy sobbing behind her. Bethany,
her mum and aunt were comforting each other in the doorway. Aunt
Mapel looked up with red, watery eyes, as Dean walked towards them.
Between her sobs, she cried, “We will be staying.”
165
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
The aftermath
The whole world was in a state of shock and mourning following the
Californian earthquake. Never before had a natural disaster so violently
wiped out the land and lives of so many. Emergency crews were unable
to attend the area for days, it was safest in the air to take a full account
of the damage - but this damage was beyond repair - it had all fallen into
the sea.
With the great mass of land disappearing into the bowels of the earth
came a gigantic tidal wave some three hundred feet high which raced
with such fury it almost wiped out the Hawaiian Islands - other smaller
islands were obliterated.
The estimated damage was the total loss of more than a third of the
State of California, approximately seven hundred miles of coastline and
a hundred miles inland had all but disappeared.
The cities of San Diego, Los Angeles, Ventura, Santa Barbara, Santa
Ana, San Luis Obispo, Monterey, Santa Cruz, Sacramento, San
Francisco - virtually every coastal city in California, were now at the
bottom of the ocean.
The fierce aftershocks destroyed any buildings and human life within
the distance of one hundred miles inland. In the central North of the
state, in the Cascade Range area, two volcanoes had erupted. Mt.
Shasta, which had been extinct and the active Lassen Peak, caused
horrific damage and death.
With the population of California estimated at twenty four million
people, it was believed that about eighteen million souls would have
perished - it would be months before an accurate figure could be
estimated.
166
For weeks afterwards, the United States Navy would be collecting
bodies and debris from the sea. Huge fires burnt out of control
everywhere - there was nothing anyone could do as it was all beyond
salvaging.
Qantas flight 705 from Los Angeles touched down at Sydney's
Kingsford Smith airport approximately nineteen hours after take-off.
The plane had carried out an emergency landing in Suva, Fiji, to attend
to ill passengers and the distressed flight crew. Now, they were facing
the cruel reality that their flight was the only successful take-off from
Los Angeles that morning.
Anna and the devotees gathered all their inner strength and each took
an arm and cradled the grief stricken bodies of elderly passengers,
helping them disembark.
Like almost every Australian family that day, Dean, his family, and
friends, sat silently in shock watching the horror unfold on their
television sets.
News cameras flashed amid the horde of journalists jostling for a
story - a remark - any remark from the passengers and crew of Flight
705.
Dean gasped in surprise as he saw the cameras settle on the face of
Anna Rogopolis, holding two elderly ladies tightly to her side. Their
heads were hung low, their bodies bent in pain and sorrow as they
shuffled through the customs exit. Anna held them firmly - Dean could
feel the strength of her love and support that she enveloped around their
traumatized bodies.
Suddenly, a reporter pushed a microphone at Anna's face and
shouted: “What happened? What was it like?” Anna glared at him with
pity that he had to ask such a question. She softly answered: “There are
no words which can be said.” The camera held Anna's beautiful
compassionate face and her love touched the moment.
Dean glanced sideways at his sister and whispered, “That's Anna.”
Helen looked at her brother with tears rolling down her cheeks and said,
“I knew it was her, I could see the same strength and beauty that Yianni
possessed.” Helen wiped her eyes with a tissue and continued, “You
know Dean, she is my son's Aunty.”
Dean cuddled his sister close. He was sad, yet so very relieved that
Anna and the devotees had managed to escape in time.
167
Suddenly, all the TV sets in the country, including the traffic
monitors at all the airports, went blank for a few seconds. Then, the
flash of a special news bulletin - the President of the United States was
addressing the World.
The tired, sorrow filled face of President John Newman filled the
screens. “The horrendous catastrophe which has wiped out our State of
California, will change the face of America for all time. This scar on
our country can never be healed or re-built, the loss of human life can
never be replaced...”
When the President spoke of his country's grief and despair,
throughout the world, traffic stopped, and businesses came to a halt,
shoppers stood glued silently to television monitors and people listened
to radios.
A hush descended upon the population as the President finally
concluded: “I would ask now that all the people of our world pause for
three minutes silence in prayer for those who have lost their lives and
the families who grieve them, in the aftermath of the greatest disaster in
history.”
After the three minutes silence, across the screens came the names of
world leaders and their messages of condolence to the President and the
people of the United States of America.
Half an hour later, people were still watching their television sets
and listening to their radios intently, as another flash came that Russia
had just experienced heavy earth tremors in the Northern part of the
country. Was this the onslaught of yet another giant earthquake? That
thought brought fear and panic to the minds of millions of people
watching and listening in Northern Europe.
Albert Braithwaite was on the telephone to Dean.
“I didn't really expect your prediction to happen so quickly, it has
stunned me, in fact, I feel physically sick just thinking of what lies
ahead, Dean.” The Prime Minister's voice was devoid of any formality,
in fact, he spoke like a good friend.
Dean answered: “Albert, there will be worse to come, but, as I told
you, Australia will be safe until after New Year. Please keep yourself
together and concentrate on the urgency of preparing our own country
for the coming disasters.”
“I am having a meeting tomorrow with our heads of National defense
and security, Dean, I am going to tell them the truth. I want to
168
implement an evacuation plan for all our major coastal cities as soon as
possible. Dean - I do believe everything that you have written. I'm
going to take my family to Church now, I'll call you in a few days,
goodbye my friend.”
After the Prime Minister hung up, Dean stared silently at the phone.
Deep in the pit of his stomach, he also had a sick feeling - this was all
happening faster than he anticipated.
Exactly two weeks after the Californian earthquake, Russia suffered
a medium, though devastating earthquake, measuring seven point five
on the Richter scale. It destroyed several large cities and towns North
of Moscow, with aftershocks being felt in Moscow itself. The
calculated loss of life in Russia's quake was eight thousand five hundred
people and property valued at millions of dollars. Compared to
California, at least they could re-build.
When Dean heard the news, he thought to himself: “Re-build for
what?”
Over in North Korea, the military plans for nuclear war were put on
hold, as crisis meetings were being held between heads of that country.
Their leaders said there was no urgency in destroying the United States,
as natural disasters appeared as though they would bring the country to
it's knees without the help of North Korea.
Ho Chi Po had spoken sarcastically after the Californian earthquake.
“Well, let's see what else Mother Nature has in store for the most
arrogant country in the world!”
All around the world, fear and uncertainty was starting to escalate,
with newspapers declaring: “WHAT COUNTRY WILL SUFFER
MOTHER NATURE'S SCORN NEXT?” and “IS THIS THE
APOCALYPSE?”
Religious broadcasters were urging people to turn to God and pray
for the Earth's survival.
On November twenty ninth, around the countryside of Northern
Japan, several earth tremors were felt. These destroyed some
farmhouses; fortunately there was no loss of life. Two days later,
stronger tremors were felt in Southern Japan, still with little damage and
no loss of life.
Tokyo was taking no chances and proceeded to implement a major
evacuation plan. The Japanese Seismology Bureau was recording
169
similar low magnitude tremors all over the country to what had occurred
in California.
In downtown Tokyo, huge corporations were urging their employees
to take a vacation, take their families and leave Japan for a few weeks.
Some of these corporations and large businesses were closing their
doors and preparing to leave the City. Many small shop owners ignored
the warnings and stayed declaring 'business as usual'.
Within eight hours of the earthquake warning, every plane, train and
bus was overflowing with frightened passengers eager to leave the city.
In Tokyo harbour, cruiseboats, tankers and even houseboats were taking
thousands of people aboard in preparation for evacuation to nearby
islands and South Korea.
The same scene was repeated in Yokohama and Kobe. Across the
Korean Strait, the cities of Pusan, Kwangju and Seoul were preparing to
take evacuees. China was watching intently as fear and panic started to
take hold of their neighbouring country of Japan.
In the early hours of the morning of December sixth, exactly four
weeks after the Californian earthquake, Japan awoke to the onslaught of
heavy earth tremors. The seismographs recorded thousands of high
magnitude tremors scattered all over the country. Japan would not
experience one giant earthquake, but hundreds over the islands.
From the Northern island of Hokkaido, the earthquakes started with
the same destructive intensity as the Californian quake, with the
exception that these earthquakes were running all over the country,
destroying everything in their path.
Mass hysteria gripped Japan, as huge landmasses fell into the sea.
Throughout the world, news bulletins flashed erratically on
television screens and over radios: “GIANT EARTHQUAKES HIT
JAPAN - TOKYO IS DESTROYED!”
In London, Professor Haywood was sitting at his computer, when all
of a sudden, the screen went blank - the computer shut down and he
couldn't start it up again.
In America on Wall Street, all computers shut down - people were
screaming and yelling with fear and concern. The world's money
market had broken down.
In North Korea Ho Chi Po picked up the red phone and ordered all
that country's nuclear missiles to be dismantled at once. The country
170
was put on high alert as small earth tremors were felt along the coastline
adjacent to Japan.
Within eight hours of the first earthquake hitting the Northern city of
Sapporo, ninety percent of Japan had crumbled under the monstrous
earthquakes and fallen into the sea. With this, came massive tidal
waves, which destroyed much of North and South Korea and parts of
the coasts of China and Russia. So sudden and destructive were the
earthquakes that the Japanese army had no time to prepare for the
horrific onslaught, which battered their country. Thousands of people
were speeding down the freeways causing massive pile-ups, others were
running wildly in all directions with bags and belongings bundled under
their arms, as mass hysteria gripped the nation.
The whole Eastern coastline of Korea was flooded beyond repair.
The Western side of the country was untouched, with the Capital city of
Seoul thankfully suffering little damage and loss of life.
When world news crews finally flew over the disaster area days
later, the enormity of the catastrophe shocked the world. Where the
huge, once bustling islands of Japan had once sat, the ocean was now
empty, devoid of land and life. Only the high mountain peaks of Japan
stood like abandoned islands in the sea, with Mt. Fuji standing high and
proud, overlooking water, scattered with debris, shells of boats and high
buildings slowly sinking.
All was gone like it never existed.
Almost two million people had evacuated Japan before the disaster
and were safe in other countries. Unfortunately, the people who had
arrived at the East coast of Korea had perished.
More than one hundred million people died that day in the country
once known as Japan.
Among them, the Emperor and the Royal Family, along with heads
of State.
In Korea, it was estimated about ten million people lost their lives.
The earth would never be the same again; it was changing for all time.
The world was in chaos - there was no time to mourn the millions of
people who had perished. This was far worse than what had happened
in California - now the world monetary system had gone. The
unbelievable crisis facing the world with the collapse of all major
computer networks linked to Japan, was beyond comprehension.
171
A financial world without Tokyo could not survive. Major banks
came to a halt, millions of businesses became non-existent overnight,
transport and communications broke down and fear and panic gripped
every developed country on earth.
In Washington, President Newman, the Senate and Congress, were
snapped out of their mourning over California like a bolt of lightning.
Now, the world would look to Wall Street, to pick up the pieces and
hopefully salvage whatever they could of the global monetary system.
Overnight, gold had become the most valuable commodity, just as
before.
In Toowoomba, everyone had gathered at the Healing Farm.
GP and Trish, Nathan, Yvonne, Tina and Antonio, had driven up
from Springbrook to join Dean and his family. Paul and Bethany were
sitting on the lounge comforting her mother and aunt Mapel, who were
finding it extremely difficult to cope with the world crisis.
Over the radio, came an address by Australia's Prime Minister.
Everyone sat silently, as Albert Braithwaite spoke.
“People of Australia, as you are aware, the once great and powerful
country of Japan is no more. We join with all the nations of the world
in this time of unparalleled grief and despair. Our connections with
Japan are severed for all time - the link has gone.”
The Prime Minister cleared his throat. Deep emotion was starting to
choke his words, he pulled himself together and continued: “We must
not panic. Only the major banks, computer networks and businesses
linked to Japan have been affected. Australia's small banks and building
societies will not suffer. The Internet is still operational and satellite
connections to other countries are still intact. We will survive and pick
up the pieces. God bless Australia and protect her in the coming
months.”
After the Prime Minister concluded, the World News bulletin
declared that in Germany, Chancellor Willheim Gertz had opened his
country to any displaced people. “Over seventy years after the start of
World War Two, Germany has opened its gates to the world. In an
emotional statement, Chancellor Willheim Gertz announced that he was
offering the sanctuary of his country to those people who were
displaced because of world events. He has guaranteed food and shelter
172
to those in need and declared Germany is open to people of all races
and religions; they are free to come and go.”
The small neighbouring countries of Switzerland and Austria later
followed Germany's lead and offered their help.
Dean went to the kitchen and grabbed a beer from the freezer. Paul
stood and followed him. Both young men faced each other with a
million worries consuming their minds. Paul spoke quietly: “You know
Dean, that New York will have to hold the world monetary system
together, Wall Street is all we have.”
Dean knew what Paul was saying and proceeded to open his beer.
Paul looked pale. “New York only has a few months, doesn't it? What
then?”
Dean placed an arm around his friend's shoulders. “Everything is
happening so quickly, like a domino effect. New York will see the New
Year in, but after, I don't know, but it will happen quickly, Paul. Look,
we must think of ourselves and the safety of this country right now. We
can't do anything to stop what nature has planned.”
Just then, Bethany walked in with tears rolling down her cheeks.
She grabbed Paul by the arm and said: “I know we will never see our
beautiful New York again, but, Paul, we have each other and my mother
and aunt are safe. Why don't you try to get through to your parents in
Canada, see how they are, tell them you love them?”
Paul cradled Bethany in his arms and they both cried deeply.
Helen and Carlos walked outside and stood on the porch, gently
inhaling the warm summer air. Their thoughts locked together and they
almost spoke simultaneously, though Helen's words echoed their
thoughts first. “Carlos, I think we should put our Christmas wedding on
hold, too much is happening right now.”
Carlos agreed and added: “When the time is right, we'll be married
and I am sure it will be in that beautiful old Church you mentioned at
Katoomba.” Carlos held the woman he loved and kissed her deeply,
then added: “We'll get through this, we will survive Helen, and you will
be my wife.”
A short while later, the telephone rang, it was the Prime Minister,
asking for Dean.
“Hello Albert, how are you coping?” Dean asked. The reply came:
“Up and down. Sometimes I'm finding it tremendously difficult - then I
go and read The Bible and some pages from your book. It gives me
173
hope and courage and believe me, I need all I can get at the moment.
My wife and sons are holding up better than me. I'm taking them up to
Katoomba for a few days break, actually, I want to check on the
progress of the bunkers - ten are finished already. Dean, could you
please come down and join me for a couple of days?”
Dean didn't hesitate, he knew the urgency of Sydney's evacuation
plan was paramount.
“Of course I'll be there Albert, just tell me where and when.”
Before the Prime Minister said goodbye, he added, “When I went to
Church the other day Dean, I could have sworn I saw tears falling from
the eyes of the Virgin Mary. I kept this to myself, I thought maybe it
was just my emotional state.”
Dean sighed deeply inside himself and knew this was true.. He knew
that right now all over the world images of Mary would start to appear
and that on portraits and statues, she would be shedding tears, tears for
mankind. Dean said: “Hold yourself together Albert, and remember
God is with us, goodbye for now.”
174
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
The love of Mary
Yianni heard the sudden screech of bike tyres, then the familiar
sound of the postman's whistle, he ran outside.
“Kavita! Kavita! It's a parcel for you from Nepal!” he yelled as
Kavita ran down the stairs. Since the destruction of Japan, world-wide
mail was in chaos, however, the parcel had been delivered to the Post
Office just before the catastrophe struck.
Kavita stood staring at the large brown paper parcel post marked
from Tibet, she recognized the scratchy writing of her mother and
excitement filled her mind. Leeanne walked over to investigate the
commotion. “Look, look, I have a parcel from my mother,” cried
Kavita, nervously trying to open the heavily sealed package.
Inside was a delicate white sari, edged with silver and white beads,
together with a letter from her mother. Wrapped separately was a
drawing of snow capped mountains and children playing with smiling
faces. Underneath, her brother, Bhutatma had written: “This is where
we live now, I miss you Kavita, love- Bhutatma.”
Tears fell from her eyes as she lovingly touched her brother's
drawing. Her mother had written about their long journey to Tibet with
Sai Baba and of the huge Ashram in which they now lived along with
hundreds of devotees amid the beauty and peace of Tibet.
Kavita laughed, as she read that they had so much food to eat,
Bhutatma was now a little fat boy! Her mother said they were all
healthy and happy and they loved Kavita, missed her and knew in their
hearts they would one day be together again. On the bottom of the
letter, Sai Baba had written some spiritual words to her, of love, faith
and courage for the coming months. Kavita read the long letter over and
175
over again and for the first time since leaving India, she felt at peace.
Happiness and faith filled her mind; she knew God would protect them
all.
A short time later, when Kavita was in her room, trying on the
beautiful sari her mother had sent, Dean walked in. He stood in wonder
at his pretty flower of India, as she paraded around like a fashion model
for him. Since arriving in Australia, Kavita had gained five kilos, and
her waist length hair had been cut to just below the shoulders, she
looked stunning.
Dean ran and grabbed her, bundling her into his arms and kissing her
deeply. “My God, I love you Kavita,” he gasped, as they fell together
onto the bed, smothering each other with loving embraces. Dean's eyes
ran over the magnificent white sari and he said: “Take care of this
gown, this is what I want you to wear when I marry you.” Kavita
giggled like a child and said, “Maybe we can go back and get married in
Tibet.”
Dean smiled and spoke optimistically. “Who knows what the future
may bring?”
Kavita was so happy with the news from her family that she didn't
object when Dean said he had to travel to Katoomba for a few days. In
fact, the young Indian girl was finally settling in to the Australian
lifestyle and adored Leeanne like her own mother and loved Yianni like
a brother.
While Dean was away, she would be busy helping Leeanne with
preparations for Christmas, making decorations and wrapping presents,
together with cooking delicious sweets. Her old life in harsh, povertystricken India seemed another lifetime away.
Dean jumped from the bus and flung his backpack over his shoulder,
and took a deep breath of the fresh Katoomba air. The Blue Mountain
ranges, some one hundred eighty five kilometres from Sydney, would be
one of the few areas of New South Wales to escape the brunt of Mother
Nature's fury in the months ahead. Dean knew there were many caves in
the area, where people could seek sanctuary.
The greatest devastation would be along Australia's Eastern
coastline.
Albert Braithwaite, his two sons and three security men, sat in the
reception lounge of a small nondescript hotel. As Dean walked through
176
the door casually saying, “Hi!” Ben and Steven stood to greet him with
open arms. “Sanjay, tell us when we're going to get through this shit,
mate!” said Ben, with worry etched over his face.
Dean put an arm around both young men and said, “We'll get through
it, but we have heaps of work - now, let's check out these bunkers.”
In less than two months, the Australian Army and Reserves had built
ten huge underground bunkers, capable of holding close to five hundred
people in each, with food and supplies for about six months. In selected
mountain areas in Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria and
Queensland, and the Atherton Tablelands in North Queensland, more
bunkers were now in the process of being constructed.
After inspecting the bunkers, Dean said to Albert: “They are very
strong and secure, you've done a great job.”
Over dinner that night, Albert outlined his plans for the partial
evacuation of Australia's coastal cities. On January second, he would
address the nation and advise people living in coastal areas, who had
friends and relatives living in the country, to evacuate inland to higher
ground, as there would be an increase in ocean levels which would
cause mass flooding.
Albert added that he would play down the urgency, to avoid mass
panic and would tell the people they had three months to evacuate
coastal areas. The Army, Navy and Air Force would assist with the
evacuations and large inland shelters would be built to house people
who required quarters.
He would advise the people that it was their choice to leave or
remain, but the threat of disaster was to be taken seriously. Albert hung
his head and said to Dean: “I don't know what else to do. A great
majority of people out there sense they are living in the final years,
Mother Nature has been giving them warnings for a long time now.”
Dean poured a glass of wine for himself and Albert, and said,
“You're right, I believe the majority of people on this earth know what is
going to happen and I also believe they understand that nothing can be
done.”
Albert's wife Gail signaled to the waiter and ordered two bottles of
Moet Chandon, to the surprise of everyone, then said to her husband:
“There will be no place to run darling, so let's just enjoy every day we
can while we have it!”
177
Albert smiled as he forced back tears. Ben and Steven yelled to the
waiter for a bottle of tequila and proceeded to grab their mother for a
dance, saying, “let's get this party on the road!”
An hour later, all the staff and guests at the hotel were dancing and
drinking, compliments of the Prime Minister and his family, whilst the
security men stood back looking on in disbelief.
At eight a.m. the next morning, Dean awoke with a terrible headache
and grabbed two aspirin, washing them down with water, followed by
strong, hot coffee. A new day was beginning.
As it was Sunday, Dean had suggested to Albert and his family that
they all attend the morning service at St.John's, the old sandstone
Church where Father Britton was the Priest. Now, as he dashed from
the shower and threw on his clothes, Dean realized he would be
somewhat late for the nine o'clock service.
Father Colin Britton stood in front of the congregation. He noticed a
dozen or so more people than usual, including the surprising appearance
of the Prime Minister and his family. He smiled, very pleased with the
increased numbers in his Church this day.
Dean walked quickly down the aisle and found a seat next to Ben
and Steven, just as the Priest began to speak. “It is wonderful to see so
many new faces here today and I am especially pleased to welcome our
own Prime Minister and his family.”
Father Britton then gave a short sermon on Jesus' teachings on faith
and courage. He concluded by saying: “Courage, true courage to be
able to withstand anything, see anything and to handle anything which
comes into your life. True hope, to know that God is your help in all
situations. Believe that you will all have the strength, the inner strength
that doesn't yield when things get tough and gives you the ability to keep
going and never give up.
“It is in your mind that the voice of God will guide you, in your
heart, you will feel His great love. Begin now to make the assessment
of your life and to find the reasons for its situations and conditions. In
the coming months, your courage and faith will be tested to the limit - I
will ask you all to remember what David wrote in the Psalms: 'Even
though the earth be moved, I will trust in you, my God.'
“What is needed on earth today is that each individual on this planet
brings his heart and mind to the one God, that we are not segregated by
different religions - that we are all the same men and women and we all
178
have the same God - the God of love and light who reigns within the
soul of every human being. May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be
with you now and forever, amen.”
Just as the organist started to play, the eyes of everyone in the
congregation were glued in shock to an area just above Father Britton's
head. Above and behind him, shone the most amazing image of Mary.
The image was like a hazy rainbow, though the detail of her face was
clear and sharp, her eyes were bright blue and held the congregation
with a look of love and compassion, tilted with sadness. The Priest
seemed in a trance-like state as he spoke softly: “Mother Mary has
blessed our gathering, her thoughts are filtering through my mind, she is
saying: 'I have come to give you faith and courage to endure these last
times - to tell you that the future will be filled with glorious peace. I
come to give you hope of eternal life, that you will have peace and love
in the aftertime and that God will be with you always.'“
The image remained for several minutes as Father Britton blinked his
eyes and walked down the aisle, appearing unaware of what had
occurred.
He stopped and turned and held the image just as it was fading. He
fell to his knees in prayer as Spiritual Holiness enveloped the small
Church.
Outside, everyone was talking at once in excited conversation. Many
people had heard stories of visions of Mary appearing around the world,
but to actually see her with their own eyes was really unbelievable. The
Prime Minister's wife, Gail, was hugging her husband and crying,
“Albert, I know now that we will survive, by God, I believe we will!”
Ben and Steven were talking to some young people.
“I would never have believed it if I hadn't seen it with my own eyes,”
said Ben, as a girl of about fourteen with frizzy red hair screamed
hysterically: “We've all seen a miracle, a miracle!”
Albert and his family bade farewell to Dean, they had to return to
Sydney by two p.m. Emotionally, they embraced goodbye.
Dean waited until after the congregation had left. He wanted a quiet
word with Father Britton. As they sat in the Rectory and shared a
welcome cup of tea, Dean said: “Thank you so much for helping my
sister Helen, if you weren't here that night, her and Yianni could have
been killed.”
179
Dean spoke at length of the drama at the Commonwealth Games and
of Helen and Carlos' hopes of being married at St. John's one day.
Father Britton lookes into Dean's eyes and said: “Helen will be married
here, I can feel it in my heart. There is much trepidation ahead for
mankind Dean, but I know God will protect us.”
Dean shifted a little on his chair and said, “Colin, we have to help
ourselves, we have to prepare physically as well as spiritually.” As
Dean explained the building of the underground bunkers and survival
preparations in remote caves, Father Britton interrupted. “Come with
me, I've got something to show you.”
They walked silently back into the Church, up the aisle and behind
the altar. The Priest bent down and pulled a rug away from the floor.
Dean noticed a small trap door. Colin opened it and proceeded to climb
down a ladder, beckoning Dean to follow.
The opening was only wide enough for one person. The Priest
switched on a light on a side wall, as carefully and slowly, the two men
placed one foot behind the other. They must have climbed down at least
fifteen feet or more, before they finally stood on firm ground.
Colin switched on another light and Dean looked in amazement.
They were in a huge underground room, about half the size of the
Church. Stacked along the walls were chairs and pieces of odd
furniture, boxes and crates of wine bottles. Huge cobwebs hung from
the ceiling.
The Priest spoke: “I found the trap-door shortly after I took over the
Parish, everything is just as I found it, years ago. I expect it must have
been an old storeroom, who knows? Anyway, I plan to clean it up and
gather supplies and water for survival. Whoever is in the Church at the
time the disaster strikes, hopefully may stand a chance.”
Dean walked around the room - it was strong and well sealed. “It's
good, your only problem will be oxygen - you could be under here for
months, Colin, you couldn't have too many people down here, maybe
ten at the most.”
Dean gave him advice on possible supplies required, but realized that
the reality of surviving in that environment for an extended period of
time was very slim.
Back inside the Church, the two men said their goodbyes. Colin had
some things to attend to back in the rectory and Dean wanted to spend a
few quiet moments alone in prayer.
180
Fine silver rays of sunlight were seeping through the stained glass
windows. A few of the rays touched the flowers on the altar, making
them seem wet with dew. Dean held the vision of Mother Mary in his
mind and her love touched his soul as he prayed, prayed for mankind
and the earth.
As he stood to leave and walk down the aisle, the silhouette of a
woman came to the door. Dean walked towards her and she walked
towards him. She was wearing loose cotton pants and a pale orange
shirt, around her head was a long flowing scarf which half hid her face.
She stood only a few feet in front of him and the scarf slipped to her
shoulders. Masses of long wavy, brown hair cascaded down to her
waist, her sparkling hazel eyes held his in recognition. She smiled and
her beauty touched his heart.
It was Anna.
“Anna,” he said in surprise.
“Dean, what are you doing here? I heard you lived on a health farm
in Queensland,” she said, looking into his eyes with surprise.
“I've just come down to Katoomba for a few days, I'm going back
this evening. I saw you on television a while ago, coming off the plane I'm so glad you and the devotees got out in time.” Dean could feel the
pain and distress that the horrific flight from Los Angeles would have
caused them all. He gently placed a caring arm around her shoulder and
said, “We'll get through this Anna, don't ever doubt that we won't.”
She looked up into Dean's knowing green eyes and held them tight
with faith, while a warm comforting sensation flowed through her body.
“Come, sit and pray with me for a while,” she said, holding his hand,
then guiding him to sit beside her. Silently, they looked towards the
altar and the golden cross - each had their own conversation with God.
They sat in the Church for a while; Dean listened intently, as Anna
told him of her plans.
She was living at a large Ashram just outside Katoomba, along with
eighty other devotees and their families. In the surrounding mountain
area, there were several huge caves, which would serve as a good
sanctuary when disaster fell.
At the moment, the devotees were busy preparing the caves for
survival, many university students had joined their group, not as Hare
Krishnas, but as friends. “Our group has decided to open its doors to all
people, no matter what religion or race, we do not place the Krishna
181
beliefs upon them. They make their own choices how they pray and
even if they pray at all,” she said.
Dean gazed into her beautiful eyes and thought of how much her
words were like his own. “ The circle of life is strange - who would
have thought that the spoilt materialistic girl, whose family had
controlled an evil drug empire would be sitting in Church beside him,
thinking just like himself,” he mused.
They stood to say goodbye. He had to hurry to catch the train to
Sydney; she would visit with friends in Katoomba. She held out her
hand to him - he held it firmly. Their eyes locked and each felt a
burning sensation in their hearts. Dean could feel tears starting to well
in his eyes; he held them back with uneasiness in his mind. Anna didn't
want to let his hand go, she felt strange, slightly queasy in her stomach.
Suddenly, she dropped his hand and walked quickly out of the
Church, not turning back.
Outside, her pace quickened and she started to run, crying
uncontrollably.
The vision of Mary which was seen in St. John's Church that day,
was one of many that had appeared all around the world. In Sweden,
Moscow, England, Ireland, France, Spain, Greece, Israel and the United
States, images of Mary were seen in Churches and synagogues.
In crowded cities and parks, she came as a vision among the clouds.
Believers came in their millions to the Churches and Halls of worship
around the world. People who had never believed in God, were now
seeking the truth, though there were those who thought it was an
elaborate hoax of some kind.
In America, the majority of people believed Mary was the miracle
they were looking for - the vision of hope and faith that would save the
world. Millions fell to their knees in prayer - at this great time of
upheaval, they looked to Mary with hope and optimism, and read the
Bible to seek the answers.
A group of Indians from the Cherokee Tribe stood on a hill in
Oklahoma and looked at the heavens. Their Great Spirit Gods of old
spoke to them of the end times.
Over in the Smokey Mountains of North Carolina, Tribes of Navajho
and Sioux Indians sat around a fire and looked to the heavens for the
wisdom of long ago.
182
In Australia, around Ayers Rock, many Aboriginal Tribes gathered to
speak of the Dreamtime and their knowledge, ancient knowledge which
had passed down thousands of years, and their preparations for the end
times.
In the week leading up to Christmas, millions of people filled the
Churches and Synagogues, praying that this would not be their last
Christmas and reaffirming their faith.
On the twentieth of December, in Rome, the Pope held a giant
outdoor mass. Thousands of people gathered in St. Peter's Square to
hear the words of Pope John Matthew echo across the cold winter night.
On television monitors across the world, the sight of thousands of
candles flickering in hope and prayer, moved mankind! As the Mass
came to a close, a huge vision of Mother Mary appeared high above the
Pope.
The hazy colours and clear face gazed down upon the masses who
were humbly seeking God in prayer and song.
Suddenly, quietness fell upon the crowd as the Pope raised his hands
to speak the words of Mary: “Do not allow fear or anguish to enter your
hearts at this great time of upheaval. Remember what my son Jesus
said: 'I am the way, the truth and the life - whoever believeth in me will
have everlasting life'.”
The Pope turned around to look at the vision of Mary. Tiny
sprinkles of rain were falling from her eyes. The TV cameras focussed
in on the vision and the world could see the rain falling like tears from
the blue eyes. Slowly, the image faded among gasps of surprise and
wonder from the crowd. People around the world fell to their knees,
crossed themselves and cried for the human race!
The sky was now still and dark - a cold emptiness filled the air there were no more drops of rain. The cameras held the face of the
Pope as he turned around and smiled to the crowd, a beautiful youthful
glow seemed to emit from his usually forlorn, aged face. His eyes were
sparkling and full of knowing. The crowd waited for his words - there
were none.
He stumbled and hunched over, trying to steady himself on a nearby
table. An aide ran to his side just as he fell to the ground. Pope John
Matthew died that night, aged seventy-four years - he had joined the
Heavenly Father.
183
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
The last Christmas
When Dean was last on Santorini, he had warned Monique and
Albert to leave Greece because of the impending war with Turkey. The
young French couple, who had been living on Dimitri's old farm, took
Dean's advice and, with their four year old son Gerard, had settled in
Austria.
When the war became a reality, Monique wrote a letter of thanks to
Dean. She told him of how Albert had bought a small furniture shop,
that Gerard was learning how to snow ski and how much they loved
their life in peaceful Austria.
Last Christmas, the families had exchanged cards and now, as Gerard
collected the mail, he recognized the Australian stamps. “Mamma,
Mamma, it is a card from Dean in Australia,” his little legs ran excitedly
towards his mother who was sitting near the Christmas tree with Zeus,
his dog originally owned by Leeanne's friend Philippe, curled up on the
floor next to her.
Monique opened the envelope and smiled at the picture of a Koala
wearing an Akubra hat sitting under a palm tree, surrounded by
Christmas presents. Inside, was a long letter from Leeanne and Gordon,
telling them all the news from the Healing Farm and their preparations
for the future. Gordon and Dean gave the family advice on survival in
the coming catastrophic months, advising them to stay in Austria.
“Most of Europe would be flooded, only Switzerland, Austria and
parts of Germany may not be affected,” Dean wrote. At the end, there
was a P.S.- “Nothing is guaranteed, all we can do is hope and pray we
will survive. God bless you all.”
Albert walked over and handed his wife a warm glass of gluvine,
then, placing a soft kiss on her cheek, he read the letter too.
184
Tomorrow was Christmas Eve and the small Chapel of St. Nickolas a
few streets from where they lived, would be packed with merry people
celebrating the Holy Season. Monique and Albert knew that tomorrow
night in that Church, they would be praying this would not be their last
Christmas.
Thousands of miles across the ocean in Australia, Leeanne was also
gazing at the Christmas card from Monique and Albert. Her mind was
filled with memories of the first time they met at the Down Under Bar
and how much Gerard had loved the little puppy Zeus. Tears started to
fall from her eyes as she remembered her special friendships with
Philippe - and Nikolas. That special year, a long way back, seemed a
lifetime away, now the reality that they may never see their friends
again hung dark and heavy in her heart.
Kavita and Yianni came bounding through the door and snapped
Leeanne back from her memories. “Grandma, Grandma, I've caught two
green frogs outside, come and see!” Yianni yelled excitedly. As
Leeanne walked outside with Yianni, she silently gave thanks to God
that this Christmas, her family would be together here at the Healing
Farm and she believed, above all else, that this would not be their last
Christmas.
In London, Christmas Eve was going to a quiet affair for Professor
Haywood. He had two old friends who said they would call by for a
few drinks, and Esme had invited a friend for Christmas dinner - apart
from that, it was just the two of them. Professor Haywood watched as
Esme hung the last of the decorations on the Christmas tree.
Underneath, sat two lonely gifts - one for each of them, not the usual
pile of gifts when Nathan and Yvonne were there. This would be a cold
and lonely Christmas for the Professor and Esme.
As he sat in his recliner chair, sipping a glass of port, Michael
Haywood read the last letter from his son. He was very pleased to hear
that Nathan and Yvonne were safe and happy, living with Dean on a
farm and how they were planning for the future. Nathan's letter was full
of faith and optimism, something the Professor didn't share. When he
read how Yvonne's pregnancy was progressing well, with no
complications, he felt relieved and happy - happy that she would deliver
a health baby.
Slowly, a sadness started to fill the Professor's heart - a deep sadness
with the knowledge that he would never live to see his grandchild.
185
Across the Atlantic in the United States, President John Newman
was optimistically celebrating Christmas with his family.
The
traditional huge formal family dinner was being served. The best in
food and the finest wines covered the huge mahogany table - no expense
was spared this Christmas!
John was determined to put the world crisis aside for the festive
season, in fact, he had completely blocked it from his mind. It was only
later that evening, when the family gathered around the Christmas tree
to sing carols, that John cried within his heart. As the timeless words of
Silent Night filled the living room, the President hugged his wife and
children tightly and silently prayed to God that they and their people
would survive.
On the East Coast, in the city of New York, people were celebrating
Christmas with the mildest winter in history. Only one dusting of light
snow had fallen over the city and temperatures were just like in early
autumn.
The people were happy, but the Weather Bureau was more than
concerned. During the past few months, the ocean levels around the
coast had risen dramatically, causing some mild flooding in low areas.
The evacuation of New York was now in the early stages, with some
two hundred and fifty thousand people already settled in other states.
The price of real estate had plummeted to an all time low and many
businesses and large corporations had re-located to more secure inland
cities.
The latest findings from the North Pole were alarming - more huge
cracks were breaking up the ice shelf, causing masses of ice to float free
and melt quickly. The world watched in fear, unable to do anything, as
Mother Nature blew warm winds onto the ice.
In North Dakota, on a remote hillside, a group of elderly American
Indians sat around a huge campfire. Around them, on either side, sat
children, grand children and great grand children from various tribes the Navajho, Sioux, Cherokee and Apache. Tonight, the elders would
speak to the souls of the Great Chiefs of the past and the ancient
knowledge and wisdom would be passed down to the children.
FROM Chief White Cloud, came this message: “It is the duty of
man to preserve the earth and the creation of the Great Spirit.
Mankind being but a grain of sand in the Holy Circle which encloses
all life. Always remember the Prophecy as told by the Cree Tribe -
186
'only after the last tree has been cut down, only after the last river has
been poisoned, only after the last fish has been caught - only then, will
you find that money cannot be eaten....'.”
Then, the voice of Chief Sitting Bull from the year 1876 filtered
through the mind of another elder. He spoke: “Today, my friend Crazy
Horse and I had a passing moment of glory. We defeated the White
Face at Little Bighorn - after many moons of war between us, we have
finally won. Though many moons ahead into our future, I can see
much blood shed - thousands of our men, women and children will be
slaughtered by the blue coats and our lands will be taken for all time.
“In the end, we will lose, our people will be herded like animals
into reservations. Then, a time will come when the Great Black Eagle
of destruction will come to the earth and all lands and people will
perish. After this, a White Eagle of Hope will appear and call to the
hearts of a few survivors, he will guide them back to the lands of their
Great Fathers and the Indian people will once again walk with pride
and hope upon their land, with peace in their hearts.”
The children looked to an Elder who was now smoking a long pipe,
gazing towards the sky. He blew the smoke out and it made rings that
drifted along with the cold night air. Several children huddled together
under a blanket, their eyes wide in wonder as another Elder began to
speak.
“The Great Chief Seattle is speaking to me from the year 1854 - his
message is to the children of tomorrow - he tells them to remember that
all things are connected, that whatever befalls the earth, befalls the sons
of the earth - that man did not weave the web of life, he is only a strand
in it and whatever he does to the web, he does to himself.”
The children looked to the sky and suddenly, a huge black eagle flew
in front of the moon.
High on the snow-capped mountains of Tibet, Sai Baba and his
devotees sat silently in meditation, outside their Ashram, the wild cold
winds blew with increased fury, while inside, they were safe and warm.
Among the hundreds of devotees were Kavita's family.
Her mother Shanti sat with four-year-old Bhutatma cradled in her
arms. Now, he was her baby, as Shakti, her baby daughter had died just
two month previously with influenza - just a week after she had sent the
gift and letter to Kavita. Shanti sat with her head bowed and eyes
187
closed in meditation, though her mind was alive with worry over how
she could tell Kavita of her little sister's untimely death.
Her other children, the twin boys Dara and Kapil, along with the
girls Parusha, Meeka and Sita, sat nearby with other children who had
made the long journey to Tibet.
Since arriving in Tibet, life had been wonderful, with ample food and
plenty of laughter. That was until Shakti's death. The people at the
Ashram had been of great comfort to Shanti at that time of great sorrow
and the love and understanding from Sai Baba gave her strength in her
heart and mind. She knew they would all survive the horrors ahead and
that God was the reality of their life.
Shanti opened her eyes and gazed upon her sleeping son and knew
that one day she would once again hold her beloved daughter Kavita.
Christmas Eve around the world came as it always had, with Church
services, carol singing, gift giving, eating and drinking. Nothing seemed
any different from other years. Though deep in the hearts and minds of
many people, there loomed the fear that this could well be their last
Christmas.
In the early hours of Christmas morning when it was still dark, a
silver saucer shaped object hovered near Ayers Rock in the Northern
Territory of Australia.
Dou Setta checked the coordinates, and then proceeded to land the
spacecraft. “This would be a short stay,” he thought. In the next few
days, they had many places around the earth to visit. Time was running
out, and hopefully, the Aboriginals of Australia would listen to them.
Half a mile from where they landed, a small group of full blood
Aboriginals had seen the strange light in the sky. They had been talking
amongst themselves of the Dreamtime and the stories passed down to
them from their ancient forefathers.
Along with many other tribal Aboriginals, this group believed that
the true God of the Dreamtime came from the sky in a great silver light.
That he could descend like a bird, speak with his mind and his wisdom
was for the good of mankind.
The small group of eight men, some with spears in their hands,
walked slowly towards the strange silver object. They stood without
fear in their minds as the door of the spacecraft opened. Dou Setta and
two of the Karas walked down the stairs towards the waiting men. Dou
Setta steadfastly connected to their thoughts. “These natives knew
188
about them, they had been visited before long ago in a time they called
their 'Dreamtime'.”
Through their minds, the Aboriginal elder asked them to sit on the
ground and speak their wisdom. Dou Setta told them of the impending
disaster and change in the earth. He advised them how to prepare and
told them the sacred places of protection would be deep caves within
Ayers Rock, caves high up in Stanley Chasm and hidden caves in the
Olgas.
Dou Setta told them that land from the bottom of South Australia to
the border of the Northern Territory would part and a huge inland sea
would reclaim much of that land. He said parts of the Northern
Territory would be flooded, but that the Uluru area would be safe.
Just as the morning sun was rising behind Ayers Rock, the
Aboriginals watched in awe as the silver object silently ascended above
them. In a split second, it disappeared like it had never existed.
The day after Christmas Day, in the skies over Jerusalem, strange
lights appeared and a new star shone with illuminating brightness. The
Jews saw this as the second coming of Jesus. The same star was seen in
America and the astrologers were at odds to explain its origin and how it
just appeared. Several small comets also flashed across the sky, the
universe was alive with change.
For three days over Christmas, Greece and Turkey declared a ceasefire with their war. Now, on the morning of December twenty seventh,
it was back to war as usual for the aggressive nations who had a history
of a long seething hate between them.
Mother Nature was not going to let this war continue, so she
intervened.
In the early hours of December twenty ninth, a tremendous
earthquake hit the capital city of Ankara in Turkey, without any
warning.
The giant quake destroyed more than half of the city, killed a million
people and threw Turkey into an hysterical state of emergency. That
same day, two other giant quakes hit Bursa and Eskisehir - the Turkish
people did not know what to do.
The following day, just as the Greek troops were clapping their
hands with glee, thinking they may now win the war, catastrophe hit
Northern Greece.
189
An earthquake with the same intensity and destructive force as the
Turkish quake, ripped through Thessaloniki and other Northern coastal
cities. It wiped out buildings, farms and human life on its destructive
path. Six hours after the first quake, another bombarded Patra and parts
of the Corinth gulf region.
Suddenly, Greece too, was in a state of emergency.
As the death and destruction toll escalated beyond belief, the troops
fighting on either side in the Northern border region, called an end to
the war.
The sun was slowly rising beyond the far hills on New Year's Eve
when three Greek soldiers walked towards the enemy at the border. A
group of Turkish soldiers stood with heavy hearts over the futility of
war at this time. Each could tell what was in the other's mind. High
emotion grabbed the soldiers as they yelled: “The war is over!” then
they threw down their weapons.
One Turkish soldier, maybe only eighteen years of age, ran to a
Greek soldier of the same age with tears streaming down his face. He
embraced him and shouted: “We will never fight again!”
Troops on both sides were then called back to their countries - the
war was over.
190
CHAPTER NINETEEN
Mother Nature's fury!
The year 2013 dawned upon a world filled with uncertainty. The
pessimists, that were the majority, huddled in fear and anger because no
one could control Mother Nature, while the few optimists truly believed
there would be a new and better world, filled with peace and love.
World leaders urged the populations not to panic, but to stay at home
and make preparations for survival if disaster should strike. The United
States and Russian space stations and satellites had reported no unusual
disturbances in the solar system except for the appearance of the new
star and some very small comets and asteroids flying around.
The new star was causing some concern, as it seemed in an elliptic
orbit with the sun- NASA was keeping a close watch on it.
In England, Prime Minister Edward Campbell had been so alarmed
with the melting of the North pole, that evacuation of low lying areas in
his country had begun. Where he had once been ridiculed for
suggesting re-location in Scotland, it now seemed that his suggestion
would become a reality.
The Royal Family was preparing to take up permanent residence in
Scotland and had already moved much of their furniture, heirlooms and
valuables to their Highland Estate.
In Europe, parts of Amsterdam were starting to flood, as thousands
evacuated low-lying Netherlands.
As each day passed, more and more people around the world were
leaving coastal towns and low lying areas to head for higher ground.
In Australia, on the Gold Coast, the Mayor was busy with her
councillors in implementing their evacuation plans for the coastal strip.
Dean was on the telephone to Mayor Denise Williams. “I know it's
191
quiet now, but in the next few weeks, Queensland will be bombarded
with two horrendous cyclones, one will hit Cairns, the other down here.
At the same time, we will have the highest tides in history as well as
torrential rain,” Dean spoke with urgency in his voice.
Mayor Williams answered: “I believe you Dean, but I don't want to
cause a panic just yet. We will start phase one of our evacuation plan
next week, but it will take at least three months to relocate most people.
It's a huge job and I know there will be many people who will not leave.
This cannot be done overnight, you understand?”
Dean sighed heavily, as he said, “I do understand Denise, but what I
want you to understand is that when the cyclone hits and the seas rise,
there will be no relief, no turning back. That will be the mild start of an
onslaught, which will grow in ferocity and intensity at a level you
couldn't possibly imagine. Every building along the coast will be
destroyed and it will happen fast.”
There was silence on the end of the line. Dean could tell The Mayor
was worried, then she spoke, “I am going to contact the Bureau of
Meteorology, I'll keep in touch, goodbye Dean.”
Leeanne walked in just as her son was putting the phone down and
she noticed the worried look clouding his gentle face. Dean said, “we've
got to get Nanna out of her house and up here permanently, the Coast
will be flooded soon, Mum.”
Leeanne knew time was running out. She had tried desperately to
convince her mother to stay on the farm over Christmas, with no
success. Eva was in her eighties and hated change. She didn't want to
live to see a new world.
Gordon's mother Beth had died a few years previously, telling them
all she had a good life with much happiness, but now it was time for her
to go. She died in her sleep and at peace. Now, Eva was saying the
same.
Leeanne dialled her number and her mother's faint voice answered,
“Hello my darling daughter.”
“Mum, I'm driving down tomorrow to pick you up. Pack your things
and be ready,” Leeanne said, with authority.
Eva replied: “Please darling, you must understand I don't want to
leave my home. I'm too old and tired to fight for my life and I don't
want to fight with you. I love you and you must give me my last wish
and that is to die here - not in some new world. Dean once said that you
192
can only guide and advise people and that in the end, it is their choice they have their own free will.”
Leeanne was silent as she fought to hold back tears, as Eva
continued: “Darling, the future is for my Grandchildren and their
children. I know God will protect you all in the new world, but it is my
wish to say goodbye to my life in the old world, my world.”
Although she was terribly sad and disappointed, Leeanne understood
and said gently, “It's OK Mum, I understand. I love you so much and I'll
call you every day. Take care and God bless you, we miss you.”
Dean hugged his mother and said: “We all leave when the time is
right for us. Sometimes, we think it is untimely and not fair, but
ultimately what is meant to be, will be, and you and I know more than
anyone that it is just a progression of the soul.”
Leeanne tipped her head and kissed her son, feeling more at peace.
Later that day, Paul, Bethany and her mother waited anxiously as
Aunt Mapel called her friends in New York.
A stranger answered the phone and told them the friends had moved
a week ago to Chicago and passed on the address. “Most people around
here have moved up state, the ocean's rising and Boston is on full flood
alert. I got myself a big boat, so that's where I'm heading, out to sea and
down to Florida...” The stranger wanted to keep talking, but Mapel said
a polite goodbye and hung up. Everyone felt relieved that their friends
were now safe in Chicago.
City police and emergency services in New York City were
frantically just coping with the ever increasing numbers of evacuees,
crime waves were gripping the city as looters broke into deserted homes
and businesses. Television news crews flying over the North Atlantic
Ocean reported hundreds of icebergs floating towards the
Newfoundland coast. All shipping in the area had come to a standstill;
the ocean was far too dangerous.
Panic gripped Wall Street just as they were finally starting to get the
world monetary system under control. New York was now in high crisis
and the world was worried.
President John Newman stepped from the US Air Force helicopter,
grave concern covering his tired face. The situation was diabolical,
there was no way out or around this one. He walked straight into the
office of General McPherson and several Air Force commanders. After
shaking their hands, he got straight to the point.
193
“Gentlemen, we have to break up those huge icebergs, I can see mass
tragedy occurring at any moment,” he said.
General Mcpherson replied: “We can fire missiles into them, that
should do the job.” The General grabbed several papers and graphs
from his desk and showed them to the President, saying, “Professor
Larsen's recent findings, Sir. The world ocean currents are flowing in
different directions and patterns. We now have strong warm ocean
currents coming from the North Pole, directly towards the East Coast of
North America. It sounds unbelievable, but it's true. The Pole is
breaking up and melting at an alarming speed and most of the ice is
heading towards us.”
The President glanced at the papers quickly - there was no time for
discussions or choices. He held General McPherson's eyes with grave
fear in his gut and said: “Break those icebergs up anyway you want, just
do it now, right now! I'm placing New York on full flood alert - let's get
our people out of there now.”
To add to New York's crisis, it started to rain. Heavy torrential rain
which wouldn't stop, day after day....and at the end of January, the State
had more than a year's rainfall in just a few weeks.
Newfoundland and the Coast of Nova Scotia were completely
flooded, Boston was underwater - fear and panic had killed thousands of
people who had waited too late to evacuate the City.
Huge cruise boats, tankers and Naval vessels took on thousands of
people as they steamed quickly to safety in the South. The luxury
residences on Rhode Island and Long Island fell in to the turbulent sea,
taking the trappings of millionaire's wealth with them.
The world watched helplessly as the coast of North Eastern America
slowly fell into the sea.
In Australia, Queensland was experiencing its own catastrophe as
two fierce cyclones battered the East coast. In Cairns over a period of
five days, cyclone Pauline had wiped out all shipping, Barrier Reef
island resorts and virtually flattened the Tropical North Queensland
City. More than three thousand people were reported killed or missing
in the aftermath of the worst cyclone in history!
Just behind cyclone Pauline, loomed cyclone Jess, with a destructive
force more than its predecessor. The Gold Coast was in its direct path
and now that area braced itself for the onslaught.
194
The seas of the Gold Coast were raging in fury as the tides became
increasingly higher. Torrential rain covered the area, causing canal
estates to flood quickly.
Mayor Denise Williams called a state of emergency, urging
immediate evacuation of the region. The Mayor's heart had sunk to her
feet as she realized she should have heeded Dean's warning sooner. A
week earlier could have saved many lives, but now she only had ten
hours before the eye of the cyclone was over Surfers Paradise.
Panic gripped the tourist city as thousands threw belongings into cars
and drove blindly West, South- anywhere, to escape the fierce assault of
Mother Nature at her worst.
In the suburb of Mermaid Waters, Eva sat listening to the radio as
the cyclone warnings flashed over the air with increased tension. Eva
had taped all her windows and had secured her furniture, then drawn her
heavy curtains. She was aware of the precautions to take when a
cyclone threatened.
Leeanne had been calling her mother every couple of hours and Eva
had been chatting on as if nothing was happening.
Now, as Leeanne once again went to dial her mother's number, a cold
chill went down her spine, she hesitated, as Gordon approached with a
hot mug of coffee. “I thought you would like this, it's going to be a long
night,” he said, handing her the mug.
Outside the farmhouse, it was raining and windy - the animals were
safely locked in the barn. Precautions had not only been taken in
Coastal communities, but also in Brisbane and the Toowoomba regions
too.
Virtually all of South East Queensland was on cyclone alert.
Leeanne dialled the number slowly, and then listened - there was no dial
tone, just a static noise.
“There's a problem with the phone Gordon,” Leeanne said.
“With this weather and conditions, it's been a miracle how you got
through before, darling, just try a little later,” was his reply.
A news flash jumped from the radio.
“Cyclone Jess is bearing down on the Gold Coast with destructive
winds of over three hundred kilometres an hour, the eye of the storm
will pass over that area in the next hour. Already huge seas have
washed away foundations of high-rise buildings close to the beach several houses have been washed into the sea. Emergency crews are
195
trying to rescue stranded people, though most of the streets are now
deserted and have turned into turbulent rivers. An eerie stillness seems
to be descending on Surfers Paradise...”
Suddenly, there was loud crackling and static filled the radio.
Gordon moved the dial, trying to get another station - there was only
static. Finally, he picked up a Brisbane radio station, which said all
communication with the Gold Coast had been cut - the cyclone had hit
the Tourist City.
Leeanne ran to the telephone and frantically dialed her mother's
number again - tears were streaming down her face. The line was dead
and an empty silence filled her heart with despair. Gordon was beside
her, cradling her sobbing body. “It's how she wanted to go darling, it's
over now,” he said.
Dean walked over to his mother and embraced her tightly, saying,
“she went quickly and felt no pain, her heart gave out just before the
cyclone hit.”
Gordon and Leeanne thought for a moment and their psychic minds
told them that this was true. Leeanne turned to Kavita, who was beside
Dean with tears in her eyes, and said: “Kavita darling, could you please
pour me a scotch and water?”
The pretty Indian girl smiled sadly and said, “yes”, as she went to the
cabinet in the living room.
The news on the television the next morning was devastating. “The
Gold Coast region from Hope Island to Coolangatta has been totally
destroyed by cyclone Jess. Billions of dollars of real estate had been
smashed to the ground, all the high rise buildings in Surfers Paradise
and Broadbeach have collapsed into the sea.”
The ocean had reclaimed almost half a mile inland and the Gold
Coast Highway no longer existed. The tourist strip was now a raging
torrent of bricks, timber, cars, houses and debris. It would be weeks
before an account could be given as to the loss of life, but it was known
that the Mayor and her family had perished on that terrible night.
The next day, Leeanne, Gordon and family and friends spent several
hours in the Healing Pyramid in prayer and meditation. They prayed for
the souls who had perished in the cyclone and the loved ones they left
behind in grief. A special prayer and spiritual reading was said by Dean
for his lost Grandmother. A heavy sadness filled the Healing Farm for
196
several days, as all around, the torrential rain fell and the winds blew
with abandoned fury.
It was just beginning.
While Australia mourned the tragedy of the lost Gold Coast and the
destruction of Cairns, New York was still fighting a losing battle with
the elements. As the waters rose, thousands had died in the stampede to
leave the City. The Air Force had successfully broken up the icebergs,
though now it was a continuing situation as more of the North Pole
cracked apart.
Television crews relayed the horrifying pictures of a huge city
littered with skyscrapers that were some ten stories underwater. Many
buildings had fallen over and parts were floating out to sea.
The United Kingdom and the West Coast of Europe were fighting
the same losing battle with floods, though the waters were not half as
high as round New York. Millions of people were now settling in
Switzerland and Austria - there were no borders and all countries of the
world were assisting each other.
The Middle East was also experiencing its share of earthquakes and
floods. The Muslims seemed resigned to their fate and perished
peacefully in the name of Allah.
Dean's prophecies were coming true. “Mankind will stop all wars,
he will be too busy trying to save himself and his country.”
In England, Professor Haywood and Esme watched in fear as the
rising flood waters lapped around their country cottage. The area where
they lived was classified as high country, safe from any floodwaters.
Unfortunately, now, no place was safe except the Highlands of
Scotland. Michael Haywood poured himself a large brandy and offered
the same to Esme. He went to his desk and looked at the calendar. It
was February eighteenth - Dean's predictions for the world catastrophes
were coming true, far sooner than had been anticipated.
He hung his head in deep thought and contemplated his theory of the
black star. “Could this really happen?” he wondered, “or would Mother
Nature destroy most of the earth instead.”
In the past months, he had started to question his own belief that an
asteroid or comet would hit earth in early 2012, turning the planet on its
axis. He took a long sip of the warm brandy and tapped his fingers on
the mahogany table.
197
The scientist in him said: “What if that new star that had been
reported was actually the black star? What if it was already sitting up
there in it's orbit with the sun and no one had bothered to check it out
thoroughly as world events now took top priority? What if everything
was somehow speeding up and what if it was all going to happen as
predicted, only sooner?”
His heart started to beat a little faster as his mind rang a bell and a
gut feeling stirred deep in his stomach. He picked up the phone and
dialed Australia.
Dean answered the phone; somehow, he was expecting the call.
“Hello Michael, how are you coping?”
“Well, I'd say I'm almost up to my bloody ankles in water, but I'm
enjoying my brandy!”
Dean had to laugh - the professor always had a dry sense of humour.
He continued: “Dean, I hope you're getting things organized now, I have
a gut feeling the time of impact is close - what do you think?”
Dean didn't have to think, his plans were already running wild in his
head. He answered: “It is close Michael, and we'll all be moving down
to The Haven in Springbrook in a few days. We will be safe there,
everything is prepared.”
Just then, Nathan walked in and Dean called him over. “Michael, I'll
say goodbye now, Nathan wants to talk to you. Give my love to Esme,
please take care and believe God will be with you always, I love you
Professor and I will never forget you.”
As Dean handed Nathan the phone, he knew he would never speak to
Professor Haywood again.
Nathan and his father chatted on about everyday things like nothing
had changed in the world. They laughed and reminisced about years
gone by, of when Nathan was a young boy getting up to all kinds of
mischief, of his wonderful mother before she died and finally of his
years at NASA and then the black star theory.
Father and son were silent for a moment, the realization that this
would most likely be their last conversation weighed heavy in their
hearts. Yvonne walked beside her husband and held his hand tightly,
small tears were forming in her round blue eyes - she whispered: “When
you're finished, I want to say goodbye.”
Nathan squeezed her hand tightly as a huge blanket of sadness fell
over his body and he spoke into the phone: “Dad, I'll put Yvonne on
198
now. I want you to know that you've been the best father any son could
wish for - I appreciate everything you've done for me...God, I love you.
Now, you and Esme finish off that bottle of brandy tonight, you hear
me? Good night Dad and God bless you.”
Nathan handed Yvonne the phone and walked into the kitchen to join
Dean with a bottle of beer.
Yvonne's soft voice rang in the Professor's ears. “Hello Dad, if you
could only see me now, I am so fat. This Grandchild of yours will
weigh a ton. After I had the initial morning sickness, I'm starved and
have to eat everything in front of me.”
The Professor laughed, he could just imagine Yvonne waddling
around. He said: “I'm a lucky bugger, you know, I have a strong feeling
my grandchild will be the first born in the New World - not many
people could claim that honour.”
Yvonne replied: “If I have a boy, he will be named Michael, after
you, but I feel, I'm having a girl - I haven't chosen a name, but it will
come to me the moment she's born. Dad, I love you, I must go,
goodbye.”
Yvonne ran to the kitchen and threw her arms around Nathan. Both
cried with the sadness that their father would never see them or his
grandchild.
Suddenly, Gordon shouted out to everyone to come into the sitting
room to watch the latest news from America.
The CTN News helicopter hovered above the flooded city of New
York. The news commentator tried to describe the horrendous
devastation below, his voice finally broke up with heavy emotion as the
viewers heard his deep sobs. All over the world, people who could
receive television, watched in despair, crying to themselves, as the
camera panned over the sinking city.
It rested on the head and shoulders of the Statue of Liberty, her
helplessness filled the screen - she held the torch high above the surging
ocean. The commentator's voice spoke: “Liberty will not give in to the
surging waters, her light of hope will always be seen, like the human
spirit, she will survive - God save America!
199
CHAPTER TWENTY
The Preparation
Helen placed a large brown box in front of her son and calmly said to
him, “Darling, I want you to fill this box with the toys and books that
are most precious to you - the ones you cannot do without.”
Yianni looked up at his mother, his brown eyes seemed concerned
and he said, “Why do you want me to do that?”
Carlos walked over and knelt down to Yianni's level and said, “We
are all moving down to Springbrook, to live at The Haven for a long,
long time, but we can't take everything with us.”
Yianni questioned Carlos with innocence as he replied, “Why?”
“Just because - now come on son, do as your Mum says,” Carlos
replied simply.
The packing up at the Healing Farm was on the way. Gordon's most
prized possession was his vast CD and Tape collection, music that went
back to the sixties, eighties and most of the latest top releases. He sat in
the living room rummaging through mountains of boxes and bags music he had collected over a lifetime.
Leeanne looked on laughing and said, “You'll only be able to take
about a third of all that, Gordon.” Gordon looked up and shrugged his
shoulders. Sorting out what he would take or leave was an emotional
job, particularly knowing that the ones he would leave behind, he would
never hear again in his life!
“Music,” he thought, “a world without music would be an empty
place.”
Paul was going through a checklist with Dean for electrical
equipment, hardware and all the components needed for survival in an
unknown environment. Nathan and Yvonne were organizing medical
200
supplies from oxygen masks, surgery equipment, to basic medicine and
drugs. This was proving a daunting task, as even with medical supplies,
there was no guarantee that any of them would survive.
The telephone rang - it was Antonio at The Haven. He told them that
Tina had just arrived with thirty-four of her group, Children of the
Light. A few had decided against joining the company at The Haven at
the last minute, preferring to stay with their parents and accept Mother
Nature's purpose. Tina was preparing to start the hydroponic garden in
the cavern and had brought a large supply of seeds, plants of various
varieties, fertilizers and equipment.
Preparations were under way.
Dean had been so busy organizing the move down to Springbrook, he
had not dwelt on what might be occurring in the solar system at this
time. Now, he was wondering if NASA had detected a new comet or
asteroid close to Earth - he wondered why Russia, China or the US
reported nothing unusual.
His instinct told him it was right in front of them!
Suddenly, Dou Setta's thoughts flew into Dean's mind with wild fury.
“It's up here - one mammoth asteroid and several small ones - and
they're on a collision course with Earth right now!”
Dean jumped at the thought. His head was pounding rapidly quickly he dialed the Prime Minister on his private line. “Hello Albert,
look, I am very concerned that something is happening in the solar
system which the experts are not aware of, could you call President
Newman and see if NASA has any reports?”
“Dean, I don't have to call, I've just had a report from Pine Gap. The
new star which was reported just before Christmas, well, it's gone,
disappeared - no trace, and they've picked up some very strange activity
up there,” The Prime Minister replied. There was a short silence, then
he continued, “Dean, I will ring President Newman now, I'll call you
back soon.”
Since the flooding of New York, America was failing in attempts to
get back on its feet. Wall Street was gone, along with the world
monetary system. Now, Gold was the only valuable commodity looting and robbery was rampant all over the United States. The
country was in chaos - the National Guard and armed forces were
fighting a losing battle, trying to restore some type of order. Similar
scenes were repeated right across the globe.
201
Thousands of people were giving in to fate and taking their own lives
every day - there seemed to be a universal acceptance that the earth was
dying and that nothing could be done. The coast of Florida was
flooding and Cape Canaveral was in a state of emergency.
Looking into space was the last thing America had considered trying to save what was left of their land was top priority at this time.
NASA was aware the new star had disappeared and they couldn't
care less. It was getting to the point where the main concern was every
man and his family, as millions of people fled to safer countries.
President John Newman called his Heads of State to the Pentagon for
an emergency meeting. As he addressed the men in front of him, he felt
a lump the size of a golf ball in his throat. “Gentlemen, this may well be
the last meeting we will ever have.” A cool silence filled the
apprehensive gathering as he continued, “Two weeks from now,
operation SUTE will be in place and activated. I would ask every man
to prepare himself, his family and friends for the worst.”
The President glanced sideways and indicated to the head of NASA
to proceed with his report. “Spacelab Venture has picked up unusual
activity around Proxima Centauri and other stars. Data from US and
Russian satellites report strange lights and sounds coming from the
outward reaches of the Universe - a different energy seems to be
entering our solar system - something is happening which we cannot pin
point just yet,” the NASA chief said.
Suddenly, the President's telephone rang. John Newman answered
and the group watched silently as the colour drained from his face, and
he said to the phone: “Are you certain of that?”
He slowly placed the receiver down and contemplated the worried
faces before him, then he said, “That was Russia, they have informed
me that a giant asteroid and several smaller ones are heading on a
collision course with Earth - they are faxing through all their latest
satellite data now!”
The men started talking nervously between themselves, tension
began to fill the air. The President walked over to General McPherson
and said: “We can re-program our satellites with laser capabilities and
attempt to break up the rogue asteroid.”
The General seemed deep in thought, then said, “Mr. President, Sir,
this could well be Professor Haywood's Black Star theory.”
202
The President held his worried eyes and replied, “I'm sure it damn
well is, and because of all our communication disruptions and the
sinking of half our bloody country, we haven't had time to see what has
been happening in space - that Black Star, and whatever it's been doing,
has been up there for months.”
A few hours later, the data came through from Russia, accompanied
by numerous telephone calls from the Kremlin. President Newman
made an announcement: “Gentlemen, in conjunction with Russia, we
have decided to re-program all our satellites which have laser
capabilities, to concentrate on the asteroid. NASA will link up with the
Kremlin and we will work together on this situation. The asteroid must
be destroyed, or at least deflected from its path, before it destroys our
world.”
The President looked over at General McPherson and the heads of
NASA and said: “I want our people in space as soon as possible - get
the shuttle Voyager up there now and contact our Moon spacelab we've gotta shoot this big mother down!!”
A voice called out from the meeting, “Do we know just how big it is
and estimated time of entry?”
“Russia has figured the asteroid at more than three miles across, with
a mass of some five hundred billion tons. They speculate it was in a
belt between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter. No one knows just what
happened up there or how its speed has increased so dramatically, it's
now travelling at more than one hundred and forty thousand miles an
hour. Russia estimates we have between four to six weeks, that's all,”
the President said.
There were sighs of disbelief and yells of “that's impossible!” in the
room - the men were all talking loudly in fear, disputing that this could
really happen.
Within twenty-four hours, China had joined the US and Russia in a
global battle to stop the rogue asteroid.
In Australia, Pine Gap space station was in constant communication
with the United States. Panic started to grip the world leaders in their
desperate race against time.
It was difficult to keep a veil of secrecy around all the mounting
tension, but the world leaders agreed that the knowledge of the asteroid
must be kept from the public. People were suffering enough with floods
and earthquakes - there was no need to frighten them even more with the
203
assumption that the earth could be split into pieces. After the lasers
knocked the intruder off course, the public would then be informed.
Three weeks after Operation Intercept commenced, satellite reports
were coming in loud and clear. NASA checked its co-ordinates with
Russia's Spacelab - they were tracking the asteroid and the lasers were
on target. The countdown was beginning - in about six hours from now,
the first of several laser charges would fire at the mammoth mass.
President Newman hadn't slept for days, he felt he had aged ten years
in the past month and his nerves were on edge.
At NASA Headquarters, he started to pace up and down like a caged
animal, ready to fight for survival.
The red counter ticked off the minutes to intercept.
Five
minutes...four...three...two...one. Then, the seconds came in time with
his beating heart. Three...two...one...impact! The screen lit up - NO
CONTACT!
Lights were flashing, there were no signals - then, the total disbelief
that all the lasers had missed the target!
“What the hell happened?!” screamed President Newman, as
personnel ran around frantically seeing if there was a malfunction.
Russia was on the red phone. “Just as we fired the lasers, we realized
that we didn't compensate for the speed variable when we entered the
co-ordinates, Iam sorry, but we clipped the tail, it was a simple human
error,” a voice reported.
An astrophysicist checked incoming data and yelled into the phone:
“This fucking thing is going too fast to be an asteroid - where did it
come from?” Amid the rising panic, the satellites co-ordinated again this time, they were determined not to miss. The countdown started everyone held their breath, eyes glued to screens three...two...one...impact! Blip, blip - contact had been made and
everyone yelled excitedly.
“We did it, we did it!” cried the President, as he shook hands with
his colleagues. Then, the satellite data came through the same as before.
There was an eerie silence as each man watched the tracking data in
disbelief - the asteroid was still on the same course - it had not been
penetrated, the lasers had not affected the asteroid or its course.
Someone was yelling: “This bloody thing is unstoppable!”
The staff was frantically re-coordinating the satellites - Spacelab and
Voyager were coming through with their latest findings - telephones
204
were ringing and the President was again on line to Russia and China.
China said that the moment it entered our atmosphere, they would hit it
with every nuclear warhead they had. The President replied, “If it
enters our atmosphere, forget any nuclear missiles, it will be too late,
this will be the end.”
Several days later, NASA reported the destruction of the three very
small asteroids, which accompanied the giant rogue. Unfortunately,
nothing could budge the determined giant from its path.
On the twenty first of March 2013, it was unanimously decided by
the three superpowers to inform an unsuspecting public that a giant
asteroid would enter earth's atmosphere in about seven to eight days.
On television monitors and radio stations around the world, came the
shock address to the world nations. President Newman was devoid of
emotion - all he could think about was getting himself, his family and
friends safely into one of the bunkers. He spoke with tense concern,
holding his head high.
“For the past month, Russia, China and ourselves have been engaged
in a battle in space. A giant asteroid, some three miles across has been
on a collision course with our planet. We have used every laser and
nuclear device possible in an attempt to deflect or destroy this incoming monster. Unfortunately, all our attempts have failed. This huge
mass is unstoppable and if it keeps up its present speed of one hundred
and forty thousand miles an hour, we can expect it to enter our
atmosphere in about seven or eight days,” he said.
The President stopped speaking and an adviser appeared on camera,
urging the people not to panic, whilst suggesting ways to prepare for
safety and survival.
Within an hour of the broadcast, countries were furiously devising
ways and means of protection for their people. In populated cities,
thousands panicked and fled in all directions, not knowing where to go many died in these frantic stampedes. In quiet country areas, farmers
looked to the heavens and prayed for their land and animals, while
desperately trying to build underground shelters in time.
All over the world, panic and havoc gripped millions as the
devastating realization hit people, that the end of the planet earth was
only one week away.
Many religious sects committed mass suicide and seemingly normal
people opted for overdoses of sleeping pills and jumped off cliffs and
205
bridges. No one could think rationally, even some of the devout
Christians started to question their belief in God. Newspaper headlines
blared: “WHERE IS OUR GOD NOW?” and “SATAN IS BRINGING
THE APOCALYPSE.”
Many people burnt their Bibles and Catholics threw away their
Rosary beads in despair! The chaos felt after the Californian
earthquake, Japan's destruction and the sinking of New York, was
nothing, compared to this - now, it was every man, woman and child for
themselves, as the countdown began.
In Washington, the President had a secure underground bunker in the
grounds of the White House. This would be used only for his family,
some colleagues and their families and a few select senior officials. The
bunkers and underwater bubbles were equipped with everything needed
to survive in a hostile environment. Evacuations to these locations for a
few selected fortunate souls were well under way.
In England, many people had moved up to Scotland - the Prime
Minister had set up a makeshift seat of Government in the Highlands
and was busy securing their underground bunkers for survival. Millions
stayed in the flooded lowlands and London, preferring to wait for their
fate. Tension and fear escalated, as it was now only three days to
impact.
In Australia, the Prime Minister had left Canberra and moved with
his family to Katoomba. The Blue Mountain area was now crowded
with millions of people scrambling to find shelter. All over Australia,
people were leaving the coastal cities and towns and heading for the
mountain areas. Some had four wheel drives, trucks and vans, with
masses of camping equipment.
Most people didn't know where they were going or what they would
do - they just fled somewhere - anywhere, in a desperate bid to survive.
The Prime Minister had allocated five of the Katoomba bunkers to
students and young people who had been selected at random throughout
Sydney. Another three were allocated to young families, the parents
being under the age of thirty years, with small children. Two others
would house doctors, nurses and medical specialists and their families preference going to people under forty years of age.
Another would house the highest ranking Army, Navy and Air Force
personnel and their families. At Army and Air Force barracks all over
Australia, underground bunkers, filled with equipment and arms would
206
house many of the Country's defense forces. The last bunker at
Katoomba was equipped to hold the Prime Minister and his family,
together with Government officials and security staff.
In other states, persons of similar backgrounds would fill their
bunkers.
Albert Braithwaite passed a cup of hot coffee to his wife Gail and
said, “Darling, I saw Father Britton in town this morning, he is holding a
service at six o'clock tomorrow night. I told him we would be there.”
Gail glared at her husband in disbelief, replying, “No way, that's
cutting it too fine for me - the impact is due that night or the next day, I
want to be safe in here and locked in way before then, and, besides, it
will be diabolical outside at that time.”
Albert held her eyes with concern and said, “Trust me Gail, when I
spoke to Father, I had the strongest gut feeling we must pray that night
in that Church.” Gail didn't answer - she just sipped on her coffee and
thought to herself, “Well, I'm staying put!”
At The Haven in Springbrook, preparations were concluded and
everyone was now settled in and living comfortably in the huge cavern.
GP and Gordon had erected a multi band radio transceiver at the top of
the cavern. Beside it was a solid steel tube made just like a periscope in
a submarine - this would enable them to see the atmosphere outside. A
huge six-inch thick steel door closed off the entrance and a large
boulder was positioned in front of the door. All was secure with no
chance of leaks from outside.
Approximately eight hours before impact, the cavern would be
sealed, and the animals would be collected and brought in last. The day
before impact, Tina and two girls from her group went into town to pick
up some last minute bits and pieces and, of course, to feast on the last
plate of fast food they would probably ever eat again. Gordon also
drove into town to collect last minute items like extra solder, leads and a
large supply of dry cell batteries. As he paid for the items, he said to the
shopkeeper, “I'm always forgetting small things at the last minute.”
At that instant, a terrible thought flew into his mind and he yelled out
loud, “Oh no! How can I have forgotten those - our wedding photos?”
The shopkeeper stared at him in surprise as he grabbed the goods and
ran outside, saying, “Keep the change!”
Outside the shop, Gordon's mind was running in circles. Leeanne
had asked him if he had packed their wedding photos - he remembered
207
putting the album along with other photos, in a box behind the bed.
Now, the cold, empty feeling hit him as he realized he had left that box
behind. “Oh Shit! Oh Shit!” he kept saying over and over to himself, as
he walked to the truck.
As he sat in the truck, Gordon looked at his watch - it was ten fifteen
in the morning. If he left now, he could get to Toowoomba and be back
at The Haven by two or two thirty. He started the engine and noticed
Tina and the girls getting into their car across the road. He yelled out to
them: “Tina, hang on a minute! I've forgotten something up at the Farm,
tell Leeanne I had to go back, don't worry, I'll be back at the cavern by
two thirty!”
Tina shot Gordon a look of disbelief and yelled to him as he drove
off. “Don't go back there, it's cutting it too fine! Stop Gordon!”
Leeanne's heart sunk to her feet when Tina told her what had
happened. Dean had a bad feeling about this news - he paced up and
down, worry and concern were enveloping his body. He checked the
time, it was eleven thirty. He would start ringing the farm soon Gordon should be there around noon.
Gordon had a good drive up the range - it was strangely quiet with
little traffic. Most people were now huddled in their homes, praying
and awaiting their fate.
It was just before noon when he turned into the winding road leading
to the farm. Everything was deserted and quiet. Suddenly, he noticed a
truck speeding towards him from the direction of a neighbour's farm.
Huge clouds of dust flew into the air as the truck came to a sudden halt
close by.
The man jumped from his truck and ran over to Gordon, yelling,
“Please, can you help! Help us! My son's had an accident, I think he's
broken both his legs!” The man was frantic.
Gordon didn't think twice and he replied, “Calm down, calm down,
drive carefully and I'll follow you.”
The seven-year-old boy had been climbing up a tree, trying to get his
cat, which had run away. He had fallen and now lay in a screaming
heap, unable to move. Family and friends were crowded around the
distressed boy, not knowing what to do, as moving him could be fatal.
Gordon jumped from the truck and took control of the tense
situation. He spoke with hard authority. “I want you all to go away -
208
only the boy's parents are to stay. Now, calm down and give me space,
go! go!” he yelled to the stunned group.
Dean dialed the number at the Healing Farm - it was twelve fifteen.
No answer. He kept dialing every five minutes, his pulse starting to
race with concern. Leeanne was beside herself and started to cry.
“Why did he have to go back there?” Helen placed a caring arm around
her mother and said, “It will be OK Mum, Gordon can take care of
himself, I'm sure he'll be back this afternoon, don't worry.”
Dean closed his eyes in thought and psychically connected with Ilias.
Slowly, the message came through, a message, which caused Dean to
shiver with fear. He spoke to his mother. “Gordon is OK, he is near the
farm helping a young boy who has had an accident. Five hours from
now, Toowoomba will suffer a devastating catastrophe - the City will
boil with fire - this comes not from above, but from within - the asteroid
will hit earth early tomorrow evening.”
Leeanne cried at Dean: “We've got to warn Gordon, he's got to get
out of there Dean!” Dean tried to contact Gordon psychically with no
success, as Gordon was using his healing powers on the boy. Dean
realised this and yelled to Paul: “Want to join me in a fast drive up to
Toowoomba, Paul?”
Amid the protests from Bethany and Kavita and the cheers of “go get
him!” and “take care!”. Dean and Paul jumped in the four wheel drive
and sped off down the dirt road.
Young Jason Black had two broken legs and a crushed vertebrae and
he couldn't be moved. Gordon had successfully talked the hysterical
boy into a calm hypnotic trance, easing most of his pain, to the relief of
his parents. Now, the physical side of setting the fractures was proving
long and tedious, but it needed to be done. Finally, both legs were
secure in tight splints.
Gordon needed a rest and a drink before he commenced the psychic
healing.
“How do you do that so well when you're not a doctor?” asked
Jason's mother in amazement.
Gordon sipped on the cool orange juice and replied, “It's a gift from
God - the gift of love.”
Thirty minutes later, Gordon had successfully healed the crushed
vertebrae and the boy came out of the trance feeling no pain. A
209
makeshift stretcher was placed under the boy and he was taken into the
house amid cheers of thanks from family and friends.
Gordon was sitting in the family room with the boy and his family,
drinking coffee and eating cakes, when he heard the loud familiar horn
from the four wheel drive blaring outside. He glanced at his watch - it
was almost two fifty.
“Don't tell me Dean has driven up here to get me,” said Gordon, as
he walked to the window. Dean and Paul burst into the house and
yelled, “You've all got to get out of here now! A disaster will hit
Toowoomba in a few hours!”
The family didn't debate Dean's advice and within twenty minutes,
they had packed their belongings into cars and trucks and drove West
towards Dalby to stay with friends.
Paul and Dean sat impatiently tapping their fingers on the dash board
of the four wheel drive while Gordon ran into the house to find the box
with the photos. Finally, he emerged box in hand and jumped in beside
them. Dean shoved the vehicle into gear and sped down the dirt road,
his psychic mind saying: “hurry! hurry!”.
The country City of Toowoomba was almost deserted as they drove
down Ruthven Street and headed towards the range area. There seemed
to be an eerie stillness that weighed heavy around the City. Gordon felt
very uneasy.
A few huge semi-trailers and a caravan which was swaying all over
the road, passed them. Something was about to happen; Gordon could
feel it with his thumping heart beats.
At the top of the range, with the City behind them, Dean breathed a
huge sigh of relief and changed the gears down in preparation for the
steep descent down the winding highway.
No one was talking; they just wanted to get back to Springbrook as
fast as they could. Almost at the bottom of the range, Dean now shifted
the gears into top and put his foot down, passing three cars in
succession. Suddenly, he felt a vibration on the wheel, the same time as
a loud roar like a million bolts of thunder rang through the still air.
“What the hell is that?!” yelled Paul, as the Toyota now started to
shake violently. Dean had no option except to slow down; he was
losing control. Gordon and Paul looked behind and couldn't believe
their eyes. At the top of the range, huge bolts of fire and rock were
flying hundreds of feet into the air. Dean didn't stop to look back, he just
210
kept concentrating on driving and passing other cars and trucks, which
had stopped.
On the opposite side of the road, cars had pulled over, screeching
their brakes and some were frantically trying to turn around and drive
back the way they had come. The once quiet highway was now turning
into a road filled with frantic tension!
The roar became so loud that Paul thought his ear drums would
burst. Behind them, they could now see masses of burning rocks flying
everywhere - the range was on fire and thick black smoke filled the air.
Some of the rocks started to hit the Toyota and Dean swerved in a
frenzy, trying to keep control. His mind told him this was an ancient
extinct volcano starting to erupt.
Gordon also remembered that the actual city of Toowoomba was
built in the core of an extinct volcano, but it would be impossible for
this to happen without warning - impossible?
“Nothing is impossible now, the world is coming to an end,” he
thought.
As they drove past the Caltex Service Station at Withcott, they
looked out the windows at people screaming and running wildly towards
cars - several Air Force helicopters were heading towards the burning
City. Suddenly, an explosion like an atomic bomb filled the air - the
core of the volcano erupted into the sky taking the helicopters with it.
Buildings, houses, cars, rocks and bolts of fire flew thousands of feet
into the heavens with abandoned fury!
Burning rocks and black ash filled the air for as far as they could see
behind them. Within a split second, masses of red molten lava poured
down the range, swallowing everything in its path.
“Holy Jesus! Fuck, Gordon, we're not going to get out of here,” cried
Paul, his eyes wide with fear.
Dean held the wheel tight against the now violent shaking earth and
he cried under his breath: “Oh God! Ilias, help us get out of here!”
Gordon had never felt fear like this before, his heart was pounding as
loud as the volcano, tears were streaming down his face and he prayed
for help like he had never prayed before.
Behind them, they saw the Caltex Service Station crashing into the
bowels of the earth as huge cracks started to break up the highway - the
heat and black smoke was overpowering them - Dean could feel his
concentration failing, the stream of boiling lava was only less than half a
211
mile away now and gaining momentum as it poured down the highway
and over surrounding farms.
Suddenly, an iluminous blinding, silver blue light appeared in front
of them. Dean jammed his foot on the brakes and the Toyota came to a
screeching halt.
All around, the noise had stopped - everything was still and quiet their minds went blank and their bodies were weightless.
212
CHAPTER TWENTY ONE
IMPACT!
Dawn on the twenty ninth of March 2013 came like most other
dawns on planet Earth, but this sunrise would be the last sunrise for
many, many months to come.
Nikolas Hionides threw the canvas backpack over his shoulder and
jumped into the fishing boat. It was almost sunrise as Panos, the old
Greek fisherman, slowly guided his vessel towards Thirasia near
Santorini. Nikolas leaned over the railing and breathed deeply, inhaling
the fresh salty spray. “What better place than here, to spend one's last
day on Earth,” he thought.
The war between Greece and Turkey was finally over. Both
countries had suffered tremendous loss of life and property during the
violent earthquakes and now, Mother Nature was planning the final
blow of oblivion for them.
The sun had risen, a deep dark orange ball of light - Nikolas stepped
from the boat and thanked Panos for the ride. Glancing around, he
noticed the familiar faces of several donkey men and his old friend
Petros. He and Leeanne had stayed at Petros' farm many years ago.
“Yassou! Yassou!” they greeted each other, then spoke about times
gone by. Nikolas could only spend a few hours on Thirasia, he wanted
to go back to Thira and visit Dimitri's old farm. Petros gladly loaned
him a moped to ride up to the monastery on the far tip of the Island.
Silver rays of sunrise were dancing on the clear Aegean waters; the
sky was filled with orange cotton wool clouds. As Nikolas came to a
stop near the monastery, he walked from the moped and gazed at the
sunrise, its beauty took his breath away. He cried to the Heavens: “Oh
God, please protect this beautiful island of Santorini and her people!”
213
Nikolas walked out to the far edge of the caldera and sat on the flat
rock where he had once sat with Leeanne seven years ago and the
memories came back like it was yesterday.
Beautiful memories of their long talks on love, and life, of their
excitement and joy with finding proof of the lost Atlantis and the
sadness of Philippe's death.
He had shared so much with Leeanne on this magic island. “Could it
all be gone by tomorrow?” he wondered. Then, the memories of Dean
filled his mind and the strength of Ilias touched him with faith. He
remembered the ancient prophecy from Atlantis: “That in the year 2010,
a young man will travel the world speaking the Divine Laws and he will
touch mankind with love and faith and he will lead the people into a
new world, then Atlantis will once again shine with Spiritual glory.”
Nikolas smiled to himself as he watched the bright sun lighting up
the ocean around him - he had faith that today would never end and that
he would live to see another sunrise.
Across the Atlantic Ocean in the United States of America, the
dawning of the twenty ninth of March was filled with a mixture of
hysterical fear, silent prayer and crazy 'end of the world' parties.
President John Newman was busy securing his people into the bunkers
and underwater bubbles. There had been some electrical problems with
the three bubbles in Lake Michigan and now panic was starting to grip
the people there, as time was running out.
The President was on the phone.
“Listen to me, Commander Shuten, just get my people into the
bubble now, they must be sealed off, you can work on the problems
once you're all inside.”
The Commander answered. “Sir, it is not that simple, I feel we have
a major miscalculation with the air pressure down here, I'll do my best
and have them aboard as soon as possible.”
President Newman slammed the phone down, he had had negative
feelings all along about the undersea bubbles, now, he just wanted to be
safe with his family in his own bunker. The stress of the past months
was getting to him and he could feel himself coming apart at the seams!
Several hours later, just as the President was securing his family and
colleagues into the Whitehouse bunker, the red phone rang.
“What?..What in the hell happened?” The President was screaming
at the top of his voice. “Well, do what you can...now listen to me, there
214
is no more red phone - I can't be contacted, I'm out of here!” Slam! went
the phone again and then the President pulled the phone out of its socket
and threw it hard against the wall, anger and fury consuming his mind.
Two of the undersea bubbles had malfunctioned with low air
pressure and small leaks had developed. When the people boarded,
disaster struck, everyone panicked and twenty people drowned in the
scramble to get off the bubbles. At the last minute, bubbles all over
America were causing problems and concern with their safety.
The only areas where some order and stability still held were the US
Army, Navy and Air Force bases - there, the defense forces were well
prepared, their bunkers secure and well stocked for survival.
Back in Australia at Springbrook, panic and fear had gripped
everyone at The Haven with the news of the Toowoomba volcano
disaster. Carlos and Antonio wanted to drive up to see if they could
find Dean, Paul and Gordon - fortunately they were stopped by a hard
thinking Tina.
Amid the hysterics from Kavita and the uncontrollable crying from
Leeanne and Bethany, Tina stood firm and yelled at the top of her voice:
“Now, you two bloody big buffoons listen to me - there is nothing you
or anyone else can do! The whole of the Toowoomba region is wiped
out and burning. Earthquakes are hitting Brisbane and Ipswich, even
the Army and emergency crews cannot get near there!”
Tina grabbed Carlos by the hand and shook him with all her might.
“Don't go...please! We couldn't stand to lose you two as well. It's too
late, it's over, all we can do is pray they are safe and somehow they'll get
back,” she said.
Helen walked over to Carlos with Yianni in her arms, tears were
filling her sad eyes as she said, “Tina's right, we can't do anything, we
must save ourselves - the asteroid will hit sometime today and we must
prepare ourselves.” Carlos grabbed Helen and Yianni and held them
tight, as he said, “I love you, I love you.”
Little Yianni looked at Carlos, and said, “Don't worry, I know Uncle
Dean and Grandpa are safe - a little voice in my head told me so, just
then.”
Those innocent words from a child seemed to calm everyone.
Leeanne stopped crying and walked over to Yianni, taking him from
Helen, she hugged her grandson - her intuition told her that they were
215
OK. It was agreed they would not seal up the cavern until two p.m. that
day and constant radio contact with the authorities would be kept until
the very last moment.
The farmer, his wife and three children huddled in the corner
alongside six other strangers - all were shaking with cold shock. They
lifted their frightened eyes up in disbelief, their minds were telling them
this could not be happening, that it must be a crazy dream. Dou Setta
and Nubon sat near the control panels with Dean, Gordon and Paul who
looked on intently as the aliens explained telepathically the workings of
the spacecraft and how easily the transporter beam had rescued them.
Paul was beside himself with excitement - this was something he had
only dreamed of, just like Star Trek.
Gordon's stomach started to rumble; he was starving. “Amid all the
fear and excitement, how on earth could he be hungry?” he thought.
Nubon's thoughts raced into Gordon's mind. He said: “You humans are
always hungry - well, at least we will offer you food, not burnt wood!”
Gordon burst out laughing, he couldn't stop laughing at the memory of
the barbecue!
Suddenly, the farmer's wife started screaming hysterically and
yelling: “That human looking thing is laughing with the alien, we must
be going mad, what's happening?” Everyone looked in the direction of
the people sitting in the corner huddled in fear. Dean, Gordon and Paul
had been so pre-occupied with being rescued by Dou Setta and his
friends that they forgot the other people who were in the spacecraft.
Dean and Gordon stood up and slowly walked over towards them,
realizing just how huge a shock this must be. They sat down next to
them, introduced themselves and spoke calmly, trying their best to
reassure them there was nothing to fear and they were safe. The farmer
cradled his sobbing wife and said with heavy emotion in his voice, “One
minute I'm getting my family safely into our truck to escape the bloody
volcano and the next bloody minute I'm here sitting in a fucking space
ship with aliens and you tell me not to be afraid?!”
One of his children, a girl of about ten years of age, said to Dean,
“Are they really friendly aliens?” Just then, Dou Setta walked over and
sat down beside them, he held the girl's eyes and his thoughts of
friendship filtered through the youngster's mind. “Mum! Mum! They
are friendly, he just told me so,” said the girl excitedly.
216
It took a great deal of convincing, but finally the group overcame
their fears, the shock subsided and within a short while, they were all
eating and drinking together around the huge oval table.
Dean and Gordon had tried desperately to contact Leeanne
psychically with no success, and now, after Dou Setta had failed also,
Gordon shrugged his shoulders and said, “She never was really that
good with telepathy over a long distance and as we are a hundred and
fifty miles in outer space, I'm not really surprised.”
Suddenly, one of the Karas pointed excitedly at the scanning tracker
screen - they had picked up the asteroid. Dean and Gordon looked at
the screen in disbelief. Paul yelled, “Oh my God no! Look at the bloody
size of that thing compared to us! If that monster crashes into earth, no
one will survive!”
Nubon hastily checked all the incoming data, then turned to his
friends and said, “It is still on the same course, with its current speed it
will enter earth's atmosphere in about ten hours - that would make
impact at around six fifteen Eastern Standard Time. I will contact the
Mother Ship, we will engage all our laser power and try to force it off
course.”
Dou Setta looked up at Nubon - the little alien's huge black eyes
blinked sadly and his thoughts entered everyone's mind.
“It won't work, nothing will penetrate or deflect the asteroid.”
Nubon yelled out loud: “We cannot just sit up here and do nothing we must try!”
Paul agreed, they had to try to save Earth - no underground bunkers
would be enough protection against the impact. The young American
stayed close beside Nubon and watched anxiously as the tall alien linked
up with the Mother Ship. As they watched the laser systems coordinate, Gordon said to Paul: “Where do you suppose that bloody
asteroid came from?”
Paul shrugged his shoulders and replied, “It's anyone's guess,
Gordon, there are only a few asteroid belts which have orbits
penetrating into the inner regions of our solar system - the Amor group,
which crosses Mars' orbit and the Apollo group, which crosses Earth's.
I think this monster came from outside our solar system, something
pertubed it's orbit, its speed is double that of a normal asteroid. Nathan's
Dad's Black Star theory seems the most probable explanation,” he said.
217
Just then, the screen lit up as the latest battle with the asteroid began.
The huge blue lasers from the Mother Ship and their smaller craft sped
with fury towards the asteroid - simultaneously they exploded on the
giant's surface. Huge bolts of lightning and burning rock flew hundreds
of kilometres into the dark silence of space - they had penetrated its
surface. Paul and Gordon looked on optimistically and yelled: “You've
hit it...but...it's still in one piece.”
Nubon checked the incoming data and thought: “It's still on course.”
He spoke to Dean: “We penetrated its surface, did some damage, but
unfortunately, it's still on the same course. The speed is slightly slower,
but we have made no difference.
Again the lasers fired - again the explosions on the surface and again,
no difference to the giant asteroid.
On the dark boundaries of the Moon's orbit, several pairs of small
yellow reptilian eyes were also watching a scanning tracker screen. The
dark creatures' cold deep voices spoke with excitement about the
impending disaster, which was about to befall planet Earth. Xiha turned
to Doldran and spoke through his large evil mouth. “We won't have the
pleasure of a great war with Earth, that asteroid is going to do the work
for us.”
Doldran hissed through his slimy grey sharp teeth, “I hope there will
be some humans left for us when we return many Earth years from now,
and that our contact in NASA has survived.”
Dean looked out the porthole of the spacecraft and gazed into the
deep blue velvet of space. He felt caught in a void of nothingness - the
realism that his world was nothing without Kavita. His mind drifted
back to the time he placed the crystal around her neck and told her he
loved her - the night he kissed her under the wood apple tree and the
beautiful blue sari she wore.
He remembered the wonderful times in India and how excited Yianni
was with his present of the toy elephant and the crystal peacock.
Suddenly Dean snapped out of his reverie with the realization he may be
able to contact Yianni psychically.
Carlos and Antonio sealed the entrance to the cavern and silently
walked back towards the anxious group of friends.
218
It was almost three pm, they had waited as long as they could. Now,
the cold empty feeling they may never see Dean, Gordon or Paul again,
hung heavy in everyone's hearts.
Bethany, who sat cradled in her mother's arms, cried hysterically at
everyone: “I knew we shouldn't have come to Australia - what's it all
been for? This damn preparation for a new world - there's no world
without Paul!”
Leeanne was crying too - she kept asking herself, “Why? Why?
Nothing made any sense - how could she go on without her husband, her
soul mate? And her beloved son - this was not how God would intend it
to be.” Fear and anger were overcoming her thoughts as she desperately
tried to control her emotions. Crying out for Gordon, she only saw
darkness, a deep, empty darkness.
There was nothing anyone could do, and by five p.m, the forty eight
people in the cavern were huddled in silent prayer awaiting their fate.
Carlos and Helen sat with their arms around Yianni and Kavita. The
pretty Indian girl held the crystal Dean gave her, tightly to her heart and
she prayed to Krishna that her 'Sanjay' would return. Yianni held his
crystal peacock and thought of Uncle Dean - he whispered under his
breath, “I love you Uncle Dean.”
Slowly the image of Dean's face appeared in Yianni's mind - the boy
held his eyes closed in excitement as his Uncle's voice spoke to him.
“Yianni, Yianni! We are all safe, do not worry, we will be back in three
months. Do not venture outside until then.” The voice was so clear that
Yianni opened his eyes in fright and yelled, “Uncle Dean is back! Uncle
Dean is back!”
Helen grabbed her son as he started to run, saying, “Where are you? I
heard your voice!”
Leeanne came out of her sad, silent state and took hold of her
grandson. “What did you hear darling?”
“Uncle Dean told me they were safe and they will be back in three
months and, not to worry Grandma!” He replied.
Somehow, Leeanne believed it - she had to believe that Dean had
gotten through to Yianni psychically through telepathy.
On the outer boundaries of planet Earth's stratosphere, a huge dark
shadow appeared, bearing down like a giant prehistoric monster, ready
219
to pounce! As it spliced through the atmosphere, fire and brimstone flew
at its side - it was on a mission, a mission of total destruction!
In St.John's Church at Katoomba, Gail Braithwaite sat between her
husband and their two sons. She couldn't believe she had been talked
into coming to this service only one hour before the asteroid was due to
hit the Earth. She thought she must be mad, absolutely mad to have this
death wish!
The streets of Katoomba had been deserted when they drove through
- Gail had thought it would be bedlam at that time, but this had not been
the case- most people had been hiding and praying in silent fear as the
hour of apocalypse approached.
A heavy silence fell over the Church as Father Britton addressed the
small gathering of some fourteen people and several young children.
Colin Britton's eyes gazed over the people before him and he wondered
who amongst them would be with him tomorrow. He signaled to June,
the organist, to play - and the congregation stood and started to sing
“Rock of Ages”.
Gail couldn't stop the tears that fell from her eyes as she started to
sing, somehow she knew that this was the right place to be at this time.
Albert squeezed Gail's hand tightly, as the heart felt words came to an
end.
The people sat and the Priest held their eyes with faith and love. He
said: “The decision to come here at this time must have been a difficult
one for most of you - I thank you for sharing with me our prayers to the
Lord God. Mother Mary has told me that we must stay here in the
Church and lock ourselves in. While I would ask all of you to bow your
heads in silent prayer for our Planet and the lives of our people, I would
also ask Ben and Steven if they would kindly bolt the doors and
windows shut - thank you, boys.”
The Prime Minister's sons quickly obeyed and secured the huge steel
bolt on the door and pulled down the steel shutters on the windows.
The Priest cleared his throat and read from the New Testament -JOHN
13, VERSE 14 - (Jesus comforts his disciples). “Do not let your hearts
be troubled. Trust in God. Trust also in me. In my Father's house
are many rooms, if it were not so, I would have told you. I am going
there to prepare a place for you. And if I go and prepare a place for
you, I will come back and take you to be with me that you also may be
220
where I am. You know the way to the place where I am going. And
Thomas said to him 'Lord, we don't know where you are going, so
how can we know the way?'. Jesus answered, 'I am the way, the truth
and the life....'.”
Suddenly, a huge darkness fell upon the Church - Father Britton
knew the time was upon them - each person shivered inside with cold
fear. A deep heavy far off roar like a million claps of thunder
overpowered the still air - the roar became louder and the earth beneath
the Church started to shake. Father Britton spoke forcefully to the
frightened congregation. “Calm down, calm down everyone - I have a
cellar under the Church - please follow me and don't panic.”
As the Priest led the people towards the trap door behind the Altar,
the roar became so loud the Church seemed to shake - lamps, candles
and vases fell to the floor - a woman screamed hysterically and ran to
the door - five other people followed as panic gripped their minds.
“Stay here! Stay here!” screamed Father Britton. It was no use - within
a few seconds, the woman had opened the steel bolt and fled outside
with the others following.
Steven and Ben didn't think twice and rushed to lock the door again,
holding their hands over their ears as the roar became unbearable.
Father Britton ushered the remaining people quickly down the ladder.
Holding the trapdoor open, he turned and watched as the fire from the
candles took hold of the drapes on the side doors and the carpet beneath.
He steadied himself onto the stairs, his eyes filled with sorrow as he
watched his beloved Church go up in flames.
Colin bolted the trapdoor shut. He was thankful he had taken Dean's
advice and replaced the old one with a solid six-inch steel door.
Halfway down the stairs, a violent shaking like the Earth was coming
apart, caused Colin to lose his footing - he fell, trying desperately to
grab on to the stairs, which were cracking apart. The people below were
screaming and falling all over the place, children were crying and he
could hear Steven's voice calling, “Hold on! Hold on!”. The loud roar
from outside was piercing through the earth, ripping at his eardrums.
Suddenly, Colin felt his leg being guided onto a step and he heard the
comforting voice of Steven saying, “Four more steps and you're down.”
On Dou Setta's spacecraft, the eleven adults and three children
watched in cold horror as the Earth communicator screens relayed in
221
graphic detail the impact of the asteroid. The data gave the position of
contact as the North Atlantic Ocean, just below forty-five degrees,
virtually in the ocean between New York in the West and Spain in the
East. The gathering watched on screens and through port viewers as the
asteriod smashed into the ocean. There was a silent pause, then, like a
massive atomic explosion, the waters erupted in a enormous spray of
steam which leaped thousands of feet into the heavens. A huge circular
tidal wave with crests of five hundred feet high commenced its
destructive surge across the sea. Clouds of gas and vapour almost hid
the massive destructive force, as they shot into the atmosphere. It had
struck with the entire force of nature's fury!
Even though the ocean had cushioned the impact more than if it had
smashed onto dry land, the speed at which the asteroid impacted, caused
the planet to tilt an extra five degrees on its axis.
Dou Setta spoke to the shock stricken group. “The biosphere of Earth
will be subject to major stress at this time. There will be a huge
increase in volcanic activity and the shifting of plates - it will take some
time for the Planet to re-align itself - the solar system will change and
there will be a change of components in the atmosphere. There will be
much moisture in the air, together with ash and dust and there will be
many months without sun. The planet Earth will be a very dangerous
place to be for a long time.”
Dean had to turn away from the sight on the screen; tears were
starting to well in his deep green eyes. Gordon grabbed him and
embraced him with heavy emotion, himself starting to sob like a child.
“Oh God! Leeanne, Leeanne!” he cried, as his chest heaved in and out
with anguished pain.
Paul sat down in a corner and cradled his head in his hands, rocking
himself back and forwards in despair. Nubon went and sat beside Paul
and placed one of his long thin arms around the young man's shoulder.
The alien could feel Paul's deep grief, as he tried to comfort him. Paul
turned his head and said: “No one could survive what has happened to
our planet - they'll all be dead, they'll all be dead!”
Nubon replied, “Have faith Paul, miracles do happen - it may not be
as bad as we think.”
The animals in the cavern were going berserk. Antonio had managed
to hobble the cows and horses and the animals were now trying to fling
222
themselves against the stalls. The goats were running in circles, making
loud agonizing sounds - dogs were barking and the hens and roosters
were trying to fly. Suddenly, a loud roar came rumbling through the
hard earth.
“Oh my God, this is it!” yelled Carlos, as he helped Antonio to
steady the animals. Nathan had kept most of the medical supplies and
equipment secure in wooden boxes, he couldn't chance anything being
broken. Now, as the roar became louder, the earth began to shake - the
boxes slid all over the place, Nathan tried frantically to tie them
securely with rope. Yvonne ran to help him, then stopped suddenly,
doubling over with pain. Holding her stomach, she cried, “Oh God! Not
now, not now!”
Tina ran to help Yvonne and guided her to a large mattress on the
floor. Leeanne ran over to comfort Yvonne, saying, “I'll stay with her,
Tina, you help the others secure things!”
Fear and panic gripped everyone in the cavern as the earth started to
shake like it was coming apart. Dust, sand and rocks fell from the high
ceiling and small slithers of crystal landed on the backs and heads of
many people, causing deep cuts and bruises. People were running in all
directions, trying desperately to find cover from the falling earth around
them.
Suddenly, a huge cracking sound pierced the air - everyone watched
in horror as the long passageway to the outside started to cave in. Heavy
clouds of dust and rubble spewed through the entrance and exploded
into the cavern.
Helen screamed in horror as she ran to grab Yianni out of the way,
just as a huge rock fell to the ground. Carlos yelled: “Everyone move to
the far end, quickly! quickly!” Just as the group gathered at the end of
the cavern, they all fell over to the left side. It was like someone had
pulled a carpet from under their feet. “What the bloody hell was that!?”
screamed Nathan, as he crawled blindly towards Yvonne, trying to get
his bearings. All of the lights except for two had smashed. GP quickly
found a torch and assessed the damage.
Everyone, including the animals, had fallen over and the ground was
on a tilt. The noise of water running over made GP realize that the rock
pool would also be at a tilt. “Quick guys, help me place these drums
under the sides, we can't have a bloody flood in here,” he yelled
frantically.
223
The dust from the caved in entrance was filling the air, causing
everyone to cough and choke, as the oxygen was consumed with wild
fury. Yianni and the six other children were huddled in a corner crying
- Helen and their mother's tried to pacify them, as the others assisted
each other as best they could. Just as the men seemed to have the water
situation under control, the ground started to shake again - this time, it
was more like a wobbling - the wobbling continued for what seemed
hours, then slowly, ever so slowly, it faded. Then it stopped and all
seemed quiet. The earthquake accompanying the disastrous impact of
the asteriod had caused the actual cave floor to tilt about three degrees
from the horizonal.
Nathan held his wife as her labour pains increased. Yvonne was as
comfortable as she could be and the two nurses fussed around in
preparation for the birth. The dust had settled and she seemed to be in
control of her contractions, breathing deeply and steadily as the time
ebbed on. Suddenly, the ground started to wobble again, gaining
momentum with her increased heavy contractions. Yvonne gritted her
teeth in pain as she screamed: “Talk about rocking the baby, this is
bloody ridiculous!”
The wobbling continued, as Yvonne's pain filled contractions now
caused her to scream with agony. “Push, push darling, I can see the
head,” yelled Nathan excitedly, as he manoeuvred his hands to assist
with the final push. The wobbling earth stopped, just as Yvonne gave
the last excruciating push - she screamed with pain and relief as the
baby slipped out and into the hands of its father.
All was now quiet in the cavern, except for the soft cries from the
mother and joyful sobs of relief from the father. One of the nurses cut
the umbilical cord and Nathan held the baby high, crying out: “I have a
daughter, I have a daughter!”
224
CHAPTER TWENTY TWO
Sounds of Silence
Even though GP had fixed the lights and the generator was working,
a strange silent darkness seemed to fill the huge cavern. It was the
darkness of the unknown - the unknown world outside.
It had been several days since impact and still every so often a slight
quivering would unsettle the ground. Carlos and Antonio had the
animals settled as best they could and Tina was busy trying to recreate
the garden which had been all but destroyed during the earth tremors. It
was decided that the men would work four-hour shifts digging out the
caved in entrance.
Carlos said, “It will be a long, hard job which will take time, but time
is something we have, lots of time!” Slowly, some type of routine and
normality was gaining momentum as each day passed.
Nathan and Yvonne still had not agreed on a name for their baby
daughter. Nathan liked Alpha, as the first letter of the Greek alphabet,
even though Leeanne had told him the word 'first' in Greek was Protos
and the female was Prote. Yvonne was unsure which one she liked and
kept saying she would decide soon. The baby took to Yvonne's milk
very well and she slept contentedly, seldom crying, usually only when
Yianni would pinch her toes!
About eight hundred and fifty kilometres South of the cavern, in an
old underground storeroom, the Prime Minister Albert Braithwaite and
Father Britton were trying to bring some normality to their own
harrowing existence. Steven and Ben had repaired the broken staircase
as best they could and cleared up the boxes and crates, which had fallen
about the place.
225
There were eight adults and two children in the basement and Colin
Britton glanced at every one of them and prayed to God they would
somehow all survive.
June, the organist, coughed deep and heavy. At sixty-two years of
age, she had played the music for St. John's Church for over twenty
years. Father Britton walked over and sat beside her, offering comfort.
“I have some cough medicine June, will you take some?” June looked
up at the Priest with tired eyes and said, “Thank you, I will have a little this cough seems to be taking hold of me, I don't feel well at all, Father.”
One of the children, a girl of eight years, with short curly brown hair
and limpid blue eyes, cried out to Father Britton in despair, “Please,
when can we go outside and breathe fresh air and see the sunshine?”
The Priest held the child's innocent eyes and spoke. “I am sorry Camilla,
we cannot go outside until Mother Mary tells me it is safe. There will
be no fresh air or sunshine outside for a long, long time.”
Camilla snuggled in close to her mother and cried, soft even cries of
helplessness. Steven had his head buried in a physics book. As he read
about oxygen, he glanced up at his brother and whispered, “Ben, the
oxygen we have down here will not last more than four to six weeks at
the most.”
GP looked despondently through the periscope into a deep black void
of emptiness. He blinked his eyes, straining again in the hope, hoping to
see something, even a flicker or change in the pitch blackness - there
was nothing - and it should have been daylight outside.
Trish walked up behind him and wrapped her long arms around his
chest, saying softly, “Darling, it's only been three weeks, Dean said we
would have darkness for several months. Come and join the others in a
game of backgammon, it will take your mind off things.”
GP turned around and kissed her deeply. She was right; he had to
stop thinking of the outside.
At the other end of the cavern, Nathan was sitting with Helen and
Carlos, sharing a cup of coffee and talking of precisely the same thing the outside. Nathan had been speaking of his father's firm belief that an
asteroid crashing to Earth some sixty five million years ago, had been
responsible for the extinction of the dinosaurs.
“Dad believed that great catastrophes occurred on Earth every twenty
six million years, and that we were due for one about now. That's why
he was so sure his black star theory was spot on.” Carlos held Nathan's
226
eyes with grave concern and said, “Don't pretty it up - just tell us exactly
what happened and how it will be outside.”
Nathan answered: “If the asteroid was about five miles in diameter,
and we expect it was...well, when it plunged through our atmosphere, it
would have left a trail of vacuum behind it. If it were to hit solid earth,
the ground would be heated up to over a million degrees centigrade - the
planet would have boiled hotter than the sun and we wouldn't be here
now.”
Helen shivered with the horrific thought of burning to death, then
said, “Thank heavens it must have landed in the ocean.”
Nathan continued, “In the water, it would be vaporized. The energy
released would have been more than a hundred million megatons of
TNT. Hot vaporized material would have blasted its way through the
atmosphere to an altitude of some fifteen miles. The impact splash into
the ocean would cause circular tidal waves, hundreds, possibly
thousands of feet high, to circle the Earth many times, flooding all
coastal regions - only the interiors of continents would be spared.”
Carlos spoke with fear in his voice. “What if we are actually under
the water - sealed off like in a vacuum?”
Nathan answered with reassurance in his voice. “I don't think so, we
are about three thousand feet above sea level here and I feel that we are
safe.”
“Go on,” said Helen impatiently.
“Rock from the crater, mixed with asteroid material would cause a
fireball to fly into the atmosphere and the heat of this would be as hot as
the sun. This heat, when fused with nitrogen and oxygen, would make
nitrous oxides, similar to smog. Later, combined with water in the
atmosphere, it would make nitric acid. In short, an acid rain will fall
and probably kill all living creatures - this is the worst scenario,” Nathan
said.
“Is there any other?” said Carlos, slouching his shoulders. Nathan
added, “There's more. When the fireball reaches the top of our
atmosphere and floats on the cooler air beneath it, it will begin to spread
out over the entire globe. As this happens, it will go from a glowing red
to an impenetrable black. The Earth will be pitch black for several
months. Without sunlight, there is no photosynthesis and all plant life
will die. The temperature will fall dramatically and much of the Earth
will freeze.”
227
Helen shook involuntarily and said: “This may be a stupid question,
but I haven't felt any difference in temperature since the impact.”
Nathan replied, “It's very deep down here - we are well protected and
sealed in...though, if it were forty degrees below zero outside, we sure
as hell would feel it in here. This cavern is strange, it's different.
Sometimes it gives me the feeling we are in a separate world from the
outside, or even a different dimension.”
Helen squeezed Carlos' hand and smiled weakly. “Dean said that
God had guided him to this cavern, and that we'd always be safe here.”
A single tear began to roll down her cheek and she prayed her beloved
brother was safe right now.
Dou Setta adjusted the co-ordinates on the Earth projector screen and
focussed in on the area that should be the South Pacific Ocean. They
had been flying around on the boundaries of outer space now for almost
eight weeks, waiting for the planet Earth to settle. If only the dark gas
cloud covering the planet would lift a little, they could get some idea of
the damage.
Unfortunately, all was just the same as before. This would be a
drawn out game of patience and faith.
Nubon spoke to Dean. “We will just have to wait, eventually we will
return when it is safe and attempt to rescue those who are still alive.”
Gordon said to Dean: “I feel like I want to lie down and go to sleep
for a long time and when I wake up this will have all been just a horrible
dream. Dean placed an arm around his stepfather and replied, “I feel
tired also, why don't we both get some sleep and let's put all our
thoughts into the beautiful world we remember.”
On planet Earth, where the Aegean Sea was, some strange violent
transformations were taking place. The large Island of Crete was almost
under the sea, only the high mountain peaks stood fierce amongst the
ferocious ocean. Many of the smaller Greek Islands had broken up and
fallen into the sea, though others had miraculously escaped almost
untouched. The Island of Cyprus, where the war between Greece and
Turkey started, had completely disappeared under the sea like it had
never existed.
The Earth's plates on the ocean floors were raging in different
directions.
228
Suddenly, a huge earthquake hit the Island of Santorini, shaking it to
its foundations. The few hundred people, who had managed to survive
the impact and subsequent fallout from the asteroid, were now holding
on for their lives, sheltered in the numerous caves around the Island.
One of these people was Nikolas Hionides. Nikolas had managed to
find shelter with several donkey men in a deep cave not far from
Dimitri's old farm. Nikolas sat with the men and their animals, his head
held in his hands, as he prayed for their survival.
Dean drifted into a deep purple void of sleep and Gordon did the
same. Their thoughts went back to Santorini and held the majestic
beauty of the Island. Slowly, images started to appear in their subconscious minds, images of a time long ago on Dimitri's farm. Gordon
could see Leeanne sitting under a wild orange tree crying. She looked
up and her tear filled green eyes held his in despair.
Suddenly, the despair turned to horror as she screamed for him,
calling: “Zaiot! Zaiot! Help me! Help me!” Gordon jumped in his sleep,
still holding the image tightly. Now, the Earth was trembling and
cracking up all round him, he could feel his own blood running cold and
his heart pounding with fear.
Suddenly, a huge explosion almost pierced his eardrums and a
deathly darkness consumed his body. He felt himself falling, falling
into nothingness. Then in the middle of this void, a small silver light
appeared. Gordon held onto that light as it became larger and larger.
Shapes started to form within the light - mountains, rivers and then
buildings - ruins, ancient ruins and finally a huge pyramid seemed to
rise from the ocean.
Both Dean and Gordon, whilst still asleep, held the psychic picture
of the magnificent pyramid - the Pyramid of Understanding!
Dean jumped bolt upright at the same time as Gordon woke up
screaming: “I saw it! I saw it! Atlantis has risen! I saw it came out of the
ocean!”
Leeanne woke up shaking. Her body was covered in cold sweat, her
heart was pounding like a million drums. She hung her head in her
hands and started to cry uncontrollably. Helen woke startled and
walked over to her mother's mattress to comfort her. “Was it a bad
dream Mum?” Leeanne tried to stifle her tears and sobbed, “Darling, it
229
wasn't a dream, it was a psychic flash, a reality! I saw it happen, Atlantis
has risen! It's back, back where it used to be!”
Helen looked at her mother seriously and said, “Calm down Mum,
calm down, it was only a dream. It would be impossible for a whole
continent to rise out of the ocean.”
Just then, Yianni tugged at Helen's hand and said, “Mummy, Uncle
Dean once told me that nothing is impossible.”
Leeanne couldn't settle down. From that day on, she knew without
question or doubt that Atlantis was out there, somewhere in the Aegean
Sea. She knew that her ancient homeland from a past life, a past life
where she lived as a young Aanyota, was now battling the elements of
nature. A proud beautiful land that she knew she would live to see
again! This inner belief gave her the strength to get through the dark
empty days of waiting...waiting....
Leeanne had made a huge calendar of the days and months according
to the twenty-four hour clock. As there was no natural light, it was
linked to the time the lights in the cavern would be turned off every
night at eleven p.m. and, eight hours later, switched on at seven a.m.
This maintained a pattern of day and night
The generator Gordon had made was working well and GP had the
atmosphere in the cavern under control. Tina's hydroponic garden was
blooming and the horses and cows were now chomping on the small
areas of grass, which were sprouting richly all over the place. Yianni's
daily chores were to collect the eggs from the chicken enclosure,
without breaking them, then to feed the chickens and clean the
enclosure. He did this with great enthusiasm and pride.
The older children took it in turns caring for and feeding the larger
animals. For five hours during the day, all seven children would study
schoolwork, the same as if they were in their old world.
The mothers took it in turn with the teaching, cooking and cleaning,
while the men worked on clearing the entrance and any other jobs that
needed to be done.
GP had stopped looking through the periscope into the black world
beyond. He decided to wait until three months had elapsed. Instead,
once a week, he would try the transceiver in the slim hope that someone
else out there was trying to communicate as well. Sadly, the only sound
he ever heard was static, cold empty static and the sound of silence.
230
Father Britton took short, shallow breaths of the fading oxygen. He
was all prayed out - there was nothing he could do, except give in to his
fate.
Two weeks previously, June and an elderly parishioner called Ted,
had died in their sleep. A day later, a girl of just four, Camilla's little
sister, died of an asthma attack.
Albert and his sons had wrapped the bodies in heavy blankets and
placed them in a long, airtight crate. Now, there was only himself,
Albert, Gail, Steven, Ben and young Camilla and her mother alive - but
slowly dying.
The small battery run compressor was not strong enough to keep up
the oxygen supply - their battery supply was gone and the oxygen was
almost exhausted. It was only a matter of hours now before they would
all die in their semi-conscious sleep. Many times, Albert had said they
must attempt to see how it was outside, but the Priest knew better and so
did Ben and Steven.
The Prime Minister's sons knew that outside, the atmosphere would
be poisonous and deadly - they had to wait as long as possible. Now,
that time was almost up - they were dying, so it didn't matter either way.
Steven slowly raised his limp body from the mattress and walked
towards the staircase.
Father Britton held him by the hand and said softly, “Please wait just
a few more hours, I feel that once you open that door, it will be the end
for all of us.”
Ben walked over to join his brother and said, “Mum is fading, please
give her the last rites, Father.” Colin Britton looked over at Gail who
was lying on the mattress beside Albert. Helplessness and despair filled
his mind - he truly believed they would survive - it was his faith that had
kept them together. Now, it was all over.
The Priest turned to Steven and said calmly, “Open the door if you
wish, I don't care.” At that precise moment, a delicate voice spoke in
the Priest's mind, “You must always care Colin.”
Colin knew the voice - it was the voice of Mary.
Slowly, he sat beside Gail and held her limp hand in his, her eyes
were shut and her breathing so shallow, it was almost non-existent.
Colin Britton prayed for help, one last desperate plea for a miracle to
save them.
231
Steven was starting to walk up the stairs to the trap door. Carefully,
he placed one foot in front of the other, his breathing laboured. Ben was
behind him, watching and waiting.
Suddenly, Steven stopped and shook his head. He could have sworn
he felt a soft breeze slide across his face, a fresh breeze of air. “What
was that?” he said, looking up at the trap door, which was just six feet in
front of him.
Colin dropped Gail's hand and his eyes held the trap door and the
shocked look on Steven and Ben's faces. Mother Mary's image
appeared in front of the door. She looked down upon them, the same
soft blue image they had seen many months ago in the Church.
Her words rang out in the minds of everyone.
“Stop! You must not go outside, I will protect you!”
Suddenly, a cool breeze filtered from her image, it almost knocked
Steven from the steps with its freshness. Camilla and her mother
awoke, breathing deeply of the cool, fresh air. Albert sat bolt upright
believing he was dreaming and Gail slowly opened her eyes, her starved
lungs finally coming to life.
“I can't believe it! I can't believe it!” yelled Ben excitedly running to
embrace his parents.
Father Britton held Mary's image with thankfulness and prayed with
newfound faith for the miracle that had been bestowed upon them.
Back at Springbrook in the cavern, Antonio, Nathan and two other
young men were coming to the end of their four hours hard shovelling in
the tunnel. It had taken them ten weeks to shovel through three quarters
of the entrance, or at least it appeared to be that far.
There were a few more large rocks to move, then they would call it a
day. Antonio yelled for Nathan to help him with a large rock that
seemed impossible to move.
“Hey, give us a hand with this one, will you?” he said. Nathan
strained hard with his weight as Antonio pushed and prized the
obstinate rock away. “Look here! It's an opening!” yelled Antonio
excitedly to the others.
Hastily, the men prized other rocks and rubble away, as the opening
became larger. GP, Trish and Tina ran over to see what the commotion
was all about. Finally, they were through to the other side and it
appeared to be just about forty feet to the front entrance. They could
now see the huge steel door.
232
GP yelled back to everyone in the cavern: “They're through! It didn't
cave in all the way!” That evening, optimism touched the hearts of
everyone, and a spark of happiness and cheer ebbed over the group as
they celebrated with several bottles of red wine and beer.
The optimism flowed over into the next day, as the men tidied up the
rest of the passage in preparation for the day when they would all walk
out into a new world.
GP was feeling positive that a change could be taking place soon.
He went to the periscope and adjusted the mechanism, bringing the long
steel tube to his level - he held the viewer close to his eyes. His
optimism turned to disappointment as he beheld the familiar black void the pitch-black emptiness of nothing! Several times during the next few
days, he returned to the periscope with the hope there would be some
change, any change from the eerie blackness.
Leeanne sat on the floor, looking through old photo albums memories of her life with Gordon, times of when they first met - crazy,
happy times filled with laughter and tears. Helen came over with
Yianni and Kavita and they all sat together, reminiscing of times gone
by and the happiness and love they all shared with Gordon and Dean.
Bethany walked over and joined in, sharing her memories of when she
first met Paul and their wonderful life in New York.
The group of friends laughed and cried for hours and somehow
within that time, a new strength was born, that one day soon, their men
would be beside them again.
A few days later, Leeanne lay on the mattress - she couldn't sleep and
needed soft music to help her float away. She leaned over and picked
up the walkman, then placed one of Gordon's old sixties tapes into the
machine - this was a tape by Simon and Garfunkel. As she closed her
eyes, Leeanne sang along with the music, then, suddenly, involuntary
tears rolled down her cheeks as the old familiar words to “Sounds of
Silence” touched her heart with sadness.
As Leeanne floated off to sleep, she could see herself alone, alone
walking aimlessly through a dark void where nothing existed. She
could see herself walking over barren dead ground - there was no
movement, no colour - only a grey, deadly emptiness. She sat down and
could feel herself dying, slipping away into the afterlife. Her heart
stopped beating. Suddenly, she could feel herself floating - floating
high above the clouds - now, the colours were beautiful - blues and
233
pinks touched with violet and silver - all around was peace, tranquillity
and a wonderful springtime freshness filled the air.
Then, she saw him. He was walking towards her among the clouds he was so young and handsome. It was Zaiot, her love. He wore the
same tunic style garment, his strong shoulders glistened against the
silver light. Around his neck hung a crystal. Leeanne could feel him,
smell him as he came closer beside her.
Zaiot looked down into her face - his blue eyes held her with a great
love - a love that seeped into every pore of her body - a love that
consumed her soul. His face came close to hers and she could feel a
feather light kiss touch her lips, she could feel his breath of love upon
her.
Leeanne stirred, she could hear a dog barking - then, the familiar
sound of Yianni yelling as he went to feed the chickens. She awoke to
life back in the cavern. Leaning up, she gazed in surprise at a single
yellow flower, which lay beside her hand. Picking it up, she smelled the
familiar bouquet - a perfume from long, long ago, and she knew that
Zaiot would always be with her.
234
CHAPTER TWENTY THREE
The first sunrise...
GP adjusted the viewfinder and held his breath with faith.
“It is more than three months, surely by now there will be some
change,” he thought.
“Quick! Quick! Come and see the blackness has gone!” he yelled
excitedly. Everyone looked in his direction - he was jumping up and
down in a fever pitch. Nathan was first beside him and grabbed the
periscope with shaking hands, then gazed into a picture of dark grey
sleet. There was no colour, but at least there was movement, something
like rain or snow was falling. One by one, everyone took turns looking
in wonder at the change outside.
A week went by with the same picture of dark grey sleet each day,
until, finally, one morning, GP looked into a somewhat paler grey void
and saw a movement like black clouds. His enthusiasm couldn't be
contained - he walked up to Nathan and said, “Let's put those protective
suits and oxygen masks on - let's go outside Nathan, and give it a try.”
Nathan squeezed GP on the shoulder. “What are we waiting for?
Let's go!” was his reply.
Yvonne wasn't happy - she thought they were crazy to go out so soon
and screamed at Nathan as he calmly slipped into the heavy protective
suit, “You're mad going out there, what if the oxygen is just poison gas,
it can leak through into here and we'll all die! You don't know what's
outside!”
Nathan held his wife's worried blue eyes and spoke gently. “It's OK,
trust me darling, I have a strong feeling it will be fine out there, I
wouldn't go otherwise.” Yvonne calmed down, knowing an argument
235
would be futile. She softly kissed her husband's cheek, whispering,
“Take care, I love you.” Trish did the same with GP.
Carlos helped his friends don the steel plated boots, excellent
protection against a hostile environment, then helped adjust their
oxygen helmets. “I feel ridiculous in this outfit, like I'm about to do a
moon walk,” laughed GP, as they slowly clumped towards the steel
door.
Trish pushed a small container into GP's hands and said, “Bring back
some samples of the earth, we can analyze them, just like on the moon,”
she laughed, feeling more at ease.
Antonio and Carlos opened the steel door, the huge boulder was just
a few feet in front of it, there was no seepage from the outside yet, all
seemed clear. Antonio and Carlos leaned against the boulder with all
their strength and as the mammoth rock started to slip away, they
scurried back behind the steel door and closed it. GP and Nathan were
now out there on their own - they continued to push the boulder until it
finally rolled away.
The two men walked outside into a horrific world, where everything
around them was dead and black. A fierce wind blew grey ash particles
across the vision of their helmets and each man breathed a sigh of relief
that they were safely enclosed in the protective suits. Slowly and
carefully, they placed one foot in front of the other, walking over a
surface of burnt vegetation and soft grey ash. They looked up to where
the sky should be - all was a deep, dark grey, with a few patches of paler
grey and what appeared like clusters of black clouds.
GP signaled to Nathan to keep walking in the direction of where the
high ridge should have been. Their boots were heavy and clumsy, it
seemed to take forever to walk the few hundred feet up the sloping
embankment which partly resembled the ridge
Finally, they came to the top and stood tall against the fierce wind.
They looked below them into a wild, ferocious ocean. About two
hundred feet from where they were standing, the surging sea crashed
into a rocky coastline, a coastline, which seemed to jut out into
nothingness. Each man stood still, glued with disbelief at the sight
before them, it took several moments for their minds to comprehend that
what they were looking at, was the coastline of Australia.
The ocean had gobbled up more than forty kilometres inland, and,
who knew just how much was left of the continent. GP turned and
236
looked at Nathan and placed his hand in his own. Both men gazed into
each other's tear filled eyes; anguish and despair consumed their minds
with the realization of the horrendous world they would now live in.
GP looked at the container Trish had given him, then he threw it into
the wild sea. “What use would samples be, this was a world which
appeared to be non livable,” he thought.
Back inside, Carlos and Antonio helped their friends free themselves
from the heavy suits. Everyone was gathered around, speaking at once.
“Quick, tell us what it was like!” they yelled excitedly. Trish noticed a
dark look of sadness filling GP's face, as he pulled the oxygen mask off.
He held her eyes and said, “We are alive, but alive for what? No one
could ever live out there, it is beyond description.”
Nathan looked at his wife and baby daughter and said, “What we
have in this cavern is like paradise, compared to outside.”
Dou Setta adjusted the co-ordinates on the earth projector screen.
After three and a half months, this time he felt optimistic. Everyone
gathered around anxiously, holding their breath and wondering what
images may appear. The farmer tapped Dean on the shoulder and
pointed.
“Look! Look! The black gas cloud has faded.”
Slowly, the images of Earth came into focus, a grey clouded mass
still hung above the planet, but the shapes of land and sea formations
were visible. Nubon slid one of his long thin fingers onto a scanning
probe button and zoomed in to check the atmospheric components of
Earth. Dou Setta gave the order to the Karas to set their course directly
back to the planet. Nubon spoke telepathically to Dean and Gordon.
“The atmosphere is changing, the nitric acid level has decreased
dramatically, this is a very good sign that the atmosphere is mending,
the poison levels are fading. Unfortunately, complete rejuvenation
could take several years.”
Dou Setta spoke out loud to the people around him.
“We will attempt to go as close as possible to Earth and observe the
damage. The data I have now tells me that the Northern Hemisphere of
the planet has the most damage. The temperature there is minus thirty
degrees celsius and much land is under ice and snow, whereas the
Southern part of Earth is minus three degrees celsius to one above zero,
237
with little snow and no ice. The water volume has increased
dramatically and much of the land is now under the sea,” he said.
The spacecraft slipped silently through the dark grey haze of Earth's
damaged atmosphere. The speed was cut back to slow cruising as the
craft circled the badly ravaged planet. Now, the close-up images
appeared on the projector screen in vivid detail. There was the instant
intake of deep breaths and undulated sighs from the people watching.
Dean's mind held the picture of horror that would have befallen the
billions of people who had lost their lives on that catastrophic day of
impact. His worried eyes searched the area that should be India,
Pakistan and Nepal. “Where is Tibet?” he cried within his soul. Dou
Setta felt his fear and zoomed into the frozen wasteland that once was
China.
He spoke to the people.
“All of Russia and China is now ice and snow. I am not picking up
any life forms in that area.” Slowly, the images of a grey ocean filled
the screen, with several mountainous islands standing alone in the icecold void. Dou Setta pressed a red scanner button and zoomed in to the
largest of the islands. Instantly, Dean knew what it was, before Dou
Setta said enthusiastically, “It's Tibet! That island is part of Tibet,
Dean!” Dean held his breath and prayed as the small alien cautiously
scanned the rugged mountainous island for signs of life forms. Several
tiny orange dots flickered on the screen, then faded and flickered again.
“I'm picking up some life forms,” Dou Setta announced. “Keep it
steady on those orange dots,” Dean said, as he placed the palm of his
hand above the island image and closed his eyes in a mediative state.
“Quiet please,” he whispered to everyone. Gradually, Dean's subconscious mind drifted towards the orange dots blinking amongst the
frozen mountains and he held the image of Sai Baba's face. It took some
time before words filtered through and Sai Baba became a reality. The
Indian spoke: “My devotees and several hundred Tibetans are safe,
though we are freezing and low on food supplies. Please rescue us as
soon as possible, we may only survive another two months.”
Dean telepathically replied that they would pick them up as soon as
it was safe.
Gordon held Dean by the shoulders and spoke emotionally. “Are
they OK? Are Sai Baba and Kavita's family safe?”
Dean embraced his stepfather and answered, “Yes, yes!”
238
Next, the scanner moved westward over the endless grey ocean and
chunks of icebergs. The area that once was Iran and Saudi Arabia,
Israel and Jordan where many holy wars had been fought, then Turkey,
now was an empty sea. Suddenly, the colour of the sea changed to pale
blue and the scanner picked up land. Dou Setta checked the old Earth
comparison data and charted the exact location. The area was the
Aegean Sea. As Dou Setta pressed the scanner button, Dean and
Gordon yelled together, “It's Atlantis, it's got to be Atlantis!”
There it stood, ravaged by nature's fury, abandoned for centuries, lost
on the ocean floor. Now, the magnificent, proud land stood wild and
free above the ocean, determined to survive! The terrain was
mountainous, then swept down onto undulating hills and valleys, all
devoid of any vegetation - just a barren black grey shell of its former
beauty.
The area covered eighteen thousand five hundred square kilometres.
Further South, appeared to be the mountain island peaks of what
remained of Crete. The scanner moved slowly around the huge island,
which seemed devoid of any life forms. Dean wondered just where
Santorini, or what was left of her, would be in the picture. Suddenly, a
small peninsular area came into view. It seemed different, the terrain
was very rocky and steep. Then, he realized it was the Northern part of
Santorini. Several orange dots flickered around the area. Gordon
pointed with excitement. “They have survived! Some people on
Santorini have survived!”
Nubon spoke calmly to Gordon. “Don't worry, we will come back
and rescue them later. We must continue around the top of the Northern
hemisphere, then move South. A detailed map of the new Earth needs
to be constructed so we know exactly where every land mass is placed
and the condition of the terrain.”
As they headed North West, the scanner continued over huge areas
of empty sea. The occasional island, a former mountain peak from
some country, jutted out of the depths, devoid of life. Before them now,
was a formation, a cluster of islands and a little farther on, another
cluster. The scanner picked up life forms. Dou Setta said, “What you
see now are the remains of Austria and Switzerland, people have
survived there.”
Further North West, there appeared huge icy mountains bunched
together. “Oh my God, I think that's Scotland, I'll bet that high
239
mountain peak is Ben Nevis,” exclaimed the farmer. Nubon zoomed in
close to the mountain peak, then stopped halfway - there were life forms
and, something else. The tall alien pressed a second red button and the
scanner zoomed in as far as possible. The data graph magnified an
image on the snow-capped mountain. “Look! I can't believe it Gordon,
it's the Union Jack flag! Someone has the bloody flag flying on that
mountain, it is Ben Nevis!” Dean yelled emotionally. Everyone
crowded around the screen and clapped happily as many orange dots
flashed within the mountain. After passing endless oceans of empty
water, the scanner then picked up what was left of North America.
Dean placed a caring arm around Paul. The young American was
finding it difficult to watch the screen. “I feel like my heart is at the
bottom of my feet. Oh God Dean, I just pray my parents have somehow
survived.” Dean squeezed Paul's shoulder and said gently. “My psychic
mind is telling me they are with a Krishna group somewhere in the
Canadian Rocky Mountains.”
The scanner was picking up the images of the Rocky Mountains now
and some life forms were showing. Paul didn't want to look, he just
walked away and sat alone. He needed to be alone with his thoughts of
Bethany.
Next, the scanner showed parts of North Dakota, Kansas and
Oklahoma. The centre of North America appeared to be all that was left
of the vast continent. Scattered life forms flickered here and there
amongst the snow-covered land. Farther south, the probe picked up the
magnificent Andes Mountains of South America. The Southern
continent had fared much better that the North. Only the coastal areas
were submerged, leaving much of the interior of the country intact,
though only a few scattered life forms were visible. The once tropical
rainforest areas of South America were now barren, burnt out
wastelands.
The probe continued west across the ocean towards South Africa.
The data coming through showed a marked rise in temperature to three
above zero as they held the image of what had been South Africa. “It
looks similar terrain to South America,” said Gordon, while Dou Setta
zoomed the scanner closer.
Just like every other country, the coastal areas had disappeared,
leaving the dead shell of the interior, standing wild, barren and lifeless.
“I wonder how many animals have survived,” said the farmer, in a sad
240
voice. “That depends on how many can survive without food for up to
six months, none I expect,” answered a voice from the crowd.
Next, they moved across the Indian Ocean towards Australia.
Everyone gathered anxiously around the screen in hushed anticipation.
Paul walked over and joined the group. As they came in over Western
Australia, the images showed a wild, rocky coastline and barren
wastelands like desert. Nubon carefully adjusted the data graph and
spoke, “The coastal towns and cities have been flooded, what you are
looking at now, is the Gibson Desert.”
Suddenly, there was ocean again - everyone gasped in surprise.
Where was South Australia? Nubon continued, “A great deal of South
Australia has broken up due to earthquakes and fallen into the sea.” He
turned the scanner across the water in a Northerly direction towards the
Northern Territory. The sea stopped suddenly in front of huge cliff
faces and a rocky barren desert appeared on the other side.
From out of the desert wasteland, Ayers Rock appeared like a rare
ancient monument, standing beautiful and untouched. “I can't believe it,
it hasn't changed, it's still that magnificent red ochre colour, the only
colour we have seen so far on Earth,” cried Gordon emotionally.
Immediately, the probe picked up many life forms within the rock.
Dean knew the Aboriginals would somehow survive!
Dou Setta turned to the crowd and said, “Your native people took my
advice, I told them the Uluru area would be spared, I told them where to
take shelter, this is very good!”
Continuing on, they found more life forms in the Olgas and the
Stanley Chasm. Much of the Northern Territory appeared to be intact.
Now, they would cover North Queensland and continue south. The tip
of Cape York had fallen into the sea and the East Coast of Queensland
had disappeared and been replaced by savage looking cliffs and jagged
rock faces. The Barrier Reef and its islands were now under the sea.
In some places, the sea had reclaimed all land up to the Great
Dividing Range.
Tense anticipation was consuming the minds of Dean, Gordon and
Paul, as the probe finally scanned near the Toowoomba area. The city
of Brisbane was gone, broken up by the horrendous earthquakes from
the volcano. Now, that area was a savage sea, empty and violent. What
had been the beautiful garden city of Toowoomba was now the
241
smouldering core of a massive volcano, with the burnt and charred
remains of the Lockyer Valley now unrecognizable.
Gordon squeezed Dean's hand with grief, knowing that somewhere
amongst the devastation would be the ruins of the Healing Farm. Dean
felt his stepfather's pain and said, “I know it's hard to believe, but some
good will come out of this horror, we must have faith that it will,
Gordon.” Within a few minutes, the scanner was picking up Tamborine
Mountain where several life forms flickered, and, then came
Springbrook. Dou Setta knew the exact location where they first landed
near The Haven and zoomed the scanner in close.
The ocean had reclaimed all the land of the Gold Coast region up to
Springbrook. Everyone looked on with silent relief as the probe
continued around The Haven, which stood only a few hundred feet
above and beyond the raging sea. “Oh, thank God! Thank God!” they all
exclaimed at once, as the probe picked up many life forms.
“Please, can we try to land, Dou Setta, please?” Paul cried in
anguish. The tiny alien held Paul's face with his big black eyes and
blinked them with understanding, as he answered, “It is not safe for us
to venture into the atmosphere yet, we will return soon, in
approximately two months.”
Hundreds of kilometres below the spacecraft, Yianni jumped bolt
upright in his sleep and shook his mother. “Mummy, mummy, wake up!
Dou Setta was talking to me,” the boy yelled excitedly. Helen stirred
and woke up, rubbing her eyes. Leeanne awoke too; she had a
premonition that Gordon, Dean and Paul were close by. She grabbed a
torch and went to sit beside Yianni and Helen, who were now speaking
about the message.
“Grandma, Dou Setta's space ship is somewhere above us, they know
we are here,” the little boy grabbed a few excited breaths, and
continued, “I heard Dou Setta say they would be back in two months
and that we should not go outside until then. He said that when the sky
changes to pale grey and the wind stops, it will be safe.”
The spacecraft continued its journey of exploration over the
continent of Australia. In New South Wales, the country West of the
Dividing Range fared reasonably well, with many life forms showing up
around the Blue Mountains. Newcastle, Sydney and Wollongong were
242
all flooded, with only the very top of the Sydney Harbour Bridge
recognizable in the turbulent ocean. Farther south, the city of Canberra
had been completely destroyed by massive earthquakes. Australia's seat
of Government was no more!
The Southern Alps was covered in ice and snow; many life forms
appeared there and Dean remembered the Prime Minister had said the
army had bunkers in the region. Sadly, all that was left of the State of
Victoria, were the mountains and the snow capped Alps.
The city of Melbourne was beneath the sea and much land had
cracked up under earthquakes and lay at the bottom of the ocean.
Tasmania had disappeared completely.
Nubon compiled a detailed graph of the continent and spoke,
“Australia has lost approximately only one third of its land mass and
that is better than other countries. Unfortunately, the heavily populated
coastal areas have suffered the most and many lives have been lost.
From my data, the Northern Territory and Western Queensland have
suffered minimal damage. There is a slim chance that some native
animals could have survived in this region, let us hope so.”
Sometime later, as they passed over the Tasman Sea, the probe
picked up New Zealand. All of the North Island had broken up under
earthquakes and volcanoes and was on the ocean floor. Remarkably, the
South Island seemed OK. Nubon zoomed into the snow capped
mountains near Queenstown. Even amongst the black ashen devastation
of the ruptured country, the mountains held a strange, stark beauty. Dou
Setta altered the course to North West towards the Pacific Islands of
Tonga and Samoa.
The temperature had now risen to six above zero. He turned to the
people and said, “When the planet turned on its axis, it changed its
position in space, the North and South poles have changed as have
latitude and longitude and, in particular, the equator, which is now in a
different position.
Suddenly, Nubon checked the old Earth data, as huge new land
formations covered the screen. Dean exclaimed, “What's that?! There's
no land mass there in the Pacific Ocean, it's only empty sea!” Nubon
replied, “This, my friend, is new land, land that has risen from the ocean
floor, just like Atlantis.”
Everyone was talking and pointing in surprise as the huge island,
which was about three times the size of New Zealand, came into focus.
243
The data showed a land of several small mountains and mainly flat
terrain with black, sandy beaches. It was agreed that this country would
simply be called Newland. To the North West of Newland, the Islands
of Tonga and Samoa seemed OK, although flattened and flooded, with
several life forms flickering here and there.
Farther eastward, the islands of Tahiti were also flooded, although
the majestic mountains remained the same, and within the mountains,
many life forms were apparent. After scanning all the Pacific Ocean
where several more new islands had appeared, it was time to draw up
the map of the new world.
Yvonne and Nathan had finally agreed to call their baby daughter
Alpha. The cute bubbly little girl was now almost six months old, with
thin strands of blonde curly hair and sparkling blue eyes just like her
parents'. Yianni was happily playing with Alpha when all of a sudden, a
thought jumped into his young mind and he call to Nathan to come over.
Nathan picked his baby daughter up and asked Yianni what was wrong.
“I just had a feeling that Uncle Dean was telling me to keep an eye
on the outside, that a change will be taking place very soon,” said
Yianni. Nathan held the boy's innocent eyes and said, “You have a
natural psychic gift my boy, and you're always right. GP and I will
check the periscope tomorrow.”
Just four days after Yianni had told Nathan that a change was taking
place, GP yelled hysterically to everyone that the sky outside was now a
pale grey and everything seemed very still. Nathan checked the date, it
was exactly six months to the day since impact, slightly longer than he
had anticipated.
Within his worried mind, he wondered just how many people could
have survived those past months and how on earth could they save the
ones who were dying out there now. GP turned to Nathan and said,
“Well mate, what do you think? If you're game, so am I.”
Nathan grinned, and answered, “We sure as hell won't know if we
don't try, let's go.”
Nathan, GP, Carlos and Antonio confidently walked towards the
huge steel door. Yvonne stood back, holding Alpha in her arms.
Bethany, her mother and aunt, looked on nervously, while Helen,
Leeanne and the others all started to cheer. “It's now or never! Have
faith!”
244
Nathan grabbed a couple of oxygen masks just in case, though he felt
sure the atmosphere would be OK. Carefully, they opened the door. GP
advised everyone to stand back and stay inside until they returned.
Everyone complied, as no one was keen to venture into the new world.
Nathan was first to walk outside, followed by GP, then the others.
His hesitant lungs gasped in shock as he took a short shallow breath of
the heavy air, then another, and another, until finally he relaxed and
said, “It's OK! It's OK! It's heavy and a little strange, but it's fine.” The
four men spread out and walked around in a semi circle, checking the
ground beneath them. The temperature felt about five degrees celsius,
just like a cold winter day, the earth was dead and barren, the sky grey
and empty and there was no wind.
“It's a damn side better that last time out here,” quipped GP
optimistically. The grey ash had settled onto the dead earth and Carlos
bent down and started to dig furiously with his hands. “There's no soil,
it's just black ash,” he exclaimed with disappointment.
Nathan bent down to his level and said, “The Earth will take a long
time to rejuvenate, but it will mend and one day in the future, I know we
will see green grass and trees again.”
Suddenly, Antonio called to the others that Yvonne had emerged and
was walking towards the high ridge with Alpha in her arms. Yvonne
walked alone up the ridge, oblivious of the calls from the men to come
over and join them. She wanted to be alone, to savor the strange new
oxygen with her baby daughter.
The dirty black ash and charred earth swam around the bottom of her
jeans, she almost tripped over a dead stump of a tree which looked like a
rock, then steadied herself, holding tightly to Alpha and continued up
the ridge.
Finally, Yvonne was at the top and stood tall, looking back in the
direction of her husband and their friends, then she turned and looked
out to sea. Below, the savage ocean had become calm, though the
colour was still a sickly grey and the sky was almost the same colour.
Yvonne hugged her daughter tightly and gazed around in despair at the
dead empty world in which they would be living.
Warm emotional tears started to roll down her cheeks, she licked
them from her lips and breathed heavily. Her eyes held the grey sky and
suddenly she blinked with disbelief as a warm silver glow slowly crept
from behind the grey void. Yvonne shook a little, noticing the sudden
245
change in warmth - the air was warmer, the sea was taking on a silver
shimmer. Mother and child were frozen in wonder as a miraculous
change started to occur.
In the far distance from behind the sea, a soft orange glow crept up
and behind the glow, a huge round ball of vibrant dark orange. Yvonne
gasped in shock, it was the sun. Slowly, it rose like a huge balloon of
life upon the dead earth, and, beside it, another ball of orange started to
appear. She cried out in disbelief: “Oh my God! It's another sun!”
Through tear drenched eyes, she watched as the sea started to turn
from a dull grey to a soft pale blue, skimming with silver lights.
The light and warmth of life!
Yvonne gazed down into her daughter's face and whispered,
“Darling, this is the first sunrise of the New World.” The mother lifted
her child high in her arms above her head and cried, “Alpha, you are the
first born of the New World, thank you God!”
246
CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR
Survival in a New World
Gordon stood between Dean and Paul, his strong emotional arms
hugging the shoulders of the young men beside him. Everyone watched
in silent wonder as two deep orange suns appeared from behind planet
Earth and slowly the grey gas cloud faded. Dou Setta felt the wonderful
relief, which was flowing through his friends. He turned his head and
blinked his huge black eyes with understanding, then said, “This is a
very good sign, Earth will now start rejuvenating itself and we can
return.”
Nubon contacted the Mother Ship - they would send six small
shuttlecraft to accompany them for the return to earth, then in two
weeks time, they would rendezvous at Ayers Rock in Australia. A mass
rescue of all those people still alive in the Northern Hemisphere would
begin immediately.
Dean spoke anxiously to Dou Setta. “Please, can we go straight to
Tibet? I feel they only have hours, not days.” The small alien rechecked the co-ordinates and replied telepathically, “Tibet is the first
place I was planning to visit, though we may have to use one of the
smaller shuttlecraft as it's pretty hazardous country.”
Sometime later, the Earth projector screen picked up the mountain
peaks of Tibet. The data coming back showed only a few possible areas
for landing and these were widespread. The terrain was icy and
perilous, too dangerous for the larger ship to land. “We have pinpointed
Sai Baba's Ashram and we will send one of the shuttlecraft down,” Dou
Setta said.
247
Dean wanted more than ever to be on that craft, to be the first into
the ashram to hold Kavita's family again. He was pacing up and down
nervously as they waited for communications with the shuttle to begin.
The voice code of one of the Karas appeared on the computer screen,
alongside the visual contact. “Terrain dangerous...may have to use
transporter beam...will circle area again....” Then, a few moments
later, the message: “Preparing to land....small flat area Northwest of
ashram...co-ordinates check...all clear.” Then, the signal they were
waiting for: “Touchdown.”
Dean was already picking up distress signs telepathically from within
the ashram - he knew that many people had perished and spoke to Dou
Setta urgently: “Does the shuttle have healing chambers, like you have
here? Many people will have hypothermia and frost bite.”
“Unfortunately no, and there is only room to take about sixty on
board, so we will rendezvous with the shuttle in Austria. It will take
several hours to evacuate all the people, I believe there are between
seven to eight hundred people in that ashram,” replied Dou Setta.
Dean suddenly received a psychic flash. “Seven hundred and ninety
eight to be exact, fifty two have died,” he said.
The mountain peaks of Austria and Switzerland covered the screen,
showing several flat areas suitable for landing the large spacecraft. As
Dou Setta and the Karas prepared for landing, Nubon said to Dean and
Gordon: “We will make a temporary base here for the rescue of people
in the Northern Regions. They can be treated in our healing chambers,
then later, we will continue to America and other countries; the people
who are well can be transported back to the Mother Ship and we will
rendezvous at Ayers Rock as programmed.”
Dean stood by the stair case wrapped in a warm fur lined coat, a
thick black scarf was pulled tight against his head. He waited, his eyes
glued to the door of the shuttle that had just landed. Slowly, the sliding
door opened and the Karas assisted ailing people from the craft.
Thick, dirty flakes of grey snow were falling; Dean wiped them from
his face as he began to walk towards the disembarking crowd. People
who were able to walk assisted those who were stumbling with painracked bodies. Many Karas carried small children and babies wrapped
in furs and rugs. Several Karas carried people on stretchers, their
bodies appearing still and lifeless.
248
Dean quickened his pace as he recognized one of those people was
Shanti, Kavita's mother. He stood by the stretcher and took the black
scarf from his head and gently placed it around Shanti's frozen grey
face, then softly kissed her cheek. The desperately ill Indian woman felt
the soft warm breath of love upon her. She opened her tired eyes and
beheld Dean, her daughter's Sanjay. Words could not come from her
dying lips, but her eyes said it all. She blinked and held Dean's eyes
with joy and a newfound faith that she would live.
From behind a group of staggering people, small voices called out:
“Dean! Dean!” It was the twins, Dara and Kapil. They approached,
Dara carrying his little brother Bhutatma and Kapil carrying his sister
Sita. Dean ran to them, his body trembling with relieved emotion, tears
starting to roll down his cheeks. “Thank God you're safe,” he cried, as
he cradled them all into his strong arms.
Suddenly, from amongst the crowd, Dean heard his name being
called again. It was the other two girls, Parusha and Meeka, and, behind
them, standing tall with the same ragged old red turban, was Gopal and
his family.
Back on board the spacecraft, the children were all trying to talk at
once, whilst endeavouring to stuff huge mouthfuls of hot cooked rice
and beans into their famished stomachs.
Gopal sipped hot tea and said, “Sanjay, I truly never thought we
would meet again, you saved my family by telling me to go to Tibet.”
Emotion covered Gopal's tired, worn face, as his eyes held Dean's with
appreciation. Shanti, along with many others who were dangerously ill
and dying, were immediately placed into the healing chambers. The
chambers resembled solariums, where the person lay on a bed, then the
top was pulled down over them and sealed. A special healing computer
was programmed accordingly, then the time adjusted and the chamber
switched on. Depending on the severity of the illness and whether it
was curable, the process usually took between fifteen and twenty
minutes.
Dean stood and walked over to the Kara who was now checking
Shanti's chamber computer.
Telepathically, he said, “Is she
responding?” The small alien held Dean's eyes and blinked with his
thought. “She is gravely ill, we must be patient, she needs longer time.”
Somehow, Dean knew that Shanti would live.
249
The last of the shuttlecraft touched down, approximately four hours
after the rescue from Tibet had begun. As the doors opened, Dean knew
Sai Baba was on board, and with him, the Dalai Lama. The once two
great spiritual leaders of millions of Tibetians and Indians, walked down
the steps to join what were left of their people. Behind them, walked
many shepherds from Nepal who had been collected on the way. Some
had been sheltering in caves, others found wandering aimlessly across
the frozen expanse of their country, had miraculously survived.
Dean and the others watched with disbelief as a herd of wild goats
ran down the steps after them. Gordon smiled as he joined Dean and
said, “God works in miraculous ways!”
The shuttlecraft were kept busy rescuing people from nearby
Switzerland and parts of Scandinavia, which was now the North Pole.
Gordon was sitting beside Shanti, who was now feeling much
stronger. He told her stories of their life at the Haven. Dean was
amusing the children with stories of the barbecue with the aliens and
Paul was sitting, quietly dreaming of Bethany.
All of a sudden, a woman's voice with a French accent called out
from amongst a newly arrived crowd. “Gordon! Dean! Is that really
you?” Monique's frail body appeared with little Gerard by her side,
tears started to flow from her hollow eyes as she ran to embrace her
friends from Santorini. Gordon hugged her tight and said, “Leeanne
prayed all the time that you would survive. Is Albert OK? How about
Zeus?”
Dean picked up Gerard into his arms and hugged the boy with
happiness. “Albert is not well, but I think he will be OK, he is lying
down over there with Zeus, come, come!” said Monique.
Albert's ashen grey face filled with a wide smile, as Gordon and
Dean approached. Zeus recognized Dean immediately and started
barking at him. The little dog looked old and thin, his once shiny coat,
now bare and scaly, showing ill health and malnutrition.
Dean sat down on the bed beside Albert and cuddled Zeus in one arm
and Gerard in the other, as they spoke of their family and friends at The
Haven back in Australia. Some days later, two shuttles arrived with the
people who had been rescued from Scotland. Everyone gathered
around, waiting for the doors to open, knowing that the people who
walked out of these shuttles may well be all that was left of England.
250
The Karas emerged first, carrying several people on stretchers and
holding sick children. Then followed a steady stream of young men,
women and children who could barely walk, they were so crippled with
frost bite and dehydration. Dean, Gordon, Paul and several others who
were fit, ran to assist the arriving crowd. Finally, the last group of
people came through the door, about a dozen or so men dressed in heavy
army uniforms emerged, carrying crates and boxes. Four German
Shepherd dogs ambled listlessly beside them. Then, a thin man who
was hunched over, stood at the top of the steps.
He was draped in a Union Jack flag. Fine grey hair and scruffy
beard hung limply around a face, which looked like it had been starved
for years, deep black circles almost enclosed his eyes. The man tried to
stand tall with pride as he glanced at the two young men beside him.
One was almost his height, with straight brown hair, the other somewhat
younger and slightly shorter. As the man started to speak, everyone
realized he was the Prime Minister of England.
Edward Campbell brought tears to the eyes of all around him when
he spoke. “I am Edward Campbell and beside me are Prince William
and Prince Harry. Together with the people before us, we are all that is
left of the British Empire.”
“Oh my God!” cried Dean, as he and Paul ran to Edward's side.
Prince William looked at Dean with the pain filled eyes of someone
twice his age and said, “I don't ever want to be known as a Prince; I am
just William, Will if you prefer. I'm going to be just like everyone else,
there is no Royal Family and there is no England.”
Paul placed a caring arm around young Harry, who was starting to
cry, together they walked over to join the huge throng of people
recovering from the past six months.
Around the world, the shuttlecrafts continued to rescue people, then
deliver the healthy ones to the huge Mother Ship which was cruising the
boundaries of Earth's atmosphere, waiting for the rendezvous at Ayers
Rock.
Not once was anyone surprised when the friendly aliens rescued
them, it seemed natural, what they were expecting. The human race was
changing, the emotions of fear and uncertainty were fading and being
replaced by gratitude and faith. Their old thought patterns were
disappearing, just like the old world. Love and caring was filling their
minds and hearts as they gave thanks for their survival.
251
In the Northern Hemisphere, the Aegean Sea area was healing
quickly, with the new Island of Atlantis showing signs of recovery. The
temperature there now was a steady six degrees celsius above zero, and
the water was slowly warming.
A message came through from the Mother Ship that they were going
to land on Atlantis before the rendezvous at Ayers Rock. “We have
found some very large flat terrain suitable for landing. Will send a
shuttle down first to make contact with humans. Will rendezvous three
days from now as programmed.”
Dou Setta turned to Dean and said, “We will return to Australia now,
it is imperative that we rescue your own people immediately. The Karas
can conclude the work here. We can take Sai Baba and your Indian
friends with us if you wish, Dean.” Dean smiled at his tiny friend, who
knew exactly what he was thinking, and answered, “Thank you my
friend, let's go.”
Two shuttlecraft, accompanied by Dou Setta's space ship set off for
Australia. The other four shuttles stayed in Austria to continue rescues
from North and South America and other countries in the region.
Nubon gave the orders to set the course directly to Springbrook on
the South East Coast of Australia. They were going home, home for
Dean, Gordon and Paul; home to their loved ones!
With the ship's slow cruising speed in Earth's atmosphere, they
should arrive in about twenty minutes. It was decided that the shuttles
would continue to the Blue Mountains in New South Wales to assist
whoever was alive, with food and water, to assess the situation and keep
contact with Dou Setta.
Leeanne dropped the cup of coffee she was making. Her hands were
shaking and a strange excitement started to fill her body, as her mind
told her Gordon was returning. Yianni came running up to her side,
yelling, “Grandma! Grandma! Uncle Dean is coming back now! Right
now!” The little boy jumped with happiness.
GP was standing near the transceiver, when the usual static stopped
and Nubon's voice boomed over the speaker: “Hello Australia! We will
be landing in four minutes!” There was a short silence, then he
continued: “Please, no barbecue this time, just a glass of red wine!”
Everyone in the cavern went hysterical with joy, hugging and kissing
each other as they ran outside to await the arrival with heartfelt relief.
252
Outside, the weather was still very cold, however with the two suns,
it was warming up to about eight above zero and the sky was a pale blue
with dirty grey clouds and, thankfully, no wind. Bethany was the first
out, grabbing a thick jacket on the way. She pushed past the others and
headed towards the flat clearing that now resembled a burnt black
football field. She stopped to catch her breath and gazed skywards, her
heart beat furiously through her chest and tears of joy filled her eyes.
Leeanne held Kavita's hand, Helen, Carlos and the others crowded
around, their eyes now watching the empty sky.
Suddenly, from out of nowhere, the spacecraft appeared. The huge
silver object hovered above them, teasing them with tense anticipation,
as it slowly circled twice before landing.
Dou Setta eased the landing pads down onto the badly charred earth.
The country resembled the aftermath of a nuclear war, completely
destroyed. Dean, Gordon and Paul stood beside each other, waiting for
the doors to open. Behind them, the others waited anxiously.
Leeanne held Kavita tightly around her shoulders, the tiny Indian girl
cried with happiness because her Sanjay was returning.
The doors opened and the men walked down the steps and into a new
world, a world of black devastation. Dean, Gordon and Paul never
noticed the horrendous charred earth around them, the three men only
had eyes for the women they loved, the women they had missed for six
long lonely months.
Dean lifted Kavita high into his arms and smothered her with
passionate kisses. Paul grabbed Bethany and almost squeezed the life
out of her with happiness, his eager lips devouring her face and neck
like a hungry animal. Leeanne walked slowly towards Gordon, her
heart beating irregularly. She felt a little faint, tears were streaming
from her eyes. Gordon grabbed her and held her tight to his chest, while
she cried, “I thought I'd lost you, I couldn't live without you Gordon,
thank God we've survived.”
Dean stopped kissing Kavita and said, “I have a surprise for you.”
Just then, Kavita's brothers and sisters came running down the steps,
followed by her mother, who was being helped by Sai Baba.
An emotional happiness that was beyond description, filled the
hearts and minds of everyone that day. A great new strength filled their
weak bodies, a strength that confirmed the will to live!
253
Meanwhile, the shuttlecraft had landed safely in the Blue Mountains,
on the outskirts of the town which was once Katoomba. Around the
mountains in deep caves, many people had managed to survive, though
many others were also dying of starvation and hypothermia. The
Krishna Ashram was set up as a makeshift hospital to assist the sick.
Inside the Ashram, a huge hydroponic vegetable garden bloomed with
life, truckloads of good soil had been stored by the devotees and barrels
of water were still plentiful. It was here that Father Colin Britton,
Albert Braithwaite, his family and other survivors from the church now
lived.
One of the Karas walked over to the Priest and said, “I am about to
contact Dou Setta at Springbrook, would you like to speak to Dean?”
Anna, who was nearby, overheard the conversation and spoke
telepathically to the Kara. “Tell Dean that I am going to stay here and
re-build the earth, with sun, we can survive. Tell him when things settle
down, to come and visit.”
Back on the shuttle, Colin watched enthralled as the small alien
pressed the communication button, then placed his hand over a silver lit
panel and said nothing. The Priest knew he was speaking telepathically
to Dou Setta. A few moments later, the Kara turned to Colin and said
out loud, “You can speak to Dean now.”
Dean's voice came through a small speaker near the silver panel.
“Hello Colin, thank God most of you have survived down there.” The
Priest replied, “For us in the church it was a miracle, Mary saved us, but
that's a long story. Dean, we have taken a head count and so far there
are eight thousand six hundred people alive down here.
“Everyone survived in the bunkers, only the Prime Minister's bunker
was destroyed. Luckily Albert and his family were with me in the
church, Ben and Steven have been a great help. We will stay here, and,
together with the Krishnas, we will build a new colony. I hope to see
you again soon, my friend, God be with you,” concluded Colin.
“Goodbye Colin, and good luck, I will see you soon,” replied Dean.
Inside the cavern, the large crowd of friends, relatives and aliens ate
and drank heartily while optimistically making plans for the future. Dou
Setta told them that two days from now, they would all be going on his
spacecraft to the rendezvous at Ayers Rock. Paul interrupted and said,
“Please, can you contact the Mother Ship now and find out of my
parents were rescued from Canada?”
254
Dou Setta blinked his eyes and looked straight at Dean, just as the
young man spoke. “You don't need to, I can tell you that they were
rescued a few hours ago, you will see them at Ayers Rock. Paul
grabbed Bethany by her shoulders and pulled her strongly into his chest,
whispering, “We have a lot of catching up to do, let's find a dark corner
so I can make passionate love to you.” Bethany giggled, and, together
the lovers silently slipped away towards the far end of the large cavern.
Gordon and Leeanne were locked in each other's arms, talking about
the miracle of the rising of Atlantis. “I can't believe it's actually out
there Gordon, just like before,” she said. Gordon looked deep into his
wife's eyes with love and said, “It's there darling, we all saw it on the
projector screen. The Mother Ship was landing there just as we left for
Australia.”
Dou Setta interrupted with a thought towards Gordon. “Atlantis will
replenish itself and one day, you will both return.”
The huge Mother Ship hovered over the Northern Territory of
Australia. On board were almost seventy thousand humans who had
been rescued from around the world. The space ship, which was equal
in size to Ayers Rock, had the capacity to hold seventy five thousand or
more. On board were twenty shuttlecraft and thirty fighter craft, along
with many laser defense missiles. The Mother Ship had the resources to
stay in space for more than twenty earth years before servicing was
required.
The Northern Territory was the warmest area in Australia, with a
constant day and night temperature of ten to eighteen degrees celsius.
To the native aboriginals, that was still cold, compared to the weather of
the old world.
Scattered groups of native people stood huddled together, wrapped in
skins and blankets, their dark eyes gazing with wonder as the huge space
ship circled the Uluru area and prepared for landing. A few minutes
after they landed, Dou Setta's spacecraft appeared, then slowly landed
beside it, looking tiny and insignificant by comparison.
From the many doors of the Mother Ship, walked thousands of
people. Some were still staggering with severe frost bite, others were
weak from starvation. There were men, women and children from
almost every country on Earth, most were setting foot in Australia for
the first time. Their skin colours were black, brown, white, red and
yellow; their religions included Christians, Orthodox, Muslim,
255
Buddhist, Hindu, Jewish and some with no particular religion, just a
spiritual faith of survival.
As from today, there would never again be a difference of colour or
belief - that was part of the old world. Today, they would be as one,
with a belief in the one God, the God of love and peace. For today,
along with the other thousands who were still in Austria and the
survivors in Australia and the Pacific Islands, they were all that was left
of the Human Race!
Paul and Bethany ran towards the oncoming crowd, frantically
searching the sea of strange faces. Suddenly, from out of the midst,
Paul heard his name called. It was his father yelling and waving his
arms high above the people, then the familiar sound of his mother's
voice. Within a moment, they were together, wrapped in each others
arms, crying and kissing each other with joy.
Dean stood beside Dou Setta and Nubon and watched as the large
throng of people walked towards them for the meeting of Nations. From
behind several men in US airforce uniforms, walked a tall thin man with
albino looks and long white hair. His name was Sien Palmer, a NASA
adviser. Immediately, Nubon recognised him as someone he had met
many years ago, during one of their earth contacts.
Dean's eyes searched the man intently and his thought crossed to
Nubon. The alien replied, “I know this man Dean, he is a friend. He is
one that has always believed and trusted in us.” Strangely, Dean's gut
feeling told him otherwise.
Sien Palmer turned and looked at Nubon , then headed towards him,
a wide smile filling his long scrawny face. Telepathically they
acknowledged each other, then Nubon introduced Dean.
Sien's strange coloured eyes held Dean's green pools of wisdom, an
awkward silence filled the air and Sien felt an uneasiness twitch through
his body. Dean held out his hand and shook the stranger's, with a
feeling of dislike.
Dean said to him, “What is the situation with your armed forces, and,
where is President Newman?”
“The President and everyone, all our people in Washington have
perished, only a few thousand of our defense forces survived.” The tall
albino looked hard into Dean's eyes and continued, “In the New World
we will never have need for defense forces, peace will reign
everywhere!”
256
Immediately the psychic thoughts of Ilias were going crazy in Dean's
head. He turned away and walked towards Dou Setta, trying desperately
to pull himself together. “After all, Nubon trusted the man! What could
be wrong?” he kept thinking.
Dou Setta's huge black eyes held his friend's with concern. Dean's
thoughts were jumping at him. “Don't trust him, he is not who you think
he is, there is a dark side to this man, there is a minute computer chip in
his brain, he has no soul.”
The tiny alien blinked his eyes and placed his hand into Dean's hand
and thought: “I do not sense these concerns you have, I feel he is a
friend.”
Dean didn't want to argue, there were far more urgent things to do,
but he would keep a close eye on the strange NASA adviser.
Dean addressed the thousands of people and spoke of his hopes and
plans for the new world - the new binary solar system. He spoke of how
their alien friends would help them to re-build the planet, how they
would set up special learning schools for children to use telepathy and
to strengthen their psychic minds. He said that one day, when the planet
has replenished itself, they could return to their countries to live in
peace and harmony with all that surrounds them.
Dean opened a folder and read from reports that his alien friends had
obtained from around Australia. “Our country of Australia is the
warmest and least damaged land on earth; it is here where we stand now
that a knowledge and communications base will be built. The City of
Mt.Isa in Western Queensland has suffered minimal damage and some
technology has been saved. The power station and oil refinery can be
repaired and the computer systems maintained. The copper mines will
re-open and Mt. Isa will eventually become Australia's manufacturing
base,” he said.
“A report from Katoomba in the Blue Mountains of New South
Wales tells us that along with the Prime Minister Albert Braithwaite and
his family, eight thousand six hundred people have survived and are
building a new colony in the area. This nation's Government records,
computer disks and so on, have been saved in the bunkers. A new seat
of Government will be established in Katoomba,” Dean concluded.
“For those of you who always believed the ancient continent of
Atlantis was just a myth, well, the myth is alive and re-cooperating in
the Aegean Sea. Our alien friends will build a World Communications
257
base on Atlantis and sometime in the future, that land will return to its
former glory,” Dean added.
Dean told the people that during the next two years, they would
experience a great spiritual growth period, that their hearts and minds
would change for all time. While Dean continued speaking, one of the
Karas walked over to Dou Setta, telepathically giving him a message
from the Mother Ship.
In turn, Dean relayed the message. “A body count of all living
persons on earth has been completed. With all of us here, and another
fifty eight thousand around Australia, eleven thousand in Austria and
five thousand American Indians still surviving in the centre of their
country, we have a total population of some one hundred and forty four
thousand people inhabiting Planet Earth.”
As Dean concluded speaking, a large flock of birds suddenly
appeared from behind Ayers Rock and flew above the crowd. People
watched in wonder as they circled, coming closer and closer. Some of
the birds landed on the ground, others landed on people's shoulders,
feeling no fear from humans, while others continued to fly North
towards the Olgas. There was a strange mixture of sparrows, magpies,
native birds and seagulls, all looking for food and the hope of survival.
A seagull landed on the ground close beside Leeanne and Gordon.
Leeanne bent down and tried to pick it up, but it flew away, joining the
flock. Gordon put his arm around his wife; he knew what she was
thinking. He said, “I'm sure if Galapos' soul is alive out there, he'll find
us again one day, he would have the strength to survive.”
258
CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE
Atlantis
Within six months, the communications base at Ayers Rock was
completed. With the aliens' advanced technology of building and their
ease of transporting large slabs of stone, the work progressed easily and
without problems.
Christmas and the New Year had come and gone with no
celebrations like the old world. Now, families and friends preferred to
pray and eat together in a private thanksgiving to God, their Saviour. A
great humbleness touched the hearts and minds of Mankind during this
period.
Meanwhile, thousands of people had been re-located at Mt.Isa and
were busy establishing a new City. The climate had warmed and there
had been plentiful fresh rain in the area, grass was sprouting and a
farming community was established.
Mother Nature was coming to life again and this time, she was
happy!
The Australian Army had saved almost a hundred jeeps and trucks
and the Air Force several helicopters and small planes. Some of these
were distributed around the country in the new colonies and towns that
were being re-built. The helicopters were based only at Katoomba,
Ayers Rock and Mt.Isa. The men and women of Australia's armed
forces were now simply known as Community Service Officers, a kind,
gentle group whose sole aim was to assist their fellow man and re-build
a peaceful country.
Thousands of miles away, in the Aegean Sea, Atlantis was also
coming back to life. For the few hundred survivors on the small
peninsular of Santorini, prayers of thanks for their good fortune were
259
held every day. Ten months previously, when the Mother Ship had
landed, there were only a few people ill enough to be treated in the
healing chambers, miraculously, the Greeks had kept their health intact
by living mostly on feta cheese, olives and tinned tomatoes. They kept
their spirit alive with the faith that God would protect them.
When the Mother Ship left for Australia, not one person went with
them, they all stayed on Atlantis and began to re-build their farms.
They toiled the dead earth for a long time before Mother Nature assisted
and sent plentiful rain, then warm sunny weather. Now, the land was
sprouting grape vines and olive trees; tomatoes and vegetables were
growing in abundance on selected patches of ground.
Donkeys, sheep, goats, chickens and birds, which were saved and
cared for in deep caves during the terrible months following impact,
now grazed freely and brought forth their young to replenish the new
world.
Nikolas Hionides looked around with joy in his heart as he headed
towards Imerovigli and the ruins of the monastery that hung on the tip of
the peninsular. Only a small section of the old monastery was intact
amid the ruins. Nikolas had re-built the section into a tiny chapel where
people could come to pray. One day, he hoped the monastery would be
re-built to its former glory, but, for now, he was content that at least he
had established a place of worship.
Several donkey men and their families were sitting outside the chapel
waiting for Nikolas to arrive. Beside them, their children were looking
at some unusual flowers and plants that had sprouted up from the
parched earth. One of the children ran to Nikolas and said, “Father
Hionides, what are these strange new flowers?”
The Priest gazed in wonder at the unusual shaped plant with huge
purple and pink petals, then bent down and breathed deeply of its
perfume. The strong bouquet filled Nikolas' mind with memories of his
past life at Atlantis; he touched the petals gently with love, then turned
and spoke to his friends. “These flowers are called Palimers, they are
thousands of years old, a native flower of Atlantis. From this day on,
many more new and unusual plants and trees will bloom here; as the
earth heals itself, so will Atlantis grow with nature to her former
beauty.”
The families followed the Priest into the chapel and spent the next
hour in prayer and song with a newfound happiness in their hearts.
260
Sometime after the families had left, Nikolas sat alone on the rocky
ruins beyond the chapel, his eyes holding the empty sky. Suddenly,
flocks of birds appeared from nowhere, flying towards him. As they
approached, he saw they were seagulls and a short distance behind them
was a flock of sparrows. Nikolas opened his bag and took out several
pieces of bread and, crumbling it up in his hands, he enticed the birds to
descend. As he fed the hundreds of birds, Nikolas' mind drifted away
with thoughts of his dear friend Leeanne and when they had first met in
Santorini so many years ago. He wondered how they were all coping
back in Australia and if he would ever see her, Gordon and Dean again.
Carlos hammered the last nail into the gate. He stood up and wiped
the sweat from his brow, then looked around at the finished paddocks,
feeling pleased with himself. Antonio waved to him with the victory
sign, the long job of fencing five paddocks was finally complete, along
with the successful re-planting of grass from the cavern.
Tina led two heavily pregnant mares into the smaller of the
paddocks, where Carlos had built a shelter shed to protect the horses
from adverse weather. The re-building of the farm at The Haven was
almost complete. In a little over eight months, a healthy vegetable
garden was thriving, fruit trees were growing and strange looking
wildflowers were blooming through the healing earth.
Yianni, as usual, was boss of the chicken coops. There, he was busy
training two children in the delicate art of feeding, cleaning and egg
collecting in the very large enclosure which now housed more than one
hundred chickens, roosters, ducks and their young. Helen walked over
and watched her son proudly as he gave the children their instructions.
In a few days from now, Yianni would be on his way to the special
school at Ayers Rock. The boy was almost seven years old and his
psychic gift and telepathic abilities were now almost ready to be trained.
Gordon believed that Yianni could eventually teach other children.
Dou Setta and Nubon, along with Gordon and Leeanne, had
successfully established the learning school, which was divided into
sections according to ability and advancement. Leeanne taught the
juniors aged four to six years, Gordon, with one of the Karas, taught
ages seven to ten years. There were no seniors as yet, however the plan
was for them to be taught by several Karas.
261
The school was not compulsory and was in addition to normal
learning practices. The parents and their children had freedom of choice
to choose what they thought was right for them. As with every other
service in the New World, there was no cost involved.
Money of the type used in the old world held no place of importance
in the new environment. Most trade was done by bartering, the trading
of goods and services. Albert Braithwaite, who was now known as
Governor, had formed a small Government committee, which consisted
of ten people from various races and opinions to assist in the peaceful
growth of the new Australia. In Mt.Isa, the copper mines manufactured
small coins for the country's one unit of exchange, the coins were
specially marked by the Governor and then equally distributed to the
people. Every person over the age of twelve was given one hundred
coins a year to use as they wished as a means of exchange. The first
year was planned to be a trial to ascertain if the plan was successful.
Because mankind had lost all its material possessions and now life
was the most precious asset, the old thoughts of greed, selfishness and
power had been obliterated from the human mind. Now, people wanted
to give more than take and only seek the goodness in each other. After
impact and the destruction that followed, survival of the species was
paramount to those who had been spared. Peace and love reigned above
all else on the new Earth.
It was early morning when Leeanne and Gordon walked up the steps
and onto the shuttlecraft that would take them to Springbrook to collect
Yianni. One of the Karas telepathically spoke to Gordon. “We have
just received a message that the Governor and his sons would like to
visit Ayers Rock base; after we pick up your Grandson, we will
continue down to Katoomba and bring them back with us.”
Gordon smiled and thought it would be wonderful to see Albert and
his family again and that Dean, particularly, would be thrilled.
Helen packed the last of Yianni's belongings into the bag. He would
be away for three months before the school had two weeks holiday and
she would see him again. Her heart was tinged with sadness because she
would miss him terribly. Carlos walked up behind her and placed his
strong arms around Helen's waist and pulled her close, feeling her
sadness. Helen turned around and cradled her head into Carlos' warm
chest, then looked up at the man she loved so deeply and held his
262
compassionate eyes. Carlos lifted her up to his level and kissed her
lovingly, then whispered, “I think it's time we got married.”
Suddenly, the moment was broken by the arrival of the shuttle and
the yelling of Yianni as he bounded through the door excitedly. He was
ready to go!
Outside, Gordon took Yianni's bag and spoke to Carlos while
Leeanne chatted to Helen about the new school. Just as they were about
to leave, Leeanne mentioned they were going to Katoomba before
proceeding to Ayers Rock. As soon as her mother mentioned
Katoomba, an idea hit Helen right between the eyes and she said
excitedly, “Wait! Wait a moment, Carlos and I are coming with you!”
Helen dashed back inside while Carlos and Gordon stood looking
blankly at each other. A few moments later, Helen emerged with a
cassette player under her arm and a bag draped over her shoulder. “Let's
go! Carlos and I are getting married in Katoomba!”
On the shuttle, Helen persuaded the Karas to wait in Katoomba until
they were married, and then drop them back at Springbrook. “It will
only take an hour, I'm sure Father Britton can organise it quickly,”
Helen pleaded convincingly.
Yianni was over the moon with excitement because finally, his mum
and Carlos were getting married! Leeanne and Gordon were speechless
with joy, “Talk about spur of the moment decisions!” they both cried.
Father Britton was among the many people who crowded around the
shuttlecraft when it landed. Albert, Steven and Ben were packed and
ready to board. Helen came out of the shuttle first, her eyes searching
the crowd for the Priest, Carlos followed with Yianni in his arms.
“Father Britton! I'm so glad you're here, Carlos and I want to get
married, now, soon as you can!” Helen yelled in an urgent voice.
The Priest looked surprised and answered, “Calm down my dear, of
course I'll marry you, now, let's talk about it.”
Gordon calmly explained the situation to Albert and his sons, who
weren't too put out to wait an hour or so, after all, this was a wedding!
When Colin Britton explained to Helen that the church had been
destroyed and that they hadn't started to re-build, she was sad, but not
disillusioned. “You say that the wall behind the altar is almost intact
and the altar is still standing? Well, that's all we need, let's go!”
Colin shrugged his shoulders and said, “Helen, the church is really
just a pile of rubble, are you sure that's what you want?”
263
Helen turned and grabbed Carlos by the hand and gazed lovingly into
his dark eyes and answered, “It's the love that counts and the people
who are with us, Father.”
It was almost mid-day by the time they had cleared the aisle and the
altar of charred timber and rocks. Colin had placed a clean cloth over
the partly burnt altar and arranged a vase of flowers beside the golden
cross. Then, he lit two candles, trying his best to bring some beauty to
the charred ruins of his church. Behind the one wall, which was still
standing, Helen quickly changed into the simple white cotton dress she
had thrown into her bag. She looked down at her feet and realised that
she only had her old sneakers. She shrugged her shoulders, thinking
that it didn't really matter.
Yianni came up beside his mother and handed her several white
daisies he had managed to find in the dead undergrowth behind the
church. Helen kissed her son, then dipped into her bag and took out a
simple silver ring, telling Yianni to give it to the Priest when he asked
for it.
Albert Braithwaite, his wife and sons, along with Gordon, Leeanne
and Yianni, gathered near the altar as Father Britton and Carlos waited
for Helen to walk in.
Helen switched on the tape recorder and turned the volume up loud.
Amid the ruins of the church, she slowly walked towards the man she
loved as the magnificent words to an old seventies song The First Time
Ever I Saw Your Face, sung by Roberta Flack, echoed through the
stillness of the cool Katoomba air.
Carlos watched her carefully manoeuvre her way towards him. The
words pierced his heart with emotion, as his mind drifted away on
clouds of memories to when he first saw Helen. Of the time in the
cavern when he held her wet body so close and kissed her lips. When
he gazed into the amber pools of her eyes, he knew then that the love he
felt would last until the end of time.
Leeanne squeezed Gordon's hand; tears filled both their eyes, as they
remembered the song so well. Helen was only a few feet from Carlos
and smiled into his eyes with love as the final words echoed through the
ruins of the Church.
Father Britton performed a short ceremony with little Yianni proudly
handing him the ring, then, finally, the Priest pronounced them man and
wife to the joyful applause of the small group in attendance.
264
During the next three months, nature bloomed passionately over the
usually dry desert area of Uluru, turning Ayers Rock into a Garden of
Eden. The Aborigines said it was a sign the Gods from their Dreamtime
were pleased. To the many races of people who were settled and living
in the area, the Aborigines were held in high esteem and great respect,
as the tribal Elders taught them how to live in harmony with nature.
Kangaroos and other native animals which had been saved by the
Aborigines in their caves, now roamed freely without fear of man; for
now, man seldom ate meat, preferring mostly grains and vegetables.
This change of habits pleased the Aliens, particularly Nubon, who still
laughed about the burnt wood on the barbecue.
Yianni enjoyed his first three months at school and excelled so much
with his telepathy that it was decided he would advance a year after his
holidays. “The boy has the ability to be a great teacher one day,” one of
the Karas said to Dou Setta, as the first class was finishing. Yianni was
looking forward to spending his next two weeks at Springbrook with his
Mum and Carlos. He picked up his books and was ready to leave. Dou
Setta took the boy's hand and walked him outside, telepathically talking
about his planned visit to Atlantis with Dean the next day.
“Why don't you take Grandma and Grandpa with you Dou Setta?”
Yianni thought.
“I'm glad you suggested it, the school is closed, so I'm sure they
would like to accompany us,” was the telepathic reply from the little
Alien.
Leeanne hugged Gordon tightly with excitement when Dou Setta
asked if they wanted to go. “We are only going for a short time, maybe
a week or so, just to inspect the progress being made on the
communications base and the repairing of some parts of the Pyramid of
Understanding,” Dou Setta said.
Leeanne felt faint at the sound of the words; could she and Gordon
be really going back to Atlantis? It seemed like a dream.
Dou Setta went on to tell them that once the communications base
was operational and the various populations deposited back to their
home countries, the Mother Ship would be returning to their planet of
Estibulos.
Gordon's thought of “I hope you and Nubon are not planning to
leave”, sadly touched Dou Setta and he continued, “Nubon and I are in
265
no hurry to return to Estibulos, we will stay as long as our help is
required, don't worry, Gordon.”
Dean helped his mother up the steps of the spacecraft. For some
reason, Leeanne felt weak, emotionally weak at the prospect of
returning to a land where she had lived another life as the young
Aanyota; back to a land which had only ever been a vision in her mind,
even though much of that vision had become a reality while she lived on
Santorini. The thought of actually standing on the soil and touching the
earth of her past life made her tremble. Dean and Gordon understood
how she felt, as it was heavy on their minds as well.
Sometime after they took off, Dou Setta spoke to his friends. “The
people who survived the earthquake on Santorini have successfully
established farms on the peninsular. As you are aware, Atlantis is very
large and the Greek people have not as yet ventured to where our base is
being established, they prefer to stay on the peninsular and to keep to
themselves. My Karas have sent a message informing them of our
arrival and our hopes that some people will be at the base to meet and
speak with you.”
Immediately, Dean knew that one of those people would be Nikolas,
he smiled to himself at the thought, but said nothing.
It seemed like no time at all and they were hovering in low over the
Aegean Sea. Suddenly, the massive island appeared before them.
Unlike the first time they had seen it, the land now had large patches of
green vegetation, with rivers and waterfalls scattered all over. Leeanne
gasped in surprise, crying, “Oh Gordon, it's beautiful, it's beautiful!”
Dou Setta slowly cruised around the large land mass and finally all
their eyes beheld the magnificent Pyramid of Understanding. The
Mother Ship and two shuttlecraft sat a short distance away, with the
dome shaped buildings of the base shining like white marble in the
sunlight.
“My Karas have found an abundance of white marble on Atlantis, as
well as several clusters of crystal, although much of the crystal from the
ancient Atlantis has disappeared,” said Dou Setta.
Gordon felt somewhat relieved that the mountains of crystal were
still under the sea; he shivered a little at the memory of diving on
Santorini many years ago.
The silver spacecraft eased itself down close beside the Mother Ship.
They had landed.
266
When the message came to Nikolas that three people from Australia
would be arriving on Atlantis, he knew it would be Dean, Gordon and
Leeanne. Along with two donkey men and their children, he had
nervously accepted a lift on a shuttlecraft. The donkey men's wives
were terrified to go on the strange spacecraft and preferred to stay
behind, praying for the safety of their men and children, even though
Father Hionides said he had complete trust in the tiny Aliens.
Dean walked down the steps, holding both his mother's and Gordon's
hands. His wavy shoulder length hair was tied back with a cord and he
wore a thick white skivvie and old jeans. Among the crowd of small
Aliens, Nikolas and the donkey men stood tall, with the children
nervously holding their father's hands, watching spellbound as the
newcomers approached.
Nikolas wore the traditional black robes of an Orthodox Priest, his
long hair, faintly streaked with grey, was pulled back like Dean's and his
dark eyes held Leeanne's as they came closer. It had been so many
years since Nikolas had seen Leeanne, but as he embraced her close to
his chest, it felt just like yesterday, yesterday on Santorini.
They both closed their eyes and let the warm memories of friendship
fill their minds. Finally, Leeanne stood back and introduced Gordon.
Nikolas kissed both Gordon's cheeks and said, “I feel I have known you
all these years, I only wish I could have been present at your marriage,
or, better still, performed the service for you.”
Gordon smiled through the tears that were now filling his eyes and
said, “Nikolas, it was your friendship and love which saved Leeanne, on
that cold, dark night high on the cliffs of Santorini when she wanted to
take her life, thank you so much for being there when she needed
someone.”
After the introductions to Dou Setta and the Karas, everyone made
their way towards the communications base. The children still held
tight to their fathers, not knowing what to make of the strange little
people who spoke mostly with their minds.
Standing outside the three domed buildings which made up the base,
one of the Karas working there explained to the bewildered humans:
“On Atlantis, we have a large marble reserve. We are able to transport
the slabs of marble with psychic levitation.” The Kara stopped and
looked directly at Dean, thinking telepathically, “Of course, you are
very capable of doing this.”
267
Dean looked surprised for a moment, then realised that Ilias had the
power. The Kara continued speaking out loud for the benefit of the
donkey men: “With our technology, we are able to mould the marble to
suit our purpose. Physical strength as you know it is not needed for this
procedure.” The donkey men gazed on disbelievingly and scratched
their heads, mumbling to each other in Greek.
Inside the base, there were several huge computer screens and
numerous silver panels containing various coloured buttons and
switches. The Kara spoke: “We still have much work to do, but
eventually, we will have a global control system. This means that every
populated country on earth will have a direct contact line to here, and
any problems arising in that country can be adjusted from this base.
When the Mother Ship returns to Estibulos, we will leave one
shuttlecraft and a Kara in Austria, North America, South America and
South Africa. Two shuttlecraft will stay at Ayers Rock and two will
remain here. The continent known as Newland will establish a
community connected with the South Island of New Zealand and one of
the shuttlecraft from Australia will eventually be based there,” the Kara
said.
“With the population of only one hundred and forty four thousand
people on this planet, it is imperative that all people have good
communications,” he added.
The Kara then urged everyone to look around the base and to ask any
questions they wished, for now he had to return to work. Leeanne was
itching to see the Pyramid of Understanding and grabbed Gordon's hand,
pulling him outside.
Some distance away, on the other side of the Mother Ship, stood the
magnificent Pyramid. It looked very tiny in comparison to the huge
spacecraft, but nonetheless spectacular. At roughly the height of a tenstorey building, it seemed strangely out of place, alone and neglected.
The ancient shiny marble was covered in patches of greenish brown
algae from centuries beneath the sea. Several Karas were busy cleaning
the algae away with a special preparation, which was sprayed on then
washed off with what appeared to be a steam hose. The whole
operation looked effortless, with the algae slipping away easily and
revealing clean shiny marble that took on a silver sheen.
“Oh Gordon, can you believe we are actually looking at the Pyramid
of Understanding, from 1500 BC?” said Leeanne.
268
Gordon stood speechless, he didn't know how he felt, it all seemed
too much to comprehend. Dean walked up beside them and said, “The
Pyramid should be cleaned in a few days. When it's finished Gordon, I'd
like you to write the Divine Laws and then we'll place them on a plaque
outside the Pyramid.”
Gordon turned to Dean, his eyes were filled with moisture and he
couldn't speak. He just hugged his stepson emotionally and they all
walked slowly back to the base.
During the following days, Dou Setta took everyone on a shuttlecraft
to explore the vast island. Much tropical vegetation was starting to
grow in the mountain areas, with the occasional cluster of colourful wild
birds flying among the new trees. Every now and again, they would
come across old stone ruins and carved marble slabs and pillars; these
were signs of the ancient Atlantis.
The donkey men were amazed, the country was very different from
theirs on the peninsular of Santorini where the country was arid and
rocky even though there was plentiful grass and good soil, it was no
where as lush and beautiful as here. The children jumped with surprise
as they beheld the magnificent waterfalls, something they had never
seen before in their lives.
Nikolas turned to the children who were now yelling a hundred
questions at Dou Setta and Dean. “Children, this is your country, your
home. Your families and friends must explore and live beyond the
peninsular. You are very fortunate to live here, this land of Atlantis
belongs to you.”
Gordon sat outside the Pyramid and started to write the Divine Laws
on a large marble plaque. His mind was heavy with emotion as he
remembered when he first wrote them at the Healing Pyramid at the
Health Farm in Toowoomba. Then, as now, he wrote them in Atlantean
and English.
Just as he was finishing, Leeanne and Dean walked up beside him.
They had known that this was a time when he needed to be alone. “The
Karas have told me the door to Pyramid is sealed and cannot be
opened,” Dean said to Gordon, as he stood back to check his writing.
“I had a feeling that would be the case,” replied Gordon.
The three walked over to the entrance of the clean, shining Pyramid
and gazed skyward to its tip. Dean placed both the palms of his hands
269
on the door and closed his eyes in meditation, his mind seeing through
the thick slab of marble and beyond.
Slowly, he spoke, “The door is sealed, it is written in Atlantean that
it cannot be opened either psychically or physically until the time is
right. It is said that the door will open when the circle is completed, that
in the not to far distant future a time is approaching when it will open by
itself, not by man or psychic power, as the Pyramid is a power unto
itself, it cannot be forced. When it is opened, all the ancient knowledge
of Atlantis will be given freely to mankind.”
Leeanne grabbed Gordon's hand, an overwhelming feeling that it was
Zaiot beside her flashed through her soul. She trembled, feeling faint
and uneasy. Gordon hugged her tightly, sensing her feelings, then he
kissed her and whispered, “Let's go and have something to eat, I'm
famished!”
The day of their departure arrived, the week had gone so quickly, it
seemed they had spent so little time on Atlantis.
Nikolas took Leeanne by the hand and walked over to a cluster of
rocks where new native Atlantean flowers were blooming. They sat on
the large flat rock and spoke of times gone by while gazing at the
strange purple flowers. Sifting the soil through their hands, Leeanne
looked into Nikolas' kind eyes and said, “I wish I could stay here, this is
my true home Nikolas, it's where Gordon and I belong.”
Leeanne stifled the tears that wanted to fall and she continued, “I'm
needed in Australia, to teach the children of the New World, this is
something I must do. My dear friend, a time will come when Gordon
and I will return to Atlantis and we will live here forever, but, for now,
goodbye until we meet again.”
270
CHAPTER TWENTY SIX
Dean and Anna
Nubon and the Karas couldn't understand what all the fuss was
about. They watched with fascination as a group of children showed
Dou Setta how to make daisy chains. Their leader was sitting on the
ground surrounded by masses of flowers and seemed very happy
threading the stems just as the children instructed.
Tina picked up on Nubon's thoughts and walked over to the tall alien,
telepathically explaining: “Tomorrow is the twenty ninth of September
2014, it is one year since our first sunrise, so we are planning a sunrise
festival, we want you and all your Karas to join us here.”
Nubon grinned and thought: “I wonder if we will be doing that
strange dancing that you humans seem to enjoy.” Tina replied, “Oh yes,
there will be lots of dancing.”
Nathan walked out of the cavern carrying Alpha in his arms, the cute
little girl with blond curly hair was now eighteen months old. As the
first born child in Australia of the New World, Alpha would be the
centre of attention for the festival. Like Yianni and most children of the
new world, the gift of telepathy had been given to Alpha when she was
born.
Nathan placed Alpha on the ground beside Dou Setta and watched in
amazement as the tiny alien showed the child how to make daisy chains.
Almost two thousand people and aliens had gathered at Springbrook
to share the sunrise on the twenty ninth of September 2014. All around
Australia, where new towns and colonies had been established the same
ritual was taking place. The largest group was assembled at Ayers
Rock, watching in awe as the two suns made a spectacular rise over the
Uluru region.
271
Alpha stood holding hands with Yianni and other children as the
darkness faded and the first rays of sunrise slowly ebbed across the
ocean. A small child dressed in a long white cotton gown with garlands
of flowers around her neck and in her hair, stood, gazing out to sea as
two deep orange suns slowly rose and filled the ocean with shimmering
light.
Dean led the people in prayer and thanksgiving for the New World.
Several children from Tina's group sang a song they had written called
'Light of the World', and later another called, 'Flowers of Hope'.
Yvonne spoke to the multitudes of her feelings and recollections of that
first sunrise. Finally, Dean spoke of his great faith and love for the new
Earth. The two suns had risen and a great warmth filled the area of
Springbrook, promising a wonderful festival.
During that day and the day after, people spent their time eating,
drinking and dancing in a festival of flowers and beauty. Several times
during the evening, Dean would hold prayer services, where people
would sit holding candles while he read the ancient scriptures of Jesus
Christ. The Holy Bible was the most precious book on Earth and was
treasured above all else.
At the close of the festival, Dou Setta spoke of their plans for the
future.
“Within six months, we will be returning many people to the
countries of their origin. The Earth climate is rejuvenating faster that
we had expected, I am pleased to say. While it still may take several
years for complete rejuvenation, many countries now have reasonable
amounts of vegetation and can sustain life,” he said. The crowd
applauded loudly at this news, though a few people sat quietly
contemplating the sadness they would feel when the Mother Ship would
leave Earth and return to Estibulos.
* * *
Fifty-five light years from Earth, in a galaxy of ten planets of which
Estibulos was one, a spacecraft journeyed through the darkness. The
tiny planet of Greygate was only a speck behind them now, as Xiha
changed the speed to slow cruising.
Beside Xiha, stood Doldran, his long nails picking out pieces of food
from between his slimy teeth. Doldran belched and a foul smell wafted
272
towards Xiha, who looked at his companion with revolting distaste.
“Do you have to do that every time you eat?” said Xiha. Doldran
widened his ugly mouth in a grin and said, “Just because you haven't
acquired a taste for human flesh, doesn't mean I have to subdue my
passion. Actually, when mixed with the wild herb weet, it is quite
delicious!”
Xiha said nothing and turned his head as Doldran belched again in
amused pleasure.
Sometime later, Xiha landed his craft on their home planet of Sepia,
glad that progress on Greygate was running to schedule. Now, all Xiha
and his crew wanted was to relax and appease their sexual appetites
with the females of their species.
The tall albino locked the door securely behind him and drew the
dark curtains. In the dim light, Sien Palmer's eyes could see as if it were
daylight. He walked to the glass cabinet and opened it with calm, cold
hands, his mind was blank, his senses suspended. Standing, facing a
wall mirror, he parted the hair on the back of his head and held it back
with two clips. Slowly, he adjusted the length on the long silver needle,
then proceeded to insert it into the back of his head.
His neck muscles flinched a little as the needle found the tiny
computer chip. The contact was made. Sien relaxed his shoulders and
let his thought patterns flow freely. The computer chip made a highpitched signal which could never be heard by the human ear. Sien
closed his eyes and said: “Xiha, the Mother Ship will be leaving Earth
in approximately six months, only a few Estibulians will be remaining
here. You can proceed with the abductions around the planet without
interference. Most of the humans remaining are young and healthy, this
should please you.”
A few moments later, the tall albino had brushed his hair back,
changed his shirt and was walking outside when he came face to face
with Dean.
They stood facing each other, their eyes held, but no words were
spoken. Even though Dean was somewhat shorter in stature than him,
the spiritual strength possessed by the young man over-awed the tall
albino. Sien mumbled a few words of recognition, feeling the same
uneasiness creep through his body, and quickly walked away.
273
What was it about Dean that made the emotion of fear enter his
mind? After all, only a small fraction of the human brain remained in his
head, just enough so as to cause no suspicion. He had total control over
all his thought patterns and that was why Humans and Estibulians
trusted him. Why was this person called Dean so different? Although
this situation was a puzzle for Sien, he didn't dwell on it, there were far
more important matters to attend to right now. When Xiha returned to
Earth this time, Sien would be returning with them to Sepia where he
belonged.
The next six months passed so quickly, it seemed like no time at all
and the Mother Ship was making preparations to leave. Of the seventy
thousand people who had arrived at Ayers Rock on the Mother Ship,
only about fifty two thousand wanted to return to their home countries.
Many had settled at Mt. Isa and found the warm weather and country
lifestyle far too glorious to contemplate leaving. Others just felt safer
and more at peace in Australia.
Sai Baba and about two hundred of his devotees, native Tibetans and
the shepherds, decided to return to Tibet. The Karas on the shuttlecraft
in Austria would keep a close eye on them if help was needed, but,
somehow, everyone knew they would survive just fine.
In North America, the thousands of native Indians who had stayed on
their lands and battled the harshness of nature, were now happily living
the same lifestyle as had their forefathers. Small herds of buffalo
roamed free and native animals from long ago grazed on new, rich
fertile grass. The centre of America was rejuvenating to its former
beauty; never again would technology and pollution touch the land.
Dean, Dou Setta and Nubon sat with several Karas from the Mother
Ship, discussing the return voyage to Estibulos. “How long will it take
you to return to Estibulos, in our earth time?” asked Dean.
“The journey is about six months, though for us, it would mean only
six days, you understand that time is a universal variant Dean?” replied
Nubon. Dean understood, though it was difficult to picture a spacecraft
flying faster than the speed of light, so as to where time as how we can
comprehend it, didn't exist!
“We may stop off at another planet in our Galaxy on the way,”
Nubon continued, glancing sideways at one of the Karas, continuing,
274
“You mentioned that our friends on Tyfin were having trouble with
Xiha again?”
“Nothing they cannot handle, Xiha and his lot are just inferior
creatures,” replied the Kara. Dou Setta broke in with the words,
“Inferior maybe, though evil enough to cause much trouble.” Dean
knew nothing about what they were discussing, however, he said:
“Never underestimate the power of evil.”
The dark orange rays of fading sunlight skipped across the Uluru
area, bathing Ayers Rock in a sheen of rich golden light. The two suns,
one somewhat smaller than the other, descended ever so slowly behind
the far horizon.
The doors of the Mother Ship opened and the Karas welcomed the
thousands of people now boarding the many steps surrounding the giant
spacecraft. In less than two hours, the fifty two thousand people, their
belongings and animals were settled and ready for departure. It all
seemed to happen so quickly, and now, Dean found himself, along with
Gordon, Leeanne and Kavita, contemplating the emptiness, which
would be felt after the departure of their many new friends.
Kavita's mother and her children stood holding hands, their eyes
moist with tears as they watched Sai Baba and his devotees turn, and
wave goodbye. Dean waved, noticing Gopal wearing the same old red
turban; the tall Indian and his family were going home. Gopal had said
even though the India of old was now just an empty sea, they would
build Tibet into the New India and that he wanted to be part of it.
Dou Setta, Nubon and several Karas walked away from the Mother
Ship and headed towards Dean. Their minds were also touched with
sadness at the departures. Dou Setta had no plans to return to Estibulos
until Atlantis was completed and functioning to perfection; even then,
he may decide to stay longer. Planet Earth was now an exciting,
beautiful place to be.
Everyone watched in awe as slowly and silently the Mother Ship
hovered off the ground, then circled several times over the top of Ayers
Rock, then quickly disappeared into the night sky.
Albert Braithwaite and his family had come up to Ayers Rock to
watch the departure. The Governor walked over to Dean and his friends
as a strange cool silence filled the empty night sky. Placing an arm
around his friend, Albert said, “Why don't you come back to Katoomba
275
with us and see how the new colony is progressing? There are also
several matters I would like to discuss with you Dean.”
Dean thought for a moment then asked Kavita if she would like to
accompany him. The pretty Indian girl screwed up her face with
disinterest and replied, “No, not really. I don't like flying in those
shuttles, I'd prefer to stay at The Haven with my family.”
Dean felt like a break, a change of scenery and a week or two at
Katoomba sounded wonderful right now. “OK Albert, I will come back
with you,” he replied.
Katoomba was a hive of activity; small clusters of houses were
springing up amongst the mountain wilderness. The houses were very
small compared to the ones of the old world; they were built simply like
an A frame bungalow and most people did their cooking and washing
outside. The lifestyle was very much like camping and 'back to nature'
was how the residents of the new Katoomba lived. Each house had its
own fruit and vegetable garden and chickens roamed freely. People
either walked everywhere or rode home made bicycles, there were no
cars.
Albert proudly showed Dean around his home, which consisted of
three rooms and a large porch. “A lot different from the opulent
lifestyle we used to enjoy eh Dean? I can't understand why we ever
needed to live in huge houses, what a waste,” said Albert.
The next day, Albert took Dean to show him the newly built Church
and to see Father Colin Britton. Colin was outside tending the garden
when Dean walked up and surprised him. The Priest turned around, and
with dirt covered hands, embraced the young man with excitement.
“My God, it's so good to see you Dean, it's been a long while.”
The Church was completely re-built. The Karas had transported
huge slabs of sandstone and natural marble, everything else was
constructed from materials on the site. Where once there were stained
glass windows, an unusual woven fabric sealed the windows. There was
no heavy wooden door, just an open space.
“I have decided never to have a door as such, so it will always be
open,” said Colin. Then, as an afterthought, he added, “When it rains, I
have a heavy canvas awning that covers the doorway.”
Over tea and freshly baked cakes, they caught up on events of the
past year. Dean decided to stay the night with Father Britton, tomorrow
276
he would visit the Krishna Ashram to catch up with Anna and the
devotees again.
When Dean arrived at Albert's house the next day, the Governor was
on his way out the door. “I have some matters to attend to today, I'll
catch you later. Ben and Steven are inside and they'll go to the Ashram
with you,” he said.
The Krishna Ashram and adjoining farm looked magnificent in the
early morning sunlight. Small white daisies covered the front lawn and
birds flew among the many fruit trees. Mother Nature had truly blessed
this place. Ben pointed out parts of the Ashram, which had been rebuilt.
“A year ago, you wouldn't believe how bad this place was, but the
Krishnas had stored truck loads of good earth and plants, and now look
at it!” said Ben proudly.
As they walked around the farm, Steven said, “This is the pride of
Katoomba, a very special place - Anna created it. It was her hard work,
faith and determination which made this all possible.” Ben jabbed Dean
on the arm and whispered, “He's got the hots for Anna, always has, but I
tell him it's a nowhere street with her. I think she's celibate, just like a
Priest!”
Somehow Dean could imagine Anna celibate, she always had an
angel-like quality.
Some time later, the three young men walked into the main prayer
room in the Ashram. Many devotees, dressed in the old traditional
garments of orange cotton pants and robes, sat cross-legged in
meditation. Flowered incense burned from the many candles scattering
the room; gentle peace and harmony filled the air. Dean, Ben and
Steven lit candles and joined the devotees in silent prayer. Dean found
himself wondering where Anna was right now; he remembered their last
meeting in the Church. Suddenly, he could sense she was beside him he opened his eyes and looked to the right. She had just walked in the
side door and was heading toward him. She sat down and crossed her
legs; her eyes sparkled and she smiled.
Dean smiled back, his heart skipped a beat, he felt a little lightheaded
and he could sense the soul of Ilias was crying.
As they left the prayer room, Anna grabbed Dean by the hand and
said, “Come, I'll show you a new section of the Ashram we are working
on. It's so good to see you again Dean, after more than two years.” Ben
277
and Steven followed, with Steven feeling a little jealous at all the
attention Anna was now giving Dean.
During the day, the four friends wandered blissfully around the
Ashram and farm, with Anna proudly introducing Dean to the many
devotees and young people who had never met him. They sat under a
large peach tree and feasted on plates of fruit, nuts and goat milk
yoghurt, whilst drinking sweet orange tea.
The past horrific thoughts of what had happened to their planet some
two years previously, were now just a hazy memory. The new world
was filled with beauty and peace.
As the late afternoon sunlight began to fade, Steven and Ben
remembered an appointment they had with friends back home. “Sorry,
we have to run,” said Steven, as they embraced each other after saying
their goodbyes. “We'll see you back home Dean for dinner at about
seven,” he added.
Before Dean left, Anna insisted that he accompany her while she fed
the ducks and birds down by the pond. The pond was about five
hundred metres from the boundary of their farm. Nestled amongst
natural hilly bushland, it was a haven for wild ducks and birds. As they
approached it, Anna said, “This is my special place, it was the first clear
unpolluted water supply which I found about fourteen months ago.”
Tall eucalyptus trees bordered the water, bottle-brush and wattle
trees were in the early stages of blooming and clumps of small white
daisies scattered the ground, some peeking through rocks and wild
undergrowth.
Brightly coloured birds sat waiting in the trees for Anna - a dozen or
so ducks and their young floated on the water, quacking as she
approached with a large bag of stale bread and grain. Dean took
handfuls of grain and threw it on the ground, watching with joy as the
ducks hungrily ate and the birds landed on his shoulder wanting their
share.
The feeding was almost over when Anna heard the distressed calls of
a duckling caught in amongst weeds in the water. Without a second
thought, she waded out to rescue the little creature. Dean watched as
she quickly walked almost waist deep to the centre of the pond,
oblivious of the cold water enveloping her body. Gently and carefully,
Anna unwound the weeds from the struggling duckling and cradled the
fluffy ball in her hands.
278
Tawny gold rays of fading sunlight skipped across the water as Anna
turned and slowly walked from the pond. Dean gazed at her silhouette
against the sunset. Long, wavy brown hair, touched with golden rays,
hung limp to her waist, the duckling snuggled in close to her breast.
The long cotton skirt was drenched and clinging close to her body. She
stood still and looked into his eyes, then bent over and released the
duckling to the safety of the ground.
Dean realized his heart was beating like a million drums and his eyes
were starting to fill with tears as he gazed upon her face. Placing one
foot slowly in front of the other, he walked towards her. Anna could
feel her heart being ripped out - a terrible sadness filled her soul - she
knew what was about to happen.
Dean's mind and Ilias' soul were being torn in all directions; his body
seemed out of control. Dull fires of lust began to grow passionately in
his veins as he now stood only a breath away from Anna.
She looked into his deep green eyes that shone like emeralds and
thought she would faint with the sudden hot passion that consumed her
body. Dean looked beyond her hazel pools and into her soul; love and
desire, mixed with confused emotions that here was his soul mate.
“How could she be?” he thought with disbelief, “Kavita is my soul
mate!”
Suddenly, his mind went blank, and his thoughts came to a halt. He
grabbed her by the shoulders and held her lips close to his. Dean could
feel her body trembling as his lips touched hers ever so gently, in a
feather like kiss of love. They parted for a moment, looking adoringly
into each other's eyes as the world closed in around them.
Now, their lips met in a hot fire of desire, their tongues intertwined
with wet fever, their bodies aching with their mounting passion. Dean
lifted her up into his arms and walked towards the soft green grass, his
lips still hungrily consuming hers. Gently, he laid her down and their
lips parted.
Dean caressed her face and touched the softness of her hair, noticing
small tears falling from her eyes - he kissed them dry, whispering, “I
love you Anna.” Within a few moments, they were naked, their bodies
intertwined with a thirst to appease their hunger. Dean gently parted her
soft silken thighs, feeling his manhood about to burst. Anna whimpered
like a caught fawn as he hungrily filled her pleasure dome. They moved
together in long, even thrusts of passion. Anna arched her back to gain
279
even more pleasure, pulling Dean deep inside of her until their bodies
became one in love and harmony. As their waves of pleasure raced
towards their mounting climax, each opened their eyes and their souls
touched the same time as their bodies drowned in simultaneous orgasm.
The suns had gone and were replaced by a soft dark sky filled with
silver stars and a large full moon. Cool night air enveloped the lovers as
they lay, their bodies at peace, oblivious that night had fallen.
Albert was concerned that Dean hadn't returned from the Ashram. It
was after eight o'clock and they had finished dinner. “Don't worry Dad,
Dean is probably caught up with friends, he'll be back when he's ready,”
said Ben, stacking the dishes.
Albert thought for a moment, then said, “You're right son, he's most
likely stayed at the Ashram for the night.”
Tomorrow, Albert had planned to show Dean how his small
Government committee was working. If Dean did not return by ten
o'clock in the morning, Albert would go and look for him.
The sudden coldness started to seep through Anna's skin as she
stirred and held Dean's face cradled beside her. “Wake up Dean, we
must go back to the Ashram, I'm cold.” Dean opened his eyes, the soft
glow of love still floating around his body. He grabbed his shirt and
jeans and proceeded to dress, then handed Anna his jacket to slip on.
As they walked back to the Ashram, they were silent, alone with
their thoughts of what had happened and just what it meant to them.
Before they arrived at the main pathway to the Ashram, Dean stopped
and turned Anna around to face him. He held her chin up to meet his
eyes, and then kissed her lips softly.
“I'm not going back into the Ashram with you, I feel like I need to go
for a long walk somewhere,” he said. Anna took his jacket off and
handed it to him, saying, “Here, take this, I'm warmer now.”
Suddenly, Dean grabbed her tightly and squeezed her to his chest,
crying, “Oh God, Anna, what are we going to do?”
Anna kissed his lips with love and whispered through tear-filled
eyes, “That is up to you Dean. Just remember, I will always love you.”
280
CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN
An anguished heart
A young man walked aimlessly along a dirt track leading to nowhere;
his head was bent in despair, his soul heavy and confused. “Why did I
let this happen?” Dean kept saying over and over to himself. He had
thought he had complete control over his life - he knew the answers and
the ancient wisdom of Ilias should have stopped this happening!
Why?! Why?! Why did he fall in love with Anna?
Dean sat down on a rock and hung his head in his hands, the heavy
darkness of the night enveloped him and a cold wind blew fiercely
through his hair. He wanted to run and hide somewhere, to disappear
into nothingness. How could he ever face Kavita again?
All through the dark night, Dean walked endlessly, trying to calm the
confusion and pain he felt in his soul, but the tears of Ilias just kept
pouring out. “Was it possible to have two soul-mates?” he questioned.
The first rays of sunlight were starting to peek through the mountain
ranges, when Dean found himself walking in the direction of Father
Britton's Church.
With shaky hands and a tired body, Dean walked through the Church
door and sat down on a seat close to the altar. Sunlight was filtering in
through the open door and shining on the golden cross. Above the
cross, hung a beautiful painting of Jesus, his compassionate eyes
looking into Dean's pools of sadness. “Oh God, please forgive the
betrayal I have committed against Kavita, please forgive me,” he cried.
For a long time, Dean sat praying with despair and grief, until finally
he asked Ilias why this had happened. The soft words of his higher soul
came to him: “Oh Dean, I feel your grief as well; I could sense this
coming all along from the first moment you met Anna. I thought I had
281
the answers to everything, that I could lead you carefully along the path
of this lifetime and that all our lessons had been learnt.
“But you are human, and even though spiritually advanced, you are
not above mortal temptations and sufferings. You know, God hasn't
made it easy to be a human being. Remember the story of my Grand
Father, who was also your Grand Father, on Atlantis, when he took his
life because of a night of passion with a female alien? Well, as he was a
Priest, he just couldn't live with himself. Dean, you must be strong, you
must face this situation and you must rise above it,” Ilias said.
Colin Britton walked quietly up the aisle to where the young man sat
slumped over in prayer. His jacket was crumbled and covered in dirt his matted hair hung around hunched shoulders that were obviously
heavy with sadness. Dean turned around and held Colin's eyes. “Oh my
God Dean, what has happened?” said the Priest with concern.
Dean didn't answer, what could he say? Colin held Dean's red
swollen eyes and studied his pale drawn features; he could sense his
pain and anguish. Colin sat beside him in silence and gently took
Dean's hand in his. No words were spoken, just the soft touch of
friendship filled the air. Eventually, Dean straightened his shoulders and
said to Colin: “Please, may I have a cup of tea?”
Back inside Colin's room, over endless cups of tea, Dean confided of
his love for Anna and what had happened. Speaking about it was
somehow making Dean feel a little better, taking the edge off his pain.
The telephone rang. It was Albert wondering if Father Britton had
seen Dean. “I checked the Ashram and they haven't seen him since
yesterday,” said Albert. “He's fine, Dean is with me now, no problems.
He will be over at your place in an hour, goodbye Albert,” concluded
Father Britton, replacing the receiver.
Dean washed his face, tied his hair back and pulled himself together,
thinking he would go back to Springbrook later this afternoon to face
Kavita. Embracing Colin goodbye, he said, “I know inside I must do
what is right, and I'll trust in God to guide me, thank you for listening
Father.”
The afternoon passed in a haze for Dean as he looked over Albert's
new office and adjoining meeting rooms, he tried his best to seem
interested, but his mind kept drifting back to Anna and the soft touch of
her lips. Albert sensed something was wrong although he didn't want to
delve too deeply into the matter. “You seem a million miles away Dean,
282
are you OK?” said Albert as they left the office and proceeded to walk
back to where the shuttle would soon land. “Yes, I'm OK, just a little
tired,” was Dean's casual reply.
Ben and Steven were waiting at the shuttle-landing base when Dean
and their father arrived. “Now, don't you go leaving it too long between
visits Dean,” said Steven, bidding his friend farewell. Ben added, “We
are having a two day music festival in a couple of weeks from now, try
to come down.” As he waved goodbye to them, Dean thought to himself
that he had no intention of returning to Katoomba for a long, long time!
The moment Dean walked off the shuttlecraft and embraced Gordon
and his mother, Gordon knew something was terribly wrong.
Leeanne walked ahead with Kavita, they had to finish preparing the
special dinner, several Indian dishes which were Dean's favourites.
“Want to talk about it?” Gordon said, as he placed his arm around
Dean's shoulder. Dean felt tired and empty and replied, “No, there's
nothing I really need to talk about, I just want a long rest.”
Gordon didn't pursue the matter, but his psychic mind could feel the
deep pain in Ilias' soul. “Something very distressing had happened in
Katoomba,” he thought.
Kavita fussed around Dean, serving him endless plates of food and
filling his wine glass. Shanti and the children sat at another table and
were being served by Leeanne. The kitchen looked more like a
dormitory as the eighteen friends and relatives ate, drank and talked for
almost three hours.
Dean had been unusually quiet all evening and now Kavita could tell
he needed sleep.
“You go up to bed my love, you look so tired,” she whispered in his
ear, then kissed him softly on the cheek. Dean held her head in his
hands and gazed into her brown eyes, then kissed her passionately and
held her tightly to his chest.
Leeanne watched as they embraced and knew something was not
right with her son. She glanced sideways and picked up on Gordon's
concerns too. In bed that night, Leeanne said: “Something happened in
Katoomba with Dean, can you talk to him darling?” Gordon shrugged
his shoulders and replied, “I know, but whatever it is, Dean has to come
to me, I am not going to push it.”
283
It took Dean several days before he could make love with Kavita.
She never questioned his lack of response and just believed it to be
tiredness, after his many months of hard work without a break.
Now, as they lay together, blissfully entwined after a sensual hour
making love, Dean stroked Kavita's hair lovingly and said, “I suppose
we should get married soon, we both want children, what do you think,
my pretty flower?” Kavita thought for a moment. There was something
in Dean's voice, which said he wasn't sure what he wanted. She
answered: “I do want children, but I always dreamt of being married in
Tibet - the New India. I want Sai Baba to marry us, Dean.”
Dean didn't answer, his thoughts were now suspended in space.
Kavita continued: “Maybe we should wait, there's no hurry.”
During the next week, Dean found himself wondering just where his
life was heading. Sometimes out of the blue, he would find himself
distressed and crying, thinking of Anna.
He would close his eyes and she would be there in front of him - he
could see her, smell her, her inner beauty touched his soul. When he
cried out to Ilias for help, the answer was, “Patience, you will get
through this in time.”
Gordon was fed up with the way Dean had been ignoring him since
his arrival from Katoomba. He approached him and stood tall, looking
directly into his eyes.
“Listen to me son, I don't know what in hell happened to you, but
you're no good to anyone like this. Whatever the problem is, you
bloody well face it and fix it up!”
Dean felt a heavy lump forming in his throat. He embraced Gordon
emotionally and said, “I'm so sorry, please just give me a little time.”
Early the next morning, when a shuttlecraft arrived on it's way to
Ayers Rock, Dean made a sudden dash to catch it.
“I want to see how Paul and Bethany are keeping at Ayers Rock, I'll
be back in a few days,” Dean yelled to his mother, Gordon and a
stunned Kavita, as he ran out the door.
Paul and Bethany had been staying at Ayers Rock for several
months, studying the Aliens' advanced technology and the intricate
workings of their craft. With Paul's physics knowledge and keen
interest in space technology, he found himself easily able to fly one of
284
the shuttlecraft. When Dean arrived at Ayers Rock, Paul was pleased to
see him and proceeded to impart all the news since they had last met.
After a delicious dinner cooked by Bethany and animated
conversation about flying a shuttle, Paul sensed there was something
troubling Dean. “I've been taking up all the conversation, I'm sorry
Dean. You don't seem your usual self buddy, is there something
wrong?” asked Paul.
“No, no, I'm fine,” Dean replied in an uncertain tone. Bethany was
busy washing the dishes and singing to herself. Paul pulled his chair
closer to Dean and looked hard into his eyes. “Listen Dean, you're my
best friend, I care about you, let's go outside and have a talk.”
Before Dean could answer, Paul had stood up and grabbed him by
the arm, leading him to the door. Outside, Paul continued, “I know
something is troubling you, I've sensed it from the moment you arrived,
now come on buddy, out with it!”
They walked for a while in silence, then Dean stopped and said: “I'm
in love with Anna, Anna Rogopolis.”
“Oh shit!” exclaimed Paul, looking at Dean in disbelief. “What about
Kavita? When did this happen? God, what are you going to do?!”
The two friends sat down on the hard earth while Dean told the story
and poured out all his pain and anguish.
When he finished, Paul said, “Look Dean, when you mentioned
about two soul mates, I believe it could be possible. I've heard of people
being in love with two people at the same time and with an equal
amount of love and passion.” Paul thought for a moment, then
continued, “But, it never lasts, someone always gets hurt, mostly, they
all suffer.”
Dean hung his head in his hands, he knew there would be no winners
in this situation and he knew he could never hurt Kavita. Paul placed a
strong arm around his friend's shoulder and said, “Listen Dean, you stay
here for a while with us, learn to fly the shuttlecraft with me, take your
mind off everything. Things always work out in the end.”
Over breakfast the next morning, it was decided that Dean would
spend the day learning the operations of the shuttlecraft and catch up
with Dou Setta and Nubon afterwards.
Nubon was pacing up and down like an agitated human when Dean
walked into the spacecraft later that afternoon. Dou Setta was huddled
over the Galaxy scanning panel with several Karas obviously worried
285
about something. Dean picked up telepathically that there was trouble.
Nubon held his friend's eyes and said, “Dean, we will have to leave
Earth in a few days.”
“What's happened?” said Dean, full of concern.
“Our Mother Ship is on the planet Tyfin, Xiha has caused much
trouble there, and now he is on his way to Earth,” said Nubon.
Dean's psychic mind picked up just why Xiha was coming to Earth.
Nubon continued: “Communications on our Mother Ship intercepted a
message from the planet Greygate to Xiha, giving details of a planned
mass abduction of humans from Earth.”
Dou Setta joined them and the urgency of the situation became
apparent. Within three days, Xiha and several fighter craft would enter
Earth's atmosphere. No humans stood a chance against Xiha and the
Sepians, they would abduct as many people as they wished. The Mother
Ship had already sent several fighters to try to intercept, but
unfortunately Xiha was a long distance ahead of them.
Dou Setta had to leave as soon as possible to stop this attack on
Earth. Dean was shocked and spoke out loud, “Do you have the
capacity to stop Xiha?”
Dou Setta answered: “Yes, our fighting power is almost equal,
though we do not like to use violence. Our mental power is far superior
and this is what we prefer to use.”
Dean exhaled several deep breaths. All his worries seemed
insignificant to this situation. In the scheme of things, his problems
were not at all important. He didn't need to think twice and spoke with
great determination. “I'm coming with you, please, I want to go with
you!” Dou Setta glanced sideways at Nubon with surprise in his huge
black eyes. Nubon grinned and thought, “I half expected you to say
that, my friend.”
Paul was almost jumping out of his skin with a mixture of worry,
fear and excitement when Dean informed him of his plans to leave Earth
with the Aliens. “Why don't you come with me, Paul?” Dean said,
matter-of-factly.
Paul looked like he was about to go into a convulsion and yelled,
“Oh my God! Oh my God! Do you mean that? Oh Jeez! Going to
another galaxy, wow! I can't believe it!”
Paul's face glowed like an excited child, then he thought for a
moment and said, “I wouldn't go without Bethany.” Dean placed a
286
calming arm around his friend and said, “Think about it, and talk to
Bethany. You have until tomorrow night.”
Suddenly, the enormity of the decision he had just made hit Dean
and he knew he had to say goodbye to Anna.
The Katoomba music festival was in its second and final day when
Dean arrived unannounced. Albert was surprised and thrilled with
Dean's sudden arrival.
“I'm afraid I can only stay a few hours, just to say goodbye Albert,”
he said.
The Governor sat and listened in shock as Dean recounted the story
of Xiha's planned abductions on Earth and that he would be leaving with
Dou Setta. Ben came over and listened with amazement to Dean's
words, then said, “How long will you be gone?”
“I have no idea, there are no plans,” was the reply.
Ben grabbed Dean by the hand and said, “Well then, you'd better
look over the festival and listen to the music - where you're going, you'll
never have music like this again, my friend.”
As the two young men walked around the festival grounds, Ben
explained that yesterday they had played new original songs and music,
including Krishna and Indian music. Today was the songs from the
sixties, seventies and eighties of the old world. Ben proudly boasted
that Steven was playing his old acoustic guitar to groups of children and
doing a marvellous job showing a hidden talent he never knew he had!
The greatest surprise of all was the magnificent voice of Anna. “We
all knew Anna could sing, but not as great as this,” Ben said smiling.
Spread over several acres of ground, the music festival was a vision of
green grass and flowers, with people sitting on rugs having picnics,
children playing and dancing to the assortment of beautiful music which
filled the warm sunny day.
They walked towards centre stage where Anna was singing. Her
magnificent voice touched Dean's heart with sorrow. Many children
with flowers in their hair sat crosslegged in front of the stage and groups
of people stood listening as Anna came to the last song of this bracket,
announcing it was from the sixties group The Seekers, called 'I'll never
find another you'. Dean stood and watched as Anna sang to the
enthusiastic crowd oblivious that he was there.
287
Dean's thoughts mingled with the words. There was no new world
somewhere - this was their new world - a world where they could never
be together as one. Where Anna could never hold his hand. Their love
was something that could never be.
She wore a long white skirt with many daisies sewn into the fabric
and a pale orange blouse with garlands of flowers around her neck. Her
long wavy hair shone like amber silk against the clear blue sky.
The crowd applauded, Ben and Dean clapped and now, Anna was
walking from the stage and heading towards them. She looked at him
with genuine surprise and said, “I never expected to see you again so
soon Dean.”
Dean was silent, drowning in the beauty that Anna radiated. He
turned to Ben. “I'd like a few words with Anna in private, do you mind,
Ben?”
Ben could sense there was something powerful between his friends.
He smiled and added, “You two catch up, I'll see you later.”
Anna had a forty-minute break before she was to sing again. They
walked silently towards the shade of a far tree, then sat on the cool
green grass. Anna took Dean's hand in hers and said, “I've missed you
so much Dean, I'm glad you came back.” Dean had trouble looking into
Anna's eyes; he felt his heart sinking to his feet. Finally, he held her
face in his hands and gazed tenderly into her eyes. “I do love you
Anna...but...I've come to say goodbye.”
As Dean explained the trouble with Xiha and the threat to Earth,
small tears trickled down Anna's cheeks, she knew that it would be
many, many years before she would see him again. Dean wiped her
tears away as she began to speak.
“You know Dean, I fell in love with you the first moment I saw you,
all those years ago in LA. Even though you were Leeanne McIntyre's
son and I knew or sensed the truth about my father and brother's deaths,
it made no difference. When I met you, I felt you were the missing link
in my soul; it's strange how life turns out. When I read The Book, I
knew you were special, but I also knew I could never have you, that you
belonged to no one, yet you belonged to everyone.
“Oh Dean! In the church that time, I felt God touch us; he touched us
with happiness and sorrow. I knew then that there would be pain ahead
for both of us, but I could never stop the love I felt for you,” Anna said.
288
Dean cradled her head close to his chest as a huge envelope of
sadness covered them. Eventually, Dean held her face close to his and
their lips touched, softly at first, then fiercely, more passionately with
heart felt love and desire. Anna pulled away, her heart was beating
furiously, she had to get herself together. It was time to say goodbye.
“I must go back and do the last bracket. Dean, I want you to listen to
the fifth song. Never forget it, it's the one I've dedicated to you.”
Dean was still sitting on the ground, coming to terms with just how
he felt, when he realised how much time had slipped by. He had to be
going soon. Ben and Steven were nowhere to be seen when Dean
walked towards the stage, waiting for Anna's next song. She said: “This
next song is dedicated to a special friend, it's a song from the nineteen
eighties, by Johnny Logan and it's called 'Hold Me Now'.”
Dean knew the song; a lump came to his throat as he choked back
tears, trying to see Anna's eyes as she sang. The words became a blur in
his mind - Dean had his own thoughts and feelings.
He knew he could never close his heart to Anna - she would always
be in his dreams and even though the dreams were not real, when he
closed his eyes, he could feel her touch, her love. It would be her
memory that would calm his tormented soul - the memory of how she
felt when he held her close, so close, for they could never be together in
this lifetime.
Time would be the healer for them both and when their tears
stopped, time would be kind to them.
Anna and Dean were oblivious of the people around. They only had
eyes for each other, eyes that were now both filled with tears.
Suddenly, several children climbed up onto the stage and handed Anna
flowers. She knelt down and spoke to them. The moment was broken.
Dean turned and walked away in search of Ben and Steven.
“Over here Dean!” the familiar voice yelled through the dwindling
crowd. “Do you have time to join us back home for dinner?” said
Steven.
“I would like to, but I'm afraid I have to leave now, the shuttle leaves
in twenty minutes.” Ben and Steven placed their arms around Dean's
shoulders, contemplating their friend's goodbye. Albert and Father
Britton joined them with some other friends to bid farewell.
“So, it's off into the dark blue yonder and beyond,” said Albert,
giving Dean a tight hug. Colin Britton had a tear in his eye as he said,
289
“God be with you Dean and protect you always, come back safely, my
son.”
As the group of friends made their way home from the parkland, the
soft words of Anna singing the final song of the festival filtered through
the early evening air. Appropriately, it was the Seekers' old song ‘The
Carnival is Over’.
290
CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT
Departure from Earth
By the time Dean arrived back at Springbrook, everyone had heard
the news of Dou Setta's departure and Dean's intention of joining them.
Paul and Bethany were now at The Haven, engaged in a heated
conversation with Bethany's mother and Aunt Mapel. When she was
exasperated, Pearl, as usual, placed her hands firmly on her plump hips
and stood tall.
“Now, you listen to me Paul, my daughter is right, you're bloody
mad, flying off into space with those Aliens, you'll get yourself killed,
you'll never come back!”
Bethany was sitting beside her aunt crying, while the elderly woman
comforted her. Paul couldn't get a word into the conversation and
several friends joined in the argument while Kavita sobbed like a child
whilst being comforted by Gordon and Leeanne.
Suddenly, the door opened and in walked Dean. The conversation
stopped and everyone looked at him. Looking at their worried faces, he
spoke calmly, “The decision to leave Earth is mine and mine alone.
Whether Paul joins me is completely up to him.” Dean said to Leeanne:
“Mum, this is something I truly want to do and I need to do. I will take
care and I promise you I will return safely.”
To the rest of the gathering, he said: “We will be leaving from Ayers
Rock early tomorrow evening and right now, I want to be alone with the
woman I love.” Dean walked over to Kavita and lifted her into his
arms, squeezing her tightly as he whispered, “Please stop crying.”
291
Alone in their room, Dean held Kavita in his arms until she finally
stopped sobbing. He lifted her chin to his face and started to say:
“There's something I must tell you...”
Kavita smiled and placed a soft finger on his lips, saying, “Shh, shh,
not now, just tell me you love me and you'll come back to me soon.”
Dean kissed her tenderly and answered: “I love you and I will love
you for all time, that will never change, my beautiful flower. When I
return, we will be married in Tibet and have lots of children. Please
don't ever doubt this will happen!”
At that moment, Dean knew in his heart that it was Kavita he loved
more than Anna.
A great weight had lifted from his heart and the sorrow of Ilias
started to fade.
That night, when they made love, it was with the same soft
gentleness as the first time, only now, both knew the memories of
tonight would have to last a long time. With the first rays of sunlight
peeping through the curtains, Kavita stirred and cuddled close to Dean.
She stroked his chest, then placed soft kisses on his arm, wishing for
a miracle that her Sanjay would stay and not leave.
Dean stirred and felt a warm passion rising through his body, he
wanted to make love again. Slowly, their bodies entwined until they
were linked in a hungry passion, which seemed to go on and on forever.
Finally, when the waves of ecstasy cascaded from their bodies, both
knew the seed of eternal life had been planted.
Leeanne couldn't believe the sudden change in Kavita. Gone were
the tears and the constant sadness of Dean's imminent departure, now,
the pretty Indian girl seemed happy and resigned to the fact that Dean
had to leave and it was OK.
“I understand this is important to Dean, I will miss him, but he will
return soon,” Kavita said to Leeanne, as they hung out the washing
together. Everyone except Leeanne, Gordon and Kavita would be
leaving on the shuttlecraft to Ayers Rock for the farewell that afternoon.
Paul had decided that he would be leaving with or without Bethany.
The chance to go where no man had ever gone before, into other
Galaxies, other worlds, was far too great an opportunity to miss. Pearl
and Aunt Mapel were still fuming over Paul's decision, whilst Bethany
was quiet and not speaking to anyone, least of all Paul!
292
However, by the time the shuttlecraft had arrived, they reluctantly
decided to join with their friends and travel to Ayers Rock for the
farewell. Dean hugged his mother and Gordon tightly, reassuring them
that he would not take any chances and that he would look after himself
and Paul. “Don't you worry Mum, I'll be back and won't I have some
stories to tell you!” he said.
Dean then faced Kavita and held her tightly; their hearts beat
together and small tears formed in their eyes. He kissed her goodbye,
then walked with Paul and the others towards the shuttlecraft.
Ayers Rock was a hive of activity when they landed. Thousands of
people had gathered to say farewell. Many brought small gifts and
bunches of flowers, children had made drawings and small books as
gifts for the Aliens to remember them. The Aboriginals performed
ancient tribal dances and chanted songs from their Dreamtime. Over the
air of happiness, a veil of deep sadness slowly fell as the time
approached for departure.
Paul and Dean said their farewells to GP and Trish, Nathan, Yvonne
and Alpha, Tina, Antonio and many others. Helen and Carlos embraced
their friend and brother. Helen couldn't stop the tears as she hugged
Dean; Yianni was crying as he wanted to go with Dean and Dou Setta.
“Why can't I come with you Uncle Dean?' sobbed the boy.
Dean picked Yianni up into his arms and kissed his forehead, and
then said, “Remember years ago, when I first went to Springbrook and
you wanted to come, I told you then it was important for you to stay and
look after the family; that you were the man of the house? Well, even
though you have your step-dad Carlos, to me, you're still the most
important man in this family. Yianni, you are my psychic link, you are
my communication with my family. It is very important that you stay
here on Earth. When I return, we will spend all our time together and if
I ever journey into space again, I promise I will take you with me.”
Somehow, what Dean said, calmed the boy and his tears stopped. He
waved goodbye to his Uncle, then ran to his mother's arms. Paul stood
facing Bethany, Pearl and Aunt Mapel. There was an awkward silence,
then Bethany hugged Paul and kissed him lovingly, saying, “I love you
Paul Evans, like I could never love anyone again, but I think you are
absolutely mad, going on that space ship. You don't know what's out
there, it's ludicrous! Paul, look around at what we have here, what
293
mankind has always dreamed of, a perfect world. How could you leave
it and me?”
Paul placed his hands on Bethany's shoulders and looked at her
beautiful ebony face.
“I love you babe, you know how bloody much I do! Don't you see, I
have to go, this is my dream, to go where no man has ever gone before,
just like Star Trek and if there's a fight in space to save the people on
Earth, then I want to be a part of it, don't you understand?”
Bethany looked at Paul and in that split second, she did understand.
Tears welled in her eyes as she kissed him once again.
The Karas were giving the signal for departure. Dean was almost at
the top of the steps, when Paul ran quickly to catch up.
Suddenly, Bethany grabbed her mother and aunt and kissed them,
saying, “I must be crazy, but I have to go with Paul, goodbye, I love
you!”
Pearl cried out as her daughter ran towards the spacecraft, “If your
father was here, you wouldn't be going anywhere young lady!” Bethany
took deep breaths and kept saying to herself, “I must be crazy, I must be
crazy!” as she ran frantically towards the steps. Now she was yelling at
the top of her lungs: “Wait! Wait for me!!”
The staircase was starting to fold up when Paul and one of the Karas
saw Bethany running like mad towards them. Instantly, the Kara
lowered the steps again, just in time for Bethany to jump on. Paul
couldn't believe his eyes as he grabbed hold of her hand and pulled her
to him. Her heart was thumping like thunder and her legs were shaking
as she fell into his arms. Paul held her tight and yelled excitedly, “Talk
about last minute decisions, thank God you're with me babe!”
It seemed only a short time after lift off when Nubon indicated that
Dean, Paul and Bethany were to join him and Dou Setta at the control
panels. Telepathically, he spoke: “Very soon now, we will be leaving
Earth's atmosphere, come and look at your planet on the projector
screen.”
Dean and Paul had seen it before when the asteroid had struck; that
horrific memory hung heavy in their minds. Bethany was like an
excited child as she gasped in wonder at the magnificent Earth with two
suns. “Oh Paul, our planet is so beautiful!” she exclaimed. Paul
squeezed her hand and whispered: “May God always keep it that way.”
294
The deep blue velvet of hyperspace was soon enveloping the space
ship as its velocities became faster than light. Suddenly, the tracker
screen picked up an object on the same course heading towards them.
Dou Setta zoomed in on the object, then exclaimed: “It's Xiha! We've
picked them up.”
Quickly he spoke to Nubon, then gave instructions to two Karas.
Dean and Paul spoke simultaneously, “What are you planning to do?”
A slight smirk slid across Nubon's thin mouth as he answered: “We
won't use violence unless we have to. We will try to outwit them by
sending a false message to our Mother Ship, hopefully, they will take
the bait and turn back towards Estibulos.”
The three humans watched in fascination tinged with fear as the huge
black spacecraft loomed larger by the second on the tracker screen.
Through the communications computer to the Mother Ship, which was
now on Estibulos, the message read:
“Estimated time of arrival is 6942 difons...we have on board five
thousand one hundred and fifty humans, young male and female and
children...together with the forty thousand you have on board, we have
successfully rescued all young humans from planet Earth...they can live
on Estibulos until safe to return to Earth.”
On board the dark spacecraft, where several cold creatures sat at
communications panels, the message flashed before them. Doldran
hissed at the message, a strange sound forming in his long throat. He
looked towards Xiha and said, “Dou Setta knows we are close by, why
would he send an uncoded message to Estibulos, knowing we can
receive it?”
Xiha thought for a while, then replied: “He is playing mind games
again. Think, Doldran! He knows we won't believe him and we will
continue on to Earth, that is what he wants us to do, so we will do the
opposite!” Xiha gave the orders to keep on course towards Earth until
they pass Dou Setta, then change course and circle back towards
Estibulos. “Contact all our fighter craft on Sepia and tell them we will
be engaging a war on Estibulos in the very near future!” he said.
Xiha's craft loomed before them like some pre-historic evil monster.
As it came into detailed view, it was a long oblong shape with side
wings covered with missile weapons ready to fire. The surface of the
295
ship resembled a pre-historic reptile - black, cold and foreboding and a
dark grey hazy light seemed to emit from several sections of the craft.
Bethany shuddered in fear and held tight to Paul as they passed close
by. Dou Setta gave the orders to open the laser covers and to activate
the forcefield in case of attack.
Many Karas rushed about co-ordinating the weapons control panels
in preparation for any onslaught against them. They were ready.
Xiha contained his urgent passion to open fire against Dou Setta.
He snarled at the Sepians on weapons controls: “Do not engage lasers,
we will pass by without attacking. A time will come soon when I will
have all Estibulians and humans under my control, we can wait.”
An eerie cold silence filled Dou Setta's craft as they passed by Xiha
within only half a kilometre. There was no attack, all was quiet, just the
uneasy emptiness of space.
Dean broke that silence and spoke to Nubon: “You know he's not
going to Earth, Xiha will follow us back to Estibulos.” Nubon grinned
at his human friend and replied, “Let's hope that he has taken the bait.”
Dean's psychic mind was telling him that there would be much fighting
in the Galaxy where they were heading.
Dou Setta kept the scanner tracker on Xiha until the black craft was
only a tiny speck on the screen. The course was still Earth bound and as
the speck gradually faded from the tracker screen, Dou Setta said to
Dean and Paul, “In about two of your earth hours, Xiha will enter
Earth's atmosphere, unless he alters course in the next fifteen minutes,
we will lose him and then we can only hope he does reverse course back
towards us.”
Dean picked up some concern in Dou Setta's thoughts that maybe
Xiha hadn't changed his mind. Ilias' thoughts were definite and Dean
said: “Xiha will wait until he is completely out of scanner range before
he alters course, but, trust me, he will not enter Earth's atmosphere.”
Paul hunched his shoulders in disbelief and turned to his friend.
“Jeez Dean, if you are right about everything, then we shouldn't have
much trouble outsmarting Xiha in the future.” Dean thought for a
moment and then held Paul by the shoulder, a serious look on his face.
“I feel there is much trouble ahead, I can sense a great darkness filled
with suffering,” he said. Paul felt a cold shiver run down his spine, he
turned and went to find Bethany.
296
One of the Karas had been showing Bethany around the large space
ship, and now they were looking at the sleeping chambers, when Paul
caught up with them. The Kara said to Bethany: “In our time, it will
take about five days before we reach Estibulos, if you wish, you can
sleep some of that time away relaxed, in one of those chambers.”
Bethany inspected the long, tube-like containers while Paul
explained: “They're not unlike the healing chambers, only higher and
your head is not exposed. I tried one for several days when Dean and I
were here before, it's wonderful, so completely relaxing, just like
floating on clouds.”
Bethany grinned and squeezed Paul's hand, saying, “Are there any
large enough for two?”
“Unfortunately, all sleeping chambers were only built for one being,
and, as they are only just long enough for humans, they were for
sleeping only and not for sex,” said Paul.
Bethany seemed disappointed and shrugged her shoulders, saying:
“Oh well, I'll try it for twelve hours.” The Kara showed her to a circular
room where many white gowns hung and explained she must wear one
of them. Bethany touched the fabric; it was like nothing she had ever
seen, it felt softer than silk and finer than gauze.
The Kara proceeded to open a side panel and take out several
garments of clothing. Bethany noticed him looking strangely at her old
torn jeans and faded sweater. He said, “I think you may find something
more comfortable to wear among these garments when you have
completed your sleep.” Paul laughed, he had been told also to change
his old clothing. The Aliens were very particular with cleanliness,
though only Nubon's species wore clothing. He smiled as Bethany
sorted through the various garments then said, “Go away Paul, come
back in twelve hours and I'll surprise you.” Paul knew what the sleeping
chambers were like and he called out just as he left the room: “If you
want more than twelve hours, just push the red re-set button!”
Dean and Paul were too excited to sleep just yet. They sat at the
controls with Dou Setta and Nubon, asking more questions about their
galaxy and Xiha.
Meanwhile, back on Earth, Sien Palmer couldn't understand why
Xiha hadn't turned up anywhere on Earth. It was now several months
since his last contact and the spacecraft should have arrived by now.
297
The tall albino proceeded to make contact again and inserted the long
thin needle into the computer chip. Several moments of static were
heard until Xiha's voice filtered through. “Sien! I'd almost forgotten you
were back on Earth. We outsmarted Dou Setta. Why didn't you inform
us that he had thousands of young humans on board his ship? And why
did you not know of the others on the Mother Ship?”
Sien couldn't believe his thought patterns and screamed hysterically
in the human tongue: “Where in the fucking hell are you!? I'm waiting
here on Earth with all the humans, no humans have left this planet
except for two males and one female on Dou Setta's craft. What in the
hell are you talking about?!”
When Xiha explained what had happened and how he thought he had
outsmarted the little Dou Setta, Sien said coldly, “You're a bloody idiot
Xiha, it's all a lie, Dou Setta has outsmarted you!”
Xiha felt a burning anger seep through his cold yellow veins, he
hated being made a fool of and he hated the half android human he had
created that was yelling at him now.
Doldran was hissing through his sabre-like teeth, wanting revenge as
soon as possible. Xiha said to Sien: “Listen to me, you piece of
machinery, I will soon have all Estibulians and humans under my
control and I will do it my way. Right now, I do not have any more
need for a lump of garbage like you!” Within a few seconds, Xiha had
pressed a double purple computer button. There was a piercing ring
through the panel, then, silence.
The piercing sound went directly into Sien Palmer's head and blew
him apart into a thousand pieces of flesh, blood and bone, sprinkled
with minute silver particles. The man who was once known as a NASA
adviser was no more.
It had been over forty eight hours since Bethany went into the
sleeping chamber. Paul and Dean had taken several quick sleeps of
about five hours each and now, one of the Karas informed Paul that his
lady was awake. “She is in the circular room, dressing,” said the Kara.
Bethany was bending down pulling on a pair of white boots, when Paul
walked through the door. She stood up, placed her hands on her hips
and swung around proudly, saying, “What do you think darling?”
She was wearing a fine skin tight white cat suit, revealing all her
sensual curves to perfection. Over the top was a deep blue velvet waist
298
coat, with several brass buttons down the front. On her hips, she wore a
wide leather belt.
Paul was overwhelmed and replied, “Absolutely stunning, just
stunning!”
As Paul walked close beside her, he noticed she looked younger and
more beautiful than before, and then he remembered. “Bethany, when
you pressed the re-set button, did you happen to also touch the small
white switch beside it?”
“I don't remember Paul, I was so relaxed, all I knew was I didn't want
to wake up or leave where I was,” she replied. After Paul kissed her
hungrily for what seemed like ages, he finally calmed down and
explained the other purpose for the sleeping chambers. “They are also
used for cell rejuvenation, like putting youth hormones back into the
body. That is why the Aliens never seem to age. As you know, it takes
us six days to get to Estibulos; in Earth time, that is six months and
when you sleep it's like suspended animation. Instead of aging six
months like you would on Earth, you actually become younger,” Paul
said.
Bethany stood with her mouth open in surprise, as Paul continued,
“You cannot become younger than you were before you arrived, but
your skin cells can be replenished to their youthful beauty. But you, my
sexy babe, have always been beautiful!”
Bethany couldn't contain the passion she was feeling and hungrily
peeled off Paul's clothing and her own garments, while locking the door.
Within a few moments, they were naked and making love on the
floor. So urgent was their need for sexual release, that the whole event
was over in just five minutes.
Paul straightened himself and decided his old clothes also had to go
and began rummaging through the assortment before him. He settled on
a pair of black pants just like Nubon's and a brown leather vest.
Grabbing several other pieces of clothing which would suit Dean, they
hurried out of the dressing room, relieved that no one had walked in
during their lovemaking.
They were into their fifth day of the journey from Earth when Dou
Setta called Paul and Bethany to join him and Dean at the projection
screen. “In a few moments,” Dou Setta said, “you will be entering our
Solar System. The first planet you will see is Tyfin, it is similar in size
to Earth and is a beautiful green planet like Estibulos. Most of the
299
inhabitants of Tyfin are Nubon's species, though there are some that
have a human appearance like yourselves. We will not stop at Tyfin
now, as our Mother Ship has gone to Estibulos.”
Paul and Bethany had their eyes glued to the screen; several clusters
of small asteroids flew past and unusual colour distortions crept into the
blue velvet of space. Suddenly, from out of nowhere, Tyfin appeared
with its two suns. “Oh my God!” exclaimed Paul, “It's so much like
Earth, I can't believe it!” When Dou Setta zoomed in closer, it became
apparent that the greatest difference was the small amount of ocean,
which accounted for only one quarter of the planet. “How many beings
live on Tyfin?” asked Bethany.
“About six million,” replied Dou Setta.
“No wonder there's no pollution and it's so green,” said Paul. The
greatest surprise was the planet's two suns, just like Earth.
“Tyfin is the only planet in our Galaxy with two suns. The twin
planets Hati and Karid are uninhabitable, though some lower life form
creatures do exist there. Greygate has a small sun and two moons,” said
Nubon.
Dean remembered the message that had been intercepted from Xiha
to Greygate and he asked Nubon more about the planet. “Greygate is a
small far away planet, what we call an outpost planet,” was the reply.
“No one goes there except Xiha, he has claimed it for himself. The
planet is barren and desolate with very little water, it has no vegetation
whatsoever and a dark grey mist cloud constantly covers all the land.
We have heard that Xiha has built a base there and some of his species
are now living there,” Nubon said.
Dou Setta added: “Greygate is the most repulsive planet in our
Galaxy, you would never want to visit there.”
Sometime later, Tyfin was a small dot behind them and another
planet loomed on the screen. The landmasses seemed mountainous and
barren with only small sections of green vegetation. Several distinct
oceans could be seen. “This is Scarib, it is what we call the sister planet
to Sepia, where most of our Galaxy's evil creatures live,” said Nubon.
No one asked questions, they were alone with their thoughts of just
what may occur down there. Sepia was the next planet, looking very
much like Scarib, except for less oceans. Dean stared hard at the vision
of landmass, an area full of evil. “So this is where Xiha and his lot hang
300
out,” he said. At that point, everyone was thinking the same thing: “Just
where was Xiha right now?”
The black space ship altered its course the moment it was out of
range of Dou Setta's scanner. Now, it would take the long way home,
back to Sepia. Doldran snarled through his sabre-like teeth, he was
angry. “I don't understand why you didn't continue on to Earth and
carry out some abductions anyway!”
Xiha was deep in thought. He would claim Earth at a later stage, the
humans there would cause no threat and take-over would be easy. Right
now, his major concern was to finally conquer his own Galaxy once and
for all. Battle plans must be set in place and the planets of Estibulos
and Tyfin would be destroyed, then, he would have supreme power.
A dark veil of evil covered Xiha's thoughts as he remembered
Greygate. He rubbed his scaly hands together with excitement. He
couldn't wait to return there.
It was ten hours since they passed Sepia and now Dou Setta was on
the home run to Estibulos. Bethany had been sleeping when Dou Setta
explained to Dean and Paul about the other planets in their Galaxy, now,
Paul told her: “The other planets are Trusion, which is about the same
size as Estibulos, though much colder. The Aliens there are good and
keep to themselves. Knod is a planet Xiha has conquered, the
inhabitants there are under his control and work more like slaves,” he
said.
“The other planet is Bluedisc, it is very similar to our planet Jupiter,
only smaller. A large blue circle covers the planet and all the landmass
takes on a bluish hue. The species of Aliens on Bluedisc can only live
there and no others can tolerate the planet's poisonous atmosphere,”
Paul said.
Bethany smiled and said, “Wow! Paul, ten strange planets in a far
away Galaxy, I can't believe we are actually here, that this is happening
and we are only six days from Earth!”
Paul kissed her cheek and said: “No babe, it's been six months!”
A mesmerising interplay of hazy lights and shadows swirled within
the deep blue of space as everyone stood waiting for the planet of
Estibulos to appear. From out of nowhere, just like Tyfin, the small
Earth-like planet emerged. Immediately the communications panel lit
301
up and the computer voiced the message, first in Estibulian tongue, then
in English: “Welcome home Dou Setta!”
Many Karas spoke strange words that sounded like excited children
and Dou Setta turned to his human friends and blinked his large black
eyes filled with joy.
Nubon zoomed in for a close-up of the planet, a sense of great pride
filling his long thin frame. Dean, Paul and Bethany beheld Estibulos
with wonder and surprise. Before them appeared landmasses, very
similar to Tyfin, so lush and green and full of natural beauty. Closer
now, Dean noticed several small mountains, which took on a clear
transparent look, almost like glass. Ilias' thoughts were jumping with
excitement. “It's crystal! It's crystal! They're Crystal Mountains!”
The Karas were busy co-ordinating landing procedures and Dou
Setta was giving orders, but Dean's eyes were glued to the familiar
terrain. “Oh my God, it is so much like ancient Atlantis!” he cried out.
Two large volcanoes came into view, then tropical mountain ranges,
with magnificent waterfalls scattered here and there. Dean swallowed
the hard emotional lump he felt in his throat and grabbed hold of Paul
and Bethany, saying: “If only my mother and Gordon could see this!”
A short time later, the outline of a huge white city shone before
them. Nubon said, “This is Pilot, our major base, there are eight other
cities similar to this around our planet.” Dou Setta gave the orders for
everyone to take their places in their seat cubicles and prepare for
landing. They were home now, home on Estibulos.
302
CHAPTER TWENTY NINE
The light of Harmoni
Nothing could have prepared the three humans for the emotion they
felt when they walked off the space ship and onto the alien planet of
Estibulos. Bethany choked back tears as she carefully placed one foot
in front of the other, at the same time holding tight to Paul. “Oh my
God, we've just arrived in Heaven!” she exclaimed in wonder.
Dean breathed deeply of an air so pure he felt like floating. His eyes
gazed around and beheld the spiritual beauty that was Estibulos. Before
them stood thousands of small aliens just like Dou Setta, all holding
something in the air, which appeared like silver flags. In the middle of
the multitude was a long passageway flanked by hundreds of Nubon's
species, forming a guard of honour for the new arrivals. Behind them
sat the spectacular circular city of Pilot. The buildings were pyramid
and dome shaped and some looked like they were clear silver white like
polished marble and others were transparent, glistening like diamonds in
the deep blue-violet sky.
Between the buildings were strange shaped trees with leaves of
green, red and gold and scattered about the city were tall clusters of
multi coloured crystals - it all looked like something out of a fairytale.
Dou Setta and Nubon walked along the passageway, followed by
four Karas, then Dean, Paul and Bethany; behind them came the crew of
the ship and many Karas. As they walked along, a melody of beautiful
music that sounded like harps and keyboards floated through the
intoxicating air. Bethany had the overwhelming feeling that she would
be able to fly if she tried.
303
At the end of the passageway, sat several small shuttlecraft, about
half the size of the ones on the ship. Two Karas dressed in blue tunic
style outfits welcomed them on board. As the small craft lifted off,
Nubon turned to each of his friends and said: “We will go the main
auditorium now, where you can eat and rest if you wish. Later, I will
take you to meet our spiritual leader Harmoni.” On the way, Nubon
explained more about their city and lifestyle.
Like ancient Atlantis, all their power and energy came from crystals;
there were many crystal mountains on the planet from where the power
was harnessed. Everything on Estibulos worked similar to Atlantis,
only more advanced; after all, it was the Estibulians who gave
Atlanteans their power and knowledge in the beginning.
Around the planet were large farming communities where various
kinds of fruits and vegetables were grown in abundance, no Estibulians
ate meat of any kind. The animals and birds lived in complete harmony
and safety with all species, there was no anger or aggression anywhere.
As Paul listened, he understood only too well how the human race of
the old world had become little more than savages filled with hate and
aggression and now how much he appreciated being alive in a new
world with a new understanding. He looked at Dean and said: “Thank
heavens I found you when I did, I know Bethany and I would never have
survived without you Dean.”
Dean leaned over and gave his buddy a tight hug. Several moments
later, they landed in the middle of the circular auditorium. Dean
straightened his purple leather like jacket, stood up and walked from the
craft, followed by Paul and Bethany. The marble floor on which they
had stepped had a pale blue tinge running through it, everything else
was sparkling white. Around the auditorium stood many large vases
holding beautiful silver flowers with pink stems and leaves.
Bethany walked over and touched a silver petal, not believing they
could be real. Dou Setta glanced up and said, “All our plants, trees and
flowers are like none you have on Earth.” They continued walking past
small groups of beings who were reading books or eating from bowls of
fruit. Dou Setta explained that some of these Estibulians were students
on their mid-day break.
Dean's eyes shifted excitedly to several glass like spheres where
beings stood inside, then somehow disappeared!
304
“What on earth are they?” Paul and Dean exclaimed together as they
approached.
Nubon smiled; he knew this would be the most fascinating apparatus
for the humans. He explained: “These are called our projection spheres.
They are used throughout the city as a means of short travel.” The
bewildered look on his friend's faces almost caused Nubon to laugh and
he continued: “Only Estibulians are capable of using them. The travel is
made possible by mind-body projection, one stands in the sphere, places
the palms of the hands close to the head, like so, concentrates on where
one wants to go, then projects the mind and the body follows!”
Bethany yelled in astonishment: “You mean you just think where
you would like to go, then pow! You just disappear then reappear? I
can't believe it!”
“I believe it,” said Dean, deep in thought, “in fact, I think I would
like to try it sometime.”
Dou Setta replied telepathically to Dean: “I know you are very
advanced for a human, though I doubt you could use our projection
spheres successfully.”
“We will see,” Dean thought in reply.
A short time later, the five friends, joined by two Karas, sat down on
long cushioned sofas flanked by tables filled with bowls of fruit and
nuts. One of Nubon's species came over and proceeded to serve them
berry juice and warm honey tea from long crystal goblets.
Dou Setta's thoughts filtered through their minds: 'We will eat and
rest here for a while, then I will take you to meet our Spiritual Leader.’
Even before the entrance to Harmoni's pyramid came into view,
Dean knew this meeting was special and that it would have a profound
effect on him for the rest of his life.
The pyramid glowed with a blue silver light, looking every bit like a
miniature model of the Great Pyramid of Understanding. As the door
opened, two Karas dressed in blue tunics handed each human and alien
a black eye shield to wear. Dou Setta explained that no one could look
into the eyes of Harmoni and if a human looked, they would be blinded.
“Mostly, Harmoni keeps her eyes shut, it is said her dark eyes
contain a hundred stars and the brightness would cause instant
blindness. Do not worry, she will tell us if she intends to open her
eyes,” Dou Setta reassured them.
305
Harmoni knew there was a male human from another Galaxy
walking towards her. She could sense his being, his aura, he was
causing emotions she had never felt enter her body so pleasingly. She
relaxed her mind and his vision appeared to her. He was tall and
handsomely built with long dark hair and deep green eyes. The stranger
wore black pants and a purple jacket. Around his neck, he wore a
crystal from Atlantis.
As the door to her chamber slowly opened, Harmoni had to contain
herself from opening her eyes; she knew this was the chosen one sent to
her and she even knew his human name.
“Welcome Dean,” a soft voice echoed in a pitch which was not of
the human voice, so much sweeter and delicate like a flower. Dou Setta
and Nubon looked surprised at Dean, while Paul and Bethany stood
mesmerised, as they looked upon the magnificent creature seated before
them. High on a clear crystal throne sat a most unusually beautiful girl.
Dean estimated her size as almost the same as Kavita, maybe
smaller. Her head was large and covered in masses of long white hair,
which shone like silver in the bluish light. Her facial features were
human, her nose small, her lips full and pink and her huge eyes were
tightly shut.
Harmoni wore a loose fitting sheer blue gown, which showed the
faint outline of small breasts not quite developed; her skin was
translucent and around her neck hung a gold medallion and a crystal.
Dean instantly knew the medallion and crystal were both from
Atlantis. Dou Setta did the introductions of Paul and Bethany and spoke
of their long journey from Earth. Dean's eyes never left Harmoni and
now her thoughts filtered into his mind.
“I have been waiting for you to come to my planet, you are the friend
I have been looking for,” she thought. Dean was a little taken aback and
spoke out loud: “How old are you Harmoni and where did you come
from?”
“In your Earth years, I am twelve, I have never aged since that time.
I come from this planet Estibulos, but I was conceived on ancient
Atlantis, thousands of years ago,” was the reply.
Bethany let out a cry of, “Oh my God, how can this be?”
Harmoni explained: “My mother was an Estibulian and my father
was an Atlantean Priest. I am the successful embryo of that union.”
306
Ilias' soul was filled with emotion, tinged with disbelief. Dean tried
desperately to contain the feeling that he had to rush and hug Harmoni
with happiness. Instead, he turned to Dou Setta and Nubon and said,
“My higher soul is that of Ilias, a high Priest from Atlantis - Ilias'
Grandfather was Harmoni's father, spiritually, we are connected, or
related.”
The Aliens knew Dean was special and now the association was
becoming clear. Harmoni felt a wonderful joy fill her heart as she also
understood the connection, she smiled, holding out her delicate hand
towards Dean and said, “Come and sit close beside me, my spiritual
brother.”
For a long time, they sat together, their souls lost in memories of a
past life on Atlantis and their hearts consumed with happiness at their
new found friendship.
Paul and Bethany were eager to explore more of the city and politely
said their goodbyes. Dou Setta and Nubon, who understood that
Harmoni wanted to be alone with Dean, joined them.
The touch of her hand was like that of an angel as Harmoni led Dean
towards a small oval table and two chairs. They sat opposite each other
holding hands and drowning in the luminous beauty each projected; the
beauty of human and alien kind together. Telepathically, Harmoni said,
“Dean, I have been so alone for all of my life. Estibulians worship me
and hold me in such high esteem, but I am alone, no one understands
me. To be part human and part alien is a very frustrating life,
sometimes I feel I am no one, that I was a great mistake from the
beginning.”
Dean squeezed her hand, then held it to his lips and placed a soft kiss
on her translucent skin. Harmoni could feel a great love and
understanding fill her body. She trembled a little, no one had ever
touched her before and she felt a strange sensation she had never
known. Dean's thoughts joined hers with hope, “You are not alone, I am
with you and even when our bodies are apart, my thoughts will always
be connected with you, my spiritual sister.”
Harmoni sat quiet for a long time, her soul drifting from the past into
the future, finally, she spoke, “Do you see what I see in the future
Dean?”
“I see much fighting, and a great dark evil threatening your Galaxy,
and, suffering.”
307
Harmoni replied, “Xiha will wage a war with Estibulous and Tyfin,
he wants total control of this Galaxy. After that, he plans to conquer
Earth. Dean, this war will happen very soon, you must help Dou Setta
and I prepare for the darkness ahead.”
“I will do everything in my power to stop Xiha, please Harmoni,
don't worry, Paul and I will not let those evil creatures destroy your
planet,” Dean replied. “After I leave here, I will meet with Dou Setta
and Nubon and together we will plan our defence strategy. Estibulous
and Tyfin will be well prepared for Xiha and his hideous lot,” he
concluded.
Suddenly, a great peace covered the tiny frame of Harmoni; she
smiled within her soul, knowing Dean had the strength and wisdom to
defeat Xiha. Gazing in wonder at Harmoni's delicate face with the huge
closed eyes, Dean thought, “To have life eternal and yet to never gaze
upon another being for fear of blinding them and to only be able to see
with your mind and not your eyes, my heart cries out to you, my
beautiful Harmoni!”
Even though Dean understood she could see what he looked like
within her mind, he wanted her to feel him. Please Harmoni, slide your
hands all over my face, I want you to feel me, touch me,” he whispered,
holding her hands and guiding them to his face. Harmoni's soft fingers
caressed Dean's forehead, then slid over his eyes, feeling the long
lashes, then the bridge of his nose, over his cheeks and gently over his
lips.
Harmoni hesitated, feeling the warm breath seep through slightly
parted lips, she had never known what it was like to cry, but now her
feelings to do just that were overwhelming. Dean guided her hands
through his thick hair, sensing her great pleasure at this, then finally
down his neck and placed both palms over his heart. Harmoni felt the
beat of his heart singing through her hands, hands that were finally
feeling complete love and understanding on her level. Dean knew what
she was thinking and the higher soul of Ilias was saying to them both,
“Do not fear, Dean will not be blinded.”
With her hands still touching Dean's heart, Harmony hesitantly
blinked her huge eyes. Dean watched her with the faith that Ilias was
correct.
Slowly, ever so slowly, she opened her eyes.
308
In amongst the deep dark alien pools, hundreds of silver specks
shone so brightly they took Dean's breath away. It was beauty beyond
imagination. Their eyes locked in a silent cord of unique understanding
and for the first time in Harmoni's long lonely life, a small trickle of
tears rolled from the silver stars.
309
CHAPTER THIRTY
An evil force
Paul and Bethany watched with fascination as a Kara walked into a
projection sphere and Nubon once again explained how they worked.
Dou Setta glanced at Paul, he sensed that finally the young Earthling
understood the power of the mind, though Bethany was still
disbelieving. “Don't you see babe, that's how miracles happen, because
people believe so strongly, the mind actually makes a physical event
become real,” Paul said.
Bethany widened her eyes with a look of “convince me”, just as
Dean walked over and joined them. He took the thought from Bethany's
mind and said to her, “I'll convince you Bethany!”
Dean walked over to the sphere and said to Dou Setta, “I understand
just how they work, mind if I try?”
The small Alien glanced up at his friend and blinked his huge black
eyes with the thought of “go ahead”, while Nubon looked on
disapprovingly.
Dean entered the transparent cylinder and with his mind, closed it
shut. Then he placed his palms to his temples and drew on Ilias'
strength of mind. As Dean's image faded, Bethany let out a startled cry,
while Paul grinned with satisfaction. The projection sphere was empty.
Everyone was silent. Several minutes went by, then suddenly, Dean
reappeared. He seemed a little lightheaded as he walked from the
sphere with a small red book in his hand.
“I've just been to your library, this is the book you are thinking of
getting tomorrow Nubon!” Dean said casually as he handed the book to
a bewildered Nubon. Dou Setta took Dean's hand and thought,
310
“Through your spiritual link with Harmoni, you are so much like us, my
friend.”
Dean broke the excitement of the moment by suggesting they call an
urgent meeting with the Planet's heads of defence to discuss the threat
posed by Xiha. As he explained the concerns expressed to him by
Harmoni, a meeting was arranged for the following day.
The Planet's Seat of Order was a circular dome shaped building of
white and grey marble, situated a short distance from Harmoni's
pyramid. Around an oval table, sat ten Estibulians and five of Nubon's
species. Behind them, stood many Karas dressed in the familiar blue
tunics.
The door opened and Dou Setta and Nubon walked in, followed by
Dean and Paul. Bethany had been asked to wait outside with several
other female Estibulians, as the Seat of Order room was for males only.
She did this grudgingly; surprised that sex discrimination existed on
other planets as well as Earth!
The meeting came to order and Dou Setta spoke of the impending
threat of war from Xiha. “This time, the threat is real and we must
prepare ourselves. Harmoni has spoken of the urgency and her vision of
the future to Dean.”
All alien eyes were now on the human stranger who stood before
them. Dean stood tall and looked resplendent in his deep purple jacket
and tight black pants. Everyone noticed the crystal he wore around his
neck was similar to the crystal worn by Harmoni. Telepathically, he
spoke to the meeting, though his eyes gazed through each set of alien
eyes as if he were addressing them alone.
At the moment of contact with Dean's green pools of wisdom, each
of the fifteen beings knew this human had a strong spiritual link with
Harmoni. “Xiha will strike this city Pilot, in two days from now, that is
approximately two thousand eight hundred difons, our defence plan
must be implemented right now,” he implored.
The central area of Pilot had a force field defence shield, which
could stay in operation for up to six hours, protecting that section from
any missile or laser attacks. Nothing could penetrate the shield.
Unfortunately, the outskirts of Pilot were not protected and this area was
where most Estibulians lived. The other eight major cities around the
planet were in the same predicament.
311
One Estibulian at the table said to Dean, “Our planet has always
lived in peace, we have never had fear of war. Xiha may have warred
with other planets, but this is the first time he has caused a threat to us,
maybe he will change his mind.”
Dean replied, “The mind of evil is unpredictable and changeable.
One thing I do know for certain is that Xiha plans to conquer all of your
Galaxy, starting with Estibulos.”
Nubon pressed several buttons on a side control panel and
immediately a huge computer screen flashed the image of their planet.
Nubon then zoomed in on each city and relayed information about
the threat of attack from Xiha in about two thousand eight hundred
difons. Each city was placed on full alert and their defences prepared in
readiness for attack. Several moments later, Nubon engaged another
panel button. This time, the darkness of space filled the screen with the
planet in the background.
Nubon addressed the meeting. “We will not wait for Xiha to attack,
we will intercept him before he hits Estibulos.”
Dean leaned over and whispered in Paul's ear, “I was thinking the
same thing, our fight will be in space and not on the land.”
“Oh Jeez! This really is going to be a Star Wars!!” exclaimed Paul in
a worried voice.
Outside, Bethany was becoming restless. She had tried with limited
success to telepathically speak with the female aliens, but her
conversation seemed to be boring to them, as all except one had left.
The only difference between the male and female Estibulians was the
two small flat nipples on the female's chest and her slightly smaller
frame. With the absence of no apparent genitalia, Bethany had often
wondered just how they copulated. That puzzle was soon answered
when the small delicate creature beside her now read her mind as
Bethany's eyes lingered on her body.
The female spoke out loud. “We copulate the same as you, only our
male's genitalia is hidden up inside and only comes out when required.”
Bethany's cheeks reddened with embarrassment, as the alien
continued, “I have a canal similar to yours though much smaller. It is
covered by a thin fold of skin.”
Before anything else could be said, the moment was broken by the
door to the Seat of Order room opening.
312
A large group of Karas walked quickly ahead of Dean and Paul,
while Dou Setta gave instructions to several of the Estibulians who were
at the meeting. The defence strategy for the planet was now being
implemented.
Bethany ran to Paul, her cheeks still pink from the impromptu
conversation on alien sex.
“What has happened? You've been in that room for hours Paul,” she
said, flinging her arms around his waist.
“I'll tell you later babe, right now, Nubon is going to give Dean and
myself instructions on flying a fighter craft.”
Dean knew only too well how worried Bethany would be about that
piece of news.
“Don't worry Bethany, we won't be flying today, just learning the
workings of the craft,” he said.
The desolate planet of Sepia loomed up before them as Xiha gave
orders for landing. He and his crew were weary after Doldran had
insisted on stopping off at Knod to appease their sexual appetites before
arrival on Sepia. Now, the ugly creature Doldran was standing with his
chest thrust out and his sexual organ still firm despite taking his
pleasure from eight young creatures in the short space of time they had
stayed on Knod!
Xiha looked at his companion with some envy and said, “Don't you
ever think of anything except eating, fornicating and killing?” Doldran
hissed with pleasure and replied, “Is there anything else?”
“Yes, we have to put our brains together and prepare for this bloody
war against Estibulos, you moron!” replied Xiha.
“That's killing and I know killing is what gives you the greatest
pleasure Xiha,” Doldran hissed back.
The small amount of vegetation on Sepia consisted of layers of dark
green slimy roots, which crawled snake-like from the barren land. The
roots gave off a vile smell of putrid decay. This smell was pleasing to
the Sepians, but to any other species, it was nauseating. There was no
need for healthy vegetation on the planet, as the Sepians' main food
source was meat and fish. The fish were always eaten alive, thrashing
as they slid down Sepian throats and into their bellies, giving them
much internal pleasure!
313
After they arrived on their planet, Xiha gave the orders to his crew.
“We must all rest, and in seven hundred difons, we will meet in the War
Chamber to commence our plans to destroy Estibulos. Once we have
the Estibulians under our control, Tyfin will surrender!”
The Estibulian fighter craft were small and compact with seating for
six beings, though mostly only one or two occupied them. They were
built in a flat pyramid shape of heavy heat resistant metal like substance,
were dark grey in colour, and had the capacity to become invisible for
short periods if necessary. Along the back of the vessel sat two rows of
missiles, each with the capacity to fire sixty rounds at a time. On the
forepart, the apex of the pyramid was the laser assembly, which was
used for much of the fighting.
As Nubon demonstrated to Paul and Dean, he said, “It has been a
long time since we needed to use force, our people do not believe in
killing unless it is for protection, and even then, it has to be the last
resort.”
Dean sensed that Nubon didn't really want to believe a war would
start and that somehow, Xiha would leave them alone. He placed an
arm on the thin alien's shoulder and said, “It is better to be safe than
sorry, my friend.”
Paul was like a child with a new toy as he sat at the controls of the
fighter, listening excitedly as Nubon gave instructions. “This red button
under the panel is for the invisible shield barrier, you understand it can
only be used for about two minutes of your time, and remember, you
will be invisible even to your own people, think before you use it.”
Nubon explained that even though the flying operations were the
same as the shuttles, the computers were more delicate and sensitive,
giving a much quicker response to the controls. In no time at all, Paul
and Dean knew they could handle the fighters and exclaimed to Nubon,
“So, when do we get off the ground and into space for a look?”
Nubon walked over to the two Estibulians who were checking other
fighters, spoke to them and returned and said, “Early tomorrow, six of
our fighters are going on a test run around Estibulos, you are welcome
to join them.”
Dean and Paul slipped silently into the light silver suits, then zipped
up their boots. In less than one hour, they would be space bound. Dou
Setta and Nubon looked on proudly as their human friends, each
314
accompanied by a senior craft operator, confidently walked up the steps
of their fighters, then waved farewell. The huge dome canopy
separated, exposing a clear blue sky, which beckoned the new explorers,
it was time for lift off.
As they departed Estibulos' stratosphere, the six small fighters eased
back into the deep silence of velvet space. The alien accompanying
Dean projected his thoughts. “You are in control of this ship, I am
merely an observer or adviser.”
Dean switched on the voice communicator and spoke to Paul. “How's
it going there buddy?” The answer came back loud and clear.
“Great, they're much lighter to handle than I expected.”
During the course of their journey around Estibulos, the fighters
engaged in simulated defence and attack procedures, whilst testing their
missiles and lasers.
Meanwhile, back on Estibulos, Bethany was anxiously awaiting
Paul's return. Dou Setta caught up with her as she was nervously pacing
up and down outside the fighter base. “Calm down young lady, they will
be back soon. I've been in contact with Dean and they will be landing
any moment now.”
Just as the six fighters started to enter the planet's atmosphere, their
scanners picked up several small objects to their rear. Instantly, Dean
knew they were Xiha's fighters. The voice of one of their pilots flashed
through his communication panel. “Number five and myself will circle
back and find out what our visitors are doing. The rest of you must
return to Estibulos, we will keep in contact.”
Dean and Paul both wanted to go back and intercept as well, but
Nubon had stressed that all orders from fighter six were to be obeyed
without question. Reluctantly, the other four fighters continued
homeward.
Bethany squeezed Dou Setta's tiny hand with relief as finally Paul
and Dean landed, followed by two other fighters. Everyone was
anxious to hear from fighters five and six.
Dou Setta climbed aboard Dean's fighter and listened to the
communications receiver. “Hello Estibulos we have lost our nosy
visitors, no sign of them on the tracker. We will cruise around here for
a while, then return home.”
Dean didn't have a good feeling about the message and warned Dou
Setta. “Those visitors were Xiha's fighters, he has sent them ahead to
315
see what we are doing. Xiha has hundreds of fighters and our air space
is empty now, unprotected. He is going to attack soon and we have to
get back up there now!”
Dean could feel a cold sweat running down his back and his psychic
mind was jumping with panic as he almost shook Dou Setta. Nubon ran
over shouting orders for the fighters to return to space, he had received a
message of incoming craft over one of their other cities.
Paul just had time to kiss Bethany goodbye before he started
preparations for take-off again; and this time he knew they would have
one hell of a fight on their hands.
All over the planet, the alert signals for attack were being
transmitted. In other cities, fighters were being dispatched to guard the
air space over their populations. Thousands of Estibulians were
preparing to take shelter underground in specially designed structures.
The reality that Xiha would attack soon swept the planet.
Two Karas guided Bethany back to the main auditorium where huge
underground sections could hold up to twenty thousand inhabitants.
This area, the Seat of Order and Harmoni's pyramid, was protected by
the force field.
Dou Setta and Nubon prepared to send one of their huge mother
ships to back up the fighters. Later, they planned to follow in their craft
to rendezvous. Within the time of several earth hours, most of
Estibulos' defence force was airborne and heading for the outer limits of
space.
Xiha hastily fastened the buttons on his battle jacket and adjusted the
web belt around his middle. He grabbed a cloth and frantically polished
the dusty buttons and medals from the Earth World War Two Army
jacket. This jacket meant a great deal to him, after all, it had belonged
to a young earthling soldier, his first abductee who had put up a great
fight before being transformed into a grey android.
As much as Xiha wanted to dwell on that pleasurable time, he was
soon thrown back into the present situation. The scanner picked up
hundreds of incoming fighters heading towards them from Estibulos.
The fight was about to commence.
Dou Setta picked up Xiha's ship, just as it dispensed hundreds of
fighters. He gave the orders for his craft to proceed with caution, then
316
spoke with authority over the transceiver to Paul and Dean: “You two
must stay at the rear of the force, we cannot afford to lose you!”
As Xiha's ship edged closer to Dou Setta's, the visual screen lit up
and Xiha's ugly face appeared snarling at his opponent. “Hello my little
Estibulian, I have waited so long for this time, when I have finished with
you lot, the light of Harmoni will be gone forever, hisss, hisss....”
Dou Setta quickly switched off the screen and locked it shut. The
thought of any physical contact with the vile, scaly creature made him
nauseated.
Dean and Paul watched from the rear of the group as the onslaught
began. Hundreds of Xiha's small black oblong shaped fighters bore
down upon them, darting everywhere, like black bullets from a machine
gun. Blue laser beams and missiles were flying in all directions, hitting
many craft and exploding them into millions of pieces! Dean's heart
was pounding and his pulse raced as the assault came closer and closer.
Paul's eyes were wide in disbelief; it looked to him like a monstrous star
wars computer game. He yelled into his communicator to Dean: “What
in the fuck are we going to do, we can't just sit back here?!”
The situation rectified itself quickly, as suddenly, several of Xiha's
fighters came in close and attacked the two craft just in front of Dean.
Dean could hear the eerie harmonics of phased energy rip through space
as the two were torn apart. Dean switched on his rear projectiles and
oped his laser cover, then quickly threw the controls into manual. He
was going to fight like a human, and these bastards were not going to
escape!
In what seemed like a split second, the laser from Dean's fighter had
blown two of the enemy into oblivion. Paul saw three more coming and
thrust the control into descent and swung a right circle until he was over
the top of the enemy. Without thinking, he held his craft upright at a
thirty degree angle and let fly with all the missile power he had. One by
one, like a domino effect, he blew Xiha's fighters away.
When Paul finally righted his fighter, he noticed Dean was off and
into the thick of the fighting.
Dou setta checked the incoming data. He had lost thirty eight of his
fighters and it appeared as if Xiha had suffered a similar loss. He had a
horrible feeling that no one was going to win this war.
317
Xiha gave the order to one of his fighters: “Take three others with
you, circle back and do some bloody damage on Pilot, it's becoming
boring up here!”
Dean glanced at the scanner screen for just a moment, just long
enough to notice four of Xiha's fighters fall back from the main group as
if to return to their mother ship. His gut feeling said that wasn't where
they were headed. He yelled to Paul over the communicator: “Drop
down, follow me!”
Thousands of kilometres below the war in space, the city of Pilot was
in chaos. The main power sensors, which activated the force field
shield over the inner city had malfunctioned!
Numerous Karas rushed around trying to correct the malfunction,
with no success.
Bethany had been underground, trying her best to pacify many of the
young females who had never experienced fear before. Now, she left
them huddled together, her instincts telling her danger was very close.
She ran up the passageway to the entrance above the main auditorium
and suddenly heard the deafening sounds of explosions from above. As
she raced towards the daylight, Bethany realised there was no protection
screen above the auditorium. “Oh shit! What's happened??” she
screamed out loud. Then a cold fear hit her - Pilot was under attack!
Out in the open now, she was faced with the horrific scene of missiles
exploding all around her. Huge black ash clouds were swimming
against the blue sky.
Karas were running everywhere shrieking like piglets caught in a
vice. “What in the bloody hell happened to the force field screen?” she
cried, running frantically to where the controls were housed. Just as she
joined the Karas at the controls, Bethany looked skywards. Relief
covered her dishevelled face as the screen finally started to close.
Dean knew the moment the fighters dropped out of formation their
intention was to attack Pilot. As soon as they entered Estibulos'
atmosphere, Dean knew the city had been hit. Clouds of black smoke
and grey ash swirled up towards them as they tried frantically to
intercept the enemy craft. Paul was fighting mad with rage as he
screamed through the communicator: “I'm going to turn those shit faces
into minute particles!”
Dean yelled back, “Let's help them do an old fashioned kamikaze
into each other, take my lead buddy!”
318
Within minutes, Xiha's fighters were on Dean and Paul's tails, just as
they wanted. Suddenly, Dean turned in a semi circle and Paul did the
same the opposite way. As they neared each other, both quickly pushed
their controls into climb at a sharp perpendicular. Instantly the fighters
collided and blew apart into thousands of pieces. “Got ya shit face!”
screamed Paul, as he now went after the other two.
Xiha had been seething with pleasure while he watched the city of
Pilot being destroyed. Now, he watched the scanner in horror as two of
his fighters were destroyed, he zoomed in close and anger turned to
disbelief as the remaining two fighters were also blown into oblivion.
Pressing the infra red scan button to close up on Dou Setta's fighters,
Xiha screamed at the images: “They're not Estibulians! There are two
humans flying those craft! I want them alive!”
Suddenly, the data came back that they had lost over fifty fighters
and couldn't afford to lose any more. Xiha was beside himself as he
assessed the damage with seeping anger boiling in his yellow veins. He
turned to his comrade. “Doldran, I want you to take three of our best
Sepians, circle back around Estibulos and capture Harmoni from her
pyramid. I will retreat slowly, keeping the fighters occupied a little
longer up here. We will get our revenge on the humans later.”
Dou Setta watched with relief and satisfaction as his enemy's mother
ship changed course and retreated with about half of their fighters
alongside. The remaining fighters continued to battle on; the assault in
space was finally breaking up and it looked as if the Estibulians had
won the first round.
Dean and Paul were the first to return to Pilot, followed by a dozen
other fighter craft, then, close behind came Dou Setta. The remaining
fighters were to stay in space to patrol the planet in case of further
attack.
The huge black smoke clouds were now just pale light grey ash
particles fading into the air, as Dean eased his craft down for landing.
Most of the damage seemed to be on the outskirts of the city, though
now, as the force field opened, Paul and Dean noticed some damage
within the central area. Quickly disembarking, they were greeted by
many distressed Karas informing them of the damage and the problems
with the force field closing. “Where's Bethany? Is she OK?” Paul
yelled to a Kara. “Your lady is safe, she is in the pyramid with
Harmoni,” was the reply.
319
Dou Setta's ship landed and everyone headed towards the door,
which was opening. Nubon embraced his human friends, relieved they
had survived the battle.
“I must say, with only one day training, you two certainly knew how
to handle the fighters up there, I noticed some tricky manoeuvres,” he
said.
Dean and Paul felt pleased with themselves, although they knew that
the battle had only just begun.
Back inside the main auditorium, Dou Setta was faced with the
devastation caused by Xiha's fighters. A Kara explained that if the force
field hadn't closed when it did, the damage would have been much
worse.
“We can repair what has been destroyed and only ten Estibulians
have lost their lives in this area,” he said.
Dou Setta ordered his Karas to first concentrate on assisting those
who had suffered outside the central area, then to report to him in three
hundred and fifty difons. A meeting would be held in nine hundred
difons at the Seat of Order, one of the few places with no damage.
Immediately, Paul's thoughts crossed to Bethany, as did Dean's to
Harmoni.
Nubon realised their concerns and said, “The pyramid was
untouched. I'm sure Bethany and Harmoni are anxious to see you both.
We don't require your assistance here at the moment and will see you
later at the Seat of Order.”
As they left and made their way in the direction of Harmoni's
pyramid, Dean had a psychic flash that Harmoni was in danger and that
the enemy was close by. As they made their way around smashed
buildings and smouldering rubble, Dean broke into a run, yelling to
Paul, “Come on! Something is wrong!”
Doldran had silently landed his small craft a safe distance from the
pyramid, instructing one of the Sepians to wait for their return and to
keep an eye out for visitors.
The front and rear of Harmoni's pyramid seemed the same, with the
front entrance door only visible to Estibulians and only able to be
opened with a special crystal key. Inside, Harmoni knew there were
several Sepians surrounding her home. She grabbed Bethany by the
hand and led her into the central chamber, then locked the door. They
were safe.
320
Paul saw them first and crouched down behind a wall of broken
crystal. “Have you ever seen anything uglier than that?” he whispered
to Dean, as they watched the enemy looking over the pyramid. The
larger of the three was giving instructions to the other two. He was a
creature of around six and a half feet tall, with dark grey scaly skin, a
long neck and hideous head that held a pair of small yellow eyes and a
large ferocious mouth. On his backside, there appeared a thin tail.
Around his middle, he wore a wide belt, which held two weapons. As
he turned around, Paul gasped under his breath at the sight of his thick
long male organ hanging freely. The other two wore short metal-like
pants and seemed less repulsive.
Dean whispered: “I'm going to circle around the back of the pyramid
and take care of those two, can you handle Mr. Universe at the front?”
Paul checked his phaser gun (the most powerful gun the Estibulians
possessed, even though they never used them) and grinned at Dean,
answering: “Piece of cake buddy!”
Paul waited until Dean had circled around behind the rubble and
emerged at the rear of the pyramid. Slowly and carefully, he made his
way closer to the enemy. The alien creature was sliding his scaly hands
over the entrance, searching for a distortion in the surface, which would
mean an opening. Paul crept up behind him, phaser gun held firmly in
his hands. Suddenly, the creature swung around and, in a split second
had thrown the phaser from Paul's grip.
Paul yelled: “Fuck! You fucking bastard!” as his weapon flew across
the ground. The revolting creature stood before him, a hissing sound
coming from a large mouth filled with slimy sharp teeth. Yellow eyes
glared at him with seething hate. Paul didn't hesitate; he wasn't a top
black belt for nothing.
Jumping in the air, he let fly with a forceful high karate kick to
Doldran's head. The alien was stunned. Then Paul let fly with another
kick and another to the head. Doldran hunched over in pain holding his
head and noticing one of his teeth had been knocked out. There was
greenish yellow blood dripping from his mouth.
Meanwhile, to the rear, Dean was fighting a losing battle with the
other two creatures, who had taken his phaser gun and were about to use
it on him. Ilias' thoughts yelled in Dean's head: “Jump up, levitate, you
can do it!” Just as the deadly blue beam was about to penetrate Dean's
chest, he found himself high above his opponents, he had disappeared
321
from their view. As he hovered above, watching them looking around in
disbelief, he suddenly leaned down and forcefully smashed their heads
together. That stunned them long enough for him to grab the phaser and
destroy them in two swift bursts from the weapon.
Several Karas ran towards the pyramid with their phasers held ready,
they were just in time to see Doldran's craft hovering above shoot down
a transporter beam to instantly beam the creature up to safety. In less
than five seconds, they had disappeared.
Paul screamed at the craft as it flashed from sight, “You got away
this time shit face, but we'll meet again soon!”
322
CHAPTER THIRTY ONE
Interplanetary war!
Harmoni felt shaken and distressed over the attempt on her life.
Never before had she known fear for her safety and that of her people.
Spiritually, she had always felt protected, but now, she felt vulnerable
and frightened. Dean took her by the hand and said, “Please don't
worry, we can protect you. Right now, I sense Xiha will return to
Estibulos and do more damage, you will be safer away from here,
maybe on Tyfin.”
Just then, one of the Karas informed Dean that the meeting would
commence shortly, and that six Karas would stay in the pyramid with
Harmoni and Bethany. Many other Karas would guard the outside. Paul
hugged Bethany tightly, reassuring her that she would be fine.
In the Seat of Order room, the meeting started with the appraisal of
damage and lost lives on the planet. One of the chief Karas reported
from the other cities that damage overall was minimal with the total loss
of life being sixty-five. Whereas in Pilot, the outskirts of the city
suffered most with more than one thousand eight hundred Estibulians
dead and two hundred and sixty wounded. It was estimated to take two
months to clean up and repair the cities. Paul tapped Dean on the
shoulder and whispered, “On Earth, it would take many years to repair
this kind of damage.”
Sometime later, the seriousness of the attempted capture of their
spiritual leader was discussed. Paul and Dean were applauded for their
bravery in defeating the Sepians. Dou Setta said, “Your quick thinking
and brave fighting saved our precious Harmoni. We cannot thank you
enough, my friends.
Dean stood tall and spoke to the meeting.
323
“I feel that the Sepians will try to abduct her again; next time, we
may not be so lucky. I sense that Xiha will attack Pilot again and this
time, he will find a way to destroy the pyramid and Harmoni. I would
like your approval to take Harmoni to a safer planet, maybe Tyfin.”
Several of the Karas nodded in approval, whilst others issued
thoughts of uncertainty. Dou Setta and Nubon had their heads bent
telepathically whilst considering the situation. Psychically, Dean could
hear Harmoni's thoughts filtering into his mind. She didn't want to go to
Tyfin; she wanted instead to travel to Trusion.
Dou Setta addressed the meeting.
“There is safe sanctuary in a remote mountain area on the Western
side of Tyfin...”. Before Dou Setta finished, Dean interrupted with a
sudden flash of the future. “No, no! Xiha is going to attack Tyfin and
he knows about this sanctuary, we must not take her there!” Dean's
pulse was racing, he could see a vision of Xiha's assault on Tyfin and
the sanctuary being destroyed.
Nubon walked over to his Earth friend and placed a calm hand on
Dean's shoulder, saying, “I don't doubt what you sense, but I feel we
should ask Harmoni where she wants to go.” Agreement was reached
on that decision and the meeting came to a close.
Harmoni knew the only safe planet for her in the Galaxy was Trusion
and somehow, Dou Setta sensed what her answer was going to be. She
said, “I can telepathically communicate with one of the Priests on
Trusion, I will inform him of our arrival and the necessity to keep this
decision to ourselves for fear of Xiha finding out our plans.” The
beautiful girl turned to Dean and Paul, whilst holding Bethany's hand.
“I like the company of Bethany, may she come with me?” she asked.
Paul smiled and answered, “Fine by me, it's up to you babe.”
It was decided that Dean and Paul, accompanied by two Karas would
take Harmoni and Bethany to Trusion as soon as possible. As the
climate there was well below zero most of the time, heavy fur garments
had to be taken. The freezing temperature on Trusion was the reason
Xiha hated the place and usually left the inhabitants alone.
Once the females were safely settled on Trusion, the two Karas
would remain with them. Dean and Paul would return to Estibulos and
prepare for the likely attack both there and on Tyfin.
324
The day of their departure dawned and already the central area of
Pilot was starting to look reasonably normal. Gone were the piles of
scattered crystal and broken walls. Cleaning up was relatively easy for
the hundreds of Estibulians who worked day and night. The re-building
on the outskirts of the city would take much longer, though the
estimated time of two months seemed impossible to the humans.
Two Karas walked either side of Harmoni, while Dean, Paul and
Bethany followed close behind. Dou Setta and Nubon were already
waiting at the departure area when they arrived laden with bags of warm
clothing. Bethany had insisted on bringing Paul's CD player and half a
dozen paperback books, together with a game of backgammon, which
she was intent on teaching Harmoni to play.
It was decided that two fighters would be taken to Trusion and when
Dean and Paul returned to Estibulos, the remaining craft would stay
with the Karas. When Xiha was defeated and it was considered safe,
the Karas would bring Harmoni and Bethany back home.
While Dou Setta spoke to Paul and Dean, Nubon pulled Bethany
aside and handed her a small laser pistol and a thin flat silver
instrument. “Take these, the pistol is light and easy to use, keep it in
your belt at all times. The instrument is called a fabit and it will open
any door, enclosure or lock,” Nubon said, turning it over and showing a
tiny button on the tip.
He pressed it and a fine red light beamed out “That is a high powered
infra red ray which can cut or melt through any material. The fabit is
indispensable, keep it safely hidden in your boots,” Nubon concluded.
Bethany looked at him with confidence in her eyes and said, “No one
will hurt Harmoni or myself, I will see to that!”
The journey to Trusion took about five and a half earth hours or
three hundred difons. Time went slowly, as with the limited space in the
fighter, one could only sit. Bethany spent most of this time kissing and
cuddling Paul, knowing it would be at least a month before they were
together again. Dean's mind drifted back to earth and Kavita; he
wondered what she was doing right now. Suddenly, from behind those
thoughts, came the image of Anna singing to him. He could see her
lovely face and hear the words to the song, 'Hold me Now' and it
touched his soul with a great sadness.
325
The planet of Trusion eventually came into view on the projection
screen as a small blue grey circle the size of Estibulos. The Kara on the
other craft spoke through the communicator, “The Northern and
Southern parts of Trusion are mountains of ice and snow. It is the
central plateau where most of the population lives. We will land in a
remote area North West of the main metropolis, follow me.”
As the images of a terrain, which was mainly ice and snow, loomed
before them, Bethany snuggled in close to Paul, sensing the cold
already. “Hey babe, it's not going to be that bad, I've been told they
have crystal heating!” Paul declared.
From out of the white void, small patches of brown and green came
into view, tucked between snow capped mountains, then a wild barren
plain and finally the large metropolis. Within a few minutes of circling
the outskirts of the city, the Kara started his descent. Cautiously, Dean
followed, surveying the strange terrain.
As they landed, the faint outline of a large building could be seen
peeking through a cloud of white mist. “That must be the monastery
Dou Setta mentioned,” said Dean.
The Kara knew Dean's thoughts and replied, “It is the residence of
Trusion's Higher Ones, they call it a Konsidium.”
From out of the white mist, a long snake-like vehicle slid across the
ground towards their craft. The welcoming party had arrived.
Bethany zipped up her heavy jacket and cautiously followed Paul
and Dean from their ship, together with the Karas and Harmoni. From
out of the transparent vehicle stepped two beings who telepathically
welcomed them to Trusion.
They stood about five feet tall, with large heads and almond shaped
eyes and were very similar to the Estibulians except their skin was grey
and their build somewhat larger. Bethany stood shivering at the thought
that these beings only wore fine silk-like garments. She blurted out:
“Aren't you people cold?”
Harmoni laughed and held Bethany's hand, saying, “The Trusions
don't feel any difference in outside temperatures, their body heat always
stays the same.”
“You mean they are phycolothermic, cold blooded?” asked Paul.
“I have no knowledge of that human word, but, yes, their blood
temperature does not change,” Harmoni replied.
326
As they sat one behind the other, Dean touched the strange clear
perspex like matter, which covered the vehicle. He jumped, it was soft,
like plastic. They were actually sitting in a long bubble that slid over
the ground. “How amazing!” he thought.
The High Priest of the Konsidium was called Emok. He was dressed
in a long flowing gown of deep purple and welcomed Harmoni and the
strangers from Earth. First, he spoke in a strange garbled language to
the Karas, then he spoke telepathically in English to Dean. “On your
planet, you must be similar to me, a being of higher knowledge, I can
see your astral body. Welcome, my friend.”
Once inside the Konsidium, Bethany had to remove her heavy jacket.
The temperature was like a warm spring day. Emok led them to a large
circular room where about fifty beings sat at long tables eating and
drinking. “This is our eating chamber, please will you join us?” Emok
said in English.
Everyone was famished after eating only a few handfuls of nuts in
the past six hours. Bowls of hot vegetable broth were served,
accompanied by slices of thin bread and warm, soft cheese. Large
goblets of berry juice that tasted like red wine followed this. Paul
squeezed Bethany's hand and said: “I like it here, I am sure you and
Harmoni will enjoy your stay, babe.”
Dean had a good feeling about the place the moment they landed.
“There is no danger here, they will be safe,” he thought.
A long way from Trusion on the planet Sepia, Xiha was planning the
next battle with the little Estibulians and this time, he was determined to
win. Doldran's mouth was still paining from when Paul had kicked his
tooth out, an experience he had never thought possible. Xiha growled at
his companion. “You deserved to lose that tooth you idiot, how could
you let the humans get away? We are far more superior than them!”
Doldran hissed through the sore gap in his mouth and replied, “That
human had fire in his eyes and power in his body, very different from
the ones on Greygate.” Xiha knew a time would come when he had
those three humans exactly where he wanted them, but, right now, a war
had to be won.
Several days later, Xiha's strategy emerged. The Sepians would
attack Tyfin with two third of their forces, they would take the Tyfins
by surprise. Xiha knew the moment he attacked Tyfin, Dou Setta would
327
come to their rescue. Whilst this battle was raging, the other third of
Xiha's forces would attack Estibulos and over throw the city of Pilot.
“This time, Harmoni won't be protected, I want her damn pyramid
blown into pieces, you hear?!” Xiha screamed at Doldran.
After only a few days at the Konsidium, it was quite clear that
Harmoni and Bethany loved the place, whilst feeling safe and protected.
Bethany had already made friends with several of the younger priests
and was happily teaching them the game of backgammon. Harmoni was
given a small private chamber where she would sit for hours in silent
meditation, this was pleasing to her after the horrific intrusion into her
previously peaceful existence.
On the sixth day of their visit, Paul and Dean knew it was time for
them to return to Estibulous. Bidding farewell to everyone, Paul
squeezed Bethany tight and said, “It may be a month or more before I
see you babe, take care, I love you.”
As they emerged from Trusion's atmosphere and into space, an
urgent message from Dou Setta came from the voice transponder.
“Dean, Tyfin is under attack from Xiha, please return as quickly as
possible!”
“We're on our way, hang in there!” Dean replied.
The Tyfins were not prepared for Xiha's sudden onslaught. The
Sepians threw all their missile power into the cities and villages, wiping
out thousands of peaceful, unsuspecting beings, without a second
thought that they couldn't fight back.
It was several hours before Dou Setta's fighters arrived in the air
above the planet. In that short time, the Sepians had caused devastating
damage, the planet looked like it had been hit by ten atomic bombs!
Only a handful of Tyfin's fighter craft had managed to become airborne
when the attack had begun. Now, they were waging a losing space
battle with the enemy.
Xiha growled with glee as he watched the huge black clouds of death
fly into the atmosphere.
“See Doldran, this is how you do it! Hit them when they don't stand
a chance. Keep a close eye out for Estibulian craft, Dou Setta should be
here any moment now!”
Nubon looked horrified at the destruction caused by Xiha and yelled
his orders to his fighters.
“Give those bastards all you've got, I want this war won now!”
328
Dou Setta was fighting mad, he never gave his own planet a second
thought and had brought most of his fighters to Tyfin.
Doldran hissed with excitement, noticing the strong show of force
from Dou Setta as they started their battle. “You were right Xiha, the
little Estibulian has brought all his fighters.”
Dou Setta watched from the Mother Ship while hundreds of laser
beams and missiles flew at each of the opposing sides with such ferocity
that it was almost impossible to tell which craft were being hit. The
projector screen lit up like a thousand stars exploding all over the sky.
Gradually, the data came in, Xiha had lost almost twice as many fighters
as them, the Estibulians were winning.
Dean and Paul could see the massive war in space hundred of
kilometres before they neared Tyfin. Dean spoke to Dou Setta on the
Mother Ship: “We're back, what's the situation, what are your orders?”
“Stay around the edge of the force, we have given him 'merry hell' in
the past few hours, as you humans would say. It looks like we are
winning, glad to have you back Dean!”
Paul zoomed the images of Tyfin up close and gasped in shock. “Oh
God Dean, that bastard has made mince meat out of that planet, the
damage looks horrific!”
Dean wasn't listening, he was making his own assessment of the
situation. Checking the scanner data, he realised Xiha was fighting with
only about two thirds of his forces, compared to Dou Setta's full
capacity. It didn't seem to worry Xiha that he was losing, there was no
sign of retreat, he was keeping the battle going, even though he knew he
couldn't win.
Dean had a premonition to return to Estibulos right away. He
switched on the transponder to the Mother Ship again. “Dou Setta, I am
returning to Estibulos, please give me six fighters for back up, I have a
bad feeling about Pilot.”
The whole time Xiha was engaging his war with Dou Setta above
Tyfin, Sepian fighters had landed unnoticed on Estibulos. After
walking the distance from where they had landed, the forces were now
approaching the Western section of Pilot, heavily armed and ready for
combat. One of the Sepians gave the orders to several creatures to find
Harmoni's pyramid, install destructive devices around the perimeter and
then wait for the order to activate.
329
The main sensors surrounding the huge city sounded the alarm of the
invading enemy. Instantly, thousands of Karas took their phasers and
positioned themselves for the terrible assault of Sepians approaching.
The central area was in chaos as thousands of young Estibulians
scrambled to safety in their sections below, whilst others decided to stay
on the surface and fight.
Unfortunately, the forcefield screen was only protection from air
attack, not attacks from ground forces.
The journey back to Estibulos seemed to take forever, as Dean and
Paul anxiously glared at the projection screen for the first sign of the
planet. “What if we are too late and Xiha's forces have been attacking
Pilot for the whole time the war has been going?” yelled Paul.
Dean didn't want to consider that scenario, it was too painful to
contemplate. “We'll find out soon enough and we will handle it buddy,
OK?” he answered.
On the normally peaceful planet of Estibulos, Karas and Sepians
were engaging in a bloody battle. Even though the Estibulians
outnumbered the Sepians, the small aliens were no match for the over
six feet tall vile creatures. Fierce blue lights of phased energy flew in
all directions from either side of the forces as beings against creatures
fought for their survival.
Hundreds of Karas were swept by the wayside as the advancing
Sepians bore down upon the main entrance. All around the city,
Estibulians were screaming and running for cover; a fear like they had
never known consumed their delicate bodies.
Paul heaved a sigh of relief as Estibulos finally came into view on
the projector screen. Dean scanned the blue emptiness of space for
signs of Xiha's fighter craft. There was nothing. He zoomed in closer as
the tracker kept scanning the empty void. “They have to be out there
somewhere!” Dean yelled as he watched the negative data keep
appearing on screen. Other craft also reported no sighting of any
fighters.
“We will have to wait until we get closer, they must be in Estibulos'
atmosphere,” said Paul. “Or on the ground,” added Dean in a worried
voice.
Somehow the Karas had managed to hold the Sepians back from the
main entrance, just long enough for more reinforcements from other
cities to arrive and assist. Unfortunately, several Sepians had penetrated
330
the wall close to Harmoni's pyramid and now the scaly creatures had
successfully planted their devices.
Splicing through Estibulos' atmosphere, Dean knew now that the
fight had been raging on land and he also knew that hundreds of Karas
were dead. The city of Pilot loomed up on the screen and Dean could
see the forcefield hadn't been closed. Then he realised it wouldn't be
closed as the fighting was on the ground. There were no massive black
clouds drifting through the air as before, as this appeared to be hand to
hand combat.
Suddenly, a huge explosion blasted through the atmosphere, coming
from the central area in Pilot. A huge white gas cloud belched out
millions of transparent spheres of crystal, tinged with blue.
“Oh my God! No! That's Harmoni's pyramid!” Dean cried, his hands
starting to shake on the controls. Paul was counting their blessings that
Bethany and Harmoni were safe on Trusion, and not in the pyramid.
They both silently prayed for the lost lives of those innocent Estibulians
who would have perished.
Dean was in charge of this mission and he gave the orders to two of
the fighters to skirt the far perimeters of Pilot to locate the enemy's craft.
“They must have landed somewhere, find them and blast those
fighter craft to Kingdom Come, in other words, outer space!” Dean
cleared his emotion filled throat and continued, “The rest of us will land
in the central base and say a prayer that we all make it OK!”
Many of the Sepians saw the four fighters approach for landing.
“More reinforcements,” they thought, as heavy fighting continued.
Several moments later, a massive explosion was seen behind the far
hills, then another and another. The enemy turned around and saw
bright orange and black smoke clouds coming from the direction they
had landed.
As two Estibulian fighters now appeared from behind the hills, every
Sepian knew their own fighters had been destroyed.
Dean and Paul jumped from the steps and, followed by the other
Karas, they raced towards the main auditorium with phasers held at the
ready. Hundreds of Estibulians were still running wildly around the city,
screaming as they fled for cover. Several Sepians were doing battle
with Karas not far from the ruins of the once magnificent Pyramid of
Harmoni and it looked like the vile creatures were winning.
331
Dean shouted to the Karas behind him: “You all continue onto the
main entrance, we'll take care of that lot over there!” Dean and Paul
circled around the rubble and came out behind the enemy. They noticed
the lifeless burnt bodies of many Karas, scattered through the crystal
ruins, and their blood boiled with revenge.
Sizing up the situation, there seemed to be about eight Karas to six
Sepians. The Karas were hiding behind some rubble, frantically
engaging their phasers in an attempt to hit the scaly creatures who were
just toying with them. The situation changed very quickly, when
suddenly deadly blue rays pierced through the backs of the Sepians. One
by one, they fell to the ground as the angry earthlings fired with the
strength of ten Sepians. The young Karas came out from where they
were hiding and shouted with victory, thanking their earth friends.
Dean didn't have time to dwell on the empty feeling he had inside
when he looked with disbelief at the shell of Harmoni's pyramid. A
small tear trickled down his cheek, as he and Paul ran towards the
entrance.
Meanwhile, outside where the main forces were in combat, the two
fighters had managed to wipe out the rear section of the Sepian force.
When Dean and Paul arrived with the other Karas, it looked like the
Estibulians had won. Only a handful of creatures were still in combat,
whilst most were retreating towards the far hills. Paul's heart sank as he
surveyed the ocean of burnt bodies around him. The Estibulians had
suffered badly.
He screamed in wild anger to the Karas: “Don't let any of those
fucking shit faces get away! After them, come on!” Paul ran wildly,
firing his phaser, wiping out every Sepian who crossed his path. Dean
followed close, picking off the ones Paul missed. The retreating enemy
was systematically wiped out with the unexpected charge of all the
Karas. In no time at all, the war was over and not one Sepian remained
alive to tell the story.
Dean sunk down to his knees, his body was exhausted, his mind
blurred with images of the shocking battle and the lost lives. He cried
out loud: “Oh God, how could I have killed so many creatures?”
Paul knelt down beside him and said, “Those things don't have souls
or feelings. It was either them or us, come on buddy, it will be OK, we
did the right thing.”
332
Dou Setta and Nubon watched with relieved satisfaction as the
remaining twelve fighters from Xiha's hundreds cautiously returned to
their Mother Ship. The war was over and the Estibulians had won.
Dou Setta gave the command for several of his fighters to remain
patrolling in space whilst he landed the Mother Ship on Tyfin to assist
their friends.
Xiha screamed a high-pitched agonising scream, filled with despair
and anger because he had lost. Doldran sat silent with hunched
shoulders, his blood was boiling with revenge, and he couldn't believe
they had been beaten. Doldran's yellow eyes were burning with hate as
he yelled to Xiha: “It was those two humans who caused all this. The
stupid Estibulians couldn't have won without their help.”
Xiha looked at his companion and said: “We may have lost most our
forces, but we managed to destroy Harmoni and her pyramid. We don't
need Estibulos or Tyfin, we have Knod and Greygate and that's where I
want to go right now, to appease my anger and frustration!”
333
CHAPTER THIRTY TWO
Earth rejuvenated
Fifty-five light years away, on the rejuvenated planet Earth, the past
six years had been filled with wonderful accomplishments for mankind.
Globally, the climate had warmed to a steady sixteen to twenty eight
degrees celsius, apart from the countries of Austria and Tibet (New
India) where it ranged from zero to ten degrees.
Throughout the new Earth, there was an abundance of good rain,
which made the usual desert areas thrive with lush vegetation. Nowhere
did farmers experience droughts or floods and universally the land
thrived. The oceans and rivers held plentiful fish life and only now,
after many years as vegetarians, the people were starting to acquire the
taste for seafood again. Red meat was eaten nowhere on the planet.
Australian Governor Albert Braithwaite had changed the name of the
newly discovered country, Newland, to New England, to the delight of
Edward Campbell, the former Prime Minister of England. A meeting of
the government advisers was held and promptly Edward Campbell
declared that William should now be Governor of New England.
William's younger brother Harry was duly sworn in as deputy Governor.
New England was now a thriving island with more than sixteen
thousand people taking up residence. Out of the population of sixteen
thousand, only five hundred were from the original British survivors
from the Old Country.
In the Aegean Sea, the magnificent island of Atlantis had returned to
its former beauty. It was now a lush fertile country of majestic
mountains, rolling hills and splendid waterfalls. The descendants from
the one hundred or so Santorini survivors now totalled two hundred and
334
ten. Many other Greek families from around the globe had moved to
Atlantis and farmed the rich land and fished the now abundant oceans.
The huge world communications base was operating successfully
with the aliens training many selected young humans in their advanced
technology. Peace and harmony flowed among every country on earth,
nowhere was mankind cruel or hateful to each other. Small industries
had started up again amongst the farming communities. In Katoomba,
the Krishna's farming skills and food preparation brought new and
innovative ways to harvest and preserve fruits and vegetables. One of
their most popular creations was the Krishna fruit jellies. These were
made from minced fruit and honey, then packed in a tree bark container
and distributed free to various settlements around the country.
Leeanne went to the cupboard and took out the large box of fruit
jellies, which Father Britton had sent her. The twins Mukunda and
Sanjay ran up close beside her, declaring: “Nanna, Nanna, please can
we have some jellies?” Leeanne smiled at her grandsons who were so
much like their mother, yet had their father's dark green eyes. She
answered, “Of course you can, come out on the lounge and we can each
have four different colours.”
Makunda noticed the old photo albums beside the table and said
excitedly, “Can we look at the photos of Daddy again?”
The previous night, Leeanne had sat on the lounge with Gordon,
sharing a bottle of wine and reminiscing about times in the old world.
She had cried with memories of Dean, and feared he may never return.
Now, she knew for the sake of his sons, she had to be happy and
positive.
Leeanne picked up the albums and said, “OK, we can have a look
again.” Turning the pages slowly, she told a story of each photo of
Dean, when he was a baby; then a toddler and finally, six years old at
school. “In this photo, your daddy is the same age as you, it was his
sixth birthday and yours is next month,” she said.
Sanjay replied excitedly,” Mummy said we are going to have a big
party.” Leeanne smiled, although her heart was breaking with memories
of her son. She held back the tears that wanted to fall and offered the
twins another jelly. As they finally came to the last page, with the
photos of their mother and father looking happy and very much in love,
Sanjay said, “You told us our daddy was a really good man, why did he
have to leave us, Nanna?”
335
That question had been asked by the twins ever since they could
speak, and Kavita had her own way of handling it every time. However,
when it came to Gordon and Leeanne trying to explain the situation,
they had to struggle to hold back their emotions.
Leeanne held their hands and replied, “After your Mummy and
Daddy made you, your Daddy was needed to help friends in a far away
Galaxy, a long, long way from here. He left Earth with his two friends
Bethany and Paul on a huge space ship. Your Daddy promised he
would come back soon and you must believe he will. He loves you very
much.”
Makunda replied, “I thought soon was quickly, why didn't he just say
a long time, Nanna?” Leeanne sighed and answered: “Darling, it's hard
to explain, but time here on Earth is different from where your Daddy is,
just believe he will come back.”
The noise of the front door opening was a welcome relief to
Leeanne. She closed the albums as the twins jumped up, knowing their
mother was home.
Kavita hugged her sons, then handed Leeanne a bunch of flowers she
had picked, saying, “I saw Yianni a while ago, he said he was going to
pop by for dinner tonight.”
Yianni had excelled in the special school, and graduated when he
turned fourteen, which was eight months previous. Most students didn't
complete their studies until they were seventeen or eighteen, but Yianni
had been gifted from the start. Since that time, he had spent six months
on Atlantis studying alien technology, now, he had been home for one
month, helping around The Haven and enjoying farm life.
Like everyone else, Yianni had missed Dean terribly, although
psychically he knew without a doubt that Dean would return. Uncle
Dean was close to him like he had always been and, every now and
again, Yianni would receive a psychic premonition of what was
happening in his Uncle's world. He hadn't told his mother that mostly
the visions were of death and destruction.
A half hour before Leeanne was going to prepare dinner for Gordon,
Kavita and the twins, Yianni walked through the door, holding Alpha by
the hand and followed by Yvonne and Nathan.
“Hi Grandma! How's everything?” he said. Leeanne hugged Yianni.
336
“I thought you were coming later, this is a nice surprise,” she said,
glancing at Nathan and Yvonne, then giving Alpha a soft kiss on the
cheek.
“Why don't you all stay for dinner? I have plenty,” she declared.
Alpha went looking for the twins to discuss their birthday party. As she
was three years older than the boys, she naturally, wanted to be in
charge.
That evening around the large table, friends and family ate, drank
and laughed, while looking at the positive side of everything and not
dwelling on the fate of Dean, Paul and Bethany.
All through the course of the dinner, Gordon had a feeling that
Yianni had something on his mind and now, when the conversation
turned to Katoomba, Yianni's eyes brightened. “Father Britton told me
that Anna and Steven are engaged and to expect an invitation soon from
Albert and Gail for the wedding,” said Leeanne.
Yvonne added: “We were down there six months ago and I must say
Anna and Steven only had eyes for each other, I think it's wonderful
news.”
Yianni coughed slightly and said, “I am planning to go to Katoomba
myself in a few weeks time. Actually, I would like to stay with Father
Britton and maybe study the ancient Christian scriptures.”
Gordon gave Leeanne a quizzical glance, then said, “Father Britton is
a very special man, I'm sure you will enjoy your time with him Yianni.”
Yianni smiled, he was feeling a strong urge to be with the Priest.
Suddenly, little Makunda said to his mother: “Where did you and
Daddy get married, Mummy?” Kavita felt a lump come to her throat,
she fought to hold her emotions in check and replied, “Darling, your
Daddy left earth before we had a chance to get married. When he
returns, I promise we will all go to Tibet and you and Sanjay can watch
Mummy and Daddy get married.”
Sanjay's eyes brightened and he said: “Tibet is where our other
Nanna is asleep in heaven, can we go and see her too?”
Kavita gave a weak smile; the memory of her mother's death four
years ago was still painful.
Shanti had planned to take the children back to Tibet and live at Sai
Baba's ashram. Unfortunately, she had died before they left.
Gordon and Leeanne took Kavita and all the children back to Tibet
for the cremation, but Kavita's brothers and sisters didn't want to stay,
337
they preferred to live in Australia. During the family's time in Australia,
the children had made many friends with Indian families living not far
from The Haven, and those families had taken the children under their
care like their own. Kavita was pleased with this arrangement, as they
were only several kilometres away and still spent much time together.
Leeanne walked to the kitchen and turned the kettle on for tea, while
Kavita took the twins upstairs to bed. The evening was coming to a
close. Alpha had fallen asleep on the floor and Nathan picked her up. It
was time for them to leave. Yvonne kissed Leeanne goodnight and
whispered: “We all love you very much, you know that?”
Suddenly the room was empty, all except for Yianni and Gordon.
Leeanne couldn't contain herself, she felt tired and worn out and flung
her arms around Gordon and sobbed, “Oh Gordon, I miss Dean so
much, what if something terrible has happened?”
Yianni stood up and embraced his grandmother tenderly, saying,
“Please believe me, I know he alive and he will be back.” Yianni led
her to the lounge while Gordon poured her a calming brandy.
Yianni sat silently holding her for a while, then he took his crystal
elephant from around his neck and placed it in her hands. “Remember
when Uncle Dean gave me this? He said it would always connect us.”
Leeanne remembered the day when Dean returned from India and
Yianni was only five. “They were beautiful memories,” she thought.
Yianni closed his eyes in meditation and let his psychic mind open.
He knew Gordon and Leeanne were doing likewise. Yianni drifted into
the deep blue velvet of space and slowly, images came to his mind. He
could see hundreds of small spacecraft engaged in a war; he could see
flashing blue lights and explosions and huge clouds of black smoke. He
saw several strange looking planets and he could sense Dean, Paul and
Bethany were there, fighting for their lives. All around, he could see
death and destruction. Finally the war was over, and Dean was saying,
“We will be coming home soon.”
Leeanne opened her eyes first and looked at Gordon, who seemed a
little pale. She spoke softly: “Darling, I heard Dean saying to me that he
will be home soon and that he is OK.” Gordon didn't speak, he watched
Yianni's eyes, and, as the young man opened them, their psychic minds
linked and silently both knew that unbelievable pain and suffering had
happened in that far away galaxy.
338
Yianni said: “Dean hasn't returned because his help has been much
needed in other worlds. When the battle between good and evil has
been won, they will return safely. When the time is right, this will
happen. When Dean comes back to earth, he will bring with him a
wondrous, precious gift for our planet.”
339
CHAPTER THIRTY THREE
A shocking discovery
Bethany sat opposite Harmoni playing yet another game of
backgammon. No matter how hard she tried, Harmoni would always
win, and win so easily. Bethany glanced up at the beautiful girl's tightly
closed eyes and thought: “I can't possibly keep playing with you, this is
driving me crazy.”
Harmoni made her move and the game was over almost before it
began. Harmoni knew her friend was bored and unhappy and said:
“Don't worry, Paul will be back soon to see you. I can tell you that the
war on Tyfin is over and the Estibulians have won. Xiha has left the
area and soon it will be safe for us to return, you must have patience,
Bethany.”
Bethany slouched her shoulders despondently and rearranged the
backgammon board again. In the four weeks since arriving on Trusion,
Bethany had not left the Konsidium. Having taught backgammon to
every priest, read her six books, walked around the Konsidium a
hundred times, and listened endlessly to the CDs, she was now bored
out of her wits and feeling very horny. God, she missed Paul and it was
driving her crazy. At least where he was, there was action and
adventure, even if it was life threatening. Anything was better than
wandering around aimlessly with nothing to do except lose at
backgammon.
That night, Bethany couldn't sleep. She tossed and turned, her mind
alight with passionate memories of Paul. Before the first rays of
morning light slipped over the far horizon, Bethany was out of bed,
dressed and ready, her mind made up.
She was leaving!
340
The Konsidium was deserted with all the priests still asleep, when
she silently walked through the main entrance and then onto the
pathway to the landing bay where the fighter craft were kept. The Karas
heard her soft footsteps as she approached the small room where they
slept. “What was she up to,” they thought.
“You shouldn't be wandering around at this early time Bethany, is
anything wrong?” said a Kara, as Bethany sat beside them.
“Please, please, can one of you take me back to Estibulos? I must see
Paul, I can't stay here any longer,” she pleaded.
The Karas glanced at each other and thought, “This is not a good
idea, it is better that you wait.”
Bethany's desperate eyes implored, “The war is over, Xiha has gone,
it is safe. Harmoni told me the danger is over and we have won. Please,
please, just drop me on Estibulos, you can be back before this evening.”
One of the Karas blinked his huge eyes, understanding the love
between the two humans. He said: “Does Harmoni agree that it is safe
for you to leave?”
Bethany hated to lie, but this seemed the only option.
“Yes, yes, it is OK,” she answered.
The Karas were silent for a moment, then one spoke hesitantly.
“I will take you, come, we will leave now.”
As they walked to the fighter craft, he said to his companion:
“Inform Emok and Harmoni of our departure when they awake.”
The Estibulian ship spliced through the dark emptiness of space on
its voyage back to the home planet. Bethany closed her eyes and let her
mind drift off with visions of Paul kissing her tenderly, while the Kara's
mind was concerned that, hopefully, he was doing the right thing.
Suddenly, Bethany's peaceful slumber was broken as the craft was
rolling sideways and shaking and the Kara was yelling. “What in the
hell is happening?” she cried, rubbing her eyes which were now blinded
by a bright blue light.
The projector screen was showing a massive space ship hovering
above them and a blue tractor beam holding their craft in a deadly vice.
The Kara was shaking with fear, as he said: “Oh no!! It looks like a
Sepian Mother Ship!”
Bethany could feel the cold sweat of fear trickle down her back, as
she prayed out loud: “Oh God, please don't let me die, I don't want to
die!”
341
Desperately, the Kara tried to gain control of his craft; even the
invisible shield failed to operate, all systems had shut down. Gradually,
they could feel themselves being pulled into the dark evil domain above.
There was blackness all around when their fighter finally came to a
jolting halt, throwing them forwards from their seats.
Bethany felt for her laser pistol, knowing she would have to use it at
any moment, the Kara did the same. All was quiet, then slowly the
darkness became light, a light filled with hideous creatures walking
around a large circular landing bay scattered with several fighters and
rows of small shuttlecraft.
Suddenly, the doors opened and a deep voice blared at them in the
Estibulian tongue: “Throw your weapons out the door, if you fail to do
this, your fighter will be incinerated immediately!”
The Kara relayed the message to Bethany in English, then threw his
laser out first. Reluctantly, Bethany did the same, thinking to herself
that she didn't need adventure like this, after all!
The vile tall creatures that stood before them hissed like snakes and
looked vaguely alien and mostly reptilian, yet their stature was human.
The Kara said to Bethany: “Meet the Sepians, handsome lot, aren't
they?”
Bethany stood tall, though she was shaking inside and wanted to
throw up. She answered: “Not exactly the type I would like to take
home to meet mother!”
Several of the creatures prodded them on the backs with their
weapons, urging them to follow the ones in front. Bethany moved
reluctantly and mockingly hissed at them defiantly.
“It is better not to antagonise the Sepians Bethany,” whispered the
Kara, knowing only too well the atrocities the creatures were capable of.
After walking up several flights of steps and down a long cold
corridor, they came to an elevator. The Sepians pushed them in head
first with the butts of their weapons. Bethany cried out in pain, as the
creature hit her again on the back of her neck. “Piss off, you jerk!!” she
yelled in anger. A pair on contemptuous yellow eyes glared back at her,
causing Bethany to control the sudden urge she had to fight.
Telepathically, the Kara said to her: “Control yourself, our
superiority over these creatures is our minds, think before you act,
Bethany.”
342
The elevator stopped and the sliding panel opened. Before them
stood several Sepians wearing the same steel plated pants with weapons
held ready. They spoke to each other in a deep garbled tongue, then
proceeded to push them ahead into a small dark room.
A switch was pressed and the room shone in a grey, hazy glow. It
was empty, cold and silent. One of the Sepians closed the door behind
them and spoke in English. “Our leader will call for you shortly, enjoy
your room.”
The Kara immediately started to slide his tiny hands all over the
walls, searching for an impression of an opening. There was none.
Bethany followed, knowing there would be no way out, except the front
door.
A few moments later, the front panel opened and a Sepian prodded
Bethany to follow, telling the Kara to stay. Bethany pushed back her
long dark hair, trying her hardest not to show fear, and followed
obediently.
As they neared the end of a passageway, Bethany knew the room
ahead would hold the vilest of creatures. She could sense the sudden
coldness of evil enveloping her body. They stood before the opening
panel and the Sepian pressed several coloured buttons. She was pushed
in and the panel closed behind her.
“Welcome, my beautiful Earthling, this is such a pleasure, finding
you.”
The perfect English voice came from the most revolting of creatures
towering above her.
“I wish I could say the same,” Bethany spat sarcastically.
He was uglier than the others, his head slightly bigger and he looked
ridiculous wearing an old army jacket.
“My name is Xiha.” Just then, another creature entered from a side
panel. He wore no steel pants like the others, and his male organ
swayed from side to side as he strode towards her. His yellow eyes
lingered up and down her body, whilst his ferocious mouth hissed,
exposing sharp teeth, with one missing. Bethany knew who he was
before Xiha said: “Meet my companion, Doldran.”
Bethany was pushed down onto a chair, while the two creatures
circled, ogling her like she was a prize lamb. Xiha said: “I will ask you
questions and you will answer truthfully. If I am not pleased with your
343
response, you will be taken to a chamber where you will be made to do
so, and I can tell you this will not be pleasant!”
Bethany felt the nerves in her stomach rumbling, panic was starting
to build in her mind and she kept telling herself: “Don't antagonise
them, the Kara said, keep control.”
“I know you have two male companions with you, why did you come
to our galaxy?”
Bethany took a few short breaths, and answered: “We came to visit
the planet Estibulos, with their leader Dou Setta.”
Xiha snarled and glared at Bethany. “I know this! But why did your
companions help Dou Setta start the war?”
“You started the bloody war, we helped Dou Setta because he is a
friend, something you would never understand, you moron!”
Instantly, Xiha let fly with a strong slap to Bethany's face. Then
another, which caused her to fall from the chair, holding her bloodied
nose, pain searing through her head.
Doldran grabbed her and pushed her back onto the chair, squeezing
one of her breasts tightly and enjoying the sharp cry of pain she
expelled.
“Now, let me tell you that the Estibulians may have won the war, but
we destroyed Harmoni and her damned pyramid and we will destroy
Dou Setta one day! Right now, I just want your two human friends;
they interest me very much. I will send a message to Dou Setta, and if
your friends want to see you alive again, they will do exactly as I say
before we reach Greygate,” snarled Xiha, unaware that Bethany was
giving silent thanks that Harmoni was safe on Trusion.
“Why were you and the Kara this far from Estibulos? What were
you doing out here?”
Bethany prayed under her breath that Xiha would believe her answer.
“It was safer for me to be away from the war, I asked the Kara to take
me to look at other planets in your galaxy.”
Xiha thought for a moment, then said: “And...have you seen any?”
“We haven't had a chance, you captured us,” she replied, trying not
to hesitate.
“Hmmm!” Xiha snarled, “Well, we are taking you to the most
interesting planet in our galaxy, where you will have the pleasure of
meeting thousands of your own kind.”
344
Bethany let out an involuntary gasp of shock. Doldran seemed
slightly amused and said: “Greygate is our pain and pleasure colony,
pain for humans and pleasure for us!”
Bethany felt her heart pounding out of control and yelled: “You
mean, you've been abducting humans?”
“Yes my dear, for many, many earth years,” came the casual reply.
Doldran ran his scaly hands over Bethany's silken hair and said: “She
will be a perfect specimen for our breeding chamber, don't you think
Xiha?”
Xiha saw strength and fire in her human eyes and answered: “She
doesn't have the helpless fear of all the others, her mind will be
amazing, full of strength. Now, I think it's time for us to examine her in
the flesh.”
Fear overcame Bethany's senses and she ran for the door screaming
hysterically. Xiha and Doldran stood back watching with amusement as
two Sepians entered the door, grabbing Bethany by the arms and
twisting them until she calmed down.
“You fucking animals! What have you been doing to the humans!?”
she screamed, tears pouring down her cheeks.
The two creatures never answered; they just carried her along with
Xiha and Doldran following. The room they entered was circular with
rows of hazy silver lights. Several creatures sat at computer panels
where strange symbols were flashing on the screens. To the left, were
half a dozen sleeping chambers, somewhat larger than the ones on
Estibulos, where Sepians lay silently asleep. To the right was a large
steel recliner chair, very similar to a dentist chair.
Bethany looked with horror, knowing that it was intended for her.
“Take your garments off or we will rip them off!”
Bethany knew that to object was futile and she prayed to God that
they wouldn't hurt her, as slowly she obeyed. Bending down to unzip
her boots, she suddenly remembered the fabit, hidden safely in a side
panel. She prayed they would not find it.
As she finally slipped off her underwear, exposing her sensuous
body, Doldran made strange guttural sounds, his mouth opened with
drips of green saliva running down his chin. Bethany shook with cold
fear, noticing his male organ become slightly erect as it swung with
excitement!
345
Suddenly, the two Sepians grabbed her and threw her into the chair.
Xiha pushed a button and instantly, her wrists and ankles were clamped
tightly in a steel vice. Xiha lifted the chair to his waist level and gloated
over her naked helplessness. The vile creature slowly ran his cold hands
over her neck, then down her arms, enjoying the sensation her warm
skin was giving him.
Bethany couldn't contain the way her firm breasts were heaving
heavy with her pounding heart beats and now, the cold hands were
devouring her tender mounds, squeezing them softly and rubbing the
nipples and watching in amusement as they hardened against her will.
“Stop! Stop!” she cried, as the hands now made their way down past
her belly and between her legs. The hands lingered for a while, they
slowly toyed with her. Bethany struggled helplessly, fearing what may
come next. Xiha glanced at Doldran, whose sexual organ was now fully
erect and throbbing with anticipation. He scowled at him: “Will you
please control yourself and put that thing away, you are not going to
hurt this one. I want her for myself when the time is right.”
Doldran snarled at his leader, “I just want some pleasure before we
reach Greygate, you've never objected before!” Xiha's eyes bored into
Bethany and he replied, “This one is different, I want her all to myself
to breed from.”
Doldran snarled with disappointment and said, “Well, at least can I
taste her?”
Xiha understood his companion's hungry sexual appetite and
grudgingly said: “OK, just this once, but keep your teeth away, she must
not be hurt.”
Bethany didn't want to think about what was happening. She
squeezed her eyes tight as small tears fell onto her cheeks. Doldran
gloated over the top of her, his hands sliding down her warm skin, thick
saliva dripping onto her stomach and down her legs. She could smell
putrid breath all over her body and felt the horrible coarseness of his
tongue as it defiled her body.
Suddenly the voice of Xiha woke her from what she wished had been
a bad dream. “That's enough! Now go and relieve yourself, get out of
here!” he snapped at Doldran.
Bethany couldn't control herself any longer and cried deep heavy
sobs of despair. Xiha looked at her with surprise, “So, you do have that
human emotion they call crying,” he said sarcasticly.
346
He pushed a button and released her arms and legs whilst the chair
righted itself; the terrible ordeal was over. Xiha picked up her garments
and threw them at her, saying, “When we get to Greygate, you will have
the real thing and believe me, I will enjoy hurting you.”
The two Sepians pushed Bethany out the door, while she scrambled
to put on her underwear. Back in the small empty room, she was
greeted by the almost lifeless body of the Kara. Several deep puncture
wounds scarred his delicate body and his eyes held the pain he had
obviously endured.
Bethany ran to him, oblivious that she was still only in her
underwear. “What did they do to you?” she cried, holding him like a
child and stroking his head.
“It is OK, the pain is fading, I will not die,” he replied.
Bethany stroked his body gently with care and said: “We must get
out of here, once we get to Greygate, it will be too late.” She
remembered the fabit and hastily grabbed her boots. It was still there.
As she dressed, Bethany thought that if Dean and Paul received
Xiha's message to come after her, they would all be captured. She
showed the fabit to the Kara and said: “This is our only chance, we have
to try.”
The Kara held the fabit and said: “If we escape from this room, then
what? Try to escape on one of their fighters? It would be impossible.”
Bethany shrugged her shoulders and replied matter-of-factly, “No, we'll
take one of their small shuttles, they wouldn't notice one gone.”
The Kara blinked his eyes in surprise and thought: “These humans
will try anything, I admire their strength.” To Bethany, he said: “I will
psychically try to feel when it is safe to leave, we must be very careful.”
Bethany placed a soft kiss on the Kara's forehead and relaxed her
mind, waiting for the right time to escape.
The moment the Kara had informed Harmoni and Emok of Bethany's
departure back to Estibulos, they both sensed Bethany was in grave
danger. Harmoni scolded the Kara. “Why did you let them go before
informing me?”
The Kara seemed surprised and answered: “Bethany told us that you
had agreed, that you were aware.”
347
Emok was very annoyed that someone in his protection could now be
in danger. He went quickly to the Konsidium communications room to
contact Estibulos.
Nubon answered, informing Emok that Dou Setta was still on Tyfin,
assisting with the massive clean up after the war. “No, Bethany had not
arrived yet. When did they leave, Emok?”
Emok checked the time and answered, “If they went straight back,
they should have been there one hundred and fifty difons ago and from
what I hear, Bethany was very anxious to see Paul.”
Nubon said that he would find Paul and Dean and inform them of
what had occurred, then would contact Emok soon.
On the planet of Tyfin, Dou Setta sat in shocked silence, watching
the face of his evil enemy glaring at him from the communications
screen. “The two humans must come alone, if any of your fighters
accompany them, their female companion will be killed. Take down
these co-ordinates, they are to rendezvous with us in approximately six
hundred difons, if not, they will never see the female again.”
The screen turned blank and the small alien sat wondering how he
was going to tell Paul that his lady was captive and in the hands of Xiha.
Suddenly, Dean was speaking with panic on the communications
screen.
“Dou Setta, Bethany and a Kara left Trusion, we don't know where
they are, their communications on the fighter are out, and they’re in
trouble somewhere!”
Dou Setta hesitated a moment, then answered: “I know where they
are, Xiha has captured them.”
Dou Setta could hear Paul yelling and swearing in the background as
he relayed Xiha's demands.
“Dean, it's up to you and Paul. If you agree, and rendezvous, you
must understand that Xiha will try to kill you all with or without back
up.”
Paul yelled through the communicator: “We're out of here, right
now! If you want to send back up, do it after six hundred difons, I'm not
taking any chances with Bethany's life.”
The Kara held the fabit steady and carefully inserted the thin paperlike blade between the door panel. There was a clicking sound, then
348
another, and then slowly, the panel opened. “Oh my God, it worked,”
gasped Bethany. The Kara gave her an odd look and declared, “Of
course, it always works!”
As they peered down the passageway, they felt relief that all was
clear, no Sepians in sight. Remembering the way they had arrived, they
quietly walked towards the elevator.
“What now?” whispered Bethany, as the elevator came into view,
with still no creatures visible.
“We press the buttons and hope it is empty,” was the Kara's reply.
Bethany's pulse was racing wildly, and expecting the worst, she
thought: “God, we only have one chance in a million of getting out of
here alive, shit, I'm scared!”
Her tiny companion seemed very calm. He held her shaking hand
and said: “Come on, I feel we will be safe.”
Within a few minutes, the elevator opened and they were inside and
on their way down to the landing bay. All the way down, Bethany kept
praying under her breath that no Sepians would greet them when the
elevator opened. Her heart was in her throat as they stopped and the
door opened.
All was clear.
Quickly, they scurried along the corridor towards the steps, hearing
the sounds of the enemy working below. Suddenly, they heard the
heavy footsteps of the enemy walking up the steps, which were only a
short distance in front. The Kara looked around; there was nowhere to
hide.
Bethany didn't know which way to run, she stood frozen with fear,
knowing that the creatures had to be heading for the elevator. Just then,
the noise of more footsteps behind them made her jump with panic. The
kara beckoned her forward, remembering he had noticed a small door
off to the left at the top of the steps. “Hurry Bethany, stay close,” he
whispered.
The door was there, but could they open it before the creatures saw
them?
Bending down, only a breath away from the approaching evil, the
Kara slid the fabit blade between the door panel. Luck was on their side
and within a second, the door opened and they crept inside the small
dark room. They crouched down between stacks of boxes. “This place
349
must be a store room,” thought Bethany, as relief filled her exhausted
body.
Several minutes passed, then carefully the Kara slid the fabit in the
panel again. The door opened and all was clear outside.
Crouched at the top of the steps, they surveyed the scene below.
Hundreds of creatures were walking towards the far end of the landing
bay, there seemed to be a meeting of some kind. Bethany noticed a
group inspecting their fighter craft and on either side, high above, sat
the rows of shuttles. The Kara whispered, “There is an entry and exit
bay between every ten shuttles, we will have to choose one down this
end, where hopefully, we will not be seen.”
Carefully, they descended the steps, almost crawling on their bellies.
Every now and again, the Kara would let out a soft moan, his body still
aching from the torture he had endured earlier. Finally, they came to the
last step, then continued on towards the shuttles, and, hopefully,
freedom.
All of the Sepians seemed to be at the other end of the landing bay,
luck was definitely on their side. They stood beside the small circular
exit bay and the Kara studied the code panel on the wall. Thankfully, it
was similar to what Estibulians used.
“Come on Bethany, we'll take this first shuttle,” he said, with
confidence. They sat inside the black, oblong craft and the Kara
adjusted the control panel and set the corresponding code buttons for
exit. Bethany fastened her body protector and prayed that everything
would work properly.
The panel lit up and the codes checked. The craft slid slowly
forward into the exit bay. Neither wanted to look below for fear of
being noticed. They just stared straight ahead into the darkness of space
and freedom.
Paul's mind was ablaze with fear and anger over what Xiha might do
to his beautiful Bethany. He checked the array of weapons they had
brought and prayed they would not be too late. Dean re-checked the coordinates, they were about two hundred difons away from rendezvous
point.
“The area where Xiha is waiting is close to the planet Greygate,”
Dean said. Just then, Dou Setta's voice came over the communicator.
350
“Dean, I am dispensing twelve of my fighters from Estibulos in a
hundred difons; they will be there as back up if you need them. Keep
your personal communicator switched on when you board Xiha's ship.
His sensors cannot pick up your signal.”
A short time later, Harmoni's voice came through.
“Dean, you must not go aboard Xiha's ship, you and Paul will be
killed. Please, I have a feeling that Bethany may have escaped.”
Dean couldn't think straight, he was hearing confusing messages
from everyone. Paul interjected. “Listen buddy, if it was Kavita on that
ship, what would you do? We have to find out one way or the other.”
Something made Dean quickly turn the scanner screen on, even
though he knew it would be too early to sight Xiha. To the far left of
the screen, flickered the signal of a small craft, then some distance
behind, two others were following in the same direction. Dean checked
the data.
“Paul, those three are coming from the same direction as our
rendezvous.”
Bethany watched petrified as the scanner showed two Sepian fighters
following them.
“I knew it was too good to be true, “ she cried.
The Kara placed the shuttle into top speed, knowing it was futile,
they could never out-run a fighter. The shuttle was useless, a hopeless
sitting duck against a fighter.
Bethany knew the Sepians wouldn't bother capturing them this time,
now, they would just blast them into a million pieces.
The scanner showed they were closing in.
“Oh shit! Can't we do anything?” she yelled to the Kara.
Then the screen showed yet another fighter, heading towards them
from the opposite direction.
“Oh my God! No! We're surrounded,” she cried hysterically.
The Kara zoomed in the image of the approaching fighter and yelled:
“It's one of ours!”
Just then, the phased energy from the Sepian missiles roared
alongside within a breath of hitting them. Instantly, the Kara dropped
the shuttle to avert attack. Bethany squeezed her eyes shut, praying the
next missile would miss.
351
Dean knew there was something wrong the moment the projector
screen showed the first image of a Sepian shuttlecraft being followed by
fighters. “What would a shuttle be doing way out here?” he questioned.
Within seconds of seeing the fighters attack the shuttle, Dean and
Paul were ready to engage. “Let's get those ugly bastards!” Paul yelled,
as Dean opened the laser force field and headed straight for the enemy.
The Sepians saw them coming and stopped their attack on the
shuttle, whilst changing direction to avoid attack. “One lonely little
Estibulian,” the Sepians thought, “easy to take care of, the shuttle can
wait.”
That was a big mistake, two mad humans had the guts of ten
Estibulians! Dean flew straight at the fighters and within a split second
of collision, suddenly dropped beneath them, swung a semi circle over
the top and blasted them with heavy laser power before the fighters
knew what hit them.
Bethany and the Kara watched from a distance as the Sepian fighters
were blasted apart and scattered into the emptiness of space.
The voice code on the shuttle would not co-ordinate with the
Estibulian fighter, but Dean knew it was Bethany and the Kara on
board. “Believe me Paul, I know it's them, trust me. Let's go home to
Estibulos.”
The long journey back was drawn out and frustrated for Bethany.
Somehow she felt that Paul was in the fighter and she couldn't wait to
hold him again. Dean made contact with Dou Setta and informed him
of what had happened, telling him the fighters were not required.
“Are you sure it's Bethany on the shuttle?” asked Dou Setta. Paul
interjected, “Has he ever been wrong?”
Four hundred difons later, the planet of Estibulos loomed up on their
projector screens. On the shuttle, Bethany leaned over and kissed the
Kara on his forehead. He blinked his huge eyes, relieved they would
soon be home.
Dean circled Pilot, while several fighter craft now joined him as a
welcome committee. The unusual sight of a Sepian shuttle landing in
their city caused many Estibulians to watch with fascinated caution.
The Kara knew exactly where he was going and dropped the landing
pads ready for touch down.
Bethany sat silent and still, the reality they had landed and were safe
weighed heavy on her small shoulders, a single tear trickled from her
352
brown eyes. The Kara unfastened his body protector, then turned
around and unsnapped hers, knowing only too well how she felt.
Dean landed the fighter to a grinding halt and Paul was out of his
seat before the controls were switched off. “Calm down, will you!” said
Dean, as Paul was up and ready to jump, the moment the door opened.
Several Karas helped Bethany and her companion down the steps and
all of a sudden, they felt very weak.
Paul saw her and ran yelling: “Babe! Babe! Thank God you're OK!”
She fell into his strong arms and cried uncontrollably with relief.
Paul placed a hand under her chin and held her face. He went to kiss
her and suddenly said, “Shit! What is that revolting smell on you,
babe?”
Bethany gave a weak smile and answered, “I want a long hot bath, a
bottle of red wine and boy, have I got a shocking story to tell you!”
353
CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR
The conquest of Greygate
Xiha had given instructions not to be woken until the time of the
rendezvous, unless it was a matter of grave emergency. Now, as two of
his warriors woke him, he felt tired and angry.
“What has happened? I told you not to disturb me, you idiots!!”
Doldran came running in, his face twisted in heated fury. “They've
escaped! They're gone!!” he screamed at Xiha.
Xiha jumped from the sleeping chamber and roared: “How could
they escape? What in the hell happened?!”
“They took a shuttle,” one of the Sepians said, “we don't know when
or how they escaped, but two fighters have gone after them. Don't
worry, they can't get far on a shuttle.”
“Well, don't just stand there,” Xiha yelled, “let's get our fighters on
the communicator and see where they are!”
A short time later in the control room, Xiha checked the coordinates, which were now in the exact position. “Hold our position
here, if the humans are coming, they should be on our screen soon, “ he
said, turning to the Sepian trying once again to find the fighters, “What
do you mean, their communicators are out? They have to be
somewhere, you fucking idiot!!”
Doldran was running around going ballistic because a female human
had escaped and it was one he wanted so badly. “Let's send more
fighters after them,” he said, “or why don't we just turn around.......”.
Xiha glared at his companion.
“We stay here,” he said, “If the humans don't rendezvous, you can
bet the female has safely found her companions. Our only hope is the
354
fighters, dispatch two more to look for the others, we cannot afford to
lose any more, I've hardly any left as it is!”
The time of the rendezvous had come and gone, with still no sighting
of the two missing fighters. Xiha's patience was fading, all he wanted to
do was get to Greygate to relax and enjoy himself. It had been a long,
tiring war. The Sepian leader turned to Doldran and said: “Call our
fighters back, we're moving on to Greygate. If I understand these
humans, they will want to rescue the ones we have captive there and
we'll be ready for them. Next time, they won't be so lucky!”
After a long hot bath filled with perfumed salts, Bethany dressed in
fresh new garments and sat sipping red wine with Paul and Dean. Dou
Setta and Nubon joined them while the wounded Kara relaxed in the
healing cylinder.
“What happened on Xiha's ship, babe?” Paul asked, gently noticing
that Bethany didn't seem to want to talk. She stared silently into the
wine glass, her mind wanting to blank out the revolting memory of her
abusers. Paul held her hand and whispered: “You're safe Bethany, no
one will hurt you again.”
Bethany placed the glass down and cried, “What about all our
people? Oh my God! Oh my God!” Paul cradled her sobbing body as
she continued: “I know what Greygate is all about, it's a colony where
thousands of humans are held captive. The Sepians have been
abducting them from Earth for years.”
Paul and Dean sat in shocked silence as Bethany recounted what had
happened on the Mother Ship, every now and again, calmly taking a sip
of red wine, as finally, her shock subsided.
“I really felt like a piece of meat sitting in that chair, those creatures
are vile animals. Can you imagine what agony other women have
endured at their hands? I was lucky, others have been raped by those
monsters and used as breeders. Oh my God! We've got to save them,”
she cried.
Dou Setta glanced at Nubon, then spoke, “We have never landed on
Greygate, it is unknown terrain. We must find out what we are up
against, but I promise you Bethany, we will do our best to rescue the
humans.”
Dean's mind was wild with the horrors he had just heard, psychically
he was getting that the situation was just the tip of it and there was
355
worse to come. “There will be no mistakes on this mission, it will be
planned carefully, we must save all those people. Xiha will be
expecting a rescue attempt, he will be waiting for us and we must be
careful,” said Dean.
Paul re-filled the wine glasses and said: “How in the hell are we
going to land undetected on their planet, not knowing where we are
going, or where the people are being held? Jeez! Just how do you get
thousands of people off a planet without being noticed?”
Everyone was silent, alone with their thoughts of the seemingly
impossible mission ahead of them. “We start with how and what we can
use to get there,” interjected Nubon.
The Mother Ships were too large and Dou Setta's craft was being
repaired after being damaged during the war.
“We have only one ship in working order which can hold two
thousand people and ten crew, no more,” Dou Setta said.
“Can the invisible shield used on the fighters be programmed for the
ship and extended up to thirty minutes?” asked Dean.
“Not a chance,” said Dou Setta and Nubon together, looking
surprised. “Well, we've never tried it, it would be difficult,” they said.
Dean suggested that if they sent a Mother Ship ahead first as a
decoy, then brought the smaller craft in from the opposite direction, and
used the invisible shield the moment they entered Greyate's atmosphere,
they may just be able to land undetected. The idea seemed feasible, but
they had no knowledge of where Xiha's colony was situated, so the
direction would have to be guesswork.
Sometime later, the news came in that Harmoni and the Kara had
arrived back on Estibulos and she wanted an urgent meeting with Dean.
A splendid new pyramid for their Spiritual Leader was being built, with
the expected time of completion just three weeks away. Meanwhile,
Harmoni would take up residence in quarters adjacent to the Seat of
Order room.
They sat opposite each other like the first time they met. Dean held
her delicate hands and felt the unusual vibrations of worry and sadness
flow from her being. Harmoni opened her eyes and the sparkling silver
stars melded into Dean's eyes knowingly. “Oh Dean! I have had visions
of Greygate. The planet holds our Galaxy's darkest evil, it is a hell pit
of human agony and suffering beyond description. Xiha must be
356
stopped Dean, for the peace and survival of our Galaxy and your world,
this evil must be destroyed for all time,” she said.
Dean held onto her thoughts and Ilias reassured them both that the
quest to destroy Greygate would be successful. Harmoni smiled and bid
Dean farewell, saying, “Go now, you know what has to be done.”
Dean arrived back at the Seat of Order room where Dou Setta and
Nubon were discussing the process of applying the invisible shield to
the ship they would now be taking to Greygate. Nubon checked the data
and felt optimistic that it may just work. “The Karas should have it
completed tomorrow, if it works, we can leave immediately,” he
informed Dean.
Just then, Bethany walked in holding the hand of the Kara who had
helped her escape. From the look on her face and the ease with which
the Kara walked, it was obvious he had healed well.
The small alien proceeded to tell the story of his time held captive
under Xiha.
“The room in which I was held was beside the main communications
area. I could see images of what appeared to be humans on their visual
screens. The humans I saw had their heads shaved, the males wore dark
grey overalls and the females wore a tunic style garment. On their arms
appeared to be a burnt symbol, like this.” The Kara drew the symbol of
a letter 'G' written sideways.
Immediately, Dean knew what their plan of entry would be. He
turned to Paul and said: “How do you feel about shaving your head
buddy?”
Paul grinned and replied: “I'll do anything to get my hands on those
bastards, what's your plan?”
“Infiltrate their camp, we have to be there, among the prisoners to be
able to get them out. Don't ask me how we'll do it, it will come to me as
we progress.”
Bethany walked over to Paul, her hands placed firmly on her hips
and said: “Don't think you're leaving me behind on this adventure, I owe
that creep Doldran a hard kick in the balls, and, besides, I've always
fancied myself as a skinhead!!”
Dean burst out laughing at Bethany's sudden fiery change, while Paul
glared in disbelief. “No way babe! You've been through enough, I want
you safe here with Harmoni.”
357
Everyone was silent as Bethany looked unswervingly into Paul's eyes
and said firmly: “I am going!”
As they made their plans to dress as prisoners, the Kara suddenly
remembered something else and said, “I noticed one of the Sepian
guards in the corner of the screen, he wore a black skin tight suit
covering his whole body, except for his head and a laser pistol on his
waist.”
“Interesting,” said Dean, “I'll keep that in mind, though I can't
imagine how we could disguise that ugly head.”
Nubon studied all the compiled data, which was available on
Greygate, as they had never landed there, it was savage unknown evil
territory. Paul looked on with great interest as Nubon explained, “The
planet has similar gravity to Estibulos, although there seems to be
sections of electromagnetic intrusion. The atmosphere shows the
oxygen content of only eight percent and that is far too low. Actually,
the readings we have suggest that human life could not survive for long
on that planet.”
“Visually, the land mass is constantly in a deep twilight gloom,
covered with a thick grey mantle of clouds and gas,” Nubon said.
Paul thought for a moment, then replied, “It could be possible that
they actually live underground.”
Just then, Dou Setta walked in with the good news that the work on
the invisible shield was progressing better than expected and that they
would carry out the first testing early in the morning and leave soon
after.
Meanwhile, Karas were busy making three grey garments similar to
those worn by the prisoners. Dean, Paul and Bethany had their heads
shaved and the Kara doing the shaving laughed as he finished the job.
“You look beautiful, just like us!” he exclaimed. Next, a tattoo symbol
was stamped, not burnt, on their left arms.
Nubon checked the explosive devices; the amount of crystal nuclear
power was enough to blow the small planet of Greygate into pieces. He
turned to Dean and said, “Is this really necessary? Do we have to
destroy the whole planet?”
Dean knew it had to be done for the evil never to breed again and he
replied: “There is no other way, my friend.”
358
The invisible shield was working perfectly for it's thirty minute time
span, as the Estibulian Mother Ship set its course for Greygate, followed
some distance behind by Dou Setta's smaller craft.
Xiha walked along the cold dark corridor towards the birthing room,
relishing the agonising screams of the three females in labour. This
time, he felt sure they would be hybrids, strong males that would grow
to serve his dwindling forces. He opened the door and was greeted by
the sight he enjoyed most; the grossly distorted bodies of the females
bleeding heavily in the last excruciating pains of childbirth.
Xiha rubbed his scaly hands together with delight as a Sepian female
showed him the progress. “These three are the strongest we have had for
along time, I feel they will survive the birth and we can breed from them
again,” she said. With that statement, one of the women let out a
piercing scream and a horrid grey slimy baby slid from between her
bloodied legs. Xiha picked the crying creature up and inspected its
form. “It's a male and larger than normal,” he declared. The woman
sobbed deeply as her horror filled eyes saw the revolting ugly thing that
only vaguely resembled a human baby.
Dou Setta checked their position, then spoke on the communicator to
the Mother Ship. “This is where we part, you keep on the same course
until you are just within Greygate's tracker system; maintain that
position so they know you are there. I will keep communications with
you on our coded transceiver.”
Dean had called on Ilias' help to visualise the position of Xiha's
colony. There was only a handful of rough structures where a Mother
Ship and several fighters sat; nothing else. The planet was devoid of
any city. Dean tapped Paul on the shoulder, “You were right, their
colony is all underground,” he said.
As they approached from the Northerly direction over the planet,
Dou Setta had trouble picking up land images on the projector screen.
As he zoomed in, he said to Dean, “All I am getting is that damn thick
grey cloud mass. It had better clear before we enter their atmosphere,
otherwise I won't know where we will be landing.”
A few moments later, just before they needed to engage the invisible
shield, the grey cloud cover cleared just enough for them to make out a
359
rough, barren land formation. “Set the co-ordinates and engage the
shield!” yelled Dou Setta in a hurried voice.
Within ten earth minutes, they had landed on the remote side of the
planet, undetected.
Paul hurried to prepare their Sepian shuttlecraft for exit; Bethany
followed close behind. Nubon reminded Dean that after they set the
explosive charges, they only had two thousand eight hundred difons,
about forty eight earth hours, before detonation.
Nubon held Dean by the shoulder and stressed: “We will be landing
back here in two thousand seven hundred difons, you have to be out of
the colony by then, with or without your people, otherwise you will be
blown into a million pieces. Also, remember, do not fly the shuttle
above one hundred metres, otherwise you will be detected.”
Dou Setta grabbed his earth friend's hand and said, “God be with you
Dean and may Harmoni's light guide you.”
Quickly the three friends boarded the shuttle and prepared to leave
the safety of the large ship for the boundaries of the unknown.
As they silently hovered low above the ground, Paul checked the
readings on the outside atmosphere. “Nubon was right,” he thought, “no
humans could live in this almost unbreathable air, or the uninhabitable
terrain which was very moon-like in its structure.”
Dean checked the positions for the charges and set them accordingly.
They would run in a semi-circle around the boundary of the main
colony, which was now established to be definitely all underground.
The Sepian Mother Ship came into view on the projector screen, with
several fighter craft on either side. Dean eased back on the controls;
they were almost there.
Inside the colony, Xiha looked puzzled at the image of the Estibulian
Mother Ship hovering above the boundaries of their atmosphere. “What
is that little Dou Setta up to? Are they going to attack or what?”
screamed Doldran whilst his leader seemed in deep thought.
Finally, Xiha said, “There's nothing for them to attack down here
except our Mother Ship, their scanners couldn't possibly pick up our
underground city. They don't know what to do Doldran, we have them
puzzled!”
Xiha gave orders to keep a close eye on the Mother Ship and if Dou
Setta sent any fighters down, engage to intercept and destroy. Several
360
difons later, the Mother Ship left, turning back towards Sepia. Xiha
exclaimed to his companion: “They came to check us out, but they'll be
back, you can count on that.”
Bethany felt a cold shiver of fear run down her spine, as they came to
a halt just metres from Xiha's Mother Ship. A half dozen shuttles, like
theirs, sat just outside the exit bays, with the fighters situated further
out.
Dean pressed the infrared scanner button; no life forms came up on
the screen, it was all clear in the surrounding area. “We'll leave the
shuttle here, it's one of theirs so they won't notice anything strange,”
said Dean, zooming the infrared scanner in to the dilapidated structure
which sat some distance away. Several images appeared to be moving
around inside whilst one was motionless at the doorway. Dean pressed
another button and enlarged the entrance. “It appears to be a huge gate
of some kind,” whispered Paul.
Suddenly, the sight of a shuttle landing close beside them made
everyone duck for cover, turning all lights off. Dean peered out into the
grey darkness and watched, his eyes able to see like daylight. That
startled him. “Another gift from Ilias?” he thought.
“What's happening? How can you see anything?” said Bethany,
crouching low beside Paul.
“Sshh, I'm concentrating,” was the reply.
Dean focussed his mind and his eyes now held the Sepians. They
were all dressed as the Kara had described them, with laser pistols
attached to their waist belts. The creature from the shuttle was inserting
a keypad, then pressing several buttons on the gate. It opened and he
walked in and joined the others. Now, they were all gone, except the
one near the gate.
Just as Dean was wondering how on earth they could get past that
gate, a lone Sepian guard walked from the Mother Ship towards their
shuttle. “Keep low and quiet,” whispered Dean, “we are going to have a
visitor.”
The door to the shuttle opened slowly and the creature stepped
inside, to be greeted by a heavy blow to the head by Dean and a quick
Karate neck twist by Paul. Silently, the creature died, unaware of what
had happened to him.
361
Dean felt for his key code and started to undress the vile body.
“What are you going to do?” asked Paul.
“The only way in is through that gate, if we can fool that guard, then
we have a chance inside. You're the tallest Paul, we must disguise you
as a Sepian, it's our only chance.”
Bethany gave a nervous laugh and said: “So, what does he do for a
head?”
Dean handed the black garments to Paul, then pulled out his fabit,
telling them both to look away. Without a second thought, Dean
pressed the ray on the fabit and proceeded to cut the Sepian's head from
its shoulders. Bethany gasped at the sudden vile smell of burnt flesh and
held her head close to Paul's chest.
Paul was speechless; he couldn't believe what Dean was doing.
“This is sick beyond imagination,” he thought. Dean opened the door
and dragged the headless body outside, then hid it underneath the
shuttle.
Careful not to get any of the creature's blood on his garments, he
then proceeded to hollow out the head, leaving an empty cavity large
enough to hold a human head. Dean grabbed handfuls of coarse black
sand from the ground and rubbed the cavity clean of any flesh; with the
flesh gone, the smell wasn't quite so repugnant!
When Dean entered the shuttle, Paul was dressed in the guard's
uniform, looking not too happy at the revolting situation in which he
suddenly found himself. Dean shook some sand from the eyeless head
and handed it to his friend, saying, “I'm sorry buddy, it's the only way,
just for forty six hours.”
Paul shuddered involuntarily and took the head, trying his best to
take his mind off what was happening. Bethany prodded him in the ribs
and said jokingly: “My, what a handsome thing you are!”
Paul's blue eyes glared at her through the head and he hissed like a
Sepian. “Keep your eyes lowered and your mouth shut, just grunt or
hiss and don't let them notice your hands,” said Dean, as they now
started to walk from the shuttle.
Paul strode tall and confidently while Dean and Bethany shuffled
like zombies alongside, all praying this crazy idea would work.
Paul didn't hesitate, he walked straight to the gate, inserted the key
and pressed the code. He pushed Dean and Bethany inside, while
grunting to himself and not even acknowledging the guard. Once inside,
362
Paul knew there was no time to relax because they had fooled the guard.
He walked straight ahead, praying to God it was the right direction.
A long winding passageway snaked itself down hill as the three
friends continued along, not knowing what was beyond. Eventually,
they came to a large open area where several Sepians stood waiting for
what appeared to be elevators.
Paul slowed down, grabbing Dean and Bethany by the shoulders,
hoping this was the way that guards treated the prisoners. Thankfully,
the lighting was dark and hazy and the Sepians took no notice as Paul
shoved his prisoners into the elevator. Finally, they were alone.
“So far, so good,” whispered Dean, as he held Bethany's shaking
hand reassuringly.
Several moments later, the elevator stopped and the door opened.
Paul estimated they had travelled underground about five levels. In
front of them now six guards were boarding open steel like carriages
which sat suspended about six inches above the ground. “The vehicles
work on a magnetic field,” Dean whispered to Paul, as they stood still
and watched the carriage move towards the dark tunnel.
The next empty carriage came towards them; no guards were in
sight. Paul spoke with a slight laughter in his voice.
“Remember the old movie, 'Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom'?
Well, let's pretend we're going on that wild carriage ride, let's go!”
The ease with which they boarded the carriage soon turned to cold
tension as the dark tunnel loomed before them. Once inside, each felt
an eerie shiver in their souls, like they were passing through the tunnel
of Hell!
After a darkness that seemed to go on forever, a hazy light finally
appeared at the end of the tunnel and the carriage slowed down. It
stopped and they were faced with a long platform and three doors. One
in the middle and two at the end on either side. Paul looked around, the
empty silence reeked with death and a cold foreboding of what may lie
behind those doors.
“So, which one do we take?” said Paul.
“I'd say toss a coin if you have one,” replied Dean.
Bethany reached down inside her bra and pulled out a small dime, a
lone reminder of her world in New York. “Use this, it's my lucky dime,
I always keep it on me,” she said.
“Your call babe!” said Paul, as he flipped the coin.
363
“The right hand door, if it's heads,” was the reply.
It was heads and slowly Paul inserted the key code. They walked
inside and the first thing that hit them was the putrid smell wafting
through the heavy air. At the far end of the room was a set of steps.
They crept slowly down them as they heard loud machinery noises
below.
“Oh my God, what's that terrible smell? I feel like I'm going to throw
up,” said Bethany, her hand covering her mouth. The steps came to an
end and they found themselves standing on a ledge. About ten metres
below was a factory of some sort. They lay on their bellies and peered
over the edge to get a better view of the activities below.
Their eyes were wide in horror and their senses filled with revulsion
at the sight below them.
Lifeless grey human bodies, naked and hairless, moved along a slow
conveyor belt towards two huge steel vats into which they disappeared.
At the beginning of the conveyor, four Sepians lifted bodies from a pile
on the ground and placed them on the belt. From the colour and smell
of the bodies, they had obviously been dead for several days.
Bethany quickly turned away in disgust and vomited, unable to
contain herself any longer.
“We've stumbled into a food processing plant, those fucking
creatures must eat us!!” cried Paul, as he also moved away.
Bethany cleaned herself up and said: “I picked the wrong bloody
door, let's get out of here!” Quietly, they climbed the steps back
towards the door, their hearts beating heavily with distress over what
they had seen.
Paul inserted the key and told the others to stay back in case they had
company. Just as the door opened, he noticed the backs of two guards
entering the middle door. “Quickly, we'll take the middle door this
time,” he said.
Thankfully, this time, there was no foul smell when they entered, just
a damp dark emptiness and a long passageway where the outline of
several guards strode ahead. Dean checked the time, it had been over
three hours and they had achieved nothing.
That all changed, when suddenly up ahead, they saw two large
compounds which held hundreds, maybe thousands of human beings. In
front of the compounds was a gate where several guards stood silently.
Paul watched intently at the actions of the guards, as the other two
364
approached. Suddenly, from another side passage, a guard walked,
dragging a young man by his arm along the ground. The guard stopped
and kicked the man in the back, then prodded him to stand up, finally
pushing him into the compound.
A short time later, three guards left, leaving only two on the gate.
Paul turned to Dean and said: “What do you think?”
“It's now or never buddy, we have to all get inside that compound,
put on your best beast act!” was the reply.
Bethany and Dean hung their heads low as Paul forcefully dragged
them by the shoulders towards the gate. The guards saw him approach
and spoke strange garbled sounds as they opened the gate. Paul didn't
acknowledge the guard, he just looked straight ahead. Dean struggled a
little and Paul let fly with a slap to his head, hoping it looked
convincing.
Inside, Paul noticed several Sepians abusing young women in a
corner. He felt like going over and kicking their ugly heads in, but he
knew their time would soon arrive.
The humans scattered in fear as Paul sauntered around the
compound; there was no fight in these people, they seemed resigned to
their fate.
Paul held Bethany's hand tightly, and slowly faded into the hazy
depths of human despair. Finally, in a secluded corner, Paul hovered
over the woman he loved and tried to act like a Sepian. Squeezing her
breasts firmly, though not enough to hurt her, he played with her body.
Bethany had to stop herself from giggling, Paul looked ridiculous
and seemed to be enjoying himself in a sick wacky way!
Meanwhile, Dean was mingling with the multitude of human
suffering. As he walked around, watching the vacant faces of men,
women and children, dark skinned, fair skinned and Asian, he realised
that every ounce of faith and hope had been sucked dry from their
lifeless minds. He had to find someone with whom he could
communicate, someone who still held a thread of courage. “There must
be a leader somewhere amongst this sea of helplessness,” he thought.
Eventually, Dean came across a middle-aged couple, talking intently
to a young man. They stopped as he approached, their eyes holding his
with wariness.
Dean stood close to them and said, “My name's Dean, I've just
arrived here, may I talk with you?”
365
The couple glanced at each other, whilst the young man looked hard
into Dean's face and replied, “You certainly are new here, you look
different from the others, obviously you haven't had the mind
conversion yet.”
Dean heaved a sigh of relief, feeling the strong soul and hope filled
mind of the young man. He held his hands out in friendship to the
couple and said, “Please trust me, I've come to rescue all of you and take
you back to Earth.”
With those strong, gentle words, the woman fainted into her
husband's arms and the young man grabbed Dean by the shoulders and
hugged him, knowing he spoke the truth.
For the next hour, Dean sat on the cold dirty ground with Edith and
Hans, farmers from Germany and Alexandros, a hairdresser from Spain.
Dean didn't want to tell them of the new Earth and the catastrophic
destruction of their homelands, that would come later. Right now, he
needed to hear their story and the workings of Greygate.
Edith and Hans had been abducted from their farm on a warm
summer's night on the twenty sixth of August, 1970, they were aged
twenty eight and thirty at the time. Dean thought to himself that would
have been over fifty years ago and they didn't look a day over forty now.
“How long have you been here?” he asked them.
“We have no conception of time, but it seems like about ten years,”
Hans answered. Dean couldn't tell them the truth about Earth yet, as
their story continued.
Somehow, they had been lucky to escape the systematic operation
performed on most prisoners, where the temporal lobe of the brain was
converted, causing the person to have memory, emotion, understanding
and speech impairment. The strongest of the men were taken to an
operating room where their complete brains were extracted and replaced
by a computer device, turning them into a type of android. These
androids worked day and night, building the huge underground city,
which was now almost complete.
For the unfortunate people who retaliated or tried to escape, it was
torture, then death. No one had ever escaped Greygate. Most young
women were raped and abused at random by the Sepians, causing some
to die after their atrocious ordeal. The strongest of the women were
used as breeders and gave birth to hideous hybrid creatures to help fulfil
366
Xiha's dream of being able to create a new evil race. Needless to say,
many women died during or after the berthing.
All the dead bodies were transported to the food processing plant for
Sepian consumption. Dean felt nauseated, remembering the sight of the
plant and the bodies on the conveyor belt.
Edith said: “We are fed twice daily, once a meal of cereal mash like
porridge and another of cold soup and bread. We are given limited
water, just enough to survive.”
Suddenly, the grey lights around the compound started to fade. “It
will soon be night,” said Alexandros. He went on to explain to Dean
that all the lights were turned off except for one hazy lamp at the gate
where the guards stood. “They are off for about six hours and that is the
only way we can tell the difference between day and night. It is the only
time we can sleep in peace and a time when many people cry in their
sleep,” he said sadly.
Dean hugged Alexandros tightly, the young man of nineteen years
reminded him of himself at that age. He then embraced Edith and Hans
like he would his own parents and placed a gentle kiss on their
foreheads, saying, “You must help me and mingle with the people to
give them hope that we will all get out of here alive.”
Dean left them and walked around in the hazy darkness to find Paul
and Bethany.
From beyond the ocean of sleeping bodies, Dean heard the soulful
singing from the far end of the compound; he made his way towards the
voices.
Bethany opened her eyes and sat up quickly, knocking Paul awake.
“Listen, there's singing coming from the far end,” she whispered, as
Paul now fumbled around in the darkness to attach the Sepian head he
had taken off.
“You had better stay here Paul, I notice there are no other Sepians
around, they have all left the compound at night and we don't want to
cause suspicion just yet, I won't be long,” she said, walking into the dark
gloom.
The seven dark-skinned men stood huddled together as one. There
were Americans, Jamaicans and one Maori, all united in their nightly
ritual of singing for about twenty minutes before going to sleep.
367
As Bethany came closer to the voices, she could make out the words
to Amazing Grace. She stopped, remembering it was her father's
favourite song. The sad, emotion filled words flowed out:
“Amazing Grace, how sweet the sound
That saved a wretch like me!
I once was lost, but now am found
Was blind, but now I see.......”
Soft tears started to roll down her cheeks as she remembered her
precious father and the memories of their life long ago before his
strange disappearance. Bethany stood still, not knowing if her mind was
playing tricks, she recognised a voice, a deep, familiar voice.
“No, it couldn't be,” she thought, “it's just my imagination.”
Suddenly, Dean was beside her and took her hand, as they walked
towards the group of men. In the morbid darkness, the silhouettes of
seven men stood singing in harmony, amongst the hundreds of tortured
souls at rest. Dean squeezed her by the hand and whispered: “Go to
your father, Bethany!”
Immediately, she knew it was him, the familiar profile, the stature,
the voice!
“Daddy! Daddy!” Bethany cried as she ran and flung her arms
around his waist. The singing stopped and the only sound was the deep
heavy crying of father and daughter.
“Is it really you Bethany? It can't be!” Thomas cried, as his almost
blind eyes tried desperately to see the young woman embracing him
tightly.
“It's me Daddy, it's really me,” she assured him.
“Oh my God no! Not my baby, they have you too?”
“Don't worry Daddy, we've come to take you home,” she said.
Thomas fell to his knees, sobbing. “Don't say things like that! Don't
tease me; there is no escape from this hell. Go away, leave me alone!”
Bethany persisted, “Believe me Daddy, I came here with two others,
we will get you all out.”
Thomas took her by the shoulders and said: “What have they done to
your mind, child? You must be mad!”
Bethany cried softly, not knowing what to do.
368
Suddenly, Dean appeared and knelt down to Thomas' level and held
his hands, saying, “Hello Thomas, my name is Dean.”
Just the sound of the young man's voice made Thomas feel a strange
joy and peace fill his empty soul. Dean continued, “Thomas, you were
once a man filled with courage and faith. The evil here may have
captured your mind and taken your sight, but they have not destroyed
your soul. I am going to place my hands over your eyes and I want you
to concentrate as hard as you can.”
With that, Dean urged Thomas to stand up and listen. “Somewhere
deep in your mind you have the knowledge that God loves you and that
you and all mankind are precious to Him. Try to remember the love of
your wife Pearl and the love of your daughter. Thomas, believe all that
love will help you to see again and that God is with you.”
Several moments passed, as Dean transferred his love through his
hands and into Thomas' weakened eyes. Dean took his hands away and
kissed Thomas gently on his forehead. Slowly and hazily, the images
around Thomas became clearer. Bethany stood before him and even
though all her luxurious hair had been shaved off, he now recognised his
daughter's beautiful face. He grabbed her and covered her face with
kisses, crying, “I believe you baby, I love you, I love you!”
With Thomas' sudden found faith, clearer eyesight and the strength
he saw in his daughter, he and Bethany spent the rest of the night
spreading the words of hope to the people who could listen. Eventually,
leading her father towards Paul, she prepared him. “Daddy, the man I
love has disguised himself as a Sepian to get in unnoticed, please don't
be frightened when you meet him.”
Paul was dozing, peacefully hidden in a dark corner, when Bethany
arrived and whispered, “Wake up Paul, I've found my father, he's been a
prisoner here for all those lost years.”
Thomas looked on horrified, as Paul sat up and casually removed the
vile Sepian head, exclaiming: “Pleased to meet you Thomas!”
“Oh my God! Oh my God! It looks so real,” Thomas exclaimed. As
they sat, making plans for the escape, which would have to be the next
night, Thomas remembered the way he had been brought in.
“There was never any carriages or elevators, it was just a long steep
path that went down hill for about one and a half miles,” he said.
Thomas thought for a moment, then added, “I remember now, when we
were taken from the space ship, we walked over a small hill, then into a
369
large cave and the path went from there. Then we came to a steel door,
the Sepians inserted a key and the door fell into the ground like it was
never there, then we went into the compound.”
Paul calculated in his mind that they had landed about three miles
from the Mother Ship. Hopefully, that cave exit would be in close
proximity to where Dou Setta would land. He reasoned that it seemed
more feasible to get the people out that way, than the difficult way they
had come.
Just as the lights were coming back on, Dean walked over with about
twenty people following. He introduced them to Paul and Bethany.
“These are the only ones physically and mentally capable of helping
us,” he said.
It was decided that during the day Dean and Thomas, with several of
the other helpers, would infiltrate the adjoining compound, spreading
the plans for the escape that night. Meanwhile, Paul, still dressed as a
Sepian guard, would keep a low profile, continuing to drag poor
Bethany around like a rag doll.
Bethany glared at Paul, as he teasingly pinched her on the bottom.
“Don't worry babe, when we get back to Earth, I promise you can abuse
me!” he said with a sly laugh.
After the tasteless morning meal of cold cereal and water, a usually
depressing gloomy day had begun with optimism throughout the new
believers. By mid-day, Dean had convinced about thirty people in the
other compound that his escape plan would work. Just as the afternoon
seemed to be progressing drama free, four Sepians marched into the
compound and changed everything.
They stormed through the frightened multitude, grabbing several
men, looking them over, chaining their hands together and dragging
them along. “Oh no!” cried Thomas to Dean, “they're collecting
suitable males to make into androids.”
It was too late, the guards spotted Thomas looking tall and strong
and made their way quickly towards him and Dean. Within a few
moments, Dean and Thomas found themselves chained together and
pulled along like animals to the slaughter.
“Oh fuck!” cried Paul under his breath, as he and Bethany watched
helplessly, unable to do anything. One of the helpers ran to Bethany
and said, “I think the operating room is down the pathway where we
intend to go tonight, it's the first room on the left, after the gate!”
370
Paul grabbed the man on the shoulder and said, “Tell me everything
you know, we've got to get them out of there!”
Thomas' heart was pounding out of control and he thought he would
die of terror as they neared the operating room. The door opened and a
guard shoved Dean hard on the back. He turned around and glared
defiantly into the creature's evil yellow eyes, causing it to hiss with
anger.
Inside were four tables with huge circular lights above and an array
of laser instruments sitting beside each table. The guards threw Dean
and Thomas onto the cold rock floor and went to a computer panel,
checking strange symbols, which flashed across the screens.
Dean whispered to Thomas: “Don't show your fear, try to hold steady
eye contact, it confuses them.”
Thomas was shaking like a leaf. “Are you kidding, my balls are
rattling so fast I think they'll fall off any minute,” he said.
All of a sudden, one of the creatures unclipped the chain, pulling
Dean to his feet. He then ran his scaly hands over Dean's strong body,
inspected his head and then looked into his eyes. The strength and
power of Ilias bore deep into the creature's eyes and held them firmly.
The guard tried to look away, but was unable to do so. Strange
unpleasant vibrations were filling his head and making his body quiver
involuntarily. He felt off balance and groaned deeply.
The other guard strode over and was confused with the actions of his
companion. He shook him by the shoulders and yelled in a garbled
dialect, whilst pushing Dean aside.
Dean watched as they went over to the computer panel and spoke
together, before looking directly back at him. They pressed a
communicator button and Dean watched with revulsion as the ugly head
of Doldran appeared on another screen, wiping his saliva filled mouth
and hissing in the usual arrogant manner.
A conversation was held between them, and Dean knew it was about
him. The creatures then pushed them onto the tables and clamped their
arms and legs in heavy steel braces. Thomas let out a long wailing
noise, while Dean lay silent, praying for help. One of the guards strode
over to Dean, his head bent low, not meeting Dean's eyes, and said in
English: “Our leaders wish to inspect you before the operation, this will
happen in four hundred difons, enjoy your last sleep.”
371
Paul, Bethany and the helpers watched in silent fear as the four
guards walked out of the passageway and headed back towards the
compounds. “This is strange, other times, they have stayed in that room
for several hours, then came out with the converted androids,” said one
of the helpers.
“Maybe they're not doing the operation just yet,” said Paul.
“I have a gut feeling they won't do it until morning,” added Bethany,
trying her best to feel optimistic.
Regardless of what happened, it was decided that the escape would
go ahead as planned. There was no way the explosive devices could be
stopped.
They prayed that somehow Dean would be able to open the steel
door. At this stage, it seemed faith was all they had. It would take
several hours to evacuate all the people from the compounds past the
steel door and up the pathway. Paul gave instructions to the helpers to
start preparing the people for departure. He would take care of the
guard on the gate.
The Sepian looked startled at the sight of Paul walking towards him.
All the guards had left the compound, why was this lone one still here at
this late time?
Paul didn't hesitate, he strode directly up to his opponent with his
hand close to the laser pistol. The guard yelled out in the garbled
Sepian tongue, knowing that something was not right. In a split second,
Paul had drawn the pistol and the deadly blue beam seared through the
creature's head, throwing him to the ground. Paul stood over the guard
and spliced the beam over his stomach and the smell of burning flesh
wafted through the air. He grabbed the dead guard's pistol and rushed
back to Bethany and the helpers.
“Here babe, you're in charge, now get these people out of here and
check on your father and Dean. We can't get past that steel door without
Dean. I'll stay back at the end in case of visitors,” Paul said, pushing the
pistol into Bethany's hand and kissing her quickly.
The compounds were in a state of confusion as helpers urged the
people to file through the gates. The ones who understood what was
happening tried desperately to help those who shuffled around like
zombies.
Bethany yelled: “Get a move on! Hurry! We don't have all night!” as
she now ran frantically towards the operating room. Trying her best to
372
hold the fabit steady in her shaking hands, Bethany inserted the blade,
as she prayed her father and Dean would be alive.
The door opened and she cried with relief at two normal faces
looking thankfully at her. “Where are the androids kept? Can we get
them out too?” yelled Bethany, as she unlocked the clamps from their
legs and arms.
Thomas glanced at Dean and said: “There's almost five hundred
androids. They are only programmed to do Xiha's bidding. It's no use,
they are not human any longer and we can't help them,” was his sad
reply.
Collecting a torch, Dean and Bethany led the multitude of struggling
humanityalong the pathway towards the steel door, while Thomas
walked alongside trying his best to hurry everyone along.
Dean approached the door and cautioned the people to stand back as
he placed his hand over the area where a key would have been inserted.
He concentrated and slowly his telepathic powers released the
mechanism. Within the blink of an eye, the huge door dropped through
an opening in the ground.
Xiha woke from his long restful sleep. He felt relaxed after many
hectic days of pleasure. Doldran was already awake, had eaten and was
now impatiently waiting to inspect the new android specimens. “One of
our guards informed me that there is something very strange about one
of the humans,” he snarled.
Xiha readied himself and said, “You told me that last night you
moron, that's why we are checking on him first, now, let's get going you
half wit!”
Dean checked the time. They only had one hour before Dou Setta
would land, then fifteen minutes to get everyone on board before the
charges went off. “Shit! We're not going to make it Bethany, some of
these people will be left behind if they don't hurry!” Dean yelled
frantically, as he ran back down the line, urging everyone to move
faster.
Paul felt relief as he shut the gate behind the last group, urging them
on like lost sheep. “Keep them moving, I'll check around the
compounds for others, I'll catch up with you soon,” he said to a helper,
as they disappeared down the dark passageway.
373
Paul was surprised that everyone was out, after checking
everywhere, including the latrines. Only eight woman breeders were
held in a room somewhere, pending labour. “Their chances of survival
are slim, we can't save everyone,” Paul thought sadly.
Before leaving, Paul decided to hide the guard's body and check the
gate area again. There was still twenty minutes before the lights would
be turned on and a further ten minutes before the morning meal and a
change of guard. He wasn't worried about time, he could easily run up
the passageway and catch up with them in twenty minutes.
That idea was a big mistake!
As he slid the guard's body under some seating near the gate, Paul
stood up and dusted himself off. He turned around and his eyes blinked
in fright. The familiar figure of Doldran, followed by Xiha and two
guards, stood only metres away. He couldn't run, he had to stall them.
“Oh fuck! How am I going to pull this off?” he said under his breath.
Doldran spoke in the Sepian tongue and Paul tried his best to just
grunt in understanding. The guards walked over and peered into the
dark emptiness of the enclosure, hissing strangely to each other, then
speaking to Xiha. Doldran stood close to Paul, so close, Paul could feel
his putrid breath clouding his eyes.
Suddenly, the vile thing had him by the shoulders, peering deep into
his eyes and knowing he wasn't one of them!
Doldran let out a high pitched wail and smashed his hand across
Paul's head. Paul fell to the ground with such force that the Sepian head
rolled off his shoulders. The excruciating sounds coming from the
Sepians made Paul shudder with terror. He knew his fate and just
prayed that the others would escape in time.
Dou Setta checked the co-ordinates as he engaged the invisible
shield and prepared for descent onto Greygate. Nubon heard the static
on the coded transceiver. “Dean must be trying to communicate,” he
thought. Several minutes later, the familiar voice came through. “Dou
Setta, we have the people with us and should rendezvous as planned.
We will be emerging from a large cave about one and a half miles North
West from Xiha's Mother Ship.”
374
Thomas and the helpers prodded the stragglers like sheep until they
started to run. Bethany could see the hazy light of dawn at the end of
the passageway; they were almost there.
“Dou Setta will be landing any moment now, get the people on board
Bethany, I am going to check on Paul,” Dean yelled, running back along
the line of rushing bodies.
Finally, Dean came to the end of the line and there was no sign of
Paul. He grabbed the last helper and yelled: “Where's Paul? Where the
hell is he?” The helper glanced around behind him and answered: “He
stayed back a while to check everything, he should be coming soon.”
Dean felt his stomach sink with fear; he knew his friend had been
captured. He held the man firm by the hand, “You listen to me, do as I
say, get everyone on that ship and out of here, don't wait for me, I'll get
Paul, OK?”
Xiha attached the electrical probes onto Paul's naked chest and
screamed at him again: “Tell us where they've gone and how you got in
here!”
Paul cleared his throat and braced his body for the onslaught of pain.
“Go fuck yourself shit face!!” he answered defiantly. Doldran smashed
down hard on the button and instantly Paul's body convulsed in burning
spasms of excruciating agony, testing every nerve end to capacity.
When the ordeal was over, Paul's pain filled face slumped forward like a
rag doll.
Xiha was going wild like a mad manic animal. Doldran snarled,
indicating to Paul, “Don't waste time on him, we must search for the
humans!”
Just as they were about to walk out the door of the operating room,
the silhouette of a human male filled the darkness beyond the opened
door.
“Xiha, I think it's me you want, not my companion!”
The tone of the voice made Xiha stand still. He felt uncomfortable.
Dean walked forward, he was now wearing his tight black pants and his
strong chest was bare except for the crystal around his neck. As he
emerged into the soft light, one of the guards recognised him and
mumbled to Doldran, who in turn said, “So, you are the human that is
strange, you were clever to escape.”
Dean glanced at Paul, who was starting to move his head slowly,
waking from the nightmare. Dean stood only a metre from Xiha, and
375
stared defiantly into the eyes of pure evil and spoke calmly. “I can tell
you everything you want to know, including the location of Harmoni,
whom you didn't kill. I have within my mind all the knowledge you will
need to defeat Dou Setta.”
“He's lying! It's a trick,” said Doldran.
“Xiha, I challenge you to combat, human against creature, you
choose the weapons and you set the rules. If I win, my companion goes
free and you will have me as your prisoner. If I lose, then you will have
us both, you have nothing to lose either way and it will be entertainment
for your guards to watch.”
Xiha thought for a moment. This human was very strange and
physical combat with a human who had unusual strength and courage
could be very entertaining. He was more than confident he would win
anyway, and answered: “Yes, we will fight!”
Doldran let out a funny guttural sound and went to find some
weapons. Dean noticed that Paul had woken and he said to Xiha: “I
would like you to release my companion from the table and give him
water.”
Psychically, Dean communicated with Paul's mind and telepathicly
said: “Don't hesitate, when you get the opportunity, run for the
passageway, don’t look back, I will be OK.”
The guards cleared the room and moved the tables, pushing Paul
beside the door, knowing he wouldn't run and leave his companion, until
the fight was over. Paul had come to his senses, he knew time was
running out, and even now, it could be too late. He shook his body in
readiness for a fast run.
Xiha chose the weapons. They were two ancient swords. He threw
one to Dean, saying, “These you should recognise from Earth, they
belonged to two humans who tried to defeat me, but lost, just like you!”
Dean straightened his shoulders and looked at the sword, a weapon
he had never used before. Holding the blade close to his chest, he called
on Ilias' strength for combat and Harmoni's guidance of mind. Doldran
and the guards stood back, their ugly mouths wide with excitement,
their yellow eyes burning with evil passion.
The moment the battle began, Paul slipped silently out the door, then
ran for his life, not looking back.
The sound of clashing steel rang out loudly through the heavy air, as
Dean ducked and avoided every powerful blow Xiha made towards him.
376
Ilias' strength poured through Dean's shoulders and into his arms, giving
him power that baffled Xiha as they now fought equally with unbridled
force.
Dou Setta turned to Bethany, who was screaming hysterically with
worry that Paul was being left behind. “We have no choice Bethany, we
have to leave. I've left one of the fighters for them, it's all we can do.”
Thomas placed an arm around his crying daughter and said: “They
knew the odds baby, let's just pray to God they somehow get out before
detonation.”
Bethany's tear-filled eyes saw the time ticking away beside her and
she knew it would be a miracle if they made it. At that moment, she
was reminded of Paul's words to her when Dean disappeared in the
sphere: “That the mind can make miracles happen.”
Dean looked into the eyes of the devil for the last time. He knew this
thrust would be the last one. The tainted silver steel from long, long ago
sliced fiercely through the neck of Xiha. Green blood gushed out as the
creature screamed in defeated agony, his body writhing in bursts of
pain. Dean knew Doldran held a laser pistol ready to fire behind his
back, he swung around and in one fierce swipe, sliced the creature's
head from its shoulders. Dean threw the sword on the ground and
placed his hands firmly to his temples, concentrating deep within his
subconscious. The guards blinked their yellow eyes in disbelief. The
human had disappeared.
Paul felt his heart beating out of control, his legs were like jelly, the
muscles searing beyond the pain barrier, as his exhausted body ran the
final strides to freedom.
The sight of the Estibulian fighter sitting outside the cave made Paul
inhale a deep breath of relief, then, suddenly, from out of nowhere, the
familiar figure of Dean was urging him to hurry as he ran up the steps.
Both of them yelled out in unity: “What took you so long?”
377
CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE
Farewell to Estibulos
Aboard Dou Setta's spacecraft, everyone watched anxiously as the
seconds quickly ticked away from six minutes to detonation.
“We will clear the planet's atmosphere in time, but I do not think
Dean has a chance. Even if they departed now, it would be too late,”
Nubon said to Thomas and Bethany, who were shedding tears of despair
and deep sorrow.
“It just can't end like this,” Bethany cried.
Nubon switched on the projector screen, in the slim hope that the
fighter craft had left the planet. The image of the Sepian Mother Ship
appeared, then the scanner moved North West towards the cave
entrance. There was nothing; Nubon zoomed in as close as possible
and picked up the outline of the cave...there was no fighter craft. “It's
gone! It's not there!” he yelled excitedly.
Dean held the controls at top speed as they flew against time to the
boundaries of Greygate's stratosphere. Paul watched the tail end of Dou
Setta's ship on their projector screen, as it spliced through the planet's
safe outer limits.
“They've made it!' he exclaimed, then watched with fear as the
seconds ticked away. There were two minutes to detonation.
“We're not going to make it,” Paul said under his breath. Dean knew
the first charges were not as strong as the set that would explode thirty
seconds later. It was the latter blast, which would completely destroy
Greygate. He prayed to God they could somehow just make it.
Paul's heart beat loud with each second...seven, six, five, four...he
knew they were at least a minute from safety…three, two, one....
378
Dean braced himself for what he knew would be the shock waves
hitting them any moment. Paul made the sign of the cross, his mind
ablaze with memories of Bethany.
Suddenly, the distant moon-like terrain of the tiny planet blew into
vaporous black clouds alive with burning rocks. The projector screen
went blank and static came from the communicator speakers. Instantly,
the fierce shock waves flew through the atmosphere, carrying with them
dark grey gases tinged with red-hot debris. “Brace yourself Paul!!”
Dean yelled, as the shock waves enveloped the tiny fighter. Dean held
tight to the controls as the craft was twisted and shaken like a cork in a
hurricane. He struggled to keep on course, knowing the next blast from
below would annihilate them.
The atmosphere was heavy and black, as the seconds to the next
detonation ticked away...five, four, three, two, one!
With just a fifth of a second, less than a heartbeat, the fighter broke
through into the safety of deep space. Dean eased back on the controls,
his tense hands now shaking with relief. Paul had his head bent, giving
thanks in silent prayer; the ordeal was over.
Nubon placed his long thin arm around Bethany as they watched the
projector screen and Greygate explode into oblivion and then the
ghostly blackness of finality.
Dou Setta scanned around the perimeter of the destroyed planet's
stratosphere and watched disbelievingly as a small fighter came into
view.
Just then, a voice they never thought they would hear again came
over the communicator, amid loud static.
“Hello Dou Setta! We're right behind you!”
Bethany cried and laughed at the same time, whilst flinging her arms
around everyone, finally lifting little Dou Setta off the ground and into
her thankful arms. Thomas was crossing himself and praying out loud
praising God, whilst hundreds of people shouted and applauded
ecstatically.
Nubon couldn't contain himself and, understanding the human sense
of humour, called back through the communicator:
“What took you so long?”
As Dou Setta eased back on the speed so Dean could catch up, he
turned to the crowd of relieved people and said, “The gates of Hell have
379
been destroyed for all time; from now on, you will have the freedom of
your own path.”
With those words, every human who was capable of remembering
knew that path would be back to planet Earth.
From amongst the masses of men, women and children, Alexandros
walked forward, carrying the limp body of a young woman in his arms.
Bethany and Nubon gazed upon her ashen face, where dark circles
covered a pair of sunken eyes; her breathing was faint and shallow.
“I don't think she is going to last long, is there anything we can do?”
asked Alexandros.
Nubon took the woman's hand and felt the slow pulse. “We can
place her in a healing cylinder and hope for the best,” he replied.
There were only six healing cylinders on the ship, and with at least
two hundred people or more in very bad shape, only the ones close to
death could be treated first.
Alexandros placed her carefully in the cylinder and watched as
Nubon checked her vital signs. “She has had massive internal
haemorrhaging from her female organs and her blood count is very low,
I will do what I can,” he said.
“Her name is Colleen, she is about twenty years old. I remember she
gave birth about three months ago, she has been dying ever since,”
Alexandros choked back tears, recalling the Irish girl's once sparkling
green eyes when she arrived several years ago.
Dou Setta opened the landing bay in preparation for Dean's arrival.
Bethany and her father were already standing close to the entrance.
From out of the deep blue curtain of space, the familiar shape of an
Estibulian fighter slowly glided towards the landing bay.
Paul was first to jump from the steps, his still exhausted body
somehow able to run to Bethany. As they embraced tightly, she said,
“Now you're the one who needs a long hot bath!”
Dean watched his friends and thought of how he longed to embrace
Kavita again, to feel her love and the softness of her touch. A great
sadness enveloped his soul, he wanted desperately to go home.
The long journey back to Estibulos was filled with the slow
progression of healing the many humans who were so desperately ill and
who lay in a state of exhaustion and starvation. Dean, Paul and Bethany
walked among the masses, giving comfort and support, showing them
their horror existence was finally over.
380
They decided it was still too soon to explain about the new Earth.
Meanwhile, Dou Setta had examined several people who had suffered
severe mind conversion and came to the conclusion that the temporal
lobe operation could be reversed successfully.
Amid the mesmerising lights and shadows of space, the beautiful
planet of Estibulos gradually emerged on the projector screen. Dean,
who was washed and dressed in clean black pants and purple jacket,
stood watching as Dou Setta made preparations for landing. The city of
Pilot loomed before them in all it's re-built glory and the vision of
Harmoni's pyramid almost completed, made Dean smile with happiness.
Dean and Paul carried out a head count of all people as they departed
the spacecraft to alight on the splendour, which was Estibulos.
Alexandros took Colleen by the hand; the healing session had worked
and the fragile body of the young Irish girl breathed new life and hope.
During the voyage, not one human had died, even though many needed
urgent care and were critically ill. Optimism reigned among the two
thousand Earthlings who now walked in wonder among the gentle
Estibulians.
For several weeks, Pilot was in a state of joyful celebration that the
evil in their Galaxy had been destroyed. The crew of the Mother Ship
had successfully terminated most Sepians on their own planet, forcing
the small number remaining to live hidden in fear amongst the decaying
land.
On the planet Knod, the Sepians had been overthrown by the beings
they held as slaves, no longer would the vile creatures dominate their
lives!
Meanwhile, the Estibulians made two thousand new garments in a
cream-like silk fabric for the humans as they regained their health whilst
heartily eating plentiful fruit and vegetables.
Dean had been visiting Harmoni in her new Pyramid when he passed
by a group of children listening to stories being told by young
Estibulians. One of the children, a boy of about six years old, looked up
and smiled at Dean. At the sight of the boy's sparkling brown eyes,
Dean was reminded of Yianni at that age. He remembered his sister
Helen, Kavita, Gordon and his wonderful mother Leeanne, and he knew
it was time to return home.
381
Even before Dean walked into the Seat of Order room, Dou Setta
knew the agenda of the meeting.
The past weeks had been filled with great joy and happiness. The
sick humans were healthy again, their minds and senses returning to
normal, although their memories would be scarred with an evil darkness
for a long time to come.
The door opened and Dean strode in, looking every inch the hero in
black pants, loose white shirt and laser pistol on his waist. His bald
head was now showing about half an inch of spiky black hair, a slim
reminder of his days as a captive.
Dou Setta blinked his huge eyes, knowing soon that his friend would
be leaving.
Dean held the small alien's hands and warm waves of friendship
flowed through their bodies; their eyes linked with the psychic cord of
knowledge that the ancient Atlantean prophecy had been fulfilled.
“I will miss you my friend,” said Dean, “but I am sure in a future
time, we will meet again.” To Nubon and the six Karas who sat at the
table, Dean said, “I cannot place into human words the gratitude we all
feel for your help in restoring the health of our hundreds of Earthlings. I
will never forget Estibulos, you and your planet will remain in my heart
and soul for all time. Now the moment has come for us to make plans
for our voyage back to Earth.”
During the meeting, it was decided that Nubon would take Dou
Setta's ship and accompany them safely home. They would land on
Atlantis and the spacecraft would only stay a few days before returning
to Estibulos.
The morning of departure dawned on the city of Pilot. The
inhabitants felt sorrow at losing two thousand Earthlings who had
become their friends over the past weeks.
The story of Dean, his companions, Paul and Bethany, would be told
for future generations of Estibulians; it was a story of great courage and
strength of mind to overcome their Galaxy's evil Sepians; a story of
Harmoni's special spiritual connection to Dean as brother and sister, and
the fulfilment of the ancient Atlantean prophecy:
'That a young man will walk the earth spreading the words of love,
peace and faith and that he will lead his people into a new world, and
382
with his spiritual link to Atlantis, he will conquer the evil which
threatens other worlds.'
The last of the people waved goodbye to the multitude of Estibulians
who gathered for the farewell.
As he walked up the steps of the ship, Thomas held his daughter
Bethany's hand, his mind was ablaze with excitement that he was
actually going home; home to America and his wife Pearl.
Dean, Paul and Nubon were the last to board. They turned and Dean
and Paul waved passionately with sad hearts, as this was farewell to
Estibulos.
383
CHAPTER THIRTY SIX
Return to a green planet.
Nubon sat at the control panel with Dean looking on, he pressed
several computer buttons and read the data to his friend. “As you know,
it is a six day journey back to Earth, that is six of your Earth months.
Do you know just how long you have been away from your home
Dean?”
Dean tried to calculate the galaxy time and said, “Ahh, roughly about
nine years.”
Nubon checked the figures again and replied, “Ten years, eight
months and two days, to be precise my friend.”
Dean scratched his head in wonder at the extraordinary difference in
time and thought of all the people with him, who would have been away
from Earth for so many years. Many of their loved ones would have
died. The enormity of the situation hit Dean hard and he realised he
would have to break this news of the New Earth very soon.
They were into their third day of travel from Estibulos, almost half
way home. Every time her father had reminisced on his past years
before his abduction, and the impending joy of knowing soon, he would
stand on American soil again, Bethany had changed the subject.
Now as she sat with her father, Bethany knew the truth had to be
told. “Daddy, there's something I must tell you, the earth as you knew it
is not the same, many things have changed.” Bethany was finding it
difficult to know where to start and she fumbled on while Thomas sat
silently listening.
“Well, for a start, there are no more wars, famines, and people do not
fight, we all live in peace. What I mean is, racial and religious
differences are gone, the people live and work together in harmony.”
384
Thomas smiled and said, “My goodness, that is wonderful news.
How could that have happened in the short time I was away?”
Bethany squeezed her father's hand and said, “Daddy, by the time we
arrive back on Earth, you will have been away almost twenty-eight
years.”
Paul walked over and noticing the shocked look on Thomas' face, he
helped Bethany explain the dynamics of space-time. Finally, Thomas
said, “So, just how did the population of Earth become peaceful?”
Before they could answer, the strong voice of Dean was calling
everyone to order. “Please, may I have everyone's attention!”
Bethany shot Paul a look of relief that she didn't have to tell the
story, both knew that Dean had that situation under control, as he said:
“We are about three days from Earth, calculated in Earth time, that is
close to three months. This may come as a huge shock to you, but when
we arrive back home, the year will be 2025 A.S. - after sunrise.”
There were cries of disbelief and loud gasps of shock from the crowd
as Dean continued to tell the horrific story of the destruction of the old
world they had known and loved. “I realise that for many of you, the
countries you once called home will no longer exist and the loved ones
you left behind may have passed on, for this, we all share in the same
sorrow and grief. However, for the small population of some one
hundred and sixty four thousand people on Earth, your safe return will
be one of the greatest miracles to ever occur.
“The planet you will return to now is like a Garden of Eden, rich in
beauty and health with an abundance of food for all. We cannot change
the past, that is history, we must live for today and give thanks for our
precious gift of life,” he said.
After Dean answered the many questions from the crowd, a strange
silence hung over the multitude, who were trying desperately to come to
terms with the news they had just heard.
***
Leeanne looked on proudly, as her grandson Yianni walked from the
Church as an ordained priest. The young man, only three weeks off his
twentieth birthday, was now a priest serving with Father Colin Britton at
the parish in Katoomba.
385
Leeanne squeezed Gordon's hand and spoke sadly, “I am so proud, I
only wish Dean had been here to see this day.”
Helen embraced her son as Gordon looked on and said, “We all feel
like that, especially Helen and Carlos.
During the past ten years, Father Britton's Church had been the
centre of many joyous occasions. First, it was the marriage of Anna and
Steven, who also had a traditional Krishna service at the Ashram. Then
it was the marriage of Tina and Antonio, followed by the baptism of
their daughter Rachael. Anna and Steven's three children had been
welcomed into both the Christian and Hindu faiths equally.
Then, there was the surprise decision by Kavita that she wanted
Father Britton to baptise her sons, the same as their father, long ago in
the old world. Colin Britton was shocked as he understood how strict a
Hindu Kavita had been, but she had assured him the twins should follow
their father.
More than ever in the new world, most religions had moved into one
universal belief in all that was good and just.
Yianni walked over to his grandparents, he had to tell them the good
news. Gordon had a psychic flash of just what Yianni was going to say,
as Yianni's sparkling eyes met Leeanne's. “Grandma, when I was
kneeling in silent prayer during the ordination, Dean spoke to me, they
are on their way home. Grandma, he'll be back in four weeks, they will
be landing on Atlantis!”
Suddenly, Leeanne felt a little faint, her heart skipped a beat then
palpitated irregularly. She grabbed Gordon by the arm.
“I must sit down, I feel giddy.”
Gordon and Yianni walked her to a nearby seat, noticing her face
become pale and ashen. Helen raced over with a glass of water; she was
aware her mother had not been well for several weeks.
“Don't fuss, don't fuss darling, I'm OK,” Leeanne said, noticing deep
concern in her daughter's eyes.
That night, as Gordon snuggled close to Leeanne, he whispered, “I
know how stubborn you are, but please darling, will you let me do a
healing around your chest?”
Leeanne grabbed her husband's hand and held it firm to her breast
and said, “There, feel that, my heart will beat forever with you beside
me. Go ahead, do some healing, but I tell you, I'm just fine.”
386
***
On board the Estibulian spaceship, Nubon woke Dean, Paul and
Bethany from their sleeping chambers, it would soon be time to contact
Atlantis. “Do you want me to inform Earth of the two thousand people
we have on board?” Nubon said to Dean, who was dressing.
“No Nubon, I'd like it to be a wonderful surprise!” was the reply.
Bethany rummaged through a pile of clothes, hoping to find her old
blue jeans, although she expected Nubon had thrown out all their old
clothes with disgust, a long time ago. Paul was happy with his usual
black pants and laughed, “I suppose you're going to say you can't find
anything to wear!”
Bethany smirked and replied, “Well, I'd like something nice, after all,
I haven't seen my mother and aunt Mapel for ten years!” Finally,
Bethany had to settle for the same black pants as Paul and a red leather
vest.
There were ecstatic shouts of joy at the World Communication Base
on Atlantis when the voice of Nubon came in over the transceiver.
“Hello Atlantis! We will be hitting Earth's atmosphere in about forty
eight hours, please make preparations.”
That message was relayed around the Earth at every communications
base, with the Ayers Rock base in Australia repeatedly blaring it loudly
many times throughout the day.
At Springbrook and Katoomba, preparations were under way for the
long awaited arrival of Dean, Paul and Bethany. The close families and
friends of the three would travel to Atlantis on several shuttlecraft, to be
there when the spaceship landed. All around the planet, there was
excitement and joy because finally, the space travellers were returning
safely.
Dean sat with his eyes transfixed to the projector screen, any
moment now, they would be slicing through Earth's atmosphere.
From out of the dark emptiness of space, suddenly hazy lights and
shadows danced on the end of his vision. Through the shadows and
swirls, planet Earth appeared as a small green and blue ball. Dean
turned around and yelled to Paul, Bethany and Thomas. “Quick! Come
and look, it's earth!”
Thomas couldn't believe his eyes, he crossed himself, saying, “Thank
you, God,” as he hugged his daughter and Paul.
387
Gradually, the planet became larger and more defined. Hundreds of
people crowded around the projector screens, their eyes finding it
difficult to believe they would soon be home. There were tears and
heavy sobs as people embraced each other, looking with wonder at the
new earth with two suns.
Alexandros held Colleen tight as tears streamed down her cheeks. “I
remember Ireland was green, but now the whole earth looks green,” she
said with surprise. Alexandros' heart was heavy with sadness that he
would never see his beloved Spain again; he held back his feelings and
said, “Colleen, we may have lost our home countries, but think of the
exciting future we have exploring a new and beautiful earth.”
The fragile Irish girl gave a weak smile. “You mean, you'll take me
travelling with you?” she said.
Alexandros bent down and kissed her softly, replying, “I'm never
going to leave your side.”
The large landing area just beyond the Atlantis base was fringed with
hundreds of people all eagerly awaiting the arrival. Several Karas stood
on either side of Leeanne, Gordon, Kavita and the twins, Helen, Carlos
and Yianni. While behind them, GP, Trish, Nathan, Yvonne and Alpha
waited, whilst talking with Father Britton and Albert and Gail
Braithwaite. From among the crowd, Aunt Mapel and Pearl shoved
their way forward, not wanting to stand behind anyone.
Pearl stood her huge frame next to Leeanne and said, “Wait 'till I see
that girl of mine, I'll give her a talking to for running away for ten years.
I've been worried sick, I have!”
Suddenly, from out of nowhere, the sight many people never thought
they would see again, appeared larger than life. The huge silver disc
shaped craft hovered above the island with hazy beams of light emitting
from its surface. Gradually, it descended, landing pads ready for
touchdown, a pale vapour ghost of energy swirling underneath.
At the moment of touchdown, there were loud cheers of joy and
applause filled with passion from the spectators. The vibrant glow from
the two suns, which were close to setting, touched the spacecraft with
electrifying colours of silver and gold. From out of the still warm air,
music like delicate harps and flutes softly flowed, as the many doors to
the craft now opened.
388
Nubon appeared, with Dean and Paul on either side and together they
walked down the steps. Three Karas followed, and then came Bethany
and her father. The cheers and applause had faded, the crowd stood
silent and motionless as their eyes could not believe the sight before
them. From the many doors, walked hundreds of men, women and
children, dressed in pale cream garments.
Their skin colours were white, brown, yellow and some with a tinge
of grey, with their heads showing short crops of hair. Humans,
hundreds of humans, now followed Dean, Paul and Nubon towards the
shocked crowd.
Kavita let go of the twins and ran towards Dean, turbulent tears of
joy flowing down her face. Gone was his long thick hair, he looked
different; she didn't care; he was back! Her Sanjay was home!
She was dressed in the same blue sari that she wore when they first
kissed under the wood apple tree, and, naturally, older that he
remembered.
Dean bundled Kavita up into his arms and kissed her deeply,
relishing the long forgotten softness of her touch. Close behind her, the
twins now stood looking with surprise at the father they had never
known. Dean saw them and slowly placed Kavita back on the ground.
Grabbing hold of their hands, Kavita said, “Dean, these are your sons,
Mukunda and Sanjay.”
Emotion like he had never known before filled every fibre of his
body, as his tear-filled eyes beheld the two ten-year-old boys. “Oh my
God! Oh my God!” were the only words he could utter as he flung his
arms around his children.
As she approached her mother, Bethany held her father's hand. Pearl
had never been lost for words before, but now, the plump woman was
struck dumbfounded, her mouth open wide in shock! Aunt Mapel kept
crossing herself with disbelief at the sight of Thomas standing as
handsome as ever before them.
Finally Pearl came to her senses and blurted out: “Where in the hell
have you been for the past eighteen years? And why don't you look any
older?”
Thomas flung his arms around Pearl, who was now starting to cry
and said, “To tell the truth, I have been to Hell and back, Pearl.”
Leeanne and Gordon embraced Dean, oblivious of the multitude of
people still walking from the spacecraft. Dean hugged his mother and
389
became acutely aware that she was not well. He kissed her cheek and
said softly, “You've no need to worry any longer, I'm home for good,
Mum.”
From out of the crowd, Father Britton walked with Yianni towards
them. Dean noticed Yianni wearing the stiff, white collar underneath
the black shirt and a pair of blue jeans. As they embraced, Dean said, “I
always knew you would be a Priest some day, my boy.”
Yianni smiled at the uncle he adored and replied: “And I always
knew you would return with a precious gift, the lives of two thousand
people is the greatest gift our world could ever have!”
Eventually, everyone gave their welcome embraces to Dean, Paul,
Bethany and Thomas.
Dean was overwhelmed with the wonderful sight of Anna and
Stephen, happily married, with three small children.
After the initial excitement had subsided, Dean addressed the
thousands before him, explaining how the people had come from the
horrors of Greygate. Miraculously, there had been many surviving
relatives or friends of the Greygate captives.
In turn, Gordon and Leeanne spoke emotionally of the wonderful and
complete rejuvenation of the green planet and the peace and harmony
which now existed.
That evening, the whole of Atlantis was in a festive mood.
Thousands of people sang and danced and ate heartily from tables laden
with fresh fruit, nuts, cheeses and breads.
Gordon glanced sideways at his wife; she looked very tired.
“Come on, we'll leave the young ones to it. Let's go to bed darling,”
he said, taking her by the arm.
Nikolas Hionides had watched in awe as the spaceship hovered over
Atlantis; they would be late for the arrival and he yelled to Gerard to
hurry.
That was two and a half hours ago, and now, finally, they had arrived
at the Base. Amid the large noisy crowd of people celebrating, Nikolas
watched as a man and woman walked hand in hand toward them, then
turned right. Even from this distance, Nikolas knew who they were. He
yelled excitedly to Gerard: “It's Leeanne and Gordon, come on, let's
catch them!”
390
Leeanne stopped, and recognised the long flowing garments of a
Priest with a young man beside him.
“Gordon, I think that could be Nikolas, wait a minute,” she said,
breathlessly.
The same long grey hair tied in a ponytail, framed the now aged face
of her dear friend.
“Oh Nikolas! I'm so happy to see you,” Leeanne cried as she hugged
him tightly. Gerard looked the same, only all grown up at twenty years,
a young man.
“How are your parents?” inquired Gordon. Gerard's sad eyes looked
downcast, as he said, “They both passed away three years ago, I've been
working the farm with two helpers ever since.”
When Gordon informed them they would only be staying two or
three days, then returning to Australia with Dean, Nikolas insisted they
spend a day at the farm.
“Please come back with us tomorrow, spend the night, we've so
many years to catch up.”
Leeanne smiled and answered, “Now that I have my son safely
home, I can't think of anything in the world I would like more than to
spend a day on Dimitri's old farm with you two.”
391
CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN
A lone seagull...
On the far tip of Atlantis stood the small peninsular area, which was
once part of Santorini. The destruction of the old world had taken most
of the majestic island to the bottom of the sea, only a thin section from
Oia to Imerovigli remained intact.
Uncle Dimitri's farm had survived the catastrophic earthquake and
Gerard had kept the farm just as it was twenty-five years ago.
The same wild springtime daisies sprouted in clusters on the green
velvet earth, donkeys grazed contentedly as Leeanne and Gordon
approached the old familiar farmhouse. Suddenly, from behind the
house, a small black and white dog came running towards them, barking
loudly. Leeanne gasped in shock, it looked like Zeus when he was a
pup. Gerard grabbed the dog and held him high for Leeanne to pat, and
said, “Zeus died years ago of old age, and this little rascal is the result of
one of his many affairs in the island!”
Nikolas gave the yapping bundle a fond squeeze and said,
“Appropriately, we called him Zeus II.”
An indescribable feeling of happiness consumed Leeanne, as she and
Gordon wandered around the familiar farm, memories flooded her mind
like yesterday. A yesterday when she rode on the back of Nikolas' bike
to visit Uncle Dimitri for the first time, sharing his home made red wine
and enjoying the taste of feta cheese, olives and fresh bread; a yesterday
of all the Sunday lunches they shared with Philippe and Fred in the
warm summer of '94.
Leeanne stored the memories up in a treasure chest and held them
deep in her mind, while her soul held the timeless love she had for
Gordon, her Zaiot.
392
Gerard had excelled himself in the art of Greek cooking and was
busy in the kitchen making moussaka and seafood saganaki, when
Gordon walked in. “That smells delicious Gerard, I miss the taste of
Greek food, I wish Leeanne would cook it more often,” he said, helping
himself to a bowl of ripe olives.
“Dinner won't be for another hour, so why don't you join me in an
ouzo outside,” said Gerard.
Leeanne walked slowly up the hill towards the wild orange trees and
Philippe's grave. This was a time she wanted to be alone. Soft golden
rays of the fading sunlight skipped over the silken grass and she bent
down, picking a handful of daisies and smelling the delicate perfume.
Philippe's grave was the same as she remembered. Leeanne knelt
down and replaced the withered flowers with her fresh daisies and
noticed the small new cross a few feet away. On the cross was written,
'Zeus -Philippe's best friend.'
A warm contentment filled Leeanne's mind as she remembered
Philippe and Zeus. It felt strange, like they were here beside her now,
she could feel them; smell them. Suddenly, from within her deep subconscious, she could hear their voices calling, happy voices, full of joy
and love...then, a cold premonition that her time in this incarnation was
fading.
Dinner was almost ready, so Nikolas walked up the hill to fetch
Leeanne. She stood, just as he approached and smiled, her eyes gazing
into his, with their unique friendship. As the sunset glowed around the
wild orange trees, Nikolas had a psychic vision from Mother Mary; her
gentle voice whispered through his mind, “Leeanne's life is fading.”
He didn't want to hear something like that, so blocked it out!
“Dinner is ready, your favourite mousaka and saganaki, from the best
cook in Atlantis, come, it awaits you, my Queen,” said Nikolas, placing
a caring arm around his dear friend, as they walked back toward the
house.
Halfway down, Leeanne stopped, feeling her heart murmuring
strangely, and asked Nikolas to sit awhile. She turned to him and said,
“Nikolas, if anything should happen to me, I want you to promise that
you'll bury me here on Atlantis.”
Nikolas' eyes were wide with shock and he said, “Don't say things
like that, nothing is going to happen to you.”
393
Leeanne took his hand in hers and continued, “Please Nikolas, listen
to me, I have had a bad heart for a long time now, I don't want doctors
or healers to cure me. This is my choice, the time I have decided to go.”
Nikolas felt a lump in his throat. He fought to hold his emotions in
check. “No, no you're too young Leeanne, you could live for another
twenty years,” he said, squeezing her hand reassuringly.
“I won't be going back to Australia; this is my home, it's where I
belong, Nikolas. You don't have to bury me near Philippe, it can be
anywhere, anywhere on my beloved Atlantis.”
Nikolas couldn't talk. He was consumed with fear and sadness. He
wanted to cry, but couldn't and sat numb with an awful emptiness inside.
“Come on, I'm starving,” said Leeanne in a voice tinged with
laughter, as she pulled Nikolas to his feet.
Gordon watched them walking arm in arm down the hill. Their
bodies were silhouetted against the fading light. He held the shape of
his wife's body and his eyes blinked at the sudden vision of her aura. As
he gulped the last mouthful of ouzo, he watched the colours of her aura
fading. From the usual vibrant purple, mauves and pinks, came a weak
flickering of pale silver and white, with some of the aura disappearing
completely.
With a strong psychic realisation, Gordon spoke out loud to himself.
“Well God, if it's going to be this way, then she's not going without me,
and that's a fact!”
During dinner that night, Leeanne joked and laughed about the past
years. Of the exciting, yet frightening summer at the Down Under Bar,
and Dundee, who was still at The Haven. Gerard couldn't stop laughing
when Leeanne told the story of Dou Setta and Nubon's arrival at the
barbecue and how Dundee had scared the life out of the tiny alien.
Gordon and Nikolas had to laugh at the way Leeanne told the stories,
though their hearts were heavy with an impending sadness.
That night, in bed, Gordon made love to Leeanne with the same soft
gentleness as the first time their bodies met. He knew she was very
tired and weak, but he also knew it may well be the last time for both of
them. He spoilt her with all the love and tenderness that would last for
eternity!
After a delicious breakfast of thick yoghurt and honey, followed by
platters of fresh fruit, it was time to head back to the base. Gerard
394
needed to stay on the farm, and, as he kissed Leeanne goodbye, he felt it
would be a long, long time before they met again.
“Take good care of little Zeus,” she said, as the overwhelming
feeling that she was embracing Philippe consumed her.
Meanwhile, at the base, Dean had spent most of the day renewing his
special friendship with Yianni, the nephew he hadn't seen in more than
ten years. As they sat chatting outside the magnificent Pyramid of
Understanding, Yianni said to his uncle. “Something has been
bothering me for a while. Grandma hasn't been well for some time now,
though she puts on a brave face. I can see inside her, I know her heart is
weak. I have a strong feeling she won't be going back to Australia, what
do you think, Uncle Dean?”
Dean didn't want to think. This was one time he wished more than
ever that he had no psychic abilities. He answered: “Sometimes, it's just
better not to think, not to know. When Nubon comes back from
Australia the day after tomorrow, we will place Grandma in a healing
chamber. I'm sure we can cure her heart illness. Don't you worry,
Yianni.”
Most of the Greygate captives had decided Australia or New England
was the place to settle, so Nubon offered to take them there before
returning to Estibulos. Nubon told Dean he would return in a day and a
half to say a quick farewell to everyone.
The idea of the healing chamber seemed to settle Yianni and he spent
the rest of the day happily listening to Dean's adventures in the far away
galaxy.
As he watched the small shuttle land, Dean felt relief that his mother
and Gordon were back. Yianni ran quickly to his grandmother's side
and held her firmly by the shoulders, saying, “When Nubon returns, I
am putting you in a healing cylinder. We'll make you well Grandma,
don't you worry.”
Leeanne's tired eyes held her precious grandson; she kissed him and
said, “Oh Yianni! I'm never worried about myself darling.”
Leeanne took Dean by the hand and the bond of love that only a
mother and son possess, flowed with understanding as psychically, she
thought: “You know I have no fear of dying and that it is my choice if I
let my soul progress from this incarnation. Please accept that this is my
time to go...you know we'll meet again my son....I love you!”
395
Dean embraced his mother, then Gordon, and said, “Off to bed with
you two, I know you're planning to wake early to watch the sunrise.”
A lone seagull glided effortlessly through the pale silver rays that
beamed the soul of energy, which would herald the beginning of a new
day. Looking through his beady pink eyes, he knew he had flown this
way before, in another lifetime, in another world.
Below him now, he saw a land of tranquil beauty, majestic
mountains and waterfalls. He knew exactly where he was going and
whom he would find. Swooping lower, he passed by the huge Pyramid
of Understanding, onward, over dome shaped roofs and marble
buildings.
Gordon saw him first. He was just a tiny speck on the horizon, a
silhouette against the rising suns. He flew towards them. Leeanne
looked up and followed Gordon's gaze and her weak eyes blinked at the
instant recognition.
It was Galapos!
The memories came flooding back to her past life on Atlantis as the
young Aanyota and the special friendship she and Galapos had shared
through the miracle gift of telepathy.
So many happy moments were shared. And then the dark sadness of
the last time she saw him in his last incarnation on Santorini, the horror
filled night when Leeanne had stood on the high flat rock, facing what
seemed to be certain death.
Her eyes filled with tears at the memory.
He flew towards them, knowing within his mind that Leeanne's time
was fading.
Galapos circled his two friends, then hovered in front and fluffed his
wings against the cool morning breeze. His small pink eyes held theirs
with love and understanding.
Within a feathered breath, he had landed on Leeanne's shoulder and
snuggled his soft head deep into her neck, then he rubbed his beak along
her shoulder, causing her to giggle with a tickling feeling.
The three friends sat silently watching the two bright orange suns
rise from behind the silver blue horizon. Gordon and Leeanne's souls
were overcome with happiness; warm tears rolled down their cheeks as
the memories from long, long ago, when they were Aanyota and Zaiot,
filled their minds.
396
The suns had risen, and Atlantis was bathed in a glorious sheen of
golden beauty.
Leeanne stood and took Gordon's hand in hers and said, “You know
what Galapos just told me? That it's time. Time to walk in to the
Pyramid of Understanding. He said that's where we should be resting
now.”
Dean knew what was going to happen this morning. Ilias had told
him of the final resting place for his parents and that now, the circle had
been completed.
The family stood in silent sadness a short distance from the Pyramid,
as Gordon and Leeanne, with Galapos on her shoulder, waited in front
of the marble door.
Helen watched, alone with memories of her precious mother. Yianni
walked up to her, placing a strong, caring arm around his mother,
squeezing her tightly. Helen hung her head against her son's chest and
gave in to the deep sobs which now started.
Her eyes held the dying frame of her mother, as the huge door slowly
opened.
Kavita placed a soft kiss on Dean's face as he tightened his arm
around her shoulder. The twins Makunda and Sanjay stood holding on
to their mother and father. The young boys' lives were just beginning.
Sorrow filled their hearts and warm emotional tears fell as they already
sensed the loss of their beloved Grandparents.
Leeanne could feel the white light ahead in the Pyramid. It was
beckoning her onwards, as her frail heart beat ever so slowly. She knew
her time was close.
Galapos snuggled his tiny head into her neck, he too could feel that
the light was becoming stronger. Gordon bent down and lovingly kissed
his wife's lips...their long, eventful journey in this lifetime would soon
be over.
Dean psychically pushed all his love into the hearts and minds of his
parents. He stood tall, his deep green eyes not yet filled with tears.
Dean knew his mother would not turn to meet his eyes. Instead,
Galapos turned his head and looked directly at him. The seagull's beady
pink eyes bored into the depths of Dean's dark pools of heavy sorrow.
They held...
397
Like the first time they met on Santorini at the Down Under Bar, in
another time, another world...
They held...
And a single tear trickled down Dean's cheek, as Galapos' thoughts
of a timeless friendship drifted along with a cool light breeze, which
now started to blow.
“Farewell Dean, farewell...”
“This is the end of this story, though the cycle of life continues....
May the love of God remain in the hearts and minds of mankind for all
eternity.”
398